JP2020093143A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve interest of a game.SOLUTION: Discrimination means discriminates operation of operation means that can be operated by a player, an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effectively discriminated by the discrimination means is set by effective period setting means, and an operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means is notified by notification means. Further, an operation performance is executed by operation performance execution means on the basis of the discrimination of the operation of the operation means by the discrimination means. In a case where at least a first effective period and a second effective period are set by the effective period setting means under predetermined conditions, notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode over the first effective period and the second effective period. Thus, it is possible to suppress reduction in a player's desire to play due to frequent setting of a plurality of operation performances.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-180364, A

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement in interest has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention has an operating means operable by a player, a determining means for determining that the operating means is operated, and an operation of the operating means by the determining means. The effective period setting means for setting an effective period for which the operation is effectively determined, an informing means for informing an operation informing mode for causing the player to operate the operating means, and an operation of the operating means is determined by the determining means. The operation effect executing means for executing operation effect based on the fact, and the effective period setting means sets at least the first effective period and the second effective period under predetermined conditions, And a notification control unit configured to notify the specific operation notification mode by the notification unit over the one effective period and the second effective period.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, and has a notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It is a thing.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the notification mode setting means is executed when the first valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode. The extension effect mode based on the operation effect No. 1 is set.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the notification mode setting means is executed when the second valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode. A second pre-production mode based on the second operation production is set.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, It has a pseudo effect executing means for executing the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means in a pseudo manner.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the validity period is the validity period when the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, and the operation of the operation means is effectively determined by the determination means. The notification means notifies the operation notification mode set by the setting means and for causing the player to operate the operation means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means being judged by the judging means. Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting unit under a predetermined condition, the notification control unit spans the first valid period and the second valid period. In this way, the notification means is caused to notify the specific operation notification mode.

As a result, it is possible to notify that a plurality of effective periods are continuous, and there is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1. That is, the notification mode setting means sets a specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be easily informed of the specific operation informing mode informed over the first effective period and the second effective period.

The game machine according to claim 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the game machine according to claim 2. That is, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set.

Thereby, there is an effect that the first effective period can be made to appear to continue until the second effective period is started.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3. That is, the notification mode setting means sets the pre-production mode based on the second operation effect executed when the second effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode.

As a result, there is an effect that the second effective period can be made to appear as if it is continuously set with the first effective period.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. That is, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing unit is pseudo-executed by the pseudo effect executing unit.

As a result, since the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, it is possible for the player to appear as if the first effective period and the second effective period are continuously set, and the player's motivation is increased. There is an effect that the decrease can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of an upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper united unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper united unit. It is a front view of an upper united unit. It is a rear view of an upper united unit. It is a front view of a lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a lower united unit. It is a front view of a lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a drive arm in a retracted rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a vertical rotation position, and an extension rotation position. It is a partial enlarged front schematic diagram of a drive arm at the time of being rotated from a retracting rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising/lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising/lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a raising/lowering base and a rotating member. It is a front view of a raising/lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange|positioned in a 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange|positioned in a 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of a lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lifting unit. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of a transmission member, a slide member, and a link member in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of a transmission member, a slide member, and a link member in a 2nd state, (c) 8] is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. FIG. It is a front view of the operation unit in a combined state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit. 65A is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 65B is a slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65B. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. 66A is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit, and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66A, and FIG. 66B is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66B. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic diagram of a front view of a slide unit in a state where a rotation transmission member and a transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear is released. It is the schematic diagram which looked the slide unit front view. 72A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72A, and FIG. 72B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72B. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is a bottom view of the main body base member due to displacement of the accommodating member. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the engagement between the first side rack gear and the transmission gear has been released. 75A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75B. It is a front view of the base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear meshed, and (b) is the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the opened state. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which front-viewed the left slide member in the state before operating a switching plate, (b) front-viewed the left slide member in the state after operating a switching plate. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state before a switching plate is operated, and (b) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state after the switching plate was operated. is there. 84A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 84B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84A. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of a slide unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. 93A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93A, and FIG. 93B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93B. FIG. 93C is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93C. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. 97A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 97B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97B. FIG. 97C is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. (A) is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a raising/lowering unit, (c) is a side view of a raising/lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting unit. It is an operation unit in a combined state. 101A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 101B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit along the line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in a state where the drive body is arranged at the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the drive body is arranged at the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize apparatus of La-La section in a 1st control example, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a variable winning a prize device in the 1st control example. FIG. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area|region division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. .. (A) is a figure which showed the area division of a display screen when a reach navigation production is displayed, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the production display mode of a reach navigation production. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the effect display mode of reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, (b), the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the navigation production selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st navigation production selection table typically, (c). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second navigation effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 1st control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an informing process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an abnormal process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the reach navigation production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b) is performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows stop classification command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related command process for a display performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a round performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows a several command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a V executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows production command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a resident process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows an image transfer setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the composite press effect is started in the second control example, and (b) is a time point when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the composite press effect in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the time when the timing press period Db1 was reached in the compound press production in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a timing press period Db1 in the compound press production in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed another example of the time of arrival. (A) is a figure showing an example when operating frame button 22 during a timing pushing period in compound press production in the 2nd control example, and (b) is the compound press production in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the time of reaching the 2 continuous hit period Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot production performed in the 2nd control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot production in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing a display example of a "normal mode" in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing a display example of the "Sugoroku mode" in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the main display area Dm in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation display of the point production in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal pressing scenario in the second control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the long-pressing and pressing scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the compound-pressing scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit character selection table typically, (c) is the omission. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the for-use character selection table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the point selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit point selection table typically, (c) is a detachment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table for use. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows the point production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows slot production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the first slot production performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during normal slot production performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the 1st shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the 2nd shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during extension slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press production relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the press command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example, (b) is a long-time performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows push command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the auto-pressing start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an automatic push command processing according to the present invention. (A) is a flow chart showing an auto-press termination command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 7 is a flowchart showing release command processing according to the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows slot production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the point production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 2nd control. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing scenario table in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example, (b) the model which showed the content of the 1st compound pressing scenario typically. It is a figure and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd compound pressing scenario. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows slot production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically each mode used for the point production in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing a display example of "normal mode A" in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing a display example of "Sugoroku mode" in the 3rd control example. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a display example of a “normal mode” in the third control example, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a display example of a “bingo mode” in the third control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the layer in which the character in the 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is an example of the layer in which the point in the 3rd control example is displayed FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are combined. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the frequency|count selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit frequency selection table in a 3rd control example typically. It is a figure, (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the number selection table for omissions in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the use score selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) showed typically the structure of the final display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the final 1st display mode selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) shows the content of the final 2nd display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the final 3rd display mode selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the character display selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display data table in a 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the drawing list in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production initial setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transfer process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the point production relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example, (b) is performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a point command process according to the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the other example of the layer in which the character in a 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is another example of the layer in which the point in a 3rd control example is displayed. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are combined. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a reach navigation effect executed in a fourth control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect in the 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd internal level selection table in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production scenario storage area in the 4th control example, (b) The model which showed typically the content of the production scenario selection table in the 4th control example. It is a figure. It is a flow chart which shows reach navigation production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 4th example of control. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a 4th control example typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a 4th control example typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the 4th control example typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 5th control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed in a slot effect in the 5th control example, and (b) is a timing showing a flow of a display mode displayed in a slot effect in the 5th control example. It is a chart. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display mode storage area in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the display mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows the content of the hit display mode selection table typically in a 5th control example. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment display mode selection table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the stop mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows typically the content of the hit stop mode selection table in a 5th control example. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the disengagement stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during the first slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during normal slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing 2 during the 1st shortening slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during the 2nd shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during extension slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. (A) And (b) is an example of the schematic diagram of the display mode of the back surface image in a 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the composite press production performed in the 6th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the background change operation mode of the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. (A) is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing the button operation content and the effect mode executed in the composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the press production 2 in the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the press production 2 in the composite press production performed in the 6th control example. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set in the seventh control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of the additional production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the 1st variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example, (d) showed typically the content of the 3rd fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production selection table in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example, (b) showed the structure of the production counter in the 7th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the example of a 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring / production processing 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 7th control example. (B) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set in a modified example of the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change production in the modification of the 7th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the additional production in the modification of the 7th control example. (C) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change production in the modification of the 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of additional production. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring / production processing 5 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the example of the 8th control.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 4, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 4 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 4, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. To support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the rear surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper face open, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34 is provided in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is played according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and general prizes. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed by tapping screws from the front side.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rails 76 formed in 1 are planted. The inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper portion of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate a force. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, if the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while if the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first winning The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 1 is in positive change, shortening time, or in normal operation by a lighting state, or by indicating whether or not it is changing. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, the lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and is in a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 140. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor time saving (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

During the probability change or time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. Time is set. When the first electric auditors product 140a is in the opened state (opened state), as compared with the case where the first electric auditors product 140a is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning hole 140 The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Therefore, the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the first electric auditors product per hit. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened, or the first electric auditors product 140a and the second electric auditors product 82 are opened per hit. Instead of the number of times to do, only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. And a second symbol display device (not shown) configured with.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device, every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, a symbol "○" and a symbol "×" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately alternated for a predetermined time. The variable display to be turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortened time, the winning probability is increased by other methods such as increasing the winning probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric auditors object 140a per hit. When it is in a state where the ball can easily win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the spheres flowing down the game board can pass through among the spheres fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (because of the turning on of the second winning opening switch) Big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 140 may be set to 5.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric auditors product 140a is It is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the shortening of the time, the time for which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 140, as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 140 in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always ready to win.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric auditors product 140a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning hole 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the process of being probabilistically changing, shortening time, or being in normal operation). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is a big hit, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed. While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to become a symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times as a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 441, 475, 476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200.

Note that, in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are respectively moved to the retracted position. In the displaced state, in FIG. 8, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid to the right slide member 450 side, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the projecting position. 9 shows a state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating/lowering member 820 are displaced to the extended position from the state shown in FIG. 7, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, in the inner space of the rear case 300. The protrusion unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. One side (front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a rectangular shape in a front view, which is disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion of which is slidably displaceable in the base member 410. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300, each slide member 430 is independently and horizontally (base member). It is formed such that an effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be capable of contacting each other, but in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are contacted with each other, they are not damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

A guide member 419 having a rectangular shape in a front view is provided in a position parallel to the base member 410 in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are disposed. When slide-displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. This can prevent the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper united unit 500 includes a base member 510 which is arranged in front of the base member 410 of the slide unit 400 and has a rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper displacement member 530 which is displaceably arranged on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower united unit 600 includes a base member 610 that is substantially L-shaped in a front view and is disposed in the left side portion and the lower side portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the lower base member 610. And a lower displacing member 640 that is displaceably disposed.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301 a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are When the displacement members 530 and 640 are extended to the extended position, the side surfaces of the displacement members 530 and 640 (the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643) are brought into contact (coalesce) with each other.

In this case, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 that are displaced in the directions approaching each other are brought into contact with each other, a shock may occur and the postures may become unstable, such as bouncing each other, In this embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of contact is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

The protrusion unit 700 includes a base member 710 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is disposed in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an elevating unit which is vertically movable in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720 are provided. The elevating base 720 together with the rotating member 730 is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) between the opening 301a and the projecting position that projects to the front side.

The projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is arranged in the rotating member 730 to be retractable (sliding displacement), a swinging member 732 that is swingable in the rotating member 730, and these projecting members 735 and A drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swinging member 732.

The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by the single drive motor 763. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to swing the rocking member 732 are overlapped with each other, resulting in a large load, which may lead to deterioration in durability of the drive motor 763. In the form, the structure which suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. This structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is horizontally long in a front view and is arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500, and an elevating member 820 that is arranged in the base member 810 so as to be vertically movable. The elevating member 820 is formed such that it can be displaced (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, a detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12, a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. A member 420, a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 along the slide rod member 420. And a drive mechanism for driving.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, on the base member 410, a plate-like protruding plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The rack gear 412 on the base side is engraved on the right side, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the projecting plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a rod-shaped body made of a metal having a circular cross section for guiding the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. As a result, both slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base-side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are connected to the left side slide member 430 and the right side slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is rectangular and oblong in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side that is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. A second member 433 having a laterally long rectangular shape in front view having a side rack gear 433a, a base member 434 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and rotatable to the front side of the base member 434. And a displacement member 436 that is disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435 and a movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 are transmitted to the rotation member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear with which a left drive gear 471 described later is meshed, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid and displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (axially supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (front side of the first member 431). A cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in a front view is disposed in the. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first rack member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 along with the slidable displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is disposed (connected) to the first member 431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the distal end side, so that the second member 433 is relatively opposed to the first member 431. While being displaced, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, a second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 433, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated along with the sliding displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is After being converted into a linear motion by the second side rack gear 433a and transmitted to the second member 433), the second member 433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 431.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 431. You can

A left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of these slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be brought into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed such that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. It

The right slide member 450 is rotatable in the front side of the base member 454, and in the front side of the base member 454, the rack member 451 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, the base member 454 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. For transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotation member 455. And transmission gears 457a to 457f.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably arranged on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is formed on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational movement thereof is converted into a linear movement by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid and displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the respective drive gears 471 and 472, A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the respective pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, by rotating the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476, the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a are passed. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be independently slid and displaced.

A cover member 416 is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471, 472 and the pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. The drive motors 475, 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is formed with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475, 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473, 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a rear side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear side base member 434a. The base member 434b is provided, and the transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back surface side base member 434a and the front surface side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a shaft support hole 434b1 which is circular in a front view.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotation member 435, and are connected in series (engagement) with each other. , The transmission gear 437a is at the top, and the transmission gear 437f is at the rear, forming one gear train (gear train).

As described above, the front transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and its rotation is The rotation member 435 can be rotated by transmission to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

The rotary member 435 includes a rotary shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b that are coaxially provided so as to project from the back surface. The rotating shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially coupled to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 437f causes the rotation member 435 to rotate with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. The E-ring is fitted into the fitting groove provided at the tip of the support shaft 435b to prevent the displacement member 436 from coming off the support shaft 435b.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably disposed on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a clearance hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the rotation member 435 is formed. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotation member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 435 can be performed. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 435 about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made

In this case, the rotation member 435 is formed such that its front view shape is a substantially elongated shape having a dimension in the length direction larger than a dimension in the width direction, and is a position substantially at the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotary shaft 435a is arranged in the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed into a shape in which the rotating member 435 is roughly divided into two at the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. You can

Further, since the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotating member 435 is provided. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

Note that in the present embodiment, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is visibly projected to the side of the rotation member 435), The center of gravity of the structure described above can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the protrusion of the displacement member 436. Thereby, the center of gravity position can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435, the center of gravity of the above-described structure moves downward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) starts. When the displacement member 436 is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the structure body is rotated by its own weight, thereby The rotation can be assisted. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435, the displacement of the left slide member 430 is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) is started. If the displacement member 436 is located on the rotation side, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435 (rotated in the other direction) to bring the center of gravity of the above-described structure close to (match with) the rotation shaft 435a. Thus, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. Accordingly, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

In addition, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435, the gravity center of the structure is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side where the rotation is performed, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped due to its own weight. Thus, when the driving of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped immediately.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a rear side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the rear side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposed surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front-side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the front-side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected in series (engagement) with each other. , The transmission gear 457a is at the top, and the transmission gear 457f is at the rear, forming one gear train (gear train).

As described above, the front transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotation member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation thereof is It is possible to rotate the rotating member 455 by transmitting to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e and rotating the rear transmission gear 457f.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that are coaxially provided so as to project from the back surface. The rotating shaft 455a is a part that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially coupled to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 457f causes the rotation member 455 to rotate with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the rear surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. The E-ring is fitted in the fitting groove formed at the tip of the support shaft 455b to prevent the displacement member 456 from coming off the support shaft 455b.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a clearance hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width of the rotation member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the escape hole 456b, and the displacement member 455 and the rotation member 455 are displaced. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centering on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is provided on the back surface of the rotating member 455, a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated with respect to the rotation member 455 in one direction or the other direction about the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed such that its front view shape is a substantially elongated shape having a dimension in the lengthwise direction larger than a dimension in the widthwise direction, and the rotating shaft 455a is provided at one end side in the lengthwise direction. The drive motor 461 is provided on the other end side. Further, since the displacing member 456 is disposed on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the rotating member 455 has a structure in which the displacing member 456 and the driving motor 461 are disposed. The center of gravity position can be arranged at a position eccentric to the one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 455) is started, the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By arranging it on the side, the self-weight of the structure can act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. Accordingly, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the structure described above is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the self-weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act and it can be made easy to stop rotation of a structure value. Accordingly, when the driving of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as described later, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), whereby the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). When the center of gravity of the structure is located on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the self-weight of the structure acts as a resistance, and the buffering effect by rotation of the structure value is exerted. Can be made

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and show transition states when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced. 17 and 18, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, in the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extending direction to the maximum, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position most apart from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a cause the first member 431 to move to the right (see the figure) with respect to the base member 410. 17(a) is slid and displaced to the right, in the direction approaching the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a. Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while slidingly displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a, whereby the second member 433 is rotated. Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 moves to the second member 431 with respect to the second member 431. The member 433 is partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 moves further rightward with respect to the base member 410 (rightward in FIG. 17A, direction closer to the right slide member 450). 18A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction as shown in FIG. 18A, and the base member 434 is moved to the right end (FIG. 18) of the movable range. (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the protruding position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the reverse direction opposite to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. By the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (the left side in FIG. 18A, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, as in the case described above, the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. As a result, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the entire lengths of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction are made longer than the entire length in the projecting position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (leftward in FIG. 17B, direction away from the right slide member 450). 17A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 431 in the extending direction as shown in FIG. 17A, and the base member 434 is moved to the left end (FIG. 17) of the movable range. (A) The left side, the position most apart from the right slide member 450), that is, the protruding position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 (left slide member 430) can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected sensor detects the detected portion. Is detected, it is determined that the left slide member 430 is located at the retracted position, and the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

On the other hand, the driving of the left drive motor 475 at the extended position is stopped by accumulating the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after starting the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches the predetermined value, it is determined that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, and the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) overlaps the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be enlarged, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

However, when the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, due to variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) due to variations in component dimensions/assembly and tolerances, or poor control (for example, Due to the occurrence of (cumulative addition error of the number of driving steps), the left slide member 430 that is slid to the projecting position may come into contact with the right slide member 450 and cause damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress damage, the effect produced by the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is formed so that damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be suppressed while ensuring the effect produced by the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the action of the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 causes the second member to move. 433 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and rotating member 435 and Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect produced by the slide displacement can be secured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 causes the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 to contact the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) on the side closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the extended position. When this is done, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, and the left slide member 430 pushes the right slide member 450 in the slide displacement direction, thereby performing an effect of slidingly displacing the both. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to reduce the impact of the above and suppress the damage of both.

The right slide member 450 is slidably arranged on the base member 410, and the slide displacement direction of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430. That is, in the state in which the right slide member 450 is arranged in a position where it can contact the left slide member 430 arranged in the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the direction in which the right slide member 450 separates from the left slide member 430 ( There is a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side in FIG. 18A, and the direction in which the right sliding member 450 can slide is such that the left sliding member 430 is in contact with the left sliding member 430. This is the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (removed rearward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, the buffering effect can be exerted (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the slide displacement directions of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel to each other, when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450. It is possible to smoothly perform the escape action of. Therefore, it is possible to surely exhibit the cushioning effect and to easily prevent the both from being damaged.

Further, in this case, since the sliding rod member 420 is shared by the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the sliding displacement directions of the both are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. In that case, the space becomes larger and the size becomes larger. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, both sliding members 430 and 450 serve as one sliding rod member 420, so that space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in the direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the projecting position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not in contact with the left slide member 430. It can be arranged at the position where it comes into contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variations and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, the stop position thereof is easily matched with the target position. Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not contact the left slide member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of times of contact and reduce fatigue due to contact. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, in the left slide member 430, both the members 431 and 433 are separately provided in order to accelerate the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear 430 are provided. Since it is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a, the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, and the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 becomes relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial speed when the slide displacement starts from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be impaired.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to contact the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back from the contacted state to the retracted position (see FIG. ) It is formed so as to be slidable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be accelerated, and the effect of the slide displacement can be improved.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 contacts the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

That is, the right slide member 450 is brought into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430, which has a slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433, and pushes back the first member 431. To the left slide member 430 (first member 431) from the time (that is, the speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after starting to push back the left slide member 430 in the stopped state). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) for converting the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into a linear motion and slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio of the right drive motor 476 and the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into a linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a). The gear ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to be larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In this embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is equal to that of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (the first side rack gear 431a or the rack gear 451a) is displaced in the sliding displacement direction when the drive shaft of the drive motor (the left drive motor 475 or the right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means a large amount.

Accordingly, the left slide member 430 can be quickly and easily displaced from the stopped state, and after the slide displacement is started, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect produced by the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited, so that the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect produced by the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (becomes slow). That is, it is possible to both smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 and increase the sliding displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation. By adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which has been impossible in the past, such compatibility can be achieved for the first time.

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

19A is a front view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper combined unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper united unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

The base member 510 includes a rear side base 511 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and a front side base 512 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511. The rear base 511 and the front base The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the facing surfaces of 512 (internal space).

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member protruding to the front side. And a support shaft 511c which is inserted into the guide groove 522 of 520.

The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed (in parallel) along the longitudinal direction of the back base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced along with the sliding displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521 that is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening that is linearly extended. The guide groove 522 and the rack gear 523 engraved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522 are provided, and are formed as a rectangular laterally long plate-shaped body.

The support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is set to the rear base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the sliding displacement direction of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connection hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that are provided to project from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 521 of the rack member 520 through the connecting hole 511 a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is a guide pin of the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that is in contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is provided on the side surface (on the tip side) opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532. It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 having a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542. Prepare The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid and displaced along the extending direction of the connection hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are a front view and a rear view of the upper united unit 500, and show the transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 move the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b at one end side ( 23 (right side in FIG. 23), the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in a horizontal posture and hidden behind the back surface of the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the normal direction from such a state, the coupling shaft 531 is displaced in the horizontal direction along the coupling hole 511a as the rack member 520 slides, and the guide pin 532 is guided. 22(b) and 23(b), the upper displacement member 530 is slanted obliquely (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) while being guided in the horizontal direction. Is displaced to. That is, the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further displaced in the horizontal direction while being inclined further (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), and FIG. As shown in FIG. 23(c), a vertical posture is formed with its tip side (upper contact portion 533) facing downward. That is, it is arranged at the projecting position (first position).

Next, the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower united unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. Attached to the drive arm 630, a drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 which connects the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and A biasing spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-shaped member having a substantially L shape in a front view, and has a protruding base portion 611 protruding from the front surface at the lower end of the substantially L shape and a protruding base portion 611 protruding from the front surface at the upper end portion of the substantially L shape. And the connecting shaft 612. The protruding base portion 611 is a portion for disposing the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where the drive arm holding member 620 is projected from the front surface of the base member 610 (raised to the front side), and extends along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. It is projected.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is disposed at the projecting tip of the projecting base 611 of the base member 610, the projecting height of the projecting base 611 is equal to the projecting height of the projecting base 611. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position can be housed in the space, the outer shape of the lower united unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

The drive arm 630 has a plurality of teeth formed along the outer peripheral surface of a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a columnar portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member including a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end portion on the opposite side of the gear portion 632, the shaft supporting hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 that are provided to project from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

A lower contact portion 643 is formed on the side surface of the lower displacement member 640. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that contacts the upper contact portion 533 (see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the side in the projecting direction (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed at one end side and the other end side, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610 are provided in the connecting holes 651 and 652. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is determined by the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape with the center.

The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and has one leg portion extending from the winding portion engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg portion engaged with the drive arm 630, and the drive arm 630. Is urged in the rotation direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsion deformation) of the biasing spring 660 becomes maximum, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to move. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (right rotation in FIG. 27A) for displacing the 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the projecting direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a, and a front surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). And a drive motor 672 installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and by connecting (meshing) in series with each other, the transmission gear 671a is at the top and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. Accordingly, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c is applied to the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the lower united unit 600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower united unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (the left rotation direction in FIG. 27A) to the maximum. It is located at a rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “retraction rotation position”), and has a tilted posture in which it descends and inclines from the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) toward the tip end side (connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the position most distant from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, left side in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is the lowest position. (The position that is most distant in the vertical direction from the overhang position, the lower side in FIG. 27A) is arranged.

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in a front view, as shown in FIG. 27B, the lower displacement member 640 and its vicinity near the drive arm connecting shaft 641. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27B), and the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (right side in FIG. 27A).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further moved as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in a front view. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the projecting position.

At the extended position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the “extended rotational position”) that is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the clockwise rotational direction in FIG. 27C). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged such that the tip end side (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 exceeds the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted to the highest position. Therefore, the lower displacing member 640 is arranged at the rightmost position in the horizontal direction (the position most distant from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27C), and the upper and lower position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position that is most distant in the vertical direction from the retracted position, that is, a position that is slightly lowered from the upper side of FIG.

Here, the displacement speed of the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 in the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extended rotation position. 29A to 29D are partial enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the extended rotation position. In the following, however, the drive arm 630 is rotated from the retracted rotation position by the angle θ1 so that the drive arm 630 is in the horizontal posture. The rotation position in which (the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction) is referred to as a “horizontal rotation position” and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in the upright posture (the posture in which the virtual line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is called the “vertical rotation position”. The overhanging rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29(a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29(b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29(c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29(d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. 29E corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and thus the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is maintained constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stop state of the drive arm 630 until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotation speed through rotation is sufficiently small and that there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(a) and 29(b), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position. Since the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is inclined so as to be positioned below the hole 631 and is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the circular arc shape of the connecting hole 633 is formed). The velocity in the tangential direction on the displacement locus of is gradually increased with respect to the velocity component (velocity Vv) directed upward, and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(b) to 29(d), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in a section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position. The connecting hole 633 is displaced further upward as it is inclined so as to be positioned above the hole 631 and is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in this section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed thereof is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(d) and 29(e), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position. The connection hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture to be positioned above the hole 631. Therefore, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. Therefore, as will be described later, the lower displaced member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displaced member 530 at the retracted position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the impact when being carried out. Therefore, the lower displacing member 640 and the upper displacing member 530 can be prevented from bouncing each other, and the postures of the displacing members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(a) to 29(d), in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is The speed component Vh heading to the left is gradually increased, while the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is the speed component Vh heading to the right in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position. Gradually increased.

As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced leftward in the vicinity of the coupling hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is reversed at the rotational position, and is displaced to the right (direction toward the retracted position) in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position.

That is, the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced leftward, and is stopped at the leftmost end (after the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is set to 0), and then the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It is possible to gradually displace in a horizontal direction in an accelerated state. As a result, an operation of flexing and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be brought out, and a dynamic effect can be given to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

Particularly, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal speed component Vh is reduced (range of angle θ1), the vertical speed component Vv is increased, while the horizontal speed component Vh is increased (angle In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-described motion of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player can be made to feel that the lower displacement member 640 is more vigorous. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displacement member 530, a section (range of angle θ2 between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position). ), in the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is decreased to 0, the effect produced by the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be impaired. On the other hand, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased. Therefore, instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (to the right) causes the lower displacement member to move. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be secured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is provided in the portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) which is separated upward from the portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 641) to which the driving arm 630 is connected. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (in the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right along with the rotation about the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the operation of flexing and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is revealed, the operation of flexing and expanding is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right due to the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be made larger. Further, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce an effect. Can be secured easily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an abutting (merging) operation of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the extended position will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden on the back side of the base member 510 to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the projecting position in a state in which the front end side (upper contact portion 533) is formed in a vertical posture with the downward direction. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position in which the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowest position, and the downward displacement member 640 is stretched. It is placed in the exit position.

As a result, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 arranged at the projecting position are united with the upper abutting portion 533 and the lower abutting portion 643 in contact with each other. Thereby, both can be integrated and a predetermined character can be formed. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the retracted position.

Here, in the retracted position, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other, the impact generated at the time of the abutment causes them to bounce back in a direction in which they are separated from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the two displacement members 530 and 640 are integrated to form one character. Becomes bulky and stretches out, which hinders the effect of production.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the projecting position, the speed of the lower displacement member 640 that is directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530). Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhang position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacing member 640 and the upper displacing member 530 from bouncing in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of these displacing members 530 and 640.

Further, the decrease of the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in the section (range of the angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, so that the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that is directed upward. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the tip of the drive arm 630 (connecting hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640, and when the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ), the upward velocity component Vv is gradually reduced by drawing an arcuate locus, so that the upward displacement velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is kept constant by keeping the driving state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, and the control cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhanging rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhanging position where the lower displacement member 640 contacts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be a negative value at the projecting position. That is, in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position, the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is directed downward (in the direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be escaped (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that a shock is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement members 530 and 640 from bouncing back in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and to stabilize their postures.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the projecting position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 has a negative value. With this configuration, even if the contact (coalescence) position is displaced due to dimensional tolerances/assembly tolerances or control variations in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, the upper displacement member 530 can be easily brought into contact with the impact member within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the protrusion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and illustrates a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 includes a base member 710, an elevating base 720 that is vertically movable on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 that is rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 are mainly provided.

First, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, a structure for elevating the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 opened as a hole having a circular shape in a front view at a substantially central portion in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front surface, and projecting from the back surface. And two supporting shafts 713 and 714. The rotary shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted through the insertion hole 711. The front support shaft 712 rotatably supports a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719, and the rear support shafts 713 and 714 rotatably support transmission gears 772b and 772c, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 provided on the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. 34). 35). A rear base 721 and a front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined distance by an amount corresponding to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is disposed between the opposed surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. Are rotatably accommodated (disposed).

One side in the width direction of the back base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its telescopic direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, a tip rail arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721), and an intermediary between the base end rail and the tip rail. An intermediate rail is provided which allows the base end rail and the front end rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL.

The rear surface 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a linearly extended along the width direction and a shaft supporting hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The slide pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the slide groove 721a. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771 and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 slides along the sliding groove 721a, so that the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721) is moved up and down. It

The connecting arm 719 is provided with a shaft support hole 719a that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear surface base 721) that is provided so as to project from the front surface at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ), a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a, and a driven groove 719c linearly extended along a direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the driven groove 719c. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 having a rotation shaft 771a rotatably supported in an insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and the drive shaft connected to the front transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and the drive arranged in front of the base member 710. A motor 773 is provided.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the transmission gear 772a is at the head and the transmission gear 772d. 1 is formed as a rear end of the gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state in which the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retraction position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force is transmitted at the beginning. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is lifted to the uppermost position (extended position) (FIG. 21(c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state in which the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)), the rotational drive force of the drive motor 773 is the first transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21(a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes the rear base 721 and the front base 722, and the intermediate base 723 provided on the lower end sides of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, and as described above. In addition, since the rotary shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (disposed) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of about 90 degrees around the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the gear. Therefore, as described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotation member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720, and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in the state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 (the protruding or retracting direction when protruding and retracting) to the vertical direction. The rotary position (hereinafter, referred to as “central rotary position”) is set (see FIG. 36B).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36(b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36(c)) (see FIG. 36(c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36(c)), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is rotated. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36(c)) about the rotation center 731a. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36A) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36A). ..

Next, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the projecting member 735 is retracted from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 swingably disposed on the front surface of the rear base 731, the swinging members 732 and the rear base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the front base 731, a front base 734 disposed in front of the rear base 731, a protruding member 735 slidably disposed on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. 734 and the rear base 731, and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and rocking) the projecting member 735 and the rocking member 732.

The back surface base 731 is formed in a substantially circular container shape in a front view with an open front surface, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is cut off, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is cut off. A part of the wall is projected upward. On the back surface of the back surface base 731, as described above, the rotation shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curve meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

In addition, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732 and a tip end of an actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e into which the slide pin 733b of the interposition member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape around the shaft center of the shaft support hole 731c as one end side and the other end side. Vertical positions are set to different positions. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the rocking member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the rocking member 732 can be rocked (rotated) so that its tip side moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, the axis of the rotating shaft 731a is located on the extension line of the extending direction, and the slide hole 734e of the front base 734 described below is formed. Formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The swinging member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an actuated shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and has a posture in which the base end sides where the rotating shaft 732a and the actuated shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is provided. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 731c of the rear base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted in the operating hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the rear base 731. To be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 732a so that the flange portion of the collar C prevents the rotary shaft 732a from coming off, and the body of the collar C connects the rotary shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. Slidably interposed therebetween. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C prevents the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body of the collar C is engaged with the actuated shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion that is interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swinging member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the ascending/descending (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, and the pair of the action holes 733a are in a C-shape when viewed from the front. They are arranged in line symmetry.

As will be described later, when the intervening member 733 is lifted (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 raises its tip side. When the intervening member 733 is lowered (slipped downward) while being swung (rotated) to, the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b downward, and the swing member 732 moves. The tip side is swung (rotated) in the direction to swing it down.

The slide pin 733b is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) protrusions are provided from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on a line of symmetry of the above-described pair of action holes 733a with a predetermined space therebetween. Therefore, the interposition member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-shaped portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the interposition member 733) and protruding from the front surface of the interposition member 733. A cam portion 761b of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intervening member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) in accordance with the change (increase/decrease). That is, when the cam diameter increases with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter decreases, the interposition member 733 increases. 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the urging spring 791 has an elastic recovery force. , And acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the interposition member 733. That is, the descending (sliding displacement downward) of the interposition member 733 is assisted not only by the action of gravity (the weight of the interposition member 733) but also by the urging force of the urging spring 791. Thereby, as will be described later, the swinging (rotating) of the swinging member 732 in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip end is lowered) can be swiftly performed.

The front base 734 is a plate-shaped member having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface (the end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a into which the slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back base 731.

The protruding member 735 is a long plate-like member that is slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) project from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined space therebetween. Therefore, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735, and a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted therein. It Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or pushed down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a torsion spring made of metal is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state where the urging spring 792 is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , As a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

A drive mechanism for displacing the protrusion member 735 and the swinging member 732 (sliding displacement and swinging) includes a driving body 761 rotatably arranged on the front surface of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. The transmission gears 762a to 762e, to which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a, and the drive shaft are connected to the leading transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and are arranged on the back surface of the back base 731. And a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a portion formed as a disc cam having a curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733, the interposition member 733 is driven (sliding displacement). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and, as described above, acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735 so that The member 735 is driven (sliding displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the driving body 761, and by connecting (meshing) in series with each other, the transmission gear 762a is set to the leading end and the transmission gear 762e. 1 is formed as a rear end of the gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the trailing gear 762e is moved. The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced and the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight. As a result, the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the working hole 733a of the interposition member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 lowers its tip end side by its own weight. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIG. 39(b) and FIG. 39(c)).

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is raised. As a result, the slide pin 761c pushes up the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and the projecting member 735 is lifted (slipped upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposition member 733 is raised, so that the actuating shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the interposition member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in the direction in which the tip end side is displaced upward.

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (slipped downward).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the driving body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the driving body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. 40(a) and 40(b), sliding of the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the interposing member 733 in a state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and at the cam surface (position P2) abutting against the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously reduced from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has a bottom surface (lower surface in FIG. 40A and FIG. 40B) in a horizontal direction (a direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the interposition member 733). It is formed in a linear shape along (a) and FIG. 40( b) left-right direction). Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposition member 733) becomes the highest position. When the driving body 761 is continuously lowered to the lower side and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, the driving body 761 is continuously raised from the lowermost side to the uppermost side.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending in a predetermined range from one end side (right side in FIG. 40(a)) of the sliding hole 735b, and the end of the curved portion 735b1 to the other end of the sliding hole 735b. The linear portion 735b2 is extended to the side (left side in FIG. 40A).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the driving body 761 when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes the bending portion 735b1), the driving body 761 slides from the driving body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, and thus the protruding member 735 is maintained in a state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) is referred to as the “predetermined rotation position”. ".

The straight line portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the projecting member 735, the horizontal direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is determined by the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2. When the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the uppermost portion to the lowermost portion.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40(b)), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1, and the predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 is set. It is located at the position (the end on the side connected to the bending portion 735b1).

That is, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and then enters the linear portion 735b2, and the linear portion 735b2 ends (slides). After sliding toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 40(a)) of the moving hole 735b, the direction is changed at the terminal end, and the linear portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight line portion 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing transition states when the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced and the swinging member 732 is swung. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 41(a), the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position is shown, and in FIG. 41(b), the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. In FIG. 42(b), a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between the predetermined rotation position and the second rotation position is shown, and a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position is shown in FIG. To be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is located at the uppermost position, and the projecting member 735 is located at the lowermost position. To be done. When the driving body 761 is rotated from this state to a predetermined rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the maximum radius R1 as shown in FIG. 41(b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41B, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the driving force is maintained in the stopped state at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the driving body 761 which has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41(b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42(a). By reducing the number (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. It

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the second rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2 as shown in FIG. 42(b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is located at the uppermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the driving body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the driving body 761 is arranged in the second rotation position), the state shown in FIG. ), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40(b)), so that the intermediate member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. As a result, the swinging member 732 is rotated in a direction of raising the tip thereof. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pressing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. It

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42(a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b has not reached the maximum diameter r1 yet, as shown in FIG. 41(b). The upward movement of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swinging member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is located at the lowermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the first rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is increased to the maximum radius R1 as shown in FIG. 41(a). As a result (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted to the protruding member 735, and the protruding member 735 is at the lowest position (that is, FIG. 41(b). The same position as)) is kept stopped.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the second member (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the single drive motor 763.

Here, in the conventional product, when the second member is displaced by the first drive motor, the driving force for driving the second member is overlapped, so that the load of the drive motor is increased and the durability thereof is deteriorated. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmitting means (the cam portion 761b and the interposing member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732. In a section (section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), the load of the drive motor 763 is raised in the section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is raised (the drive body 761 is set from the second rotation position to the first section). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section (rotating to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (the driving body 761 is rotated by the second rotation). Drive of the load of the drive motor 763 in the section from the position to the first rotation position) to the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Allows the second transmission means to have a relatively low load. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 763 can be dispersed, so that the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, since it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the effect produced by the displacement of both the members 732 and 735 while aiming.

Further, the first transmitting means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmitting means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. Displacement, and swinging per unit displacement amount of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761) depending on the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The displacement amounts of the member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply electric power) of the drive motor 763 is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced while suppressing the load on the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, a section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (a section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally displaced due to the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projection member 735. It is formed by providing a downward displacement component, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from being complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, since the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b are prevented from being complicated, the displacement speed of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 can be easily made constant, and the drive motor 763 can be correspondingly moved. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the cam portion 761b of the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c of the second transmission means are integrally formed, the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are separately arranged. A space for the rotation member 730 can be eliminated, and the rotation member 730 can be downsized accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be increased.

Here, when rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position, that is, when starting the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load of becomes large, the initial speed becomes slow, and the effect of production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) extends from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be urged accordingly, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is prevented. The upward sliding displacement can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the tip end is lowered (see FIGS. 41A and 41B). Therefore, when the swinging member 732 is swung while maintaining the protruding member 735 in a stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum for the rotation of the driving body 761 can be further increased, so that the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung while the projecting member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both of the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of the displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotation of the driving body 761 is performed using the curved portion 735b1. The projecting member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state by giving momentum to the.

In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the rotational driving of the driving body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the bending portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the driving body 761 is arranged in the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is located at a predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 (the end portion on the side connected to the curved portion 735b1). (FIG. 40(b) and FIG. 42(b)). As a result, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor 763.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed). In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section and changes its direction at a predetermined position, so that the shape of the non-transmitting section is an arc that is convex toward the rotation center of the crank member. Becomes Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the projecting member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 increases. And the load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving motor 763.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43A is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43B is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43C is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500, and the base member 810 is vertically movable. Lifting member 820, a drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the lifting member 820, a transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the driving motor 891, and one end of which is pivotally supported by the base member 810. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is slidably displaced by displacement of the link member 850, and It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed in the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43(b)) to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. And is mainly formed.

Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole which inserts each sliding pin 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860 mentioned later inside, and regulates the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is a gravity direction (FIG. 43(b) is formed in a long hole shape having a long opening in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811, 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are projections that are inserted into shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 described later to rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are attached to the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed therethrough.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 formed at one end of a link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. Is formed into a cylindrical shape.

The drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a drive force to the elevating member 820, as described above. The drive motor 891 is provided on the base member 810 on the back side of the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-shaped body. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted to the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844. As described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable with respect to the shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface side of the base member 810. Is pivotally supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, its driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, by driving the drive motor 891, the end gear 844 can be rotated.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The projection 844a is a projection for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850 described later, and is formed to project at a distance where the tip end overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 penetrating in a circular shape at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 penetrating in a long hole shape in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, the through hole 851 and the transmission. The connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854 is mainly provided.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole through which the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. The pin 817 has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter. Therefore, the link member 850 is irremovably connected to the base member 810 by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 from the back side and fastening them with a screw or the like. To be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 that protrudes in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43(b)). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member that forms a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850, and rotatably accommodates the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protrusion size is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

A torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by stacking a wire made of a metal material on a spiral of a column shape, and can apply a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion of the torsion spring SP1 that is wound around the spiral. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 collapses, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 causes the axial direction of the helical portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even in the case of the torsion spring SP1 having a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can prevent the spiral state from being collapsed and stabilize the biasing direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. You can

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 that projects like a hook from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is a locking portion 818 that projects like a hook from the back side of the base member 810. Engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and can apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the rotation axis.

The coupling side sliding groove 853 is a long hole into which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can slide and be displaced inside the coupling side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission-side sliding groove 854 is a hole that allows the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 to be inserted thereinto and displaces the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860, which is inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810, can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected with the base member 810 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. This makes it possible to reduce the overall size of the lifting unit 800 when viewed from the front.

The slide member 860 includes a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is formed mainly with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced along with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the sliding member 860, and are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are inserted. The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 by a screw or the like.

Therefore, the slide pins 862 and 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide holes 812 and 813 formed through the base member 810 in the shape of straight long holes, so that the slide member 860 The base member 810 is made non-rotatable, and is slidably connected in the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as an axis, whereby the slide member 860 can be displaced in the gravity direction (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which projections 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 to be described later are inserted, are formed in long holes in the direction of gravity, and have a width dimension in the short direction. The protrusions 871a to 871c are formed to have a smaller outer diameter.

The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and is engaged with a rack 872 that is extended in the direction of gravity and that is paired with the target rack 872, and a rack gear of each rack 872. Each pinion gear 873 and a second slide member 871 arranged between the respective pinion gears 873 are mainly provided and formed.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, a pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the center of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the side surface of each rack 872 on the opposite side and meshes with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the gravity direction, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the gravity direction. At this time, since the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and an upright portion 871e that is bent and erected on the front side at the lower end, and a rack gear 871d that is engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. A plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c protruding in a columnar shape are mainly provided and formed on the back surface side.

The upright portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the upright end surface of the upright portion 871, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw into the upright end portion 820 to fasten the elevating member 820 is penetrated. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

The upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and disposing a decoration member 830, which will be described later, in the gap. The vertical dimension is set larger than the thickness of. Accordingly, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the above-described pinion gear 873, and is formed on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and the slide members 860 are slid from the back side of the slide members 860 to the tip ends of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of each slide-side sliding hole 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated, as described above, and thus the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced with the rotation. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides and displaces in the gravity direction with respect to the slide member 860, so that the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860, and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit, and it is possible to suppress the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 from decreasing.

The elevating/lowering member 820 is a member that is vertically displaced along with the displacement of the second slide member 871 as described above, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects to the back side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion that is connected to the standing portion 871e of the second slide member 871 and is formed so as to project at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the standing portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the projecting tip surface, and the screw inserted into the inside of the coupling hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Accordingly, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the transmission member 870 from displacing to the front side, and thus can prevent the transmission member 870 from displacing to the front side and colliding with the decoration member 830.

The decoration member 830 is formed in a shape imitating a title or logo of a game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, light can be emitted from the title, logo, etc. to the player side to give the player amusement.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, a movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described.

46 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 52(a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52(b) is a transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52C is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located. The second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state, and is a state in which it is located below the decoration member 830 and the base member 810. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement loci of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the ends farthest from the rotation axes of the rotating members 435 and 455 are shown by a chain double-dashed line, and the reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52(a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is positioned above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the gravity direction. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end portion of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end portion of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned above. Therefore, the elevating/lowering member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also placed in the upper position.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the projection 844a, and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. And a virtual line KS2 that connects the intermediate position of the connecting-side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction is orthogonal to the position (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, the displacement of the link member 850 due to the load of the elevating member 820 can be suppressed. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 49, and FIG. 52(a) and the rotational driving force acts, as described above, the respective gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate, and The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced in accordance with the rotation driving. The protrusion 844a is inserted into and connected to the inside of the connecting-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, into which the sliding pin 861 is inserted and connected to the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slid and displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed in the rack 872 according to the displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 arranged between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid and displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 50 and FIG. 52( b ), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link motor 891 is rotated, whereby the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Is set Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the first state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52(c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged below and adjacent to the decorative member 830. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. Further, the elevating member 820 is adjacent to the lower part of the decorative member 830, so that the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 and the decorative member 830 are combined can be displayed in front of the game area. it can.

Furthermore, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the projection 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, damage to the gear 844 can be suppressed.

Next, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

The combined state shown in FIG. 53 means that the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800 is moved. 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing the respective members (the elevating base 720, the rotating members 435, 455, and the elevating member 820) of each movable unit (the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern ( It can be made visible to the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, each member of each movable unit is formed in a shape imitating a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating an animal's wings, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in an arc shape, and the elevating unit 800 is formed. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of a gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830. Therefore, in the combined state (extended state), the elevating base 720, the rotating members 435, 435. One pattern (character) can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms the one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (projection unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with a single display surface. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of display forms by making the displacement states of the movable units (the elevating unit 800, the protruding unit 700, and the slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200 different, which is of interest to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, part of each of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is arranged in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54) in the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800. It is placed in the overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed by including the protruding unit 700, which is displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800, and the elevating member 820 protrudes. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be respectively displaced to form one pattern, so that a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the staging effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, since the raising/lowering member 820 of the raising/lowering unit 800 is arranged in the projecting position with the front-rear direction position different from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, in the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members come into contact with each other or are likely to come into contact with each other in the projecting position, it is necessary to set in consideration of damage due to impact at the time of contact. Also, since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, the displacement speed thereof can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent lift member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 at the projecting position, and when the pattern (character) is formed, the effect is produced. Can be increased.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the rear side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or a malfunction, the rotating members 435 and 455 are moved to the protruding member 735. The contact can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) move and unite in the space of the central part of the gaming machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surface thereof There is a game machine that collides with each other and unites. However, when the side surfaces collide with each other to be united, a scratch is likely to be formed on the collision surface due to the collision. Therefore, there is a problem that the designability of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to reduce the collision speed, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the character It went down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces do not collide with each other when they are displaced into the central space of the game machine and combined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Furthermore, when the movable unit is displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and the side faces do not collide with each other, the displacement speed can be kept constant during the displacement of the united state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the combination operation of the accessory, and to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the elevating unit 800 includes a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871). 873, the slide unit 400 is configured such that the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). The speed of the displacement operation can be improved as compared with a conventional rack (a configuration configured by only a rack and a pinion) Therefore, by improving the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time during which the player can visually recognize the joining operation, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Here, when the movable units (the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the size in the front-rear direction increases and the size increases. If the front-rear dimensions of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 are made small (thin) in order to suppress the front-back dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes the second slide member 871 that is formed to extend to the side where the front-rear direction position is the same as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, the whole (elevating member 820, rotating member (The total of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the gaming machine 10 in the front-rear direction, while increasing the front-rear size of the elevating member 820 to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position projecting to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. They are arranged at overlapping positions. As a result, the space on the rear surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width that is increased in the front-rear direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the lifting unit 800 and the slide unit 400 are arranged. It is possible to reduce the width that increases in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference between and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 are Collision during displacement can be suppressed (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, a displacement mode when the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are displaced to a combined state will be described. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. 55 to 58, the displacement mode when the movable units are displaced to the combined state is sequentially illustrated with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be sequentially described from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. It is rotationally displaced, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swing member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the protrusion unit 700 slidingly displacing the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed while the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is being displaced with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 and the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455 and the elevating member 720 can be made substantially the same.

As described above, the slide members 430 and 450 are rotationally displaced as the rotary members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the slide displacement. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. It is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle with the (center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) interposed.

Here, a first member and a second member that are linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (extended) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the united position. There is a gaming machine that brings the player into visual contact as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member by bringing them into close proximity or abutting.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the projecting position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the first member and the second member have a structure in which they are displaced to the combined (bulging) position by linear displacement, respectively, when the first member and the second member are increased in size, they are mutually displaced during the displacement to the combined position. May interfere. Therefore, it is not possible to perform the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members at the same time. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is linearly displaced up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that the elevating base 720 is disposed at the combined position and the rotating members 435 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are arranged. Since the 455 is rotationally displaced from the retracted position and is disposed at the combined position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement loci of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotation trajectories that do not intersect with the displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end positions of the rotating trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 are the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the trailing end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720, the rotational trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotation trajectories having at least displacement components in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotational trajectories are combined (extended). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to be reduced as the position is displaced.

Accordingly, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set to a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that makes a linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 are deviated, their loci do not intersect with each other, so that it is possible to suppress mutual interference of the members. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, which shortens the time until a pattern (character) is formed, The staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape of the slide unit 700 which is linearly displaced is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720. It is possible to easily suppress the interference with the rotating members 435 and 455 even if the value is increased. Therefore, the lifting base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the slide-displaceable base members 434 and 454. That is, the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the combined (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved trajectory on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the combined position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (bulging) position by the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation to the combined position is performed. It can be used not as movement but as displacement for avoiding interference with the protrusion unit 700, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when the rotary members 435 and 455 are only rotationally displaced, the position of the rotary shaft is fixed, and therefore, when the rotary shafts of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set to the ends of the rotary members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, only the end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft is rotationally displaced, and thus it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotary shafts of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set at the centers of the rotary members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotary member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotary member is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the central positions of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation shafts of the base members 434 and 454 are slidable. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is not the attitude at the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 rotate only and are displaced between the retracted position and the combined position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhang position. Since the rotary members 435 and 455 combine the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture in the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture in the combined position by the amount of linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the postures of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal directions in the retracted position (positions where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space in the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the positions where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), the rotation is made to be substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position, and to make the central part of the game board 13 stick out at the combined position.

Further, here, in the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is arranged, as the third symbol display device 81 becomes larger, , The space on both sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (bulging) position, and the projection unit 700 forms a character, a large character cannot be formed, It is not possible to fully exert the effect of production. That is, the game area is formed vertically long, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure a space for disposing the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (bulging) position, whereas they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. The rotation space 435, 455 can be increased in size by effectively utilizing the installation space of the members on one side or the other side of the third pattern display device 81, and as a result, the rotation members 435, 455 are formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the retreat space for revolving members 435, 455 is reduced to secure a space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the gaming machine 10 and, at the combined position, to the central portion of the gaming machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protrusion unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotatably coupled to the base members 434, 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotary member with respect to the protrusion unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation members 435, 455 from interfering with the protrusion unit 700 during the displacement to the extended position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size correspondingly, and the protruding unit 700 can be formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (extended) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a region where it is relatively difficult to secure a space for disposing members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member 435 is arranged in such a region. , 455, the rotating members 435, 455 can be formed in a large size.

Further, the protrusion unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, since the swinging member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, it can be brought into contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 while approaching them. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by the contact with the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swinging member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be given later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700 can displace the swing member 732 according to the displacement thereof.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which the movable units are integrated (in a combined state) and give the player an excitement due to the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, the swinging member 732 between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 can be displaced. The gap (space) can be made larger than in the second operation.

Accordingly, when the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) are in a combined state, a displaceable space can be secured. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, it is possible to perform displacement by further rotating the rotating members 435, 455 (slide members 430, 450), and it is possible to increase variations in the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and while exerting the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, Displaces the swinging member 732 in a direction approaching the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as a displacement space for the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be increased.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining the operation units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when the respective members (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the respective operation units are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435, 455 imitate a bow, the rotating members 435, 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455, and the bow is moved. You can create a state in which the bow has been pulled or a bow has been released from the bow. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both end portions of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side of the arrow (the side opposite to the arrowhead), and the elevating member 820. Is the center of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59A and 59B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. 59(a) and 59(b) show transition states when the left slide member 430 is displaced from the stop position in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide.

59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotation member 435 will be described. It is assumed that 435 is symmetrically arranged around the central position of the operation unit 200 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally designed as shown in FIG. 59(a) due to poor control, rattling of each member, or error in sensor mounting position. There is a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700 without being stopped at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with each other and the parts may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, it is shown in FIG. 59(b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, it is possible to reduce the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 rotates with respect to the elevating base 720, so that the variation of the displacement mode of the protrusion unit 700 can be increased, and the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It is possible to suppress the breakage.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59B, when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 of the protrusion unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The swinging member 732 arranged in a pair with the swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to mitigate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to rotate further is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation member 730 from being further rotated.

That is, the rocking member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed in two sets on the left and right sides, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the rocking member 732 in one set, the pair of members is contacted. With the contact, the swinging member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is When it is displaced beyond the reference position and abutted against the rocking member 732, the rocking member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), whereby the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the one set. The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Thereby, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, since the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 07(b)) with respect to the rotating shaft, the rotating member 455 (rotating member) is rotated. When abutting against the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotation moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotation member 455 (rotation member 435). It is possible to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730 by utilizing the rotation moment of (1). Therefore, it is not necessary to supply the electric power for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 730, and the drive energy can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described. FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. 60(a) and 60(b) show transition states when the respective slide members 430 and 450 are displaced from each other and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 is displaced in the excess direction, the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455, and the swinging member 732 or each rotating member 435, 455 is collided. Could be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-described third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to mitigate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact generated when the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as the driving force for causing the protruding member 735 to protrude, so that the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, by transmitting the impact generated when the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 to the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, the driving body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can be made to act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be delayed for a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with the rotary members 435 and 455, the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are displaced. Due to the rotation resistance of the motor 763, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily stopped while the swinging member 732 is displaced.

Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy for driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of the rotary members 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61A and 61B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 in the third operation. It should be noted that FIG. 61B shows a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation are displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the gaps between the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation are different from each other in the gap of the rotary member 730 when the third operation is displaced. The swinging member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the projecting member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than in the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 are further slid and displaced to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated, and It can be displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. As a result, it is possible to give a further sense of unity to the united (extended) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435, 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second combined state of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 62 to 64 each show a transition state in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 is projected to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are shown respectively.

Furthermore, each member (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) in the combined (extended) position will be described below as the first combined state. In the first combined state, the movable units of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are associated (integrated) with each other, and one pattern is used as the first rendering mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22(a). )), the lower unitary unit 600 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A). In the formation of the second united state by the operation unit 200, from the state shown in FIG. 62, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slid and displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is moved. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by the downward displacement and the downward displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the projecting position (the position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper uniting unit 500 is in the projecting position (the position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower uniting unit 600 is in the projecting position ( By being respectively displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27(c), the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second combined state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600) are associated (integrated) with each other, and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode is, for example, a pattern (character) imitating Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on a horse's body). In this case, the component forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower uniting unit 600, the component forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the component forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434, which is slidably arranged, is displaced to the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the slide end position. That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged with different distances to be slid from the retracted position. Further, since the rotary member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotary member 435 is arranged can be different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 moves from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently because the sliding displacement is different. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is different between the first combined state and the second combined state with the posture about 180° about the rotation axis.

As described above, the operation unit 200 is configured such that the members (rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and the elevating member 820) of the respective operation units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are stretched. By the displacement to the projecting position, the respective members can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, the operation unit 200 only forms one pattern (character) by combining the respective members in the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) as the first effect mode. Instead, as a second effect mode, it is possible to combine the respective members in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from that of the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made Therefore, it is possible to increase the variations of the effects, so that it is possible to show the player various effects and provide the player with amusement.

Here, a first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units that is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the projecting position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) with one pattern ( While letting the player recognize (character) as the first effect mode, when the movable units of the second movable unit group are arranged at the projecting position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other. (Integrated), an effect of causing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as a second effect mode is performed. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed to the extended position, thereby A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the second movable unit group, and in the second game state, the first movable unit is retracted to the retracted position while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the projecting position, an effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger pattern (character) in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (modes of effect) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters increases accordingly, so each movable unit is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit because the area (space) for keeping it is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (effect mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as the movable unit, the number of movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) effect modes is correspondingly increased. The total number can be reduced and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is part of the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since there is a space in the retracted space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), each movable unit (slide) The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) can be increased in size.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (the rotating members 435, 455, the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and the elevating member 820) can be increased in size, It is possible to increase the size of the pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is part of the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the pattern (character that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode). ), the first movable mode and the second movable mode are arranged in the same position, and the first movable mode and the second movable mode are movable in common. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member (rotating member 435) of the unit is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom decreases correspondingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has a combination (extension) position that is arranged when forming the first effect mode and a combination (extension) that is arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since it is set to a position different from the (outward position), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, which hinders the interest. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, a pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at a different position (extended position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position) with

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for the player to see and hinders interest. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating member 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has different postures when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, since the rotating member 435 is arranged in different positions in the first and second performance modes, and in different positions (rotation angles), the rotation member 435 has different positions. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are combined, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being hindered.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is commonly used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode or the second effect mode is different. However, there is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since both the position and the posture to be arranged are different between the mode and the second effect mode, it is possible for the player to use the rotating member 435 in both the first combined state and the second combined state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the linearly displacing base member 434, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a combination of the rotational displacement and the linear displacement. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be enhanced. Therefore, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 can be associated (integrated) with each other so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving unit for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed in a larger size correspondingly, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be converted. For example, even if there is a region that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for disposing members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member is in such region. The rotary member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of 435.

In this case, since the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region such that the rotary member 435 for striking the base member 434 overlaps in the retracted position in a front view, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are correspondingly arranged in other regions of the base member 434 (the conversion mechanism). Can be made smaller in the front-rear direction of the region (where is not arranged). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 from contacting the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, referring to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65(a) to 66(b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 67(b) is shown in FIG. 65(b). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit 400, an upper united unit 500, and a lower united unit 600 when viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIb. 68(a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66(a), and FIG. 68(b) is of FIG. 66(b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view.

It should be noted that FIG. 65( a) to FIG. 66( b) sequentially show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second combined state. 65(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, and FIG. The slide units 400 in the retracted state are shown.

The displacement from the state shown in FIG. 65A to the first state shown in FIG. 65B is performed by sliding the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66(b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66(a), the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by that. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. The transition from the second state to the second coalesced state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper united unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower united unit 600, and the rotary member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 67A, in the retracted state (the state in which the retracted position is set), the upper united unit 500 has the upper displacement member 530 housed inside the base member 510. Thus, the lower united unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 of the left slide member 430.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed from the front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed to the back side is formed below the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b (lower side in FIG. 67(b)).

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600, and the lower side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is the entire back surface. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side, so that the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower combined unit 600 can be inserted into the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

In addition, since the thickness of the lower side of the base member 434 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the lower displacement member 640 and the opposing surface can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slid and displaced in the first state (state shown in FIG. 65(b)) described later, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, the transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotation member 435 can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction above the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 and is hung down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6 ), a force is exerted when the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65A). It is easy to make it possible to increase the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434, so that the base member 434 can be prevented from being deformed.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65(a)), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower united unit 600 abuts on the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower united unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be long in the up-down direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 that are connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 where the upper end portion easily falls in the front-rear direction. By bringing the lower displacement member 640 into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from tilting in the front-rear direction and stabilize the position of the lower united unit 600 in the front-rear direction at the retracted position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when slidingly displacing to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65B and 67B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced along with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount to rotate the rotary member 435 so that the rotary member 435 and the lower united unit 600 do not overlap each other in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower member 434 do not overlap. It may be a position where the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, when viewed from the front, inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65(b)) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower united unit 600, the lower base member 610 does not overlap in the front-rear direction. A portion of the lower displacement member 640 is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is easily tilted in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (rotating driving force) to displace the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500. It is arranged at a position overlapping 530 with the front-rear direction. This can prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 from colliding with the rotary shaft 435a that connects the base member 434 and the rotary member 435 when the second unit is displaced.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper united unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the upper displacement member 530 and the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for starting the displacement of the left slide member 430, it is possible to suppress the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. This can prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (on the upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and is projected and displaced as it slides in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction of FIG. 66B). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slid and displaced toward the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the rear side of the front side of the base member 434. Then, when the upper displacement member 530 is collided with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. It is possible to suppress the collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 68(a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. It is slid to the right side (the right side in FIG. 66(a)). Therefore, the rotary member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) in accordance with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. Accordingly, one end of the rotating member 435 positioned on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65B) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by slidingly displacing the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 66A) is increased, and by rotating the rotating member 435, the vertical direction of the region K2 (see FIG. 66( a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to suppress collision with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, at the time of displacement from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be placed on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530, and as described above, the other end portion of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion 533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, since the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 434 in a front view while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, it is displaced to the position forming the second combined state. Until the above, the upper displacement member 530 can be suppressed from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Furthermore, since the projecting position of the upper displacement member 530 is set between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 can be positioned further to the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the upper member. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) with each other to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66B and 68B, in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 68(b)) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower united unit 600.

Accordingly, the rotating member 435, the upper displacing member 530, and the lower displacing member 640 can be arranged in close proximity to each other so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, since the rotating member 435 has different overhanging positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stop states, control or The structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) easily varies. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, If the arrangement position or the posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper unit unit 500 and the lower unit unit 600, while if the arrangement position or the position of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper unit unit The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is configured such that the movable member (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protrusion unit 700) of the movable unit in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , The lifting unit 800) and the movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), lifting member 820) arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit in a front view. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member, the relation between the movable members of each movable unit even when the stop state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies. It is easy to maintain sex. That is, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient due to the overlapping of the portions in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the movable members of the movable units and the positions in the front-rear direction. Due to the difference, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable members of the movable units due to the extrusion of the movable members. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association with each movable member of each movable unit in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, since the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are arranged in contact with each other, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of them, By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435, the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be located at the same position in the front-rear direction, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (extended) state can be separated from each other. As a result of being integrated and easily visible to the player, the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be easily visible to the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and at the stopping position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode, the upper displacement member is formed. In the structure in which the rotating member 435 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 when the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position. ) Is blocked.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or the posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a positional deviation, which hinders the association (integration). That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact, the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. When the arrangement position or posture of 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 that are in contact with each other are displaced, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (bulging) position, the configuration in which the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 is adopted. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, part of the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least part of the part where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 contact. The rotation member 435 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the pattern (character) in the second effect mode and impairing the interest.

Next, a slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment are described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 according to the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. Composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a rectangular oblong shape in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the lower side edge portion on the front side of the game board. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with projecting portions 2481 projecting on the lower surface sides of both ends in the longitudinal direction.

On the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a base side rack gear 412 for energizing the first side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 according to the sliding displacement of the first member 431 is engraved.

As described above, the protrusions 2481 are formed on both ends of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. The protrusion 2481 is provided with a circular bearing hole 2481a in which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in a protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (right side of the gaming machine).

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the longitudinal center of the main body base member 2480 to the outside, and the shaft centers formed at both ends are concentric with each other.

The rotation transmitting member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape having a size slightly smaller than the distance dimension of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. A rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape in a side view and having a predetermined thickness is formed at both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, and a shaft portion 2486 of a shaft-like body is axially outward from a shaft center of the rotation portion 2487. Are formed to project.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Is set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed on both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485 are formed such that their respective axes are concentric with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protrusion 2481, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

Accordingly, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and disposed on the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (the right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (right side in front view).

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmitting member 2485, and the shaft center is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotation shaft inserted through the through hole 2481b of the protrusion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the surface opposite to the protrusion 2481.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed on the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. Accordingly, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2437a rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. Accordingly, the rotational drive can be applied to the rotating member 435 in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2457a rotates, the drive is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a is omitted.

71A is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71B is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a includes a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 having a tooth thickness that gradually decreases toward the back side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the thickness dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction) of the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion bulging in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the tooth thickness central portion as it goes toward the back side. The distance dimension at which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. This can prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from decreasing and prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The following description will be given with the left slide member 2430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

72(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a mesh with each other, and FIG. 72(b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 when viewed from the front in a state in which the meshing of is released. 73(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and FIG. 73(b) is a slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

Note that in FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmitting member 2485 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 73(a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned below (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission is performed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a and the gear 2437a mesh with each other is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the rotational driving force is applied to the rotary drive motor 2489 and the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated upward on the rear surface side, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. It

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72B and 73B, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates the rotation transmission member 2485. Is displaced upward with the rotation of. As a result, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slid with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, the driving force is not transmitted from the transmission gears 437b to 437f to the rotating member 435, so that even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, the rotating member 435 can be configured not to rotate.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left sliding member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is stopped to rotate. A third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force.

This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotating member 435, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to dispose a drive motor for applying a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 becomes large. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotary motion of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a driving unit for rotating the rotating member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 having the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, so that the left rotation transmission is performed. When the gear engagement between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the gear engagement is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gear is engaged, the gears cannot engage with each other and the side surfaces are not in contact with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not mesh with each other due to a collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the side surface area of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portions of the transmission gear 2437a when switching from the second drive state in which the tooth engagement is released to the first drive state in which the tooth engagement is performed. it can.

Further, since the bulging portion 2437a2 has a tooth thickness that gradually decreases toward the back side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along an inclined surface that gradually decreases. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, the meshing at the time of switching from the meshing-released second driving state to the meshed first driving state can be smoothly performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is formed such that the shaft center thereof is located on the front plane of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first driving state to the second driving state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotary member 455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is provided upright on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the lower surface side on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Is set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is vertically formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side.

The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge portion toward the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed such that the outer shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Thereby, the housing member 3490 can be arranged inside the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base rack gear 412 is formed on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the upper protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft of a telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490. The diameter is smaller than the diameter of the.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides the housing member 3490 up and down by its driving, and by applying electric power, the shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. Is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 in a state where its shaft portion is inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the projecting plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is vertically displaced, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be vertically displaced. That is, the containing member 3490 can be vertically displaced with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the containing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Also, the following description will be given with the left slide member 430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are meshed with each other, and FIG. 75B is a housing member 3490. 6 is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in which the slide unit 3400 is displaced and the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 76(b) is a slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that in FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding. In addition, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the accommodation member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodation member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are meshed with each other while being arranged in a sufficiently secured state.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to project from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, in the state where the containing member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the containing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged to be smaller than the distance dimension L1. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other (distance dimension L1>L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 is slid with respect to the base member 3410, the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotation member 435, it is possible to form a form in which the left slide member 430 does not rotate even if it is displaced.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotary member 435 remains unrotated, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, and the rotary member A third drive state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 430, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480, thereby It is possible to switch between the first drive state and the second drive state.

Therefore, when the second drive state is switched to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

That is, when the tooth portion of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a phase-shifted state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is moved. Since the transmission gear 437a rotates and meshes along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while the tooth surface of the left transmission transmission gear 437a and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a contact each other, There is no need to match the phases, and meshing can be performed smoothly.

Next, a slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotary member 455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a plate-shaped body having a rectangular oblong shape when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. .. A left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that imparts a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that imparts a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed on the bottom surface side of the projecting plate portion 411.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, notches 4413a are formed by cutting out the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 at both ends and the center. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are provided with small tooth portions 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 has cutout portions 4414a formed at both ends thereof by cutting out tooth surfaces thereof. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the cutout portion 4414a include small tooth portions 4414b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth that are not adjacent to each other.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. Also, the following description will be given with the left slide member 430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

78(a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a mesh with each other, and FIG. 78(b) shows the base member 4410. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 4400 from the front in the state where the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was cancelled|released. Note that, in FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. In addition, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the cutout portion 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates left. A state in which it meshes with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the cutout portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is not moved. The state in which the meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is released is formed.

That is, the rotation member 435 can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 where the teeth are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to rotate the rotation member 435 by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotary member 435 remains unrotated, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, and the rotary member A third drive state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 430, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is performed by removing a part of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for releasing the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with the small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the cutout portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly meshed when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that does not include the small tooth portion 4413b, when the phase of rotation with the transmission gear 437a is deviated when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, The teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 may be meshed with each other, and the teeth may not be meshed.

In this case, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase with each other by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a to have an outer shape smaller than the other teeth. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from meshing with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 5430 as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment are described. 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member 5455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 penetratingly formed in a shaft center of a transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5435, and cam surfaces of the inner ring 5439c. Mainly comprises a plurality of rollers 5439d disposed in the above, a holder 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the holder 5439e for switching the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. 81(a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81(b) is a left view in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked the slide member 5430 from the front. Note that, in FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawing is simplified and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacing member 5436 are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. Bite into the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed with the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows transmission of rotation and a state in which transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains unrotated, and the one-way clutch when stopping the sliding displacement of the left slide member 5430. 5439 is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which it is blocked, so that the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped to form the third driving state. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined with the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 6430 as a representative example, and description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment are described. By switching the one-way clutch 5439, 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member 5435 is not rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotary shaft 5435a of the rotary member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 being inserted into the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. It

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to an operator 6438 described later. It

The operator 6438 is formed in the shape of a rod having a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The operating element 6438 has a connecting pin 6438a protruding forward at the lower end and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the center in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the back surface side of the back surface side base member 434a, and is formed with a hole diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 will be inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a rotatable state.

The connecting pin 6438a is a columnar body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and the outer diameter dimension thereof is smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Accordingly, when the operating pin 6438 rotates with the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 with the through hole 6438b as an axis, the connecting pin 6438a changes its position. The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434a and the other end is locked to the operating element 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always biased in the right rotation direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis center when viewed from the front. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driven state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435) when the external force is not applied to the operating element 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84(b) is a slide unit in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at 6400 from the front. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and FIG. 85(b) is a slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that, in FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, in the base member 6410, a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 is formed at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84( a) and 85 (a ), in a state where no external force is applied to the operating element 6438, the operating element 6438 has a longitudinal direction that matches the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Will be placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(b) and 85(b), the left slide member 6430 is slid and displaced, and the other end of the manipulator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 is located immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side in the front side (upper side) contacts the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the terminal end after the side surface of the operator 6438 and the base member 6410 contact each other, the operator 6438 is displaced in the left rotation direction in front view about the through hole 6438b.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 can be formed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, a state in which the rotation transmission of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the rotation transmission is cut off can be formed. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. When the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by its inertial force when the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, with reference to FIG. 86, a slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 7430 as a typical example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment are described. By switching the one-way clutch 5439, the 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 and a non-rotation state. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which a second slide member 7460 described later is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. Mainly formed of a shaft portion 7463, a roller 7465 arranged in a state where the shaft portion 7463 is inserted, and a drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with a tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. It

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and a gear tooth surface 7461a is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed into a plate-shaped body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the side of the rack gear 7461 is formed on the side surface so as to be vertically long and recessed, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening with the rack gear 7461. A plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw with the fixing hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7463 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is held by being sandwiched between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and a shaft hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the shaft center of the roller 7465. The shaft portion 7463 of the roller 7465 is inserted into the shaft hole, and is disposed between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for engaging a tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force for slidingly displacing the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted into the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged on the front side is decorated (displaying a design etc.) on the plane arranged on the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be slidably displaced from a position overlapping with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position not overlapping with the left slide member 7430, so that the player can visually recognize the decorative surface.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operator 6438 before displacement, the through hole 6438b, and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not arranged between the 6434a2 and 6434a2, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction from the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced to the position (the position shown in FIG. 87(b)) where the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the left slide member 7430 is moved. The rotating member 5435 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87( b ), when the operator 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 becomes a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Abut. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is tilted to the right side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, while the roller 7465 is urged downward by the slid displacement, the manipulator 6438 can be rotated with the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operation element 6438 to rotate with the through hole 6438b as an axis while biasing the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is disposed in a state of being tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is disposed on the left side of the through hole 6438b. To be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 can be formed.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is rotated to the state of tilting to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 contacts the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the left side, further sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 can urge the roller 7465 upward by the sliding displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the shaft portion 7463 inserted through the roller 7465 is slid upward and displaced. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89(b).

The rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 blocks the rotation transmission as described above. The rotational inertia of the rotating member 5435 at the time of sliding displacement makes it possible to keep the rotation.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, a state in which the rotation transmission of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the rotation transmission is cut off can be formed. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430. In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can form a third driving state in which the rotation is continued due to its inertial force.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotation movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third drive state (for example, waiting until the inertial force ceases to act), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 does not act on the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, It is possible to form the second driving state in which the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 remains unrotated.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is prevented. It is possible to change the position where the allowable state is changed from the permitted state to the regulated state or the permitted state is changed to the regulated state. Accordingly, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotation member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped are set. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the slide displacement of the second slide member 7460 is also possible, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are shared, it is not necessary to separately provide a unit for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is disposed on either the left or right side of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other side in the left or right direction while the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without slidingly displacing the left slide member 7430, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied. The first driving state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains unrotated. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of a slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. A member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420 are mainly provided. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 includes a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in the front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in the front view that hangs down from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. The second pinion gear 432 and the second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed have a vertically elongated second member 8433 in a front view, and a rectangular vertically long base member hung from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d that is rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 that is rectangular in a front view and has a third side rack gear 8445a that meshes with the second side pinion gear 8433d. , And a base member 8446 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is hung from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 is provided with a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, which extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 has a second side rack gear 433a formed on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

The second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 with the sliding displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably disposed on the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 has a third side rack gear 8445a formed on the lower surface thereof. The third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated along with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 receives the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d, and the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, The driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state of being accelerated more than the second member 8433. You can

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93(a) to 93(c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, showing transition states when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and FIG. 94(b) is a slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b). 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93C. Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 94A, when the left slide member 8430 is in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. A third member 8445 is disposed inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 depending on the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b depending on the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed in front of the base member 8434. To be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slid and displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

Further, since the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect area K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93(a), the base member 8410). It is possible to secure a region where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left The left drive gear 471 that meshes with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid and displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a. Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 is engaged with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 are interposed. Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both 433a and 433a, the driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. A driving force associated with exercise can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is shortened. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged to face each other in a posture parallel to each other, and both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in the combined state is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are provided. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the second member 8433. You can

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the second member 8433 can be slid relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slid and displaced relative to the second member 8433.

Accordingly, the time required for slidingly displacing the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is reduced. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 8430 is in the projecting position, the second member 8433 leaves some overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433 with some overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface of the base member 8431b that is suspended from the first member 8431 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 8434 that is suspended from the second member 8433 on the right side in front view are substantially in the front-rear direction. It is placed in the same position. In addition, the side surface of the base member 8434 hanging from the second member 8433 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 8446 hanging from the third member 8445 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. It

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire effect area K.

Next, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 hangs down from the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b hangs down from the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 that is suspended is disposed. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. A member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove are mainly provided.

The left slide member 9430 includes a first member 8431 that is oblong in a rectangular shape in a front view, a base member 9431b that is vertically long in a front view and is hung from the first member 8431, and a first member that is rotatably arranged in the first member 8431. A second pinch gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a second member 9433 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and a base member having a vertically long rectangle shape in front view suspended from the second member 9433. 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 that is vertically long in a rectangular shape in front view and is connected to the slide rail 9443, and a thread-shaped wire 9444 that is freely deformable. Consists of

The first member 8431 is provided with a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section and extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a recessed groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface of the upper end side on the left side in front view, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9431b1 that extends upward and downward is provided inside the recessed groove. Formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the second member 9433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

On the base member 9434, a notch 9434c is formed by cutting out the right side surface of the upper end side in a front view in the front-rear direction, and a disc-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. A slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 on the upper end side in a state where the extension/contraction direction is the left/right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described below, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed by two plates and the plates are slidably displaceable. A coil spring (not shown) is provided inside the slide rail 9443, and the slide rail 9443 is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The back side of the base member 9437 is fastened to the slide rail 9443 so that the base member 9437 is slidable with respect to the second member 9433.

The base member 9437 is formed with a recessed groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface of the upper end of the base member on the right side in front view, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a that is vertically extended is formed inside the recessed groove. To be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged such that its vertical position is substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, fishing line, or the like. The wire 9444 has one end connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member and the other end connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connection path connecting one end and the other end between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. Is arranged in a state where a part of the side surface of the sheet is in contact with the side surface of the sheet (see FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97(a) to 97(c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing transition states when the left slide member 9430 is slid and displaced. 98(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and FIG. 98(b) is a slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b). 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 98(a), when the left slide member 9430 is in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are different positions in the front-rear direction. Is located in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. A space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9446 is moved leftward with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446. Although a sliding force acts, by connecting the wire 9444 to the connection shaft 9431b1 and the connection shaft 9438 and setting the connection path between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, the base member 9434 causes the base member 9434 to operate. Sliding displacement of the 9446 to the left with respect to the base member 9434 can be suppressed.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is set to the dimension in which the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction is combined with the dimension dimensions of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. The state in which 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 overlap in the front-rear direction can be maintained.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left pinion gear 473 is rotated. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid and displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Since the second member 9433 is interposed, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is reduced, and shielding is performed. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3>L4). Therefore, since the wire 9444 is loosened, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is shortened, and It is possible to quickly switch the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), in a state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the projecting position, the side surface of the base member 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 9434 on the right side in front view are arranged. The side surface and the side surface are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire effect area K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444. Therefore, as in the eighth embodiment, the third member 8445 is provided above the base member 8446. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction between the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102, an elevating unit 800 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99(a) is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800, and FIG. 99(c) is a side view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extended) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. The same reference numerals are given to the parts and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 that is arranged in a base member 810 so as to be elevatable. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 projecting to the back side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 engage with each other when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state. It is formed so as to project from the rear surface side of 10820. The size of the engaging portion 10822 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance size between the facing members of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed to project to the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 102(a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and which penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the protruding member 735 in a top view. Accordingly, when the operation unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the tip end portion of the protruding member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102(b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. 101 is the operating unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 taken along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102(b) is the CIIb- in FIG. 101. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit 10200 in a CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 of the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102(a)).

Note that the engagement portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension thereof decreases in the rear view as the outer shape goes downward. That is, the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed to incline toward the central portion in the left-right direction as they go downward.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, on the back side of the projecting member 735, there is formed an inclined portion 10735a having a larger protruding distance as it goes downward, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be capable of contacting each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging unit 10822 can bring the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 into a state of contacting (connecting) with each other, so that each movable unit in the combined state (the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit It is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is vertically displaced (vibrated) by a relatively small distance by repeatedly causing a drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 to repeatedly perform a relatively small rotational drive.

In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the left and right side surfaces (the left and right sides in FIG. 99(b)) of the engaging portion 10822, the slanted shapes of the left and right side surfaces are associated with each other. The side in contact with the joint 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

It should be noted that the rotating members 435, 455 are provided with a rotational moment in a direction in which the side contacting the engaging portion 10822 due to its center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 at the united (bulging) position. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can again come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, in the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the inclined portion 10735a is in contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, so that the elevating member 10820 is periodically displaced, whereby the inclined portion 10735 is provided. The inner surface of the through-hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface. Therefore, due to the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (leftward in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the protruding member 735 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, since it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, 476, the driving energy can be suppressed.

That is, in the united (extended) position, the raising/lowering member 10820 is formed so as to be capable of contacting the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455. Since the raising/lowering member 10820 is formed so as to be periodically displaced, The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, which can enhance the dramatic effect. .. Further, in this case, by bringing them into contact with each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 is provided. No need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (not in contact with each other), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being influenced by each other. it can. That is, it is possible to easily transmit the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be disengaged (vibrated) cyclically in a manner different from each other without relating them. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they vibrate in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 in one character in different states. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 causes the rotating member to rotate in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotation member 730 can be cyclically repeated in the manner described above, and the rotation member 730 can be cyclically repeated in the front-back direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the protruding member 735 is connected to the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force for displacing (vibrating) the protruding member 735 is transmitted through the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the protruding member 735. In the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, since the elevating member 10820 is arranged at a position in the front-rear direction in the united (extended) position that is in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, it is arranged closer to the player. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect in which the force of the vibration is easily transmitted to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103(b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation position. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange|positioned in the position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving body 761 is moved so that the interposition member 733 descends in accordance with the rotation of the driving body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the projecting position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is moved along with the rotation of the driving body 11761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the projecting position (a state in which the protruding member 730 protrudes from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment has a sliding wall 733c when the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the contacting cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam contacting the sliding wall 733c in the state where the driving body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously increased from the position P1 toward the position P2.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposition member 733) is changed from the lowermost position to the lowermost position. When the driving body 761 is continuously raised to the upper side and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost side to the uppermost side.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the top. As a result, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to a combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially show the displacement modes when the movable units are displaced to the combined (extended) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. The tenth embodiment will be described as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protruding unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. It is rotationally displaced, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid and displaced upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protrusion unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, in the retracted state, the arrangement space for each movable unit can be reduced, and the amount of overhang during the overhang operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protrusion unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by slidingly moving the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. The member is displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is stored in the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip end of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to the lowered position which is close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in the state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is placed in the united state (extended position), so that the rotating member 11730 rotates during the displacement to the united position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by the movable units (the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730) is shortened, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the tip end of the swinging member 732 is in the descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating members 435, 435. 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern formed by combining the respective members (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730), and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) (character ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 can displace the swing member 732 according to the displacement thereof.

Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be lifted in the direction in which it is separated from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is set to the combined (extended) position, the tip end of the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating member). The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to abut against the base member 410.

In this case, the abutted portion is provided on the base member 410, and the abutted portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and variations in the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is abutted. The member is brought into contact (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that restricts the displacement of the left slide member 430). By abutting the abutted member with the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, the impact at the time of the abutting is weakened and damage to both members is suppressed. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) that is the contact target (the member with which the first member 431 is contacted) is. The case where the displacement is the slide displacement (linear motion) and the displacement direction is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but the displacement is not limited to this. However, the contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be rotational movement or movement along a curve.

Thus, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the contact is made, the contact target can be moved back (released) by the above-mentioned parallel displacement component, and the buffering effect can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displacing the contact object in the opposite direction to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted.

The contact target does not have to be driven by the drive means. Instead of driving by driving means, or in addition to driving by driving means, it is formed so as to be biased by biasing means (elastic material such as rubber or urethane, spring such as coil spring or torsion spring). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact, the biasing means is elastically deformed, whereby the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted, and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position at substantially the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first arranged in the projecting position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the projecting position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 contacts the stopped upper contact portion 533. Contacted). Even in this case, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the change in velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (the target to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) at the extended position). Although the case where the 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact target may be a stopped one (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the change in velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the bulging position is set to the bulging rotational position in the lower united unit 600 has been described. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position may be the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed so as to contact the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. May be.

Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the extended position is set to a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 moves 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). It may be a rotated position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotational position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is set as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is moved to the upper displacement member. You may form so that it may contact|abut to 530.

In any of these configurations, a change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 can weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is provided so as to project from the rear surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the rear surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin is slidable is provided. A structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is extended between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove is exemplified.

In the case of such a structure, among the displacement (velocity) components of the lower displacement member 640, at least the component in the direction toward the contact target (the target to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so as to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. As a result, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the change in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppresses rebound. can do.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, only the lower united unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper united unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 which is turned upside down may be disposed as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, the drive states (supply power) of the drive motors 543, 672 are constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. However, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased/decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased). For example, the electric power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the other of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 near the overhang position decreases. A mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced is exemplified. Note that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672 or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 contact each other is the rotation of the driving body 761 in a front view. Although the case of being located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40 ), the position is not necessarily limited to this, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface contact each other passes through the rotation center of the driving body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the oscillating member 732 and the interposition member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the oscillating member 732 and the interposition member 732 are arranged so that the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the protruding member 735 is raised. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the protruding member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the swinging member 732 and the interposition member 733 are raised. It is preferable that the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so that the weight of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 act on the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the own weight of the swinging member 732, the interposition member 733, and the protruding member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. It is preferable that the center angle of the predetermined range is set corresponding to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing when the displacement of the swinging member 732 is started can be matched with the timing when the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 has an upward displacement (speed) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). Direction has a downward displacement (velocity) component, and while one of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (gravity) component. In the above description, the load on the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming the drive motor 763 so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is not limited to this. The load of the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) in (1) and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761).

That is, in the region where the load required to exert the action from the cam portion 761b on the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the load required to exert the action from the sliding pin 761c to the sliding hole 735b is large. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action from the sliding pin 761c on the sliding hole 735b is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c becomes relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as the biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700, but this is not always the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may act as a biasing force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the protruding member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above, the initial speed when the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment described above, in the slide unit 2400, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, similar to the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when the meshing is released and the meshing is switched to the meshed first driving state.

Further, bulges may be formed on both sides of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, which are vertically arranged. In this case, since swelling portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when the second drive state is switched to the first drive state, the first drive that meshes with the gear from the second drive state where the mesh is released. It is possible to switch to the state more smoothly.

Further, in this case, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small by forming the bulging portion on both sides of the gear that meshes with each other so that the tooth thickness gradually decreases.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position at the center of the gaming machine). In the above, the case of displacing from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430, 430 extend from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position ( When it is displaced to the center position of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment described above, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the cutout portions 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are small tooth portions formed in a small size to improve the rigidity. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rigidity of the teeth may be increased by forming the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the cutout portions 4413a and 4414a to be large.

Also in this case, similarly to the fourth embodiment, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portions 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, in the slide unit 6400, the case in which the protrusion 6411a for displacing the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a may be formed on the rear case 300. It may be formed so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be any member formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine). In the above, the case of displacing from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are at the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine). It is also possible to displace from the second drive state to the first drive state when it is displaced from the to the extended position (position at the center of the gaming machine).

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the slide unit 7400, the roller 7465 for displacing the operator 6438 is provided in the second slide member 7640. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not limited thereto. A roller 7645 that gives a displacement to the base member 7410 is disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. It may be.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance for relative displacement and the distance for relative displacement of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, and the distance by which the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400 and 9400, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slid and displaced to the effect area K, the effect areas are generated. Although the case where K is invisible is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first members 8431, 9431, the second members 8432, 9432, and the third members 8445, 9445 may be used. It is also possible to form the light-transmitting material so that part or all of the effect area K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surfaces of the base members 8431b and 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the right side in front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the left side in front view and the side surfaces of the base members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction are described. The side surface of the members 8431b and 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the right side in front view may be arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are in contact with each other is controlled and sized. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when the both approaches the reference position due to variation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be steadily collided with each other.

In this case, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly because the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member. That is, since the rotary members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the drive transmission path from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the stop operation is quickly stopped at the united (extended) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used to Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436, 456 arranged on the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated to the side opposite to the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), and the ascending/descending direction. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position. Although the case where the rotary members 435, 455 and the rotary member 11730 (elevating base 720) are arranged in contact with each other may be arranged, the case where the rotary members are arranged is not limited to this. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the combined position. It is easy to increase the size of the pattern (character).

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position and the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. The case where the rotary members 435 and 455 absorb the shock when the swing member 732 collides has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lift base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotation member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. By rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with respect to the swinging member 732, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, it is possible to easily absorb the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

In the first embodiment, at the time of forming the second effect mode, at least a part of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 by the rotating member 435. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is not limited to this, and the entire contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. May be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of a region exceeding this.

In this case, the rotating member 435 can make the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 invisible to the player, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 form one pattern. As a result, it can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the pattern (character) in the second effect mode and impairing the interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13 as shown in FIG. 2, and a first winning opening 64 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. Further, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 (hereinafter, referred to as the right area) on which the balls shot so as to jump over the variable display device unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flow down, a through gate 66, The second winning opening 140, an open state that is associated with the second winning opening 140 and allows the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. The electric winning object 140a, the specific winning opening 65a, an open state associated with the specific winning opening 65a in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state There is provided a variable winning device 65 that can be changed to and.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result. The variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, an operation in which the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) is executed, so that the player aims at the right side region of the game board 13 , A right-handed game) is performed and a ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as a prize ball, so that the player can obtain a large number of prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state where the big hit game is not being executed, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 is performed, and in the big hit game state where the big hit game is executed, it can be changed by a right hitting game. It will aim at the winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she is playing the game by changing the area where the ball is shot according to the game state.

Furthermore, the variable winning a prize device 65 whose opening operation is executed during the big hit game is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball entered into the specific winning port 65a can pass. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball that has entered can pass, and a ball that has flowed down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Then, by passing the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter, the probability variation state. Will be given).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with a right side area unit (not shown) into which a ball that has been launched by a right-handed game and has passed through the through gate 66 provided in the right side area of the game board 13 flows in. There is. The right-side area unit is provided with a clune having three discharge holes through which the balls can pass, as a sorting means for sorting the incoming balls into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this clune, the balls that have passed through one discharge hole flow down the first path and are guided to the second winning opening 140. Then, the balls that have not entered the second winning opening 140 are guided to a specific general winning opening (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the balls that have passed through the other two discharge holes out of the three discharge holes formed in the clune flow down the second path and are guided to the variable winning device 65. Then, the balls that have not entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are discharged from the second path as they are, pass through the first outlet 71, and are discharged from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, for example, a ball that can enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening and a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are simultaneously generated during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make it possible to complicate the flow of the ball during the jackpot game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, if the prize balls are paid out to the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning openings, the winning balls may be paid out to the plurality of winning openings during the jackpot game. Since this is possible, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the big hit, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Furthermore, you may execute the effect based on the ball that entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, for example, when the number of balls that entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game exceeded a predetermined number. It is advisable to execute the effect based on this. In this case, a jackpot with a long period in which the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot that is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a) can increase the number of balls that enter the specific general winning opening. Even if the ball is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to give the player a privilege.

In addition, during the big hitting game, the ball is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (opening period, interval period, ending period) You may comprise so that an effect may be performed based on having entered. This allows the player to continuously execute a game in which a ball is shot during the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from being lowered.

As described above, in addition to the effect based on the ball entering the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, it is possible to enter a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a specific general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1). In the case of providing a sorting member for sorting the ball and the ball, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the specific general winning opening during the big hit game or one round game during the big hit game, that fact May be notified. As a result, when the jackpot game is not being executed by the normal right-handed game, or an abnormality of various devices (sorting members, etc.) provided on the game board 13 can be detected early.

Also, in the middle of the route until the ball that has flown into the right-side area unit (not shown) reaches the klune, the sphere can pass as a drop position changing means for making the position where the sphere falls into the klune undefined. A moving member having a different path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate within a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown), and the timing at which the sphere flows into the moving member. It is possible to change the position of discharging (the position of falling into the klune). As described above, by providing the moving member, which is the drop position changing means, above the klune, which is the sorting means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the klune. The above-mentioned moving speed of the moving member may be set to such a speed that the falling position of the balls, which are continuously fired, fall 10 mm or more when the balls fall on the klune. By setting in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the damage of the device due to the balls that have continuously dropped on the klune colliding and bouncing. Further, even if the distance between the clues and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball that has dropped first and the ball that has dropped later interfere with each other to cause ball clogging. It will be possible.

Although the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example uses the clune-shaped mechanism as the distribution means, any structure capable of distributing the spheres to a plurality of paths may be used. A flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be used, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the sphere may be used. Further, in the present control example, the moving member is used as the drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls into the clune does not become a fixed position, but any structure that can change the drop position of the ball may be used, for example, It may be configured to move the clune itself.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning a prize device 65 during the jackpot game, the probability variation state described above occurs, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 to 65, the normal game state in which the first winning port 64 is aimed is entered.

Here, in the probability variation state in the present control example, the probability that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit as described above is high, and the ordinary symbol that the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is a lottery. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time (hereinafter, referred to as variable time) until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is fixed is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the special symbol lottery is 100 times in succession after the jackpot game is over, until the lottery result other than the jackpot is reached, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100. It is set to shift from the probability changing state to the normal gaming state after the jackpot has been continuously except the big hit. By thus limiting the period during which the probability variation state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that you can. Note that the period in which the probability variation state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. You may perform the transfer lottery which transfers a probability change state to a normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period which a probability variation state continues by time.

Furthermore, in the probability variation state of the present control example, the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 140a that is driven to open when the winning is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 66 is the normal game state. It is set so that the opening pattern is more advantageous to the player. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability variation state is more spherical at the second winning opening 140 than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the open state period during which the player can enter the ball is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes the right-handed game in the probability variation state, and the game can be efficiently executed by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. Has been done. Therefore, the right-handed game may be continuously executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the probability variation state, and the player can be provided with easy-to-understand game playability.

<About the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the variable winning device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. There is provided an LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening/closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g to play the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the passage solenoid 65k from the back side to fix the passage solenoid 65k to the back cover body 65j with a screw. There is.

FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 109(b), the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 109(b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110(b).

As shown in FIG. 109(b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state and a non-entering state in which a game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. Is configured. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140 while keeping the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 109(b). As shown in FIG. 109A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

FIG. 110(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. To be done.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be unable to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. There is. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 110(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning game ball won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round in a state where the gaming ball is not discharged, and the jackpot B is won in the probability variation switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, 15 balls per prize). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 111(b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of the range, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", a variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned is performed. In addition, if "big hit A", a variable display in which main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are arranged is performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a predetermined main symbol combination indicating a small hit (for example, on the activated line L1, the main symbol combination is “3” “4” in order from the left symbol column Z1). "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present control example, the ball to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

In addition, in the present control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, when the same reference numeral is given in the description of each effect described later, it indicates that the display or area has the same function, and the place (display form) where the display or area is arranged is different. Will be described with the same reference numerals.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a display mode of the effect executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol, and FIG. ) And FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. This reach navigation effect allows the player to visually recognize the progress of the aspect of the effect (main effect) executed by a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach), and notifies or suggests it step by step. It is a production (sub-production). In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (effect description of the main effect, variation time, and expectation of being a big hit) by using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide easy-to-understand games.

Next, the reach navigation effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 112(a). As shown in FIG. 112(a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. The small area Dm5 is reduced and variably displayed, and the main effect based on the variation pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, the reach navigation effect which is the sub effect is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, a time gauge Dm4a indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a character Dm4b as a moving display portion visually indicating the progress of the main effect, and the main effect. An informing section Dm4c for notifying at least a part of the effect result and guide display sections Dm4d, Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period in which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, advances from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a. When the character Dm4b moving corresponding to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification content is sent to the notification unit Dm4c. Is stopped. In addition, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display unit for indicating the period in which the main effect is executed, but other displays may be used, for example, a predetermined finished product (for example, a building). It may be configured to be able to display the process of creating foods and dishes.

The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move from the left side to the right side on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. In this way, by moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed, it is possible to make the player predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. Note that in the diagram shown in FIG. 112(a), only the image simulating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but in reality, a plurality of character images at different speeds on the time gauge Dm4a are stored. It is controlled so that the length of the time gauge Dm4a and the selected character are set on the basis of the length of the selected main effect (length of fluctuation time).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying the sub-effect in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of fluctuation patterns (main effects) with different fluctuation times. The expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, the color) of the character Dm4b that is the movement display unit or the effect accompanying the character is a big hit May be displayed, or the progress of the main effect may be suggested according to the display mode of the selected character. Thereby, it is possible to have both the function of notifying the degree of progress of the main effect and the function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to perform effect display with a high effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the effect result of the main effect, and a rotation display (see FIG. 112(b)) that rotates in the left-right direction is performed on the small area Dm4. The indicator Dm4c is configured to be able to display an index indicating the effect result of the main effect on both sides thereof, and when the rotation display of the alarm unit Dm4c is stopped, the effect displayed by the indicator is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4. Is notified.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an index for notifying the effect result of the main effect, "V" which is an index indicating that the jackpot is a big hit, "X" which is an index indicating that the jackpot is out, and the main effect "Development", which is an index indicating that the effect is further continuously executed, and "?", which is an index indicating not to notify the effect result of the main effect, are set, and two of these indexes are set. The index is selected, and one index (for example, “V”) is displayed on one surface side of the notification unit Dm4c, and another index (for example, “?”) is displayed on the multiple surface side, and the display is rotated.

With this configuration, for example, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotatably displayed with the "V" index and the "X" index displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b notifies the notification unit Dm4b. When it reaches the section Dm4c, it will be notified in advance that there is no further development, that is, to grasp in advance the production time of this main production (the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production). Therefore, it is possible to display a main effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed with the “V” index and the “development” index displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the jackpot is reached when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c. Or the main effect is further developed from there, it is informed in advance that the player expects at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c). However, you can see the main production with peace of mind.

In this control example, the player can grasp the plurality of indicators by rotating and displaying the plurality of indicators, but the player may grasp the plurality of indicators by using other configurations. For example, a configuration is used in which a plurality of indicators are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indices are simultaneously displayed on the notification unit Dm4c and the index that is desired to be selected in the present effect is deleted over time is used. May be.

The guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, guidance display indicating the effect contents of the main effect this time is executed. When the character Dm4b arrives at the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the word "chance" is displayed or rotated and displayed as an effect indicating that the result of the main effect this time is a big hit. The indicator attached to the notification unit Dm4c is switched. As described above, by providing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle of the main production progress, it is possible to notify the player of the information based on the result of the main production in a stepwise manner. On the other hand, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be constantly watched.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the guide display unit can notify the guide display indicating the result of the main effect and the guide display indicating the period of the main effect when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the information notified to the player by the guide display unit. Although the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guide display portions, it may be provided with one or three or more.

Next, a display mode at each timing of the reach navigation effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 112(b) and 113(a) to 113(c). FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113(a) is a small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. 113(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113(c) is a view after the main effect is continued in the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a movement display is performed in which the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point). Further, the notification unit Dm4c executes a rotation display so that the player can visually recognize the indexes displayed on both sides thereof. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, the player is provided with information regarding the effect period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect in the middle of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it becomes possible to notify in advance (before the special symbol lottery result is displayed).

Further, in FIG. 112(b), the character Dm4b has a chance below the guidance display portion Dm4d! ! Character is displayed. This is a display showing the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portion Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guide display portion Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to determine at what timing the display showing the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit is executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the index displayed on the notification section Dm4c can be changed at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, for example, although two indicators of “V” and “x” were displayed on the notification unit Dm4c at the timing when the reach navigation effect was executed, at the timing when the character Dm4b reached the guidance display unit Dm4d, It is possible to switch the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c to the display of two indicators of "V" and "development". Thus, by changing the display content of the notification section Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display section Dm4d), it is possible to diversify the production content of the reach navigation production that is the sub production. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting tired at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113A, a case where the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 113(a), when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification section Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” displayed on one surface of the notification section Dm4c is displayed in the small area Dm4. It will be stopped. When this "?" index is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113(b), an effect is performed in which the character Dm4b is flicked off and returned to the point on the timing gauge Dm4a where the guide display portion Dm4d is provided. It

The index “?” displayed on the notification section Dm4c is an index that prevents the player from ascertaining whether the main effect ends or continues at this timing, and when the main effect does not develop this time, FIG. After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b rising up. On the other hand, when the main effect this time develops and continues further, the character Dm4b gets up as shown in FIG. 113(c), and the reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (display mode of peripheral effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can understand that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

The position at which the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113(b) is returned is determined based on the period of the main effect after development. Specifically, the time until the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a and reaches the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time is the main production time after development (the remaining time of the main production is 10 seconds). It is returned to the center position of the gauge Dm4a. With this configuration, it is possible to display the reach navigation effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development, and in the sub effect. It is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach navigation effect.

Furthermore, it becomes possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after the development based on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. In the pachinko machine 10, since a long variation time is easily selected when the special symbol lottery is won as a jackpot, the character Dm4b is returned to a position closer to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a and the jackpot is more returned. It is possible to make people think that they have been won and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the indicator displayed in the notification section Dm4c is "?", it is not notified to the player whether or not the main effect this time is developed, and therefore the player returns the character Dm4b. After confirming the position (after predicting the effect period in the case of development), the effect of whether or not the character Dm4b stands up will be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the reach navigation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment as described above, since it is possible to notify the player in advance of the information regarding the main effect, which is the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to notify the player. Thus, there is an effect that the main effect can be watched in a state in which the progress destination of the main effect is predicted. In addition, by displaying the information on the main effect stepwise, the player can keep an eye on the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

It should be noted that the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation effect used in the present control example is for performing various other effect displays. For example, in the reach navigation effect described above, a character imitating a rabbit is used as the movement display unit, but as the other characters, a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. In this way, when the character used in the reach navigation effect this time is selected from the plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the display contents of the main effect and the sub effect relevant to each other, and it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of comfort. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the character is displayed in the reach navigation effect that is the sub effect before the character is displayed in the main effect. Thereby, the contents of the main effect can be grasped in advance by seeing the reach navigation effect, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed corresponding to the pre-developed main effect and the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed corresponding to the advanced main effect may be different. .. As a result, the main production period after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, so that the production period of the main production after development can be easily grasped. There is an effect that can suppress.

Further, the degree of expectation that the main effect will be developed may be indicated depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, even if a region with high development expectations and a region with low development expectations are provided on the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b is returned to the region with high development expectations, the main effect will develop with high probability. Good. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position where the character Dm4b is returned, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table, for low probability of special symbols (time period of low probability state of special symbols), and when the probability of high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special symbols) Of high random numbers) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a high-probability game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9" It is determined whether or not there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "9". If "9", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed form is a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, the first special symbol, at the time of low probability of the second special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, the random number value "0" is for low probability The first random number is stored in the random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/400”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/40".

It should be noted that a duplicated value between the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability In order not to become, it is possible to set the random number value which becomes the big hit of each. If there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and fraudulent jackpots are easily assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value to be a big jackpot, the jackpot of a special symbol Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that becomes, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 29" is "big hit A". In addition, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present control example, there are two types of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting the jackpot type that the number of rounds to be executed more, by setting the jackpot in the second special symbol to the player more You can expect it. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played longer.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “complete disconnection” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 storage ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 140.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely out".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation superreach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various kinds of "normal reach" and various kinds of "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown in the drawing, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed fluctuations corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. , Is stored in the ordinary symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number which is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a normal symbol hit. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, when the low probability of the normal symbol (the period that is the normal state of the normal symbol), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability time (the normal symbol It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state) and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol. In this control example, the special symbol is set to a high probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is also set to a low probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. Is prescribed. That is, there is no game state in which the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are a hit of the normal symbol, and the range thereof is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are a big hit is 24, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol “○” is displayed as, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is “0.2 seconds×1 time”. However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values to be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and is further attached to the second winning opening 140. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 140. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is "1 second x 2 times" only. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 115A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 115(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) is a table in which the value of the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

This first hit random number table 202a, the jackpot determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at the time of low probability of the special symbol (the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability), and the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of determination values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be a big hit, the probability of a big hit is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116(b)) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected, corresponding to the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Has been done. Specifically, the value "0-49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A in the special symbol 1, and the value "50-99" is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and the special symbol 2 is the big hit. As the determination value of A, the value (0 to 99) of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, it is determined whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, in the “big hit B”, it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation state is established is not performed).

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the special symbols 1 and the special symbols 2 are assigned different jackpot types, and in the special symbol 1, the percentage of the “big hit A” selected among the jackpots is 50%, and in the special symbol 2, the jackpot. Of these, "big hit A" is configured to be selected 100%. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which the lottery is executed by the ball entering the second winning opening 140 as described above, and the lottery is rarely executed in the normal gaming state. The lottery is executed in a probability variation state in which a ball easily enters the winning opening 140. In this control example, if the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without a big hit even after transitioning to the probability changing state, it is configured to shift to the normal gaming state, and thus shifts to the probability changing state. It is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the probability variation state by continuing to win the jackpot again until the special symbol lottery has been performed 100 times since the beginning. Therefore, even after the player shifts to the probability changing state, the player will eagerly play the game so as to win the next jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is usually determined as a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). While being displayed, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117(b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117(c)), At least the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117(d)) is specified.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 117D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation game state is higher than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when it is out of the normal is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. FIG. 115( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 115(b), special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability variation It has at least a valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. The respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning the prize, are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to fourth area) similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above. Since it is different only in that it is changed to the second special symbol, its detailed description is omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64. It is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the sphere enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases 1 up to a maximum value of 4 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the variable display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the second winning opening 140. It is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 2 hold sphere number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the second winning port 140 and the number of reserve balls of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 122).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times of variable display holding N1 in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number of holding times of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. Thereby, the number of spheres of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 is held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls displayed in the actual variable display has deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a variable display holding sphere number (waiting number) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 66, and the number of holding balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 126: No).

The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning a prize device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the probability variation counter 203t is turned off based on it being turned on. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the big hit game (13 rounds in the big hit A in this control example). .. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds on the basis of the start of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds on the basis of the start of 13 rounds in the jackpot B. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls winning in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1302 of the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of main controller 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is prompted to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is finished, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In addition, in the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 is shown so as to be shown to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, but may be configured to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so that the player can see. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12th round and informing the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the longest time until the operation of the switching member 65h ends (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) is set as the distracting effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag that indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is closed in one round and that the abnormal process described later can be executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game ball in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this control example, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, the fact that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65 can be notified at an early stage. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is. Also, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3. Since this remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed and a new round is executed until the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value. No winnings will occur.

If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It means that a certain amount of time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period in which the game ball may pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-described probability variation validity flag 203q is set to ON. After the passage solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability variation switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is changed illegally to allow the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball, or to push the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraudulently causing a magnetic sensor to be falsely detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. This probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when performing the special symbol lottery. (S213 of FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S221 of FIG. 122).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the decoration lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the other device 228, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

As shown in FIG. 118A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. ..

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, out-of-reach, various reach, etc.) are set in the counter value for not-shown variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting effect information used in the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used for setting a reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect will be briefly described. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation effect is an effect that suggests and informs the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and the small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). This is a sub-effect performed in (see). In this reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect, and a guide display. It is an effect display including parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

In the reach navigation effect described above, the character Dm4b is set to be able to move a plurality of times on the time gauge Dm4a, of which the effect related to the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect related to the movement of the second time is the second navigation. It is set as a performance. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured such that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b. A variety of performance patterns can be set.

The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected as the remaining variation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of variation, so when the super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, , The remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and when the special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect The fluctuation time becomes 60 seconds.

Then, if the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to". If it is "199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "70 to." If it is "199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by configuring selectable effect patterns at different times in the first navigation effect, it is possible to change the remaining fluctuation time when selecting the second navigation effect, which will be described later. Can be set more complicatedly. Furthermore, if the special reach with a high degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery has been won as a jackpot as the variation pattern of the special symbol is set (if the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), the super reach is set. Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the change pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is set to be larger than that (when the remaining change time is 30 seconds), the player can make the first change. Isn't this fluctuation developed into a special reach by watching the progress of the production navigation? You can play while predicting.

In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed to set an effect pattern of 20 seconds and an effect pattern of 30 seconds. It is possible. Specifically, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b in the effect pattern of 30 seconds, and a character imitating a rabbit is set in the effect pattern of 20 seconds. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set a plurality of effect patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach navigation effect. be able to.

Further, in this control example, as described above, the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the moving speed on the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, it is only necessary to see the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the expectation degree of the jackpot is predictable, the moving speed may be set to be different by using the same character. With such a configuration, only the player who has experienced the reach navigation effect a plurality of times can understand that the moving speed of the character in the current reach navigation effect is different from the speed of the character in the previous reach navigation effect. There is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced for a player who is playing a game for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm4b is set so as not to be changed midway during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Note that the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed midway during the first navigation effect without being limited thereto. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected on the basis of the remaining variation time stored in and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(c), when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further 20 in the first navigation effect. When the second effect pattern is selected, the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, so "second 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. The second time means that the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113A), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again. This shows that the effect starts (see FIG. 113(b)). In this control example, it is possible to set up to the third movement effect at the maximum.

Next, when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the production pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if "4 to 6", then “Second time 20 seconds, third time 10 seconds” is selected as the 2nd navigation effect, and if “7 to 9”, “2nd time 30 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect.

Then, when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect, If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if "4 to 6", then it is the second. “Second time 20 seconds, third time 20 seconds” is selected as the navigation effect, and if “7 to 9”, “second time 30 seconds, third time 10 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect.

As described above, when setting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complicated effect pattern by making it possible to select the effect period for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect separately. You can In addition, in the present control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the value in the lower one digit of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. With this, it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns in one process using one effect counter, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect patterns. There is an effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). As shown in FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop. At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 of FIG. 138). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game is executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining variation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect. When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the remaining time storage area 223h is set with the variable time based on the acquired variation pattern (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is displayed. The remaining variation time after the setting is updated (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the reach navigation effect setting is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using the remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol over a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the change time of the special symbol, first, information indicating that the remaining change time is 60 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds as the first effect. Then, when an effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining change time. After that, it is possible to select the second effect using the remaining period based on the remaining change time. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing when selecting the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect for gradually selecting the fluctuation pattern. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 of FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 of FIG. 141), and selected. The effect pattern of the first navigation effect is set (S2103 of FIG. 141), and then the effect pattern of the selected second navigation effect is set (S2106 of FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variable production) and notice production are controlled.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. There is. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, while using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (not shown) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed, and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data source size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when a ball is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear surface images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all third symbol display devices. It is an image horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and the image controller 237 causes the rear image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while being horizontally scrolled from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 has been entered, the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect, but changes in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol, which is composed of an attached symbol imitating the above, is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to write one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effect, jackpot-related A display data table corresponding to the command-related display, round effect, and demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the ordinary symbol starting port 66, so the chances of drawing the ordinary symbol increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. . Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be opened as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls can easily enter the second winning opening 140, and the special symbols can be easily selected. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, and the player can have it. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is entered, it becomes a jackpot of ordinary symbols and the electric accessory is opened, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 140, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession, or a state in which the number of balls in possession does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of a period when you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

Also, in the ending production, by notifying that the lottery result of one of the special symbols that are being held will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player will be a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol that is being held. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address that represents one frame of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in that image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image or characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image. This rear surface type displays any one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, which range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type is specified. The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified to create a drawing list described later. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table is associated with an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is listed. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list to be described later, and transfer data is created. From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. The drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 of FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 111B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 111(b) S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 123(b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the image drawing instruction contents for As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list in which the drawing instruction contents are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. )), the pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated as described above, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. And the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite that should start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is drawn. Add to list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of retained balls symbol 1, number of retained balls symbol 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 111(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 of FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting a display area (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) in which the display of the character symbol and the point symbol is prohibited in the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed in the point effect. . In the point effect, the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is set three times in total, so the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first period to third period). A storage area 223m is provided. With this, different prohibited areas can be set in each period, so that variations in production can be increased.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and other than the demo display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115(a)). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115(a)). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the present is in the confirmed display effect.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in this control example, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting prize) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 is accompanied by the passage of the sphere. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol. It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and is changed by calculation. A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If the jackpot B is a big hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the jackpot is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning hole is set (S217), and then the jackpot start setting (a jackpot of 16 rounds, etc.) Setting) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221). Then, when the processing of S218 or the processing of S221 described above is finished, a stop command is set (S219), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first This is processing for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302).

When the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, when the current is the probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special value for high probability Based on the symbol big hit random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big hit is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number to be hit are the same. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but it is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big hits.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, if the present is not the probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. Since it is (low probability game state), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the low first probability random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)), The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and the starting winning is performed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 116(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the probability-based second random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 116(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol is hit, the same as when the normal symbol is missed The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the electric accessory 140a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 140 is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the regular symbol variation process (FIG. 125, S106) is the regular symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the processing in S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the present process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 of FIG. 129. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) and the start winning process (see FIG. 124) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is performed. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 127 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S98 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 is completed, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S801). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 129), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S1101. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1102, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the number of rounds command of number of rounds is set (S1105), and this processing is ended. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the round number command. Then, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the round number command is added so that the current round number can be grasped. Thereby, there is an effect that the data amount of the command output from the main controller 110 can be reduced. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if there is a problem in the data related to the number of rounds on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 (the stored data is erased due to a power outage etc.), the latest data will be updated each time a new round is started. Since the round information can be received, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

130, the description will be continued. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1004: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1006). When it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present control example), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. If it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is turned off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). Then, this process is completed. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game ends without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to be off just in case in the process of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the endin production is after the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the final round ends (the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the final round ends. The ending effect may be executed immediately after. In this case, the abnormal process for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of the ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process ends.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. You can play games with interest.

130, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification processing is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made in the twelfth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1305: No), this process ends. Here, since the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the jackpot game ends, expecting that the probability variation game state is given.

In the present control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), the notification command is set. (S1304). Then, this process is completed. The notification command causes the audio lamp control device 113 to set the output of the audio "Look at the liquid crystal".

In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the present process is ended.

130, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1401). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1, and the winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is displayed. Set. Then, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1406). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). Then, the process of S1408 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1409). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). Then, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1415). Then, this process is completed. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, even if the game ball remaining in the special discharge passage 65e2 passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation is confirmed. The game can be controlled so that it is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1420), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a game ball illegally and being given a probability variation game state.

130, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1013). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality process (S1013), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). Then, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Then, the process of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is a big hit.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1716 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 137). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), the power-off process in S1716 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1714 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off at S1714 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decoration lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 of FIG. 137). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1604 to S1606 is followed to the process of S1608. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1604 when the processing of S1608 is reached through the processing of S1604 through S1606. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1701 this time is performed (S1701), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1702 to S1811, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the decoration lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later is achieved (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1707). The frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. In addition, the input of whether or not the touch operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 is also monitored.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1708), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, etc. are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

When the process of S1710 is completed, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 137) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination processing (FIG. 138, S1711), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the processing of S1808, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c that have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values. After the processing of S1808 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning), or the special symbol lottery Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time the start winning is detected or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1808. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809). In the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit is received (S1809: Yes), the big hit related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot is not received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1811.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

When it is determined that the notification command output from the main control device 110 is received by the processing of S1811, the notification sound corresponding to the received command (in the present control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , Set the display command for notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot-related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the big hit related process (S1810). The jackpot-related processing (S1810) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related processing, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1901). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S1903). When it is determined that the round number command is received in the process of S1903 (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S1903, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1903: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the ending command is received (S1906: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this processing is executed. finish.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command is received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 to execute the effect suggesting that the probability variation gaming state is given. A V effect command for display is set (S1910), and this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This fluctuation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2007 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the processing of S1803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 138), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach (S2004: Yes), the reach navigation effect setting process is then executed (S2005). This reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 141, but if the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, the third symbol display device 81. Is a process for setting a reach navigation effect (sub effect) that guides the main variable effect (main effect) executed in.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the acquired variation pattern type is not the variation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach, that is, if the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to the missing or the normal reach (S2004). : No), based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Here, the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting processing (S2005), the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired variation pattern type and the effect contents (expectation degree, effect period) of the main effect are guided to the player. The sub-effect to be set is set.

When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, The change pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol by using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect executed in the central part of (see).

After the processing of S2101, the remaining time storage area 223h is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S2102). In the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of stepwise setting sub effects based on the variation time corresponding to the obtained variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern acquired this time by this processing is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this processing.

Although not shown, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, so a fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, a process of subtracting 30 seconds, which is the sub-effect execution ineffective period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119(b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are selected. The first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and based on the set first navigation effect period, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation effect is 60 seconds and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

When the process of S2103 is completed, the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining change time for setting the reach navigation effect that is the sub effect is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected in a state where "60 seconds" is set as the remaining fluctuation time in the remaining time storage area 223h, the remaining time storage area 223h is determined by this processing. The remaining fluctuation time of is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105), and when it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation effect is displayed. The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is achieved only by the first navigation effect. Will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to super reach, and "30 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. This corresponds to the case where the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected.

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation production is selected from the second navigation production selection table, and the variation pattern is selected. Update to the temporary storage area. The second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119(c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are selected. Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the second navigation effect is selected, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds, and the value of the last one digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period “30 seconds”, the effect pattern information of “second time 10 seconds” and “third time 20 seconds” is selected, and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

In this way, the second navigation effect is configured to generate the effect pattern using the remaining variation time after the setting of the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than collectively setting the production pattern for all the periods in which the reach navigation effect can be set, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the second navigation effect period, and the effect patterns are respectively set. After setting, by combining, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect and to prevent the player from getting tired.

In this control example, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the other periods, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not use all of the remaining variation period, and after performing the process of S2016, the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h. It may be configured to determine again whether is 0 (S2105). As a result, the reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining variation time after the second navigation effect setting can be set by the same process as the process of setting the second navigation effect, and the process can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 141, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No) or if the process of S2106 is completed, then the variation pattern for display is displayed based on the information in the temporary variation pattern storage area. A command is set (S2107). Here, as the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area, the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101 and the sub effect Which corresponds to the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the process of S2103, which constitutes the reach navigation effect, and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the process of S2106. This is a display variation pattern command.

When the process of S2107 is finished, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information about the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

In the present control example, the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired variation pattern and the sub effect are set and output as one variation pattern command for display. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the display main effect variation pattern command and the display sub effect variation pattern command may be output as separate commands. Thereby, for example, the display control device 114 displays the main effect on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub effect can be displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. In this way, the player operates the frame button 22 to easily perform the control of displaying or deleting the sub-effect.

Further, by using the configuration described above, it is possible to easily perform control such that an additional command is output to the sub-effect and the effect pattern of the sub-effect is switched while the main effect is being variably displayed. Specifically, during the period from the execution of the main effect to the execution of the sub effect (30 seconds in this control example), it is used for the sub effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed. It is possible to change the displayed character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) and change the content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, which has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to play.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 142, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed following the process of S2302. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. Alternatively, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of this register or a partial area of the internal memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2205). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) that are the power-on images are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variation effect to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer it. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(b). FIG. 144(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2502) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption processing are analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505). , A drawing list is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop types indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, non-out-of-reach reach, complete disconnection, chance The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (eye) are compared, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on time image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and in S2504. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2502) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2701, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2702. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606), If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete omission, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-described task process (S2504), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the identified stop is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2802.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may confuse the pachinko machine 10 with "a special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, referring to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-described display jackpot-related command process (S2609), which is one process of the command determination process (S2502, see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command (S2901). (S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

Details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display round command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S2903: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the display jackpot related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149(a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3201, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2905, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and display is performed. If there is a V effect command for use (S2907: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot-related command processing ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149(b). FIG. 149(b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the process of S2907, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot-related command process is ended as it is.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. In the process of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the back image change command If there is (S2610: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150(a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3401). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3401 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3402. .. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S3402 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, there is no reception of two or more backside image change commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2612), and there is an error command. If (S2612: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3502), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the error frame command processing, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3501, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the processing of S3502, and the error type Processing is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S3502 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

In the processing of S2601 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), and the processes of S2602 to S2613 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146(b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3602 to S3604 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3602), and then S3603 to S3604. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3701).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3605.

In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3801, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S3803), and if it is the demo display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3806), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3802: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 151, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3606 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is ended as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3609).

As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the finalized display data table is not displayed yet, and the finalized display effect is generated. Is set (S3610), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3615, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off instead of on (S3609: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect, and therefore the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3617) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The drawing content can be set.

In the process of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3616: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that defines the stop display of (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2505) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 154(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S3901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3901, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 154(b). FIG. 154(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3902).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4002). In the processing of S4002, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4002 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4002: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Further, as a result of the processing in S4001, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the processing proceeds to S4003.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4003: No), the resident target image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154(a)).

By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) previously executed from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4103), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4102: No), the processes of S4103 and S4104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. .. If it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process is not completed (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Further, as a result of the processing of S4105, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4105: No), the processing proceeds to S4107.

In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). If the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S4108), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4107: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4109). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S4109: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4110), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

In the processing of S4113, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4113, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4114). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, and thus the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-described drawing process (S2506) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), a drawing list is generated (S4201). That is, in the process of S4201, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2504). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 that stores the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S4202, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4203). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the reach navigation effect is executed as the effect display executed in the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, as the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect is advanced by the operation of continuously pressing (continuously hitting) the frame button 22 and the operation of pressing at the right time. The combined press effect and the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped by pressing the frame button 22, and the slot effect is a continuous slot effect within a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). A predetermined value (point) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a point effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) is executed by accumulating a predetermined number of the points is configured. Thus, various effects can be provided to the player, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp controller 113 are partially changed from those in the first control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display controller 114 are partially modified. The difference lies in that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Of the effects executed in this control example, the composite press effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the composite press effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157(b) shows the composite press effect being executed at the effect notification timing D3b. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the time reaches, and FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the compound press effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1. [Fig. 159] Fig. 159 is a diagram illustrating another example of the timing at which the combined press effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1, and Fig. 159(a) illustrates that the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period of the combined press effect being executed. FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case, and FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of a point in time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the second continuous hit period Dc.

This combined press effect is a press effect in which three press effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm is based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each press effect period. The effect of accumulating the meters of the meter display portion D1 displayed on the side is executed. When a predetermined amount of meters are accumulated in the meter display portion D1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

When the composite press effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157(a), the press effect corresponding to the first continuous stroke period is executed. On the third symbol display device 81, the above-described meter display portion D1, a button display D2 for urging the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding the composite press effect are displayed. In the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment field for guiding the effect contents in text is displayed.

The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the effect result of the composite press effect, and is controlled so that the meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each press effect (see FIG. 157(b)). .. Then, in the meter display portion D1, a comment of "collect meter" is displayed as a comment for prompting the player to participate in the game. In the meter display portion D1, "V" is displayed at the right end portion of the meter at an initial stage, and the special symbol jackpot is won as a privilege that is advantageous to the player by accumulating the meter up to "V". Is notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the composite press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159(a)). As shown in FIG. 159(a), when the meter area is extended, "VV" is displayed at the right end of the meter area, and the bonus is further advantageous to the player by accumulating the meter up to "VV" (for example, 2 You will be notified that you will be awarded in each jackpot.

It should be noted that the privilege given by the composite press effect is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and, for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or the player collects it. Value information (points) may be added. Further, the display form displayed by "V" and "VV" is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the condition for giving the privilege to the player is visually displayed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the privilege granted when the "V" is reached and the privilege granted when the "VV" is reached, and different benefits may be set. Good.

The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the operation content on the frame button 22, and is a schematic diagram for continuously pressing the frame button 22 in the first continuous stroke period shown in FIG. 157(a). The display and the comment of “repeated hits!!” are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operating condition of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player is not operating the frame button 22, the button display is made to blink. When the player is operating the frame button 22, it is reduced or erased to change to a non-highlighted display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game guide display to the player from becoming excessive. Furthermore, it is preferable to change the button display D2 to a display that is not emphasized even when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during which the player does not operate the frame button 22. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to perform the frame button operation from being continuously highlighted, and to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The effect gauge D3 is a display unit showing the overall flow of the composite press effect, and the composite press effect is time-series from the left side to the right side of the effect gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 157(a)). it's shown. The effect gauge D3 is divided into a first continuous hitting period Da, a timing pressing period Db1, and a second continuous hitting period Dc in the order in which the pressing effect is executed, and is currently displayed depending on the position of the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. It is configured so that the player can grasp the situation. In this way, in the combined press effect in which the press effects different in the operation method of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, by displaying the entire combined press effect and the situation of each press effect so that the player can grasp the game, It is possible to execute a production that is easy for a person to understand.

Further, since the moving object D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the entire period of the composite press effect based on the moving state of the moving object D3a. ..

Further, of the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first continuous hit period Da. The effect notification timing D3b is for notifying in advance the content of the pressing effect executed during the timing pressing period Db1 executed after the first continuous stroke period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the composite press effect, a guide for the press effect executed in the next press effect period is displayed in the comment field described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the mode of the pressing effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the composite pressing effect and an unintended operation is performed. In addition, you may make it determine the operation condition of the player with respect to the frame button 22 at the time of reaching this production|generation notification timing D3b, and set the production mode of the next press production period.

In the comment field provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the composite press effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157(a), a comment is displayed that "automatic repeated hits are executed by long pressing the button." The automatic continuous hitting means that the player performs a predetermined operation (long-pressing operation for 2 seconds or more) during the press effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 to artificially hit the frame button 22 in a pseudo manner. It is a control process. By executing this automatic continuous hit, it is possible to entertain the repeated hit effect even for a player who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22 multiple times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the composite pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period is started while continuing the pressing effect in the first continuous hit period Da. Specifically, the timing gauge Db2 in which the area of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be targeted by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "aim button at the center of X mark..." is displayed as a part of the game guide of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pushing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving body D3a moves the timing gauge Db2 at the same time as the moving time of the moving body D3a on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the moving speed of the moving body D3a faster than the moving speed of the moving body D3a on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, the moving speed of the moving body D3a can be made different. With such a configuration, when the player is displayed using the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a that moves on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, the player is informed of the period of the composite press effect, the player There is an effect that the effect of timing display can be diversified without giving a feeling of strangeness.

Furthermore, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 at the time when the performance notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing pressing performance executed this time, and it is possible to facilitate the timing. There is.

Note that in FIG. 157(b), the target Db3 that is the target for operating the frame button in the timing push effect is displayed at the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the displayed position is moved closer to the end of the timing gauge Db2 and the timing is pushed. You may make it possible to set the difficulty level of production. Further, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158(a) and 158(b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the timing press effect period will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the automatic continuous hit is not executed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158(a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts moving rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. Since the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the region of the timing pushing period Db1 is extended as described above, the time required for the moving body D3a to pass the timing pushing period Db1 and the moving body D3a passing the timing gauge Db2. The time required to do this is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158(a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length that is approximately eight times as long as the timing pushing period Db1, the speed of the moving body passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing pushing period Db1. This is about 8 times the speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, the target Db3, which indicates the timing of pressing the frame button 22 in the timing push effect, blinks and is highlighted. Furthermore, in the comment field, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed and a diagram schematically showing pressing the frame button 22 are displayed as a timing push effect.

On the other hand, FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous hits are executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from the above-mentioned FIG. 158 (a) is that the third symbol display device 81 has a display indicating that the automatic continuous hit is currently being made, and a comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column. It is changed to "Hanase". That is, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing push effect while pressing the button, and therefore cannot perform the action of pressing the button in that state.

Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic continuous hit is being performed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing push effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment field is changed from "press". While changing to “Hanase”, the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing push effect is separated from the pressed timing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22) Is turned off). As a result, in the composite press effect, even if the timing press effect is executed in a state where the automatic press operation has been performed in the previous press effect (first continuous hit effect Da), the effect is executed without hindering the player. can do.

In the timing press effect period Db1 described with reference to FIG. 158(a) or FIG. 158(b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158(a), 158 (b), the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment field. A comment "Perfect!!" is displayed to inform that the frame button 22 is often operated. Further, the meter display portion D1 is extendedly displayed as a privilege that succeeds in the timing pushing effect, and that effect is notified in the comment field.

Even at this timing, the moving body D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, while the result of the timing pressing effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2, the progress of the composite pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3. Therefore, there is an effect that both the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the composite pressing effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, a case where the timing push effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second continuous hit period Dc has been reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). When the second consecutive hit period Dc is reached, the display for causing the frame button 22 to be consecutively hit is executed as in the first consecutive hit period. The difference from the display of the first continuous hitting period described above is that the game result of the timing pressing effect is displayed in the area of the timing pressing period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the game result of the timing pressing effect is displayed on the meter display section D1. This is the point that the privilege based on it is given. Since the other display contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second continuous hit period elapses, the composite press effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the present composite press effect is notified. This completes the composite press effect. As described above, in the combined press effect of the present embodiment, as the operation of the frame button 22, the continuous hit effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 and the timing press of operating the frame button 22 with good timing. The timing push effect for performing the operation is set to be continuously executed, and the result of the entire composite press effect is set based on the result of each press effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to obtain a sufficient result of the effect, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

Further, since the player has an automatic continuous hitting function for assisting the continuous hitting operation, the player can easily operate the frame button. Here, if the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the continuous hitting effect rushes into the timing pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically pressed repeatedly after the timing pressing effect is started. The problem that the situation in which 22 is pressed occurs occurs. Therefore, a period during which the automatic continuous hitting function is valid and a period during which the automatic continuous hitting function is invalid are provided, and the automatic continuous hitting function is set to be invalid during the timing push effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed by automatic continuous hits from occurring during the timing push effect, and it is possible to produce an effect that the player does not intend.

Further, with the above-described solution alone, the player who has entered the timing press effect while the automatic continuous hit function is being executed, that is, the frame button 22 is being pressed, is prevented from being accidentally pressed by the automatic continuous hit. There was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, when the same timing push effect is executed by simply disabling the automatic repeated hitting function, a game having a content such as "press the button at the right time" is given to the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. There is a problem that the guide is displayed, the player is confused by the displayed content, and cannot enjoy the timing pushing effect.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing at which the timing push effect is executed, and when the automatic continuous hitting function is set to ON, the content of the timing push effect is set at a good timing. I changed it to the production of releasing the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released at a timely timing, so that the player can participate in the effect of performing the operation of the framed button 22 at the timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the pressing effect is switched in the state where the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is continued in the composite pressing effect, but the operation invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is advisable to inform the player of the content of the next press effect within the operation invalid period. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the information display regarding the pressed effect being executed and the information display related to the pressed effect to be executed next from being displayed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect. There is an effect.

Next, of the effects executed in this control example, continuous slot effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot effects executed in this control example. The continuous slot effect is an effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 to execute the slot effect in which the pseudo symbol that is rotationally displayed is stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds). The result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects executed a plurality of times. Specifically, all the combinations of predetermined symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) are stopped and displayed during the continuous slot effect, so that the player is provided with a privilege (big hit game). .

As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, first, the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is executed. In this slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the effect period is 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (between 2 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. Is set as a frame button operation valid period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1--5 seconds) during the last 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 2) Then, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 has elapsed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of the effective line 1 row). Display), then the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is entered, and the second slot effect is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) in the first 6 seconds of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (between 2 seconds and 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). 1-1), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of the first line of the effective line), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) ) Is executed. Then, when the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the pseudo symbol does not stop and is displayed and the special slot effect is directly transferred. To do.

This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set, and an effect is displayed in which the pseudo symbols that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed regardless of the operation of the player, Any one of the display modes of the 1st to 3rd effective lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

The frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set in the special slot effect described above because the frame button operation effective period of 11 seconds is set in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) even though the frame button operation effective period (BT) is set. Since the player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, the effect of operating the frame button 22 again is not displayed during continuous slot effects. Is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In this control example, the special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is executed as the effect without setting the frame button operation effective period, but the operation of the frame button 22 is not necessary. It suffices that the effect to be performed is executed, and for example, the slot effect may be ended and a different effect may be executed.

Next, the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the effect period is 10 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is performed for 6 seconds (12 to 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). The slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is generated only when the frame button 22 is operated within the predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot effect to be executed.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). During 18 to 20 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and then the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is entered.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the extended slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect has an effect period of 10 seconds, and a frame button operation for which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 6 seconds (22 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. It is set as a valid period (BT).

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) during the extension slot effect, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of two lines of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

Next, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the effect period is 10 seconds, and during that period, 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the frame button 22 is operated. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). is there.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). During 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (the continuous slot effect is executed). After 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), a combination of pseudo symbols which are stopped and displayed when the frame button 22 is operated and not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) is a predetermined combination ( The ratio of "AAA", "BBB", or "CCC") is set to be different, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the predetermined combination described above is set to be more easily stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

Finally, the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), the effect period is 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (17 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. It is set as a frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the last 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the slot button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). This is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during (between).

When the frame button 22 is operated in the latter half 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). , After the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one or two effective lines), and continuous slot effect Ends.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated within the first 2 seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after the lapse of 19 seconds, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of the first line of the activated line), and the above-described slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is performed.

Even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (the continuous slot effect is being executed). From 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol is in the effective line 1 line or 2 lines It is set to be decided by lottery, and one of them is selected at a ratio of 1:1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a display mode of the above-described continuous slot effect will be described. FIGS. 161(a) to 161(e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the first slot effect executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the first slot effect, a pseudo symbol row having a plurality of pseudo symbols is displayed in three rows in rotation, and a frame button 22 for guiding the depression of the frame button 22 is schematically shown below the row. The guide map and the time gauge showing the frame button valid operation period are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, there is displayed a history display section for displaying a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") stopped and displayed in the current continuous slot effect.

In this state, the player operates the frame button 22 to shift to the state shown in FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol arrays are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161(b), the three pseudo symbol strings that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed (“AAA”), and the guide map and the time gauge are deleted. When the symbol stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the above-described predetermined pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed at the corresponding position on the history display unit.

Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the initial slot effect is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161(c), and the normal slot effect is started. In this normal slot effect as well, the three pseudo symbol arrays are rotated and displayed as in the first slot effect described above, and the three pseudo symbol arrays that are rotationally displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 are stopped and displayed. Is. The point different from the first slot effect is that the stop display mode in which the effective line has two rows as shown in FIG. 161(c) is selected as the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol row stops. Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped 2 seconds after the normal slot effect is started, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the inside symbol rows.

When the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined combination of the pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed on the history display portion. Here, when all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed on the history display portion are acquired, a privilege (big hit game) is given after the end of the continuous slot effect.

In this way, when the continuous slot effect is executed by the normal frame button operation, the slot effect is performed twice (first time slot effect and normal slot effect), and three combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols are performed by the slot effect. The game nature to acquire is provided.

On the other hand, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the initial slot effect is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process moves to FIG. 161(d) and the first shortened slot effect is started. It In this first shortened slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are displayed in rotation as in the normal slot effect as in the first slot effect described above, and three pseudo symbols which are displayed in rotation by the player operating the frame button 22. The row is an effect of being stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed (“BBB”) in one effective line. Then, after that, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161(e) is executed.

This second shortened slot effect is the same effect as the above-described first shortened slot effect, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, It is configured such that the effect mode of the executed slot effect is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects performed during the continuous slot effects is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of times of slot production is increased, the production result of continuous slot production becomes more advantageous to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the slot effect executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect (first slot effect), even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. Up to this, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effects is small, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot effect, so that it can be displayed to the player. You can have expectations until the end.

For the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the operation of the frame button is executed after the first slot effect is finished, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

Next, of the effects executed in this control example, the point effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162(b) is the “die roll mode”. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a case.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will not be described in detail, but in the present control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 causes the game mode to be performed. In the case of winning the transition lottery), it is configured to transition between two game modes (“normal mode” and “die roll mode”) in which the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is different.

The "normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol becomes reach, a predetermined character ("rabbit" "turtle" "hero" ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of) appears is executed. Then, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) that cumulatively display the points acquired by the point effect executed in the present control example are displayed, and any one of the indicators ( In any of P1, P2, and P3), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a privilege (reach effect) is given to the player.

On the other hand, in the “die roll mode”, the variable display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5, and the player is informed of the special symbol lottery result due to the progress of the game (not shown) using the die in the main display area. This is a game mode in which the effect to be performed is executed. Then, as in the case of the above-mentioned "normal mode", two indicators (P4 to P5) displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P4 to P5) is displayed. In P4 or P5), the bonus (reach effect) is given to the player when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points).

First, the point effect executed in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 162(a). FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example in the “normal mode”. As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the “normal mode”, three indicators are displayed, and each indicator is associated with “rabbit”, “turtle”, and “hero”. This is, the type associated with each character is set to the points (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) given to the player in the point effect, and the type of points given to the player is set. Points are given to the respective indicators (P1 to P3) in accordance with the above.

In addition, the characters "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" associated with the respective indicators (P1 to P3) are the third symbol variation effect and the pending symbol display (not shown) executed in the "normal mode". ), the point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed based on the character being displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation in which the points in the point effect are accumulated. Note that it is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be randomly determined. As a result, the points associated with the characters other than the characters displayed in the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), which makes it possible to give the player a surprise.

Further, in this control example, any one of a plurality of characters (“rabbit”, “turtle”, “hero”) appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as the point effect, and the displayed character is at that time. Is set so that high points are awarded when the character matches the character displayed as the main body of the third symbol variable display.

Further, the period for displaying the character as the point effect is set three times during one point effect, and the points are set to be given at each timing. As a result, it is possible to further associate the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of the main character or the type of that character) with the point effect, and to make the compound effect easy for the player to understand. There is an effect.

In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. A display object (for example, a “sword” or the like related to “hero”) may be used. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can play the game while comparing the display object displayed in the point effect with the content of the third symbol variation effect and predicting the presence or absence of the relationship.

Note that the point effect may be associated with something other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or is output from the voice output device. It may be associated with the voice of the character. As described above, by associating some effect provided to the player with the point effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect.

In addition, in this control example, the points are configured to be accumulated in the indicator at various timings during the variation display of the special symbol (during the third symbol variation), and the maximum number of points (7th stage in FIG. 162). ) Is reached, at least an effect with a higher jackpot expectation degree is executed than the variable effect of the third symbol being executed at that time.

Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not one of the indicators reaches the maximum value by the point effect and can execute the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

The manner in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As described above, in the present control example, the "normal mode" and the "die roll mode" are set as the plurality of effect modes by the voice lamp control device 114 which is the effect mode setting means. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process which will be described later executed by the voice lamp control device 114. A plurality of effect modes may be set by operating the frame button 22.

Then, the indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as stage information of a plurality of stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points that are variable information on the third symbol display device 81. It

Next, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the point effect executed in the “die roll mode” will be described. FIG. 162( b) is a diagram showing a display example in the “die roll mode”. As shown in FIG. 162(b), in the “die roll mode”, two indicators simulating a die roll are displayed, and the cumulative value of points is displayed by the eyes of the die roll. The two dice associated with each of the indicators are configured in the same display mode as the dice used in the “dice effect” executed in the “dice mode”.

As described above, since the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed in the point effect of this control example, it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a feeling of strangeness in each effect. be able to.

Further, in each game mode, since the type of points accumulated by the point effect and the upper limit value are set to be different, different point effects can be enjoyed for each game mode. Regarding the points given in the point effect, the point reference value to be given in advance is determined, the point reference value is converted to correspond to the indicator display of the currently executed game mode, and the converted points are converted. It may be configured to be given to the player. As a result, the control for giving points can be simplified.

Furthermore, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points already stored in the indicator may be converted into the points corresponding to the game mode of the transfer destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already given during the point effect is stored in the storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114, which is the stage information storage means, and the game mode is set. It is advisable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of shift to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the shift destination, and to control the display. Thereby, the indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display region Dm, and FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of effect display executed in the main display region Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. I have decided. This prevents the point displayed in the main display area Dm and the third symbol variation effect from overlapping and giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. Has been done. The place where the points are displayed is determined for each of the divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying points in each small area unit is stored in advance, when the small area in which the point display is executed this time is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, only the process of determining the display portion is executed, and there is an effect that the process can be simplified.

A method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. Good.

Further, in the present control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine, but it may be divided into a larger number, and the point display is not executed in one small area, but a plurality of small areas are displayed. May be used to execute the point display.

Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). As the third symbol variation effect, when the points are displayed while the effect shown in FIG. 163(b) is being executed, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small area not used. The area is discriminated, and as a result of the discrimination, a small area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, an allowable area for allowing point display is set.

Then, an image relating to the "hero" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which points are currently given to the selected small area Dm12 among the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set as the allowable area. Then, two points are displayed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the image serving as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, two points of the indicator corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162(a) are accumulated.

In the present control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, the points that the player can obtain are higher than when other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect with the character image that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect before the points are displayed, and determines whether or not the points that can be obtained in the current point effect are high. Can be predicted. Therefore, the continuation of the production can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the character image is displayed in the point effect and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing at which the point is displayed. In, points may be accumulated in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect.

Furthermore, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the cause of the change of the hold image is due to the point effect or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed hold image indicates the expectation of a big hit. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed later.

As described above, the display location of the points is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and the points are distributed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect, so that the game is played. It is possible to perform point productions that are easy for the user to understand.

In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which points can be displayed, it is possible to select a location for point display based on the number of points to be given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, Point display is performed in the small area Dm13 that is in the vicinity of the "monster" that is the enemy as the main subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol is hit. In this case, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, points may be displayed in the small area Dm11 in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the protagonist as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect. With this, by grasping the place where the player displays points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, in the small area of 1 It is also possible to calculate the proportion occupied by the image, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area in which points can be displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

FIG. 164( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a pressing scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added, The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the pressing scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165(a), the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the long pressing scenario 222c2, and the composite pressing scenario 222c3 are set in the pressing scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal press scenario 222c1, the period during which the normal button press is valid (normal press period) is set according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). It is a scenario. The information of the normal press scenario 222c1 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the normal press effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is the normal press period based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

Further, the timing type is set for each period during which the button press is valid. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

Specifically, in the normal press scenario 222c1, the normal press period is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. “OK” is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display is started, and is incremented by 1 every 1 ms thereafter, so the period of 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the change is determined as the normal press period. Will be done.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the pressing effect ending process is executed.

When the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", the pressing period type is not set and the button pressing is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long-pressing scenario 222c2. In the long press and hold scenario 222c2, a period (long press and hold period) in which the long press button press is valid is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). It is a scenario that has been done. The information of the long press pressing scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storing area 223m when the long press pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the long press pressing period is set based on the information of the set press scenario storing area 223m. Is determined.

Specifically, in the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the long press pressing period is set as the pressing period type and the "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. There is. That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the long-pressing and pressing period. The long-push pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in the present control example) (long-pressed). In the long press depressing effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the characters “long press success!” is displayed) is executed based on the long pressing operation performed during the long pressing depressing period.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the pressing effect ending process is executed.

When the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", the pressing period type is not set and the button pressing is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the composite pressing scenario 222c3. The composite press scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which a plurality of types of button presses are valid is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of variable display). The information of the composite pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the composite pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and indicates various pressing periods based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined. In the present embodiment, only one type of compound pressing scenario is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the combined pressing scenario 222c3, the automatic pressing period is set as the pressing period type and the "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001-12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the automatic pressing period. The automatic pressing period is a period in which the automatic pressing is executed based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the long-press operation being performed during the auto-press period, the effect is that the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long-press operation is continued (for example, the frame button The effect of increasing the gauge by repeatedly hitting 22) is executed.

With respect to the value “12001 to 13200” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the automatic pressing is performed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, "NG" is set as the timing type.

With respect to the value “13201 to 13800” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the automatic pressing is performed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, “OK” is set as the timing type.

With respect to the value "13801 to 15000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the press period type when the automatic press is in progress, and the normal press effect is set when the non-auto press is in progress, "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when the automatic pressing is being performed, a release effect, which is an effect of releasing the frame button 22, is displayed, and by releasing the frame button 22 in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of variation, an effect based on the timing type of “OK” ( For example, the characters "Good timing!" are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, the character “Bad Timing!”) is displayed.

In the case of non-automatic pressing, a normal pressing effect that is an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of variation, based on the timing type of “OK”. An effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed during 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, the character “Bad Timing!”) is displayed.

For the value "15001 to 18000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the automatic press effect is set, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Then, for the value "20001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the ending process of the composite press effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a hit character selection table 222d1 and a removal character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166(b). FIG. 166(b) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table.

Although not shown in the figure, the effect counter 223f has three types of independent counters, and when selecting a character in each period, a different counter is used for selection. Thereby, the variation of the character displayed in the first period to the third period can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0-49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "50-100" of the effect counter 223f. “Rabbit” is defined as a character, and “turtle” is defined as a character corresponding to the values “101 to 149” of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of the point effect" is defined, and the character (hero, rabbit, turtle) performing the main effect in the point effect. The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point effect executed when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is easily displayed in the first to third periods, whereby the game is played. Since the person plays the game in the expectation that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166(c), the contents of the detachment character selection table will be described. FIG. 166(c) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is out of alignment, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table.

Specifically, in the disengagement character selection table 222d2, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0-65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "66-132" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "turtle" is defined as the character corresponding to the values "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a hitting point selection table 222e1 and a missing point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, and points corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table. In addition, when selecting points in each period, selection is performed using different counters as in the case of selecting characters. Thereby, the variation of the points displayed in the first period to the third period can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the last one digit value "0-2" of the effect counter 223f, and the last one digit value of the effect counter 223f. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to "3 to 6", and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last single digit value "7 to 9" of the effect counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the deviation point selection table 222e1 defines "1" as the point corresponding to the last digit "0-4" of the effect counter 223f, and the effect is defined. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "5-7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "8-9" of the effect counter 223f. It is prescribed.

Therefore, the hitting point selection table 222e1 is configured so that higher points can be selected more easily than the deviation point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, high points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the press effect flag 223j, the press effect scenario counter 223k, the press scenario storage area 223m, the slot effect flag 223n, and the slot effect counter 223p. The difference is that the slot effect state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (display). When it is on, it indicates that the pressing effect is being executed (display), and when it is off, the button is pressed. Indicates that the effect has not been executed (displayed). The pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired fluctuation pattern is the pressing effect (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170) (FIG. 170). See S2031). Then, in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172), it is referred to for determining whether or not the press effect is in progress (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to OFF at the end of the press effect (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The press effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the press effect is set. This press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined that the press effect is being performed in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 at the end of the press effect. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the press effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time from the start of the variable display) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later, is it a valid period for pressing the button? It is determined whether or not.

The pressing scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario table 222c described above. In the pressing scenario storage area 223m, when the fluctuation pattern in which the pressing effect is set is acquired in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the pressing scenario corresponding to the set pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is in a valid period.

The slot effect in progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, the slot effect is being generated. Indicates that the effect has not been executed (displayed). This slot effect flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired fluctuation pattern is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172) (FIG. 170). See S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining whether or not the slot effect is being performed (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is turned off when the slot effect is completed (see FIG. 174). (See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. The slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) when it is determined that the slot effect is being performed (S4601: Yes in FIG. 174) (S4603 in FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot effect counter 223p is the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the first slot effect during process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect during process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect during process (FIG. 177). Reference), second shortening slot effect production processing (see FIG. 178), and extension slot effect production processing (see FIG. 179).

The slot effect state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot effect is stored, and during the first slot effect, the normal slot effect, the first shortened slot effect, the second shortened slot effect, and the extended slot effect. The corresponding value is stored. In the slot effect state 223q, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is set to the slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170), the first slot effect is set. (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the process during the first slot effect (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first shortened slot is selected when the first shortened slot effect is selected. The effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and the special slot effect is set when the special slot effect is selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot production process (see FIG. 176), when the display slot stop command of the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot production is performed. When the display slot effect command corresponding to is set, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first shortened slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 177), when the second shortened slot effect is selected, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extended slot effect is selected. The extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot production process (see FIG. 178), when the display slot stop production command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extension slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 179), when the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared at the end of the slot effect (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the work RAM 233 in this control example, a prohibited area storage area 233m is added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163) of the display area, which is composed of a total of nine areas obtained by vertically dividing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 into three, and dividing the display screen into three horizontally. Is stored, and the character pattern and the point pattern are controlled so as not to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as the information indicating the display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, it does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, A character design and a point design (not displayed in Dm12 and Dm13) are selected, and a point effect is executed. Further, after the character symbol is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area in which the selected character symbol is displayed, and then the point symbol is selected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the character design and the point design from being displayed in the same display area in an overlapping manner. In addition, when all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m when selecting the point symbol, the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol are combined (or reduced) to display an overlapping display. This may be prevented, or one of the character symbol and the point symbol may not be displayed.

The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table that stores image data for displaying a character design in the point effect described above. This character data table 234a3 stores the display information of the character symbols displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, and in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186), the character information of the received command is used. The display information of the corresponding character design is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character symbol display information includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information matching with is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character design from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point design and the character design displayed in the point effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. You can prevent it from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point pattern in the above point effect is stored. This point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbols displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, and in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186), the point information of the received command is used. The display information of the corresponding point pattern is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The point symbol display information includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information matching with is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point symbol from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are overlapped and displayed. You can prevent it from happening.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), a change is made so as to execute the press effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732). The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169. In the main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1710 is completed, the press effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. This variable display setting process 2 (S1712) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example in that a process for executing a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect is added instead of the reach navigation effect. The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1712), first, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed, and then the variable pattern command for display is set (S2006).

When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is to execute the press effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is set (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the processing of S2033, for example, if the acquired variation pattern is for executing a normal pressing effect, a normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, the button effective period can be adjusted to the display of the effect based on the pressed scenario storage area 223m and the pressed effect scenario counter 223k.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2031, if it is determined that the pressing effect is not executed (S2031: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect is executed (S2034).

In the process of S2034, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is to execute the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q. Is set as the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2034, when it is determined that the slot effect is not executed (S2034: No), it is then determined whether or not the point effect is executed (S2037).

In the process of S2037, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is to execute the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to S2007. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2037, when it is determined that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the transition to S2007, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process is ended.

Details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described below with reference to FIG. 174. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the hit/miss determination result is a big hit (S4301). Then, the first to third character information is determined based on the type of point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying the character design in the three periods in which the character design set in the point effect and the point design are displayed. The first character information is the information of the character symbol displayed in the first period which is the earliest of the three periods (the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is the shortest), and the second character information is the first period. Is the information of the character symbol displayed in the second period which is the next period, and the third character information is the information of the character symbol displayed in the third period which is the period following the second period.

As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured to easily select the same character pattern as the predetermined character in the point effect. As a result, if the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character pattern displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, then let the player expect a big hit after that. You can

When the process of S4302 is finished, the first to third point information is determined based on the last one digit value of the effect counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The 1st to 3rd point information is information for displaying the point symbol in the 1st to 3rd periods set in the point effect, like the 1st to 3rd character information described above.

As described above, the hitting point selection table 222e1 is configured to easily select the point symbols having higher points than the deviation point selection table 222e2. As a result, a large number of high-point symbols are displayed in the point effect, which allows the player to expect a big hit thereafter.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if the result of the hit/miss determination is determined to be miss (S4301: No), the first to third characters are determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the miss character selection table 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the deviation point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is finished, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 receives the point effect based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. Is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, details of the press effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. The pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects pressing of the frame button 22 (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) according to the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and the command corresponding to the pressing is displayed and controlled. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

In the press effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the press effect in-progress flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the press effect is in effect) (S4401). In the process of S4401, when it is determined that the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is off (S4401: No), it is not necessary to perform the setting related to the pressing effect, and thus the process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to S4402 to execute the process related to the pressing effect.

In the process of S4402, the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to the process of S4403. Since the press effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is every 1 ms while the press effect is being executed. Is incremented by 1.

In the process of S4403, based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m, the frame button 22 whose current period is normal is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is the period to be detected (normal pressing period) (S4403).

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4404). If it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal press period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and the present process is ended.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and the display pressing command corresponding to the timing type is set. Accordingly, when different effects are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the pressing timing.

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a period for detecting the long pressing of the frame button 22 (long pressing pressing period). Yes (S4406). In the process of S4406, when it is determined that the current period is the long press and hold period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is long pressed (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is set ( (S4408), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed for a long time (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the current period is not the long press and hold period (S4406: No), it is then determined whether or not the current period is the automatic press and hold period (S4409). In the process of S4409, when it is determined that the current period is the automatic pressing period (S4409: Yes), the automatic pressing effect setting process is executed (S4410), and the present process is ended. Details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the automatic pressing period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. When it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is released (whether or not the pressed state is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state) (S4412). ..

When it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released is set during the release period, and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the processing of S4412, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the processing of S4413 is skipped and the present processing ends.

In the process of S4411, when it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), whether or not it is the end timing of the press effect period (obtained based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k). It is determined whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is information of "END" (S4414).

In the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the press effect effect flag 223j is set to OFF. Then (S4416), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173, the details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that it is the automatic press period will be described. .. This automatic press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a long time during the automatic press period, and the frame button 22 is pressed for a fixed period (every 1 second) during the long press period. This is processing for transmitting a command indicating that 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the auto-press effect, by long-pressing and holding the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed.

In the automatic press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is started. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for automatic pressing ( S4502). Then, in the auto-pressing period, an auto-pressing start command indicating that long pressing of the frame button 22 has been started (automatic pressing has been started) is set (S4503), and this processing ends. By changing the pressing scenario to the pressing scenario for the automatic pressing in the process of S4502, the effect mode displayed thereafter is changed to the effect mode on the assumption that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, the effect of pressing the button can be changed to the effect of releasing the button).

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the long pressing of the frame button 22 is being performed (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being long-pressed (S4504: Yes), the previous auto-press is performed in the period in which the auto-pressing started by the long-pressing the frame button 22 is being executed. It is determined whether or not a certain period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has elapsed since the previous automatic pressing was executed (S4504: Yes), the display automatic pressing command is set (S4506), and the The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the fixed period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous automatic pressing was executed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and the present process is executed. finish.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being long-pressed (S4504: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been long-pressed (S4507). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. This prevents erroneous determination that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has ended when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like. it can.

In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is finished (S4507: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for non-automatic pressing. (S4508). Then, a display auto-depression end command indicating that long pressing of the frame button 22 has been completed (auto-depression has been started) is set during the auto-depression period (S4509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is not finished (S4507: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuous hit) during the automatic continuous hit period, and therefore, based on the timing type. A pressing command for display is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this processing is directly terminated.

Details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. The slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether the slot effect flag 223n is ON (whether the slot effect is in progress) (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S4601: No), it means that the slot effect has not been executed (displayed), and thus the process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during execution (display) of the slot effect. It

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is the value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (first slot effect) is being executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the first-time slot effect, the in-first-time slot effect process is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the process during the first slot effect (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 175. The first slot effect mid-process (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first slot effect of the slot effect. is there.

In the initial slot effect production process (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within a valid button pressing valid period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 13000 (that is, from 2 seconds to 13 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that the button pressing effective period. To do.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is reached (S4701: YES), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). When it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4702: No), this process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). .. In the processing of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press effective period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds). Since the frame button 22 is pressed during (for 8 seconds) and the remaining effect time of the slot press effect is long, the process proceeds to S4706 to execute the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value of 2000 to 8000 (that is, a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 for executing a normal slot effect. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4709), and the present process is ended. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that it is not the button press valid period (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press valid period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less in the process of S4710 (S4710: No), this process is directly terminated.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the first slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the normal slot effect during processing (S4606).

The process during normal slot effect is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect production process (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within a valid button pressing valid period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 17000 to 28000 (that is, from 17 seconds to 28 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that the button press effective period. Determine.

In the processing of S4801, if it is determined that it is not the button press valid period (S4801: No), the processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S4801: YES), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802).

In the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4802: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803).

In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect. This is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot effect whose time is 10 seconds. In this case, the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809), and the display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is set. A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to S4804 to end the slot effect.

In the processing of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined that it is an even number (S4804: Yes), a display slot in a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned The stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process of S4807 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the normal slot effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, in the second shortened slot effect, one symbol is stopped and displayed. Three symbols will be stopped and displayed together with the stop display in the slot effect. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed down slowly, it is determined whether two symbols or one symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the value of the effect counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, the possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed is increased, so that the player can be actively participated in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. Yes (S4607).

In the process of S4607, when it is determined that the first reduced slot effect production is set (S4607: Yes), the first reduced slot effect production process is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 177, the details of the first shortened slot effect production process will be described. The first shortened slot effect mid-process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. This is processing for.

In the first shortened slot effect production process (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect.

In the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect is determined (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

In the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4902: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is arranged is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the button press valid period is not reached (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has not been pressed during the button pressing effective period in the first shortened slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

When the process of S4905 or S4908 is completed, the display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4909), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then it is determined whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. It is determined whether or not (S4609).

In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect during process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the second shortened slot effect production process (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 178. The second shortened slot effect during processing (S4610) is processing executed in the slot effect setting processing (see FIG. 174) and corresponds to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. This is processing for performing processing.

In the second shortened slot effect mid-processing (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the processing of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing period is not valid (S5001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

In the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5002: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The process is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and the present process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then it is determined whether or not the extended slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. It is determined (S4611).

In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extension slot effect is being set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 179, the details of the extension slot effect production process (S4612) will be described. The extension slot effect mid-process (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the extension slot effect. Processing.

In the extension slot effect production process (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the extension slot effect (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the button pressing period is not valid (S5101: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102).

In the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5102: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The process is set to the end waiting state (S5104), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extended slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to S4613.

In the process of S4613, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 in order to determine whether it is the end timing of the slot effect (S4613). In the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), since it is not the end timing of the slot effect, this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect, and then the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the slot effect is already stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is the case where the special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to end the slot effect after the effect mode in the slot effect is stopped and displayed, a display slot effect forced termination command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot effect flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and the present process is ended.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180), a press effect related command process, a slot effect command process, and a point effect command process are added. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the processing of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the press effect related command is received (S2631).

In the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to press effect is received (S2631: Yes), the command process related to press effect is executed (S2632), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

On the other hand, in the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to the press effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect command has been received (S2633).

In the process of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command is received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

In the process of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command is received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command is not received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the processing of S2601. Return to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184, details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described. The press effect related command process (S2632) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) the press effect.

In the press effect related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S5201). In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Here, details of the press command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command processing. This push-down command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display push-down command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the press command processing, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the press display data table thus determined is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S5301). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5302).

Then, based on the pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5305), the press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether the display long pressing command has been received (S5203).

In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display long press command is received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

Here, details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the long press command processing. The long press command process is a process corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the long press command processing, first, the long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5402).

Then, based on the long press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5405), the long press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether the display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-press start command is received (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

Here, the details of the automatic press-down start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a flowchart showing the automatic press-down start command processing. This automatic press-down start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display automatic press-down start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press start command processing, first, the auto-press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press start command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502).

Then, based on the auto-press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5501, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S5504). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5505), the automatic press-start command processing is terminated, and the control returns to the press effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-pressing start command has not been received (S5205: No), it is then determined whether the display auto-pressing command has been received (S5207).

In the process of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

Here, the details of the auto-press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(b). FIG. 183(b) is a flowchart showing the automatic press command processing. This auto-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press command processing, first, an auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, the determined auto-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602).

Then, based on the automatic press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5605), the automatic press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), it is then determined whether the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

When it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command process is executed (S5210) and the process proceeds to S5211.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the details of the automatic pressing end command processing (S5210) will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a flow chart showing the automatic pressing end command processing. This automatic press-down end command processing executes processing corresponding to the display automatic press-down end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the automatic press end command processing, first, an automatic press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display automatic press end command is determined, and the determined automatic press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5702).

Then, based on the auto-pressing end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5705), the automatic pressing end command processing ends, and the processing returns to the pressing effect related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press termination command has not been received (S5209: No), it is then determined whether a display release command has been received (S5211).

In the processing of S5211, when it is determined that the display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), the release command processing is executed (S5212), and this processing ends.

Here, details of the release command process (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing the release command processing. This release command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display release command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the release command processing, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S5801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5805), the release command process is terminated, and the press effect related command process is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5211, if it is determined that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this processing ends.

Next, details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the slot effect command processing. The slot effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5902).

Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S5905), the slot effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

Next, the details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the point effect command processing. The point effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display point effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, information on the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

Character data of the character pattern to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the processing of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information on the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command, the point data of the point symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6008), the point effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

As described above, since the composite press effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously performs different operation modes (continuous hitting, timing pressing) on the frame button 22, It is possible to increase the willingness to participate. Further, when it is determined that the player was executing the automatic pressing function during the composite press effect, the press effect mode of the composite press effect to be executed is switched, so that the player can be provided with an effect that is not uncomfortable. You can

In this control example, normally, as a composite press effect, a setting (timing press effect) in which the frame button 22 is pressed at a good timing after the press effect in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed (continuous hit effect) is set. If the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect switches from the continuous hit effect to the timing press effect, it is configured to switch the above-described timing press effect to the release effect that releases the button at a good timing. Other configurations may be used.

For example, when the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous hit effect to the timing push effect, the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the timing press effect may be automatically determined. The effect may be continuously executed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a feeling of strangeness to the player who is executing the automatic pressing function.

Further, in the second control example, the normal press effect, the timing press effect, and the release effect can be displayed as the composite press effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which the long press effect is executed may be provided as a part of the composite press effect.

Further, in the second control example, the timing of changing each pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect is the timing of switching the pressing effect, but the effect mode of the next pressing effect is the timing at which the previous pressing effect is executed. May be determined. This makes it possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the composite press effect.

Further, although the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the effect period of the composite press effect executed in the second control example, an invalid period is provided during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite press presentation using an invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period in which the composite press presentation is being executed, and thus it is easy for the player to understand. A performance can be provided.

In the composite press effect described in the second control example, the result of the composite press effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each press effect executed during the composite press effect. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play each pressing effect. Note that the method of displaying the effect result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the composite press effect.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, It is configured such that the effect mode of the executed slot effect is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects performed during the continuous slot effects is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of times of slot production is increased, the production result of continuous slot production becomes more advantageous to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the slot effect executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect (first slot effect), even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. Up to this, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effects is small, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot effect, so that it can be displayed to the player. You can have expectations until the end.

Further, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the operation of the frame button is executed after the first slot effect is finished, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

In the second control example, the slot effect is used as the plurality of operation effects executed during the continuous effect executed for the specific period, but based on the operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. Thus, as long as the configuration and the number of times of the other operation effects executed during the continuous effect can be changed, an effect other than the effect using slots may be used.

As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the display location of the point is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and further displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Since the points are distributed based on the character, it is possible to execute a point effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which points can be displayed, it is possible to select a location for point display based on the number of points to be given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, Point display is performed in the small area Dm13 that is in the vicinity of the "monster" that is the enemy as the main subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol is hit. In this case, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, points may be displayed in the small area Dm11 in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the protagonist as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect. With this, by grasping the place where the player displays points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 of FIG. 163(b)) may be a display mode for guiding the point display location (small area) to be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display mode in which the point display location (small area) is guided by the character's eyes.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, in the small area of 1 It is also possible to calculate the proportion occupied by the image, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area in which points can be displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

The following configuration may be used as the configuration for setting the display location of the point effect based on the location where the third symbol variation effect is displayed. That is, when the display control device 114 side receives the command for displaying the points, it controls so as to display the points in each of the small areas, and the small areas other than the small area for actually allowing the player to visually recognize the points are displayed. The point display displayed in the area may be masked so that the player cannot visually recognize it. With this configuration, for example, during the third symbol variation effect, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the permissible area are exchanged. The case can be easily processed.

Further, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying points is displayed in all the small areas, and the effect display image layer for displaying the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. Is provided, and it is preferable to execute a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer.

Further, in the second control example, the small area in which the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as the prohibited area in which the point display is prohibited, but the small area in which other display is executed is prohibited area. May be set as, for example, a small area in which game information such as the display of the number of holdings is displayed, or the pachinko machine 10 which is driven by a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection) being established. 3 In the gaming machine having a decorative accessory that covers a part of the front surface (specific small area) of the symbol display device 81, the specific small area described above when a predetermined condition is satisfied, or an abnormality when an abnormality is detected In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area in which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be the prohibited area.

Further, although the second control example describes the control example using the display area of one display device (third symbol display device 81), even if the same control is executed using a plurality of display devices. Of course, for example, when the movable (rotatable) sub display device is arranged at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and when it is arranged at other positions, it may be set as an allowable area.

<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. The first modified example of the second control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) is replaced. The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first modified example of the second control example, three types of automatic pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are different in each automatic pressing period. As a result, for example, an effect that requires the frame button 22 to be pressed a plurality of times during the button pressing period (continuous hitting effect), or pressing the frame button 22 only once with good timing during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect), Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

Further, in the first modified example, an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated/stopped is executed three times as the slot effect is displayed, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the depression of the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster as the pressing of the frame button 22 becomes slower. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and it becomes easier to align the targeted symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, The rotation speed in the rotation effect of becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the targeted patterns. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Modification of Second Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 187, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187(a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modified example is different from the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above in that instead of the compound pressing scenario 222c3, the first compound pressing scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first combined pressing scenario 222c4. The first compound pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the compound pressing scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the pressing interval during the automatic pressing period is different, and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 187(b), in the first combined pressing scenario 222c4, the automatic pressing period A (pressing interval of 1 second) is set as the pressing period type for the value “5001-12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. For the value "15001 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the automatic pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set.

In this way, by changing the pressing interval with respect to the automatic pressing period set to a different period depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the player executing the automatic pressing function executes the automatic pressing function. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of an effect based on the effect of being performed.

In this modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto-pressing period, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is set. When the auto-press period is reached, one auto-press pattern is selected from the auto-press pattern selection table that stores a plurality of auto-press patterns with different press intervals, and the press interval is based on the selected auto-press pattern. May be set. With this configuration, even if the composite press effect based on the same composite press scenario is executed, the automatic press function with different press intervals is executed, so the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, a predetermined automatic pressing pattern may be selected from the above-mentioned automatic pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, when the effect that the degree of progress increases according to the number of presses is executed, if the determination result of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, it is stored in the automatic press pattern selection table. It is advisable to select the automatic pressing pattern having the shortest pressing interval from the existing automatic pressing patterns. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the effect when the special symbol determination result is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the automatic pressing function predict the determination result of the special symbol according to the degree of progress of the effect.

Further, while the automatic pressing function is being executed, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the pressing interval. As a result, the player can visually recognize the pressing interval of the automatic pressing function being executed this time.

Next, the contents of the second combined pressing scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(c). FIG. 187(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second combined pressing scenario 222c5. The second combined pressing scenario 222c5 is a period corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) with respect to the above-described first combined pressing scenario 222c4, and the value "12001" to "" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. The difference is that the automatic pressing period is also set to "15000", and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

In the second combined pressing scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187(c), the automatic pressing period C (pressing interval 2 seconds) is set for the values "12001" to "15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. .. As described above, the automatic pressing function with the pressing interval of 2 seconds is executed during the period in which the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) is set to 3 seconds, so that the automatic pressing function is performed within a predetermined period. It is possible to realize a situation in which a button is pressed at a timing.

Specifically, for example, when the effect pressed by the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k during the automatic pressing period A is "14000", the pressing effect during the automatic pressing period C At the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing 2 seconds after the previous pressing effect, the next pressing effect is executed. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at a timing one second after the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) is started.

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during automatic pressing, it is possible to preferably execute button pressing effects with different game characteristics while the automatic pressing function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is being pressed and held for a long time). It becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that a pressing number counter 223r is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing number counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed during execution (display) of the slot effect. In the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press valid period arrives (see FIG. 189). (See S6108). Then, when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 2 or less, the setting of the next rotation effect is executed, and when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Further, the button press valid period is set based on the value of the press count counter 223r.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , And other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). This slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which the rotation effect of rotating/stopping the slot is executed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the depression of the frame button 22. Perform processing. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to reduce the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and it becomes easier to align the targeted symbols.

In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), firstly, it is determined whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S6101: No), this means that the slot effect has not been executed (displayed), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S6101: YES), the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 because the slot effect is being executed (displayed) ( S6102), the process proceeds to S6103.

In the processing of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period (S6103). Specifically, the button press valid period is set by the process of S6115 described later. For example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is When the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, from 2001 ms after the slot effect is started until 8000 ms elapses), the button press valid period is set.

In the processing of S6103, when it is determined that the button is not in the valid period (S6103: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), the display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating design in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , S6108.

In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106). Specifically, when the pressing number counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

In the process of S6106, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S6106, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop production command for forcibly stopping the rotating design in the rotation production. Is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the pressing number counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added pressing number counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), it means that the rotation effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times. The process moves to S6113 for setting.

In the processing of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the pressing number counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot. The value of the effect counter 223p is 28000, and the remaining time is the value obtained by subtracting the current value of the slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p that is the upper limit time.

A display slot effect command in a display mode in which the rotation speed is 10 rotations with the remaining time calculated in the process of S6113 is set (S6114), and a button press valid period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is set. (S6115), this process is completed.

In the process of S6115, specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is from 12001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period, and the press count counter 223r is set. When the value of 2 is 2, the period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value from 22001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed in the final rotation effect of the slot effect (or the button press is effective). The period has expired). In this case, a display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the pressing number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112), This process ends.

As described above, in the first modification, in the slot effect in which the rotation effect is performed three times, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the target symbol is obtained. While it is easy to align the symbols, if the frame button 22 is pressed down slowly, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the targeted symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the length of the next button press effective period to be set may be varied depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button press effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, the button press period is set to be long in the next rotation effect, so even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, there are many times when the target symbol is stopped (that is, the chance increases). Since it is possible to give, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modified example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the frame button 22 is in the automatic pressing state, a pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, and the frame When the button 22 is in the non-automatic pressed state, a difference is that a frame button controller 290 that outputs a pressing signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is provided to the voice lamp controller 113, and the other difference. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modified example, the frame button control device 290 described above is in the state of being automatically pressed based on the predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During automatic pressing, a pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals without operating the frame button 22. Therefore, even when the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, and the operation load on the player is reduced. You can

<Electrical Configuration in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the second modified example.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modified example via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the processing of this MPU 291 detects pressing of the frame button 22 and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the detection result.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, and stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an automatic pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (whether the frame button 22 is pressed or not, a press signal is output at regular intervals). If it is, it is determined that it is in the state of being automatically pressed (while it is being automatically pressed), and if it is off, it is determined that it is not in the state of being automatically pressed (not being automatically pressed).

The automatic pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is pressed for 2 seconds or more. The auto-pressing flag 293a is referred to in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing state is set.

The pressing time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressed time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the automatic pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is completed.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during the automatic pressing. The period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, the auto-pressing state). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during the automatic pressing. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is voice lamp control. Sent to device 113. The period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches a predetermined value (1000). Therefore, every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time 1 second elapses), the button pressing signal is output. Will be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

By changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to change the interval at which the button pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the automatic pressing. For example, the predetermined value may be set to 500 or 2000, and the variable timing may be the timing at which a predetermined operation (long press, repeated hit, other button press, etc.) is executed. The timing should be switched. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the voice lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding Control Processing by Frame Button Control Device in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 291 regularly (every 1 ms in this modification). The timer interrupt process is a process for detecting pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When the long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the automatic press function is executed, and the press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modification). It is a process to do.

In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). In the processing of S6201, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressed time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the pressed time counter 293b is calculated. It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the processing of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), it means that 2 seconds have elapsed since the frame button 22 was pressed, so the automatic pressing flag 293a. It is determined whether or not is on (S6204).

In the processing of S6204, if it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), it means that the automatic pressing function is not executed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the automatic pressing function, The automatic pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating pressing of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. By the process of S6206, the pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the production based on the reception of the pressing signal is executed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that the automatic pressing is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. Note that the output is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notification that the automatic pressing is set is performed, and based on the notification, the effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set is executed by the voice lamp control device 113. May be.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6204, when it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is ON (S6204: No), it means that the automatic pressing function is being executed, and therefore the execution of the automatic pressing function is ended. Then, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

When it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 to S6207 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the processing of S6201, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208).

In the process of S6208, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, a pressing signal indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 is issued. In order to output, the process proceeds to S6209. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms) by the process of S6208, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Even when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a period of time (for example, 1 ms), the pressing of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

The processing of S6209 determines whether or not the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the process of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is normally pressed, and therefore the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113. To (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), it means that the frame button 22 is long-pressed, and thus the process of S6210 is skipped. , S6211 is performed.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). In the processing of S6212, when it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is ON (S6212: Yes), it means that the automatic pressing function is being executed, and therefore the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by one. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the added value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) (S6214).

In the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), the press signal indicating the press of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 ( (S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the processing of S6212, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6212: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, the processing of S6213 to S6216 is executed, and The process ends.

As described above, in the second modified example of the second control example, by performing a predetermined operation (long pressing of the frame button 22), it is possible to switch the automatic pressing function on and off. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press the frame button 22 for a long time in order to execute the automatic pressing function, so that the operation load on the player can be reduced.

In the second modified example, the pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the automatic pressing function is started. This allows the player to easily recognize that the automatic pressing has been set. Note that the output is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notification that the automatic pressing is set is performed, and based on the notification, the effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set is executed by the voice lamp control device 113. May be.

The second modification is configured to detect the normal depression of the frame button 22 and output a depression signal to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the automatic depression function is executed. As a result, even when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the effect mode, and thus the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected when the automatic pressing function is executed. Further, when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the execution of the automatic pressing function may be terminated based on the normal pressing of the frame button 22. As a result, the execution of the automatic pressing function can be easily terminated, and a game machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

In the second modified example, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the process of the MPU, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is being pressed down, and when the voltage of the capacitor is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 5 V), it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time. May be.

<Other effect examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the control examples described above will be described. The same components as those used in the above-described control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the control examples described above, the mission effect is executed when a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113. This mission effect is an effect in which a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a privilege (for example, a big hit) is given when the effect contents executed thereafter satisfy the command.

In each control example described above, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of the command content (first command information) and the commander (second command information). The past command display can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are simultaneously displayed. Here, it is configured to indicate to the player whether or not the mission effect of this time will be successful, based on the relationship between the command display of this time and the past (previous) command display.

Specifically, if the current and previous command displays (first command information and second command information) are the same, it indicates that there is a high possibility that the mission performance of this time will be successful, and if they are different, this This suggests that mission production is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, when a part of the command display is matched (for example, the commander who is the second command information is matched), it is set so as to indicate that there is a high possibility of success if the mission performance progresses to the latter half. It

In this way, because the contents of the past mission effect and this mission effect overlap so that the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased, the same effect is repeatedly executed, and the player gets tired of the game. It is possible to make an easy situation into a situation where you can expect a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in this mission production, when a command such as “collect people” is displayed as the instruction content, if the result of the production is “0 person”, the instruction will fail and “1 person” to “100 person” will be displayed. The command is successful, and when the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, "1 person" command achievement rate 1% and "100 people" command achievement rate 100%) is set. By setting this command achievement rate, it is possible to set the expectation that will be a big hit in more detail. In addition, when the command content of the first command information is the same and the commander of the second command information is different between the command display of this time and the previous command, the performance is executed while the command achievement rate is taken over. Has been done. This makes it possible to change the content of the effect even if the effect having the same command content is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the above description, the effect based on the previous command display history and the current command display is executed, but, for example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided, and The player is provided with a selection means for selecting an arbitrary command display. Even if the command display selected by the selecting means is displayed on the display screen (third symbol display device 81), the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selecting means and the instruction display this time. Good. In addition, information corresponding to past instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 as a two-dimensional code so that the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information will be used when the pachinko machine is executed next time. By making it possible to input in 10, the command instructions executed in the past (for example, the day before) may be taken over and displayed.

<Chance up production>
In each of the control examples described above, in order to indicate the degree of expectation that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display or reach) The effect of changing the color pattern of the title name display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when a similar effect is executed, the player pays attention to the effect while expecting which color pattern is displayed in the partial display mode of the effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. It is restrained.

However, since the above-described partial display mode is displayed at various timings in one effect (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice the change in the partial display mode, or expects to see the effect. As a result, there was a problem that I felt dissatisfied by not being displayed in a color pattern with a high expectation of a big hit.

On the other hand, in each of the control examples described above, when the effect is executed, there is provided a color pattern advance notification means capable of notifying the player of the color pattern displayed in the current effect in advance. This allows the player to know in advance the color pattern provided in this presentation.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, a specific color pattern is automatically selected from a plurality of displayed color patterns as the color pattern advance notification means. As a result, a color pattern with a high jackpot expectation is displayed among the plurality of color patterns that have been once displayed, and the color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means in the expectation that the color pattern will be selected. It is possible to pay attention to the production that is performed.

Further, the color pattern advance notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the partial display mode described above. As a result, when a plurality of color patterns with high jackpot expectation are notified in advance, the player need only pay attention to the effect, and suppress distrust in the game caused by having excessive expectations for each effect. be able to.

In addition, since the plurality of partial display modes described above have different jackpot expectation degrees when the color patterns are changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern previously notified by the color pattern prior notification means. You can watch the production while enjoying how it is used.

<Hold change effect>
In each control example described above, an area (hereinafter, reserved display area) in which information (hereinafter, referred to as reserved number information) indicating the number of rights for which special symbol variation is executed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. , And an area (hereinafter, referred to as an execution display area) in which information (hereinafter, referred to as execution information) corresponding to the special symbol whose variation is currently executed is displayed. And, the so-called hold-ahead read-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol that represents the number-of-holds information displayed in the hold display area based on the information that pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol Is configured to be executable.

Conventionally, this hold prefetching effect was configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol when a new variation of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the hold prefetching effect if the information on the number of holdings equal to or more than a predetermined number is displayed, but if the number of holdings is small, entertain the effect sufficiently. There was a problem that I could not.

On the other hand, in the hold change effect of each control example described above, based on the information that pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, the time required for the reserved symbol to move to the execution display area is used. The display mode of the pending design is changed. Thereby, even if the number of holdings is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the holding design by using at least the time until the fluctuation of the special design that is currently being executed is completed.

Specifically, the hold design that is the target of the hold change (for example, the hold design displayed in the hold 3) is changed to a character, and the hold design changed to the character is a predetermined hold display area (eg, hold 2 is displayed. When it is displayed (shifted) in the area to be held), the pending change effect is started (for example, battle effect). Then, the longer the time until the hold change effect ends, the longer the hold change progresses.

That is, in the case where the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change is shifted to the pending 2, the length of the pending change effect based on the variation time of the special symbol being executed and the variation time of the pending symbol displayed in the pending 1 Is determined. As a result, even if the hold change effect is started in the state of hold 1, if the change time of the special symbol that is currently changing is long, the hold change can be sufficiently advanced by the hold change effect.

Further, the end of the hold change effect may be the timing at which the hold design subject to the hold change effect is moved to the execution display area, or may be ended before that.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, when the holding symbol which is the object of the holding change effect is moved to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for the pre-reading effect of the hold symbol displayed in the hold display area in the state where the hold symbol which is the target of the hold change effect is displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending symbol that is the object of the pending change effect has changed and the character displayed near the execution display area will execute the above-mentioned battle effect. With such a configuration, when the holding symbol is changed to a character in a state where the number of holdings is small, the character is used for the pending change effect of the later holding symbol, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that in the above-described battle effect, the degree of expectation may be suggested by a combination of characters to be confronted. Further, the frequency of the hold prefetching effect and the expectation degree of the big hit may be set to be different depending on the type of the character displayed near the execution display area.

<Button effect setting>
In each of the control examples described above, a plurality of frame button operation effects in which the frame button 22 can be operated can be executed as the variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114. Further, although detailed description is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set more in each control example described above (for example, by continuously pressing the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). , The effect of notifying the player by changing the colors emitted by the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the degree of expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the changing third symbol this time, and a voice lamp The effect of changing the decoration mode by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently executed and the action of the player operating the frame button 22 is complicated.

On the other hand, a unit that determines whether a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a plurality of the set button operations when it is determined that a plurality of frame button operation effects are set. Interval determination means for determining the interval of the frame button operation effect, and when the interval determination means makes the interval of the plurality of frame button operation effects a predetermined interval, the operation of the frame button 22 is also valid at the predetermined interval. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Accordingly, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid so as to span a plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from being complicated.

Note that, as the interval determination means described above, specifically, a period in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and the intervals of the plurality of frame button operation effects are set based on the set period. A storage means is provided for storing a combination of what is to be discriminated and a plurality of frame button operation effects at which intervals at which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed are less than a predetermined amount, and a combination of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means. There is one that determines whether or not is set.

Further, as the above-mentioned frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, a case where the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect executed first is set to be extended and a case where the frame button operation is executed later. In some cases, the effect operation effective period is set to be moved forward, and in another case, a new frame button operation effect is set.

When setting the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect that is executed first to be extended, the frame button operation effect that is executed first is displayed in a manner in which the operation effective period is extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation effective period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation effective period is predetermined. When the period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining) is reached, the operation valid period may be extended and displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has not been set until immediately before the completion of the frame button operation effect that is being executed earlier, so that more players The button 22 can be continuously operated, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from being complicated.

Further, the effect result of the frame button operation effect that is executed first at the timing when the normal operation effective period is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by the operation of the frame button 22 for the extended operation effective period, The display mode of the effect result of the previously executed frame button operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

When setting the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be executed ahead of time, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later. As is, the operation valid period set ahead of time may be used as the preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when a frame button operation effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, by performing the successive hit operation during the preparation period, a display indicating the degree of the consecutive hit operation is performed, During the preparation period, the automatic repeated hitting function can be set to ON.

Further, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect executed first or the frame button operation effect executed later is executed.

As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, as a method of setting the frame button operation effect, a plurality of frame button operation effects may be set when setting one effect, or for each effect that may be close in execution time. A frame button operation effect may be set. For example, by continuously hitting the frame button 22 until the fluctuation of the third symbol based on the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), the special symbol of this time is expected to be a big hit. The degree is displayed in the light emission color of the decoration lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and when the predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol has a predetermined dynamic display. When a pattern (for example, SP reach) that is a display mode is selectable from a plurality of patterns (for example, three patterns), and a pattern in which the frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, 2 The interval at which one frame button operation effect is executed may be set to a predetermined interval.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. However, the operation is not limited to this, and an operation of providing a proximity sensor that can be operated by the player bringing the hand close Means, operating means that reacts when the player touches (detects changes in pressure and capacitance), operating means that allows the player to tilt forwards, backwards, leftward and rightward, and operating means that allows the player to rotate. Any configuration is acceptable as long as it is operable. Furthermore, in the above description, the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operation means, but the operation means may be constituted by using a plurality of devices.

Furthermore, in each control described above, a setting method of pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or more is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operating means, but the setting method is not limited to this, for example, a predetermined method. The operation may be set when the operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operation means is operated in a predetermined procedure. Also, a dedicated device for automatically switching to a state in which the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. In the second control example described above, as the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. A point effect in which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX), and the display mode of each indicator is changed in the point effect The control of the point display for displaying the predetermined value (for example, points) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the above-described second control example will be described. The third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference lies in that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with regard to the point effect executed in this control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, there are two types of modes used for point effects (“normal mode” and “die roll mode”), whereas in this control example, there are four modes used for point effects (FIG. 195). (See) is different.

Further, in the second control example described above, the points are evenly allocated to the respective indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the “normal mode”, whereas in the present control example, the “normal mode A” is set. The difference is that the points are distributed differently for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in accordance with the special symbol lottery result. Further, in this control example, a detailed description is added to the process relating to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram illustrating each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of this control example is an effect that is performed while the variation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the indicator display mode is similar to the point effect executed in the second control example described above. It is an effect that notifies the player that a privilege (an effect with a high jackpot expectation degree or a jackpot) is given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "die roll mode", and "bingo mode". In each of these modes, different indicators are displayed, and at the time of mode transition executed during point performance, the indicators are displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator displayed in the mode before the transition. Is configured. Specifically, it corresponds to a rabbit in the display mode (for example, in “normal mode A”) in which it is determined that the privilege 2 (for example, a performance with a high jackpot expectation degree) is fixed before the mode of the point performance is changed. In the case where the indicator P1 is in the maximum value (MAX) display mode, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition has been determined to be provided with the privilege 2 (effect with high jackpot expectation) (for example, A display mode showing a doublet in the "dice mode" is displayed.

Specifically, the display mode displayed by the indicator is determined in a plurality of stages (privilege 1 display mode (big hit confirmation display mode), and privilege 2 display mode (effect with high jackpot expectation is confirmed). Display mode) and a high standard display mode (a display mode showing a high standard state in which any privilege is given soon)), and the display can be determined and stored when the mode is changed. The display mode corresponding to the mode stage is the initial display mode after the mode transition.

With this configuration, when the mode transition occurs during the point performance, the player can easily understand that the privilege acquired by the point performance so far has not been lost, and the point performance It is possible to suppress the player from getting tired early by diversifying the effect by shifting to different indicators.

Here, details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode A" used for the point effect in the third control example. The "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the "normal mode" described above will be described. , And other explanations are omitted.

In the "normal mode A", the three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In the present control example, unlike the above-described second control example, the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "hero" is set higher than the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "rabbit" and "turtle". .. Specifically, the privilege given to the player when the value of the indicator reaches the maximum (MAX) is different, and the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to the "rabbit" and the "turtle" have the respective indicator values. When the maximum (MAX) is reached, it is informed that the effect 2 (main effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is transferred as the bonus 2. When the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to the "hero" is maximum (MAX), it is determined as the privilege 1. , It is configured to notify that the special symbol that is changing is a big hit.

In addition, as a display mode (high standard display mode) showing a high standard state in which a privilege is granted a little more, a display mode in which any of the display modes of each of the indicators P1 to P3 indicates the sixth step is set. As a result, when the mode is changed when any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is in the display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. It will be.

In addition, when "normal mode A" is set as the point effect, an effect in which "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" are displayed is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) are made to have a relationship between the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "die roll mode" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing a "dicing mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. The "die roll mode" has the same display form as the "die roll mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the above "die roll mode" will be described. Other description is omitted.

In the “die roll mode”, two indicators P4 and P5 simulating a die are used as in the “die roll mode” used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, double eyes), the player is provided with the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). .. Specifically, when the indicators P4 and P5 display the same display number (that is, the double-eye display mode), the bonus 2 is given an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the double-eye display mode. In the case of “6.6”, the bonus 1 is notified that the jackpot is won.

In the “die roll mode”, the indicators P4 and P5 simulating the dice are rotated and displayed, and when the double-sided display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. The display mode showing the numbers (that is, the non-double eye display mode) does not occur, and the rotation display that indicates whether or not the number stopped and displayed in the double eye display mode is increased is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-doublet display mode from being stopped and displayed once the doublet display mode has been stopped and displayed, so that the benefit given to the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Further, in the "during dice mode", the case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the "normal mode A", when the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed, when the "die roll mode" is selected, the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and an effect in which only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed is executed. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

Furthermore, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed at "5", "5.5" is stopped and displayed when the doublet display mode is displayed. Therefore, after the double-eye display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be predicted that the double-eye display mode “6.6” for notifying that the jackpot is won is close, and the effect can be enhanced.

When the “die roll mode” is set as the point effect, an effect using a die is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) are made to have a relationship between the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the “normal mode B” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode B" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 that represents 100% as a whole is used, and the display mode of the indicator P6 is a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). In this case, the player is set to be provided with a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 50% is displayed, an effect with a high expectation for a jackpot is given as the privilege 2, and a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 100% is displayed. Is notified that the jackpot is won as the privilege 1.

In the "normal mode B", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, when the “normal mode B” is set, The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to the display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

Next, the “bingo mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "bingo mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "bingo mode" uses an indicator P7 of 9 squares with numbers 1 to 9, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is erased (designated). The production to go is executed. Then, when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are aligned in a straight line is displayed, the player is provided with the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2).

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the indicator P7 is aligned with two lines is displayed, it is indicated that an effect having a high expectation of a jackpot is given as the privilege 2 and the indicator P7 is aligned with three or more lines. When the display mode is displayed, it is notified that the bonus 1 has been won as a bonus.

Further, in the "bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of the indicators P7 is aligned is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, when shifting to the “bingo mode”, The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to the high reference display mode indicating that one line is complete. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

As described above, the indicators having different display forms (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes for notifying the player that the privilege is given) are different in the plurality of modes used for the point effect in this control example. (P1 to P7) are used, and the effect of monotonous point effect can be enhanced by changing the mode during execution of point effect.

Further, even when the mode is changed during the point effect, the point effect after the mode change is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode change, so that the player can easily provide the point effect. You can

Further, as will be described in detail later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), a display mode (for example, the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4. 4.4"), but by changing to a different mode (for example, "die roll mode") while the display mode is being displayed, the player can display the indicator as a mode after the mode is changed. Is set to display a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “4.4”) indicating that the privilege (for example, privilege 2) is given.

In this way, by shifting to a mode in which the display mode of the indicator showing that the privilege is awarded to the player is changed, the privilege is granted from the display mode showing the low reference value with a low expectation level of the privilege. It is possible to change to a display mode (or a high standard display mode in which the degree of expectation of a privilege is high).

Furthermore, in the final stage of the point performance (for example, the state where the special symbol changes three times during the point performance), there is a low expectation that the privilege will be displayed in the current mode (for example, “normal mode A”). Even if each of the indicators P1 to P3 is in a display mode in which a low numerical value is displayed, the display mode in which the privilege is granted from the display mode in which the expectation level for the privilege is low and the reference value is low (or Since there is a possibility that the mode is switched to a high standard display mode in which the degree of expectation of a privilege is high, it is possible to entertain the player until the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from the "normal mode A", and the mode change is executed when it is determined that the mode is changed as a result of the mode change lottery executed during the point effect. (Hereinafter, referred to as first mode transition). In addition to the above-described determination of mode transition, the mode transition is executed based on the result of the hit/miss determination and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter referred to as the second mode transition).

Further, with respect to the mode transition destination, a restriction (that is, prohibition processing) is set based on the result of judgment or the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is lowered by executing the mode transition. It suppresses the occurrence of situations.

First, in the "normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode" are set as transition destinations of the first mode transition, as shown in FIG. 195, and when the mode transition lottery is won. Then, the mode is changed to the mode set as the transfer destination. That is, the "normal mode A" that is set as the first mode when the point effect is executed is set to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

In the case where the above-described first mode shift is executed and the display mode before the mode shift is a display mode that notifies that the privilege 2 is given, the display mode after the mode shift is also notified that the privilege 2 is given. When the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode transition is the high standard display mode (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the high standard display mode (high standard display mode). To be done. Thereby, even if the mode shift is executed in the middle of the point effect, the player can be informed easily of the status (display mode) of the indicator.

In addition, the "normal mode A" is the "dice mode" in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition. It is configured to be transferable to. In this case, in the "die roll mode" after the mode transition, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same appearance pattern (that is, doublet pattern) (for example, "3.3"). In this way, by performing both the first mode transition performed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition performed based on the display mode, the mode transition is performed in various situations in the point effect. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the "normal mode A", when the transition condition of the first mode transition and the transition condition of the second mode transition are satisfied at the same time, the second mode transition is preferentially executed. This is because the second mode transition is likely to be set to the mode transition based on the winning/decision result of the special symbol, as opposed to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the "normal mode A", if the special symbol lottery result (winning/absence determination result) is a big hit, the transition condition of the second mode transition is likely to be established. Is configured. That is, since the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied is a state in which the jackpot can be expected, by executing the second mode transition condition with priority over the first mode transition condition, the jackpot for the player is increased. It is possible to perform mode transitions that have expectations.

In this way, in the point effect that can transfer a plurality of modes, the satisfaction conditions of the plurality of mode transfer conditions are set so that the expectation of winning a jackpot is different, and further, when a plurality of mode transfer conditions are satisfied at the same time, By executing the mode transition based on the satisfaction of the mode transition condition with the higher expected degree of winning, it becomes possible for the player to execute the mode transition during the point effect as an effect in which the player expects a big hit, and enhance the effect of the effect. The effect is that you can.

Next, when the mode set during the point effect is the “die roll mode”, the “normal mode A” or the “bingo mode” is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set so as not to shift from the “die roll mode” to the “normal mode B”. This is a preset prohibition process, and the first mode is for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to have a relationship between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transfer and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transfer. Even when the transition condition for the transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode transition is set not to be performed. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when shifting from "Die Roll Mode" to "Normal Mode A", "Normal Mode A" displayed when shifting from "Normal Mode A" to "Dice Roll Mode" in this point effect The display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 are set so as not to be lower than the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 of (the numerical values of the respective indicators are not lowered). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode shift is stored, and the display mode of the mode shift destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode is changed a plurality of times during one point effect and the mode is changed to the initially set mode. Note that the number of times of mode transition executed during one point effect may be limited (for example, once) so that the mode does not transit to the mode already displayed during one point effect.

When "normal mode B" is set, only "normal mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition of the first mode transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won). When the "bingo mode" is set, only the "normal mode B" is set as the transfer destination when the transfer condition of the first mode transfer is satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in the present control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand by the plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and further has an expectation.

In the present control example, the second mode shift (mode shift based on the result of judgment of the special symbol and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to the “normal mode A”, but it is set in any other mode. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, and an upper limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed in one point effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of mode transition during the point effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the indicator display mode in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is created, a plurality of layers are overlaid and created (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a character image of a third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. 198(b) shows a plurality of layers. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub effect), and FIG. 198(c) combines a plurality of layers (a layer displaying a character image and a layer displaying a point image). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the image.

As shown in FIG. 198(a), the layer displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area in which the character is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) are discriminated from the small area (Dm11) where the character is not displayed, and the image processing is executed so that the small area (Dm11) where the character is not displayed is transparent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the layer displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small regions (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, like the layer displaying the character image. It is divided, and a point display process for displaying points is executed for all the small areas. In this point display process, by receiving a command indicating the number of points output from the voice lamp control device 113, the point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198(c), only the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed in the character image is combined on the back surface of the layer displaying the character image. The layer displaying the point image becomes visible, and the point can be displayed at a position where it does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the above-described image creating process, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, since the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, the allowable area in which the point can be displayed is one, the processing for directly transmitting the small area is performed. However, if there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is preferable to execute the process of selecting one small area from the small areas. For example, the type of the character image (main image) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character that imitates a hero as a character associated with an indicator of point effect). It is advisable to select one from the allowable areas adjacent to the small area in which Dc1) is displayed (small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, and Dm32 in the case of FIG. 198(a)). Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

Further, although the player is allowed to visually recognize the point display by transmitting one of the allowable areas, which are the small areas in which the character image is not displayed, of the layer displaying the character image, other control methods may be used. .. For example, in the image created this time, a small area in which the character is displayed but the character is not displayed later may be determined, and the transparent processing may be performed at the timing when the character is not displayed in the small area. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time lag from the reception of the command for the point display to the actual display of the point, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the point display. Furthermore, since the point display is performed based on the movement of the character that moves in the third symbol variation effect, the display in which the third symbol variation effect which is the main effect and the point effect which is the sub effect are associated with each other ( Production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

When such a control method is used, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters are confronted is executed, and an ally character (for example, the character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. If you do, the points will be displayed, and if the enemy character (for example, the character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, the points will not be displayed, or the points will be lower than the points displayed when the ally makes an attack (numerical value). It is better to display points. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In the above control example, the number of points having the same value is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Alternatively, the point display method described in the second control example may be used.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205.

FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in each control example described above with respect to the internal level selection table 222aa, the internal score selection table 222ab, the number of times selection table 222ac, the use score selection table 222ad, and the final score. The display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display mode selection table 222ae are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the judgment result of this time special figure variation and the judgment result of the winning information currently stored on hold, and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is a table for selecting an internal level. In addition, the hit/no hit determination result in the special figure change of this time is judged based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the hit/no hit determination result of the winning information currently held and stored is output from the main controller 110. It is determined based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the hit determination result of this time is “win”, the hit determination result of the hold is “win”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “3” is set. Is selected and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, the result of the present success/failure determination is "win", and the result of the success/failure determination in the hold is "miss", If the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. Moreover, if the hit/miss judgment result of this time is “miss”, the hit/miss judgment result of the hold is “win”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “2” is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the result of the hit/miss judgment of this time is "miss," and the result of the hit/miss judgment in the hold is "miss," and the effect counter 223f displays If the value is "0 to 149", the internal level "1" is selected, and if the value is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is selected such that a high numerical value is selected according to the advantageous state in which the game state is advantageous to the game (for example, the state where the jackpot is won). Is configured. In this way, by providing an index (internal level) according to the game state and executing an effect based on the index, it is possible to easily set the degree of expectation that the game state is advantageous for each effect to be executed. be able to.

Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referred to when selecting an internal score used when executing point production, based on the internal level and the value of the production counter 223f. Is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is Is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and if "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score. .. Also, when the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and when it is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". Is selected.

As described above, in the present control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set corresponding to the game state, so that the player can feel the expectation. It is possible to execute a point effect that gives

Next, the number-of-times selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201(a), the number-of-times selection table 222ac is set with a winning number-of-times selection table 222ac1 and a removal number-of-times selection table 222ac2. This number of times selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times of changing the special symbol that the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are configured to be referred to depending on the win/no win determination result or the win/no win determination result for the winning information held and stored.

FIG. 201(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning number selection table 222ac1. The hit number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects executed when the hit determination result is a hit, and the point effect is ended by a change in the special symbol which hits the hit determination result. The number of points is selected. Specifically, if the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol change this time is a hit, "1" as the number of point effects is the special symbol change after one rotation (that is, executed after the end of this special symbol change). If the hit determination result of (reserved storage) is a hit, “2 times” is selected as the number of point effects, and if the hit determination result of the special symbol variation after 2 turns is a hit, “3 times” is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of times of the point effect based on the timing when the special symbol variation to be won is executed, it is possible to suppress the hit game being started in the middle of the point effect, and the point effect The effect of can be enhanced.

FIG. 201(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the disconnection frequency selection table 222ac2. This miss count selection table 222ac2 is executed when the win/no win determination result is missed (that is, when the win/no win determination result of the special symbol variation this time is also no win/win determination result corresponding to the winning information that is stored on hold). It is a table for selecting the number of times of the point effect, and the number of times of the point effect is selected based on the number of winning information that is held and stored (hereinafter, referred to as the number of reserved balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point effects. This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute the point effect. With such a configuration, it is determined that the win/no determination result is wrong, and further, in the state where the number of reserved balls is "0", execution of a point effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variations is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect that is executed. In addition, in the present control example, it is configured that the win/no determination result is wrong and the point effect is not executed in the state where the number of reserved balls is “0”, but other configurations may be used, for example, The point effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (10%).

When the number of reserved balls is "1", the number of point effects is "2", and when the number of reserved balls is "2", the number of point effects is "3" and the number of reserved balls is "3". In the case of “”, “4” is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of holding balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the win/loss determination result is out and the point effect when the win/loss determination result is a hit. It is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the number of point effects.

In this control example, when the hit determination result is the number of times of the point effect, the hit determination result is selected based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that is hit is selected, and when the hit determination result is out, Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect when the result of the hit determination is out, the number of holding balls may be set as the maximum number of point effects, and the number may be selected by lottery within the range. With this configuration, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the use score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the usage score selection table 222ad. This use score selection table 222ad is for selecting a score used in each point production, and as shown in FIG. 202(a), the use score selection table 222ad shows the number of point productions (remaining number). And the used score is selected based on the internal score and the remaining score.

Specifically, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the usage score is "5". Is selected as "2", the remaining score is "6", the usage score is "3", and the remaining score is "7", the usage score is "-". When the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is “3” and the remaining score is “3”, the usage score is “1”, and when the remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “2”. , The remaining score is “5”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “6”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “7” , "-" is selected as the usage score.

Furthermore, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the use score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the use score is "2". , The remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “5”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “6”, the usage score is When the score is "5" and the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the use score. When the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the use score is "1", and when the remaining score is "2", the use score is "2". , The remaining score is “3”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “5” , "5" is selected as the usage score, "6" is selected as the usage score when the remaining score is "6", and "7" is selected as the usage score when the remaining score is "7".

In this way, by selecting the use score used in the point effect executed during the special symbol change this time based on the remaining number of point effects and the remaining points, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of changes of the special symbol) ) Is prevented from being understood by the player in advance.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202(b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display. The mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and the final display mode of each mode when the point effect is executed. It is configured in advance so that the final display mode corresponding to the mode set in the final stage of the point effect (change of the last special symbol in which the point effect is executed) is displayed.

FIG. 203A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. The final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode A", and the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Based on this, the final display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.7” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4”. .4” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.7.7” is selected. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, the value is higher than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2) as the final display mode. The final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which the score is given has the maximum value is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.6.5” is selected, and “ In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.4" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are set to "5.4.7". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect When the value of the counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “6.3.1” is selected, and when the value is “50 to 99”, the indicators P1 to P3 are indicated. The display mode indicating “5.5.3” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.2” is selected, and “150 to 198”. In the case of, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4” is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected and "50" is selected. In the case of "~99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.5.1" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are set to "5.4.3". Is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is changed. It is possible to increase the expectation of winning by changing to a display mode in which the specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

In the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage is the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and this time. Since the indicator is selected according to the score, the value of the final display mode is high (the closer to the maximum value the display mode is), the value is likely to rise in the middle stage. Therefore, since the final display mode can be predicted by grasping how the indicator rises in the middle of the point effect, the point effect can be continuously watched.

FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “die roll mode”, and is based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Thus, the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, and " In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4". The mode is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. That is, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, it is a display form of an indicator to which a high value score is given as the final display form. “6.6” is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “5.3” is selected, and “50 to” is selected. In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" are selected. In the case of being selected and "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0". In the case of "49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" are selected. In the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1". The display mode indicating "" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99". In the case of ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" are selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of the respective indicators in the “die roll mode” is reduced according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference whether or not it is visible.

FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. The final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected and "150 to 198" is selected. In the case of ", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected. That is, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, it is a display form of an indicator to which a high value score is given as the final display form. "100%" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and "50 to 149" is selected. In this case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected and the internal score is "5". When the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the indicator P6 is "60". The display mode indicating "%" is selected, the display mode indicating the indicator P6 is "70%" in the case of "100 to 149", and the indicator P6 is "80" in the case of "150 to 198". The display mode indicating "%" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "40%" is selected, and the display mode is "50 to 99". , A display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “60%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198” , A display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “80%” is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the final display mode of the indicator in the “normal mode B” is determined according to the internal score. It will be possible to make a difference in how far it will rise.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. The character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is executed in the "normal mode A", and is made to appear in order to suggest an indicator of which the display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (mini character for sub-effect (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", "Kame" is selected as the character. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, and thus the character “hero” Is set so that it is easy to select.

Next, if the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "hero" is selected as the character, and if "100 to 149", the character is selected as the character. When "Rabbit" is selected and "150 to 198" is selected, "Kame" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". For, "hero" is selected as the character, "rabbit" is selected as the character in the case of "50 to 99", and "kame" is selected as the character in the case of "100 to 198".

Furthermore, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 198", "Rabbit" is selected as the character. "Kame" is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character that suggests an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the current time is changed depending on the displayed character. It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect of is a point effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

When changing the display mode of the indicator in the middle of the point effect for which "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. As a result, the display of the character and the change in the display mode of the indicator can be associated with each other, and the staging effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during point performance. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to (S6406 of FIG. 212: S6406) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is ON in the mode transfer process (see FIG. 212).

In the mode selection table 222ag, the destination mode is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode to which the prohibition is applied is set not to be selected as the mode transition destination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the mode transition between the modes in which it is difficult to find the relationship in the display mode of the indicator displayed corresponding to each mode.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode shift destination displayed at the time of mode shift. This display form selection table 222ah is referred to when determining the display form in the display form selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 in FIG. 213).

In the display form selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display form to the “highly expected form” is selected based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter set in the present point effect. This "highly expected form" is a display form for notifying the player that the point effect of this time is a point effect with a high expectation of jackpot.

Specifically, it is a display form in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". .. It should be noted that this "highly expected form" may be set to the contents common to the indicators (P1 to P7). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the "highly-expected form" is displayed regardless of which point effect the mode is changed to.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display mode only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, it is possible to expect the player to expect the mode transition during the point performance. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199(b), the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that the internal level storage area 223aa, the continuous production start flag 223ab, the production number counter 223ac, the score information storage area 223ad, and the remaining score. The information storage area 223ae, the display information storage area 223af, the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, the mode information storage area 223ah, the mode transition flag 223ai, the character information storage area 223aj are different, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates the value independently, but the description thereof is omitted, and the effect counter 223f is used as a generic term. do. Therefore, even when the process of referring to the value of the effect counter 223f is executed at a plurality of locations in one control process routine, different counter values are actually obtained in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In this internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the win/fail judgment result and the internal level selection table 222aa in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when the point effect ends in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210). If determined (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information about the internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point effect is being executed, and when it is off, the point effect is Indicates that it is not running. The continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the next point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), it is referred to when determining whether to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed when starting the continuous effect. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The effect number counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) executed this time. This effect number counter 223ac is set to a value corresponding to the determined number of effects in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect number counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when it is determined whether or not the point effect is a continuous effect (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process ( In FIG. 210), it is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the use score to be used in this change is determined. It is referred to when doing (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the internal score selection table 222ab described above and the usage score selected in the usage score selection table 222ad described above. In the score information storage area 223ad, the internal score determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211), and determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). The usage score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when determining the final display mode in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the character is displayed. It is referred to when determining (S6356 of FIG. 211), and referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) (S6404 of FIG. 212). The use score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214), When the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503 of FIG. 214: No), it is referred to when determining the display mode (S6507 of FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 of FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the already used use score from the internal score set in the continuous performance (point performance) being executed this time. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the use score in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect that is a continuous effect and the display mode displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 of FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is also configured to be able to set a display mode for a mode other than the currently set mode, and the indicator can be smoothly displayed even when the mode transition is executed during the point effect. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to be output to the display control device 114 by one display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is temporarily determined by the display mode changing process (see FIG. 213) and temporarily stores information regarding the determined display mode (indicator color, pattern, etc.) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information regarding the display mode (display mode displayed after the mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and the information regarding the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is temporarily stored (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214), and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and thereafter, the stored information regarding various effects is initialized ( S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. This mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the information corresponding to the mode after the transition when the mode transition is performed in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) (S6409 in FIG. 212), and the display background command is set. This is referred to (S6410 in FIG. 212) and is referred to in determining the display mode in the point effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 214) (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is completed (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is preset to be started from the “normal mode A”, when the point effect is executed, the information corresponding to the “normal mode A” is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. Is stored.

The mode shift flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether or not a mode shift condition (condition for satisfying the first mode shift) is satisfied during the point effect which is a continuous effect, and when it is on, the mode shift condition is satisfied. If it is off, it means that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), and the mode transition is performed. In the process (see FIG. 212), the process is referred to in order to determine whether the mode shift condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the process relating to the mode shift (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Is set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in this special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed (S6509 of FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed (winning the mode transition lottery) (S6509 of FIG. 214: Yes), the mode is set. The transition flag 223ai is set to ON. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. If it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), the process related to mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

In other words, in the point effect in this control example, since the mode is configured to be changed when the next special symbol variation is executed, for example, a lottery for whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed by the special symbol variation this time. By making a lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by, the player is made to recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol fluctuation, and the mode shifts at the next special symbol fluctuation Can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information regarding the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in this character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to indicate which of the indicators P1 to P3 the display mode of the indicators changes when the "normal mode A" is set. Is. In this character information storage area 223aj, information regarding the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when the display point effect command is set in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 of FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6314 of FIG. 210). In this control example, the character is displayed to indicate whether the display mode of the indicator changes only in the "normal mode A". However, whether the display mode of the indicator changes for each mode You may make it perform the effect which suggests, and you may use character information in order to suggest whether it is mode-shifted. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the “normal mode A” is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to the “normal mode A”.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, differences between the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example and the control examples described above will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example creates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to points is described on the back side of the character in the image for one frame. The difference is that they are set as follows. By generating the drawing list in this way, the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198 can be created.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variable display setting process 3, similar to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed.

After the process of S2006 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051), and when it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (S2051: No), it is set. It is determined whether or not the changed pattern command is for executing the point effect (S2052). Here, when it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is finished, the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, if it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if the point effect is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed and S2053 is performed. Process shifts to. This prevents a situation where a new point effect is executed while the point effect is being executed.

Further, in the processing of S2052, when it is determined that the variation pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the processing of S2053 is finished, the variation in the second control example described above. Similar to the display setting process 2, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting the display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. Processing.

In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined to be off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: YES), it means that the point effect which is the continuous effect has already been executed, and therefore, the point effect. The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

Here, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command set in the variable display setting process 3 (S1712 of FIG. 209) is to execute the point effect, and various kinds of cases in which the point effect is executed This is a process for executing the initial setting.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined by referring to the internal level selection table 222aa and set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). As a result, it is determined whether or not the point effect executed this time is a point effect that leads to hitting a special symbol.

Next, in S6351, the internal score used in the point effect executed this time is determined by referring to the internal score selection table 222ab based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa and the value of the effect counter 223f. , In the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and setting the character as described above. In addition, it is also used for setting the use score used each time the variation of the special symbol is started while the point effect is continuing, and for setting the remaining score.

When the process of S6352 is completed, the number of times of the point effect of this time is determined based on the number-of-times selection table 222ac (S6353), and the value corresponding to the determined number of effects is set in the effect number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number-of-times selection table 222ac is referred to by different tables depending on whether the hit/miss determination result is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the reserved storage executed after three rotations is a win, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to, and “4” is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set in the number-of-effects counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the number of times of effect “4”. The value of the effect number counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 of FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the value of the counter becomes “0”.

Next, based on the internal score and the final display mode selection table 222ae set by the process of S6352, the display mode of each indicator finally displayed in the present point effect is determined, and is stored in the display information storage area 223af. The setting is made (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to four modes (“normal mode A”, “die roll mode”, “normal mode B”, “bingo mode”) that are shifted during the point effect. Therefore, in this processing, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of which mode the point effect is finished.

When the process of S6355 is completed, the character used when the mode of the point effect is set to the “normal mode A” is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information is set. The storage area 223aj is set (S6356), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most aspects including the final display aspect of the point effect executed this time are set. By thus setting the aspect of the point effect in advance, it is possible to advance the aspect of the point effect in the middle stage according to the final display aspect, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Can be executed.

In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode, but for example, only the indicator related to the display mode for informing the player that the privilege is given is set to the final display mode. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set at random. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more versatile, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early. In this case, the prohibition process may be executed so that the notification that the privilege that is not randomly given is not given is given. As a result, it is possible to execute a point effect that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the present control example, when the point effect is executed, the internal level is set based on the hit/miss judgment result, but the internal level based on the hit/miss judgment result is always set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. You can With this configuration, it is possible to use the internal level when setting the production mode of the production other than the point production, and it is possible to easily set the production corresponding to the game state of the special symbol. is there.

Furthermore, in this control example, the winning/deciding result is determined by referring to not only the special symbol to be executed this time but also the winning information held and stored, but it is determined based on only the lottery result of the special symbol to be executed this time. The determination result may be determined and the internal level may be set.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is finished, a mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode shift process (S6304), a process of determining whether to shift to the mode during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode shifts are executed.

Here, the mode shift processing (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode shift processing (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, when it is determined that the mode is to be changed as a result of the predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 of FIG. 214) described later) (the mode change flag 223ai is turned on). There are two mode transition conditions: a case where the mode is changed to (when set to 1), a case where the mode is changed based on the set mode, the current display mode, and the internal score.

As described above, by performing the mode transition randomly performed by the lottery and the mode transition performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is fulfilled, the mode performed during the point performance It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

Note that, although details will be described later, in this control example, when there is a high possibility that the hit/miss judgment result is a hit (the internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in the “normal mode A” is zero. When the eye (“2.2.2” or “4.4.4”) is reached, the mode is changed to the “die roll mode”. This is a situation in which it is difficult to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player in the “normal mode A” (for example, notification that an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, notification that a jackpot is won) is given. Even if the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 has not reached the maximum value, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is likely to be given when the display mode becomes the predetermined display mode (double eye display mode). This is to make it into a state. As a result, even if the display mode of the indicator in the point effect is not good (for example, in the case of “normal mode A”, the points are not increased), the privilege that is advantageous to the player due to the mode transition is provided. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation to be given, it is possible to entertain the effect to the player to the end.

Further, in the present control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in the "normal mode A" is a doublet, the privilege that the display mode of the doublet is advantageous to the player is given in the "dice mode". Since it is possible to shift to “”, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect without making the player feel uncomfortable with the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode shift.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the mode transition processing (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is the “normal mode A”. Yes (S6402). When it is determined that the currently set mode is the “normal mode A” (S6402: Yes), the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is “2.2. It is determined whether it is "2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

In the processing of S6403, when it is determined that the current display mode is “2.2.2” or “4.4.4” (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is “6” or more. If it is determined (S6404) and it is determined to be “6” or more (S6404: Yes), the “die roll mode” is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, in the processing of S6404, when it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than "6" ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this processing ends. To do.

In addition, in the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the currently set mode is not the “normal mode A” (S6402: No), or in the processing of S6403, the current display mode is “2.2.2. If it is determined not to be “” or “4.4.4” (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

The mode shift flag 223ai is a flag set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when the mode shift flag 223ai is set to ON, the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210). ) Is referred to in the mode shift processing (S6304 of FIG. 212), and the mode shift is executed.

In the process of S6406, when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, in the process of S6406, when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process is directly terminated.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the processing of S6407 will be described. In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transfer destination is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a prohibition for limiting the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, in the state where the “die roll mode” is set, the mode transition to the “normal mode B” is not performed. When the "bingo mode" is set as described above, the mode is not set to the "die roll mode".

This prohibition process is intended to prevent the display mode of the indicator from being changed by the mode transition during the point effect, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. By configuring in this way, the merit of shifting the mode in point production (the point that the player can have expectations until the end of the production by changing the display mode of the indicator according to the mode transition) is utilized. However, it is possible to suppress disadvantages (points that are difficult for the player to understand due to the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition).

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the processing of S6405 or the processing of S6407 is completed, the display mode changing processing (S6408) is executed. This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode shift.

Next, the display mode changing process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode changing process (S6408). This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode shift based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift is predetermined. Display mode (display mode informing that the privilege is awarded to the player or display mode that is similar to the display mode informing that the privilege is awarded to the player), and the determination result The display mode after the mode change is set based on the.

When the display mode changing process (S6408) is executed, first, the display mode is determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). The display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set in the present point effect. Thereby, when the mode is changed in the point effect, the player can be watched not only in the display mode of the indicator after the mode change but also in the display mode (color, pattern), and the effect can be further enhanced. ..

In the beginning of the point effect, that is, even when the mode transition is executed in a state in which the display mode of the indicator is largely apart from the final display mode, the indicator display is based on the internal score set in the point effect. Since the display form is set, it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation of a big hit.

When the processing of S6451 is completed, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach correspondence (S6453). The SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that a performance (SP reach) with a high jackpot expectation degree will be executed, and specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", one of the indicators P1 and P2 is displayed. In the display mode in which the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), in the case of "the dice mode", in the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 are "double eyes (excluding 6.6)" and in the "normal mode B" In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", in the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is in the display mode "2 lines established".

In the processing of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the SP reach compatible display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454). This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode shift is the display mode corresponding to the SP reach, the display mode after the mode shift is also set to the display mode corresponding to the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege (notice of execution of SP reach) displayed before the mode shift disappears after the mode shift (a display mode that does not correspond to the SP reach is displayed). It is possible to execute a suitable effect that does not cause dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is not SP reach compatible (S6453: No), it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. Yes (S6455). As described above, the high standard is set as a display mode that is similar to the display mode in which the indicator display mode is not a display mode in which the player is provided with a privilege.

Specifically, in the "normal mode A", the display mode of any of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", and in the "dice mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5". In the display mode, the indicator P6 is "40%" in the "normal mode B".

With this configuration, even if the mode shift occurs during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is greatly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed in the point effect so far. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the accident.

For example, in the “normal mode A”, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates “6” is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard and the mode is switched to the “bingo mode”, Indicates that the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition is a display mode indicating "one line established". Therefore, it is possible to execute the point effect after the mode change while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode change is given to the player.

Returning to FIG. 213, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is set. Is set (S6456), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: No), the display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and the present process ends.

As described above, when the mode shift is executed in the point effect in this control example, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode shift. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator is displayed after the mode is changed in a mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, the display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In the present control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is to be given, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two levels, but it is divided into three or more levels. Alternatively, the display mode may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift and the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is applied. Although the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the display mode changing process (S6408 in FIG. 213) ends, then the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is set. The background command for display corresponding to is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is finished, next point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed. The point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator changed in the variable display executed this time.

Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, using the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac, the use score selection table 222ad is referred to this time. The use score to be used in the change of is determined (S6501).

Then, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated based on the determined usage score (S6502). Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new residual score information.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and when it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, when it is the end of the point effect, the display information storage area 223af is set. The final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in No. 1 and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, the display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the use score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. Based on the final display mode and the current display mode, the current display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), then it is determined whether or not the mode transition is executed (S6509), and if it is determined that the mode transition is present (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processing of S6505 and S6506 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no mode shift (S6509: No), the process of S6505 and S6506 described above is executed without setting the mode shift flag 223ai, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is finished, the value of the effect number counter 223ac is then decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. Yes (S6307). If it is determined that it is not equal to or less than "0" (is equal to or greater than 1) (S6307: No), this is the end of the process as it is because the point effect continues.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), it means that the point effect is finished this time, so the score information storage area 223ad is set. Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control 114 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the point effect-related command process is added in the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 215), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

Then, in the processing of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the display point effect related command is received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect related command has not been received (S2637: No), the various processes described in the control examples described above are executed as other command processes (S2614), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2637, when it is determined that the display point effect-related command is received (S2637: Yes), the point effect-related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, the point effect-related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216(a) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing (S2638). The point effect-related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to the point effect are output from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the point effect-related command processing (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and when it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command A process (S6602) is performed and it transfers to S6603. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603). If it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), the indicator command processing (S6604) is executed to display the indicator indicator. If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this processing ends.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216(b). FIG. 216(b) is a flowchart showing the point command processing (S6602). This point command processing (S6602) is for executing processing corresponding to the point command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a point that suggests a change in the display mode of each indicator during point performance (see FIG. 198). ) Is a process for displaying the third symbol display device 81.

In the point command processing (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. It is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, the indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point effect related command processing (see FIG. 216(a)) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). The indicator command process (S6604) is a process for executing a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the display mode information (for example, display mode or set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined, The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Is initialized to (S6754). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6755), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, a modification of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the point display in the third control example. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub-effect) among the plurality of layers in the present modification, and FIG. 218(b) is a plurality of layers in the present modification. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the image which combined the layer, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram which shows an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) for displaying a character image have points at different display positions (display positions in each small area). Data that can be displayed is stored, and a small area corresponding to the main effect to be executed this time is set, and point display processing for displaying the points of the set small area is executed. Then, an image in which the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image are combined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218(b)).

As shown in FIG. 218(b), in the image where the two characters (Dc1, Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started face each other, the points (displayed in the small area Dm31) executed in the point display processing are displayed. Displayed points are overlapped with the character Dc1 and display processing is performed so that the player cannot visually recognize the display of points.

Then, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218(c), when the character Dc1 moves, the point displayed in the small area Dc1 becomes visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of motion patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured such that whether or not the points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the progress content. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In this control example, the small area in which the points are displayed is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. However, for example, as described above, a plurality of motion patterns (each of the plurality of characters moves as the main effect). When the pattern) is settable, the points may be displayed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218(b), display processing is executed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping the character Dc2, and the main effect is displayed. You may make it display the point corresponding to the operation pattern set as. In this case, the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc1 which is the ally character moves and the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc2 which is the enemy character move are different. You can set the display settings to.

With such a configuration, it is possible to associate the motion pattern in the main effect with the value of the point to be displayed, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

As described above, in the present control example, when the display contents of the point effect are determined by the voice lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. Is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, when the points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or when the display mode of the indicator is changed and displayed, each command is respectively It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output every time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary to cause the display control device 114 to perform processing such as rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them are set as a common display command. The audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when the mode shift is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode shift. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator is displayed after the mode is changed in a mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, the display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In the present control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is to be given, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two levels, but it is divided into three or more levels. Alternatively, the display mode may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift and the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is applied. Although the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

The configuration used for the point effect of the present control example and the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above may of course be used in combination, and for example, the point effect of the second control example described above may be used. Similar to the third control example, four modes may be set and the mode transition processing configuration of the present control example may be added, or the second control described above regarding the method of determining the points to be displayed in the present control example. You may make it correspond to the display content of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) as in the example. Further, in the present control example, the configuration for determining the position for displaying the points may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more various effects.

Further, in the "normal mode A", the "bonus 1" given when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and the "bonus 2" given when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX are the jackpot expectations. Among the effect contents of the third symbol variation effect set in a stepwise manner, it is a privilege to notify that the stage is going to increase with respect to the effect content currently being executed. For example, "privilege 1" is the expectation degree of the jackpot. The privilege for notifying that a plurality of steps (two steps) will be raised, and the “privilege 2” may be, for example, a privilege for notifying that the expectation level of the jackpot will be increased by one step.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the effect contents executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing when the indicator becomes MAX, and the player can watch the effect. It becomes possible. In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the indicator is MAX and the timing at which the privilege is given are different. As a result, the indicator becomes MAX, and in the state where it is determined that the privilege is awarded, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while predicting which effect content is being executed and the privilege is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the above-described first control example, in order to suggest and inform the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is the sub effect, is described. In this reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a moving display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. It is an effect display including parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the above-described first control example will be described. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed and a plurality of patterns of reach navigation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are explained. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the change time of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined change pattern (super reach or special reach) of the change time of the special symbol. It is a sub-effect, which allows the player to visually recognize and informs or suggests in stages. In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (effect description of the main effect, variation time, and expectation of being a big hit) by using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide easy-to-understand games.

In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117(b)), and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the variation start, and 20 seconds later (that is, 50 seconds after the variation start). In the figure, the flow of the reach navigation effect when a variation pattern in which the main effect is further developed is selected is shown.

As shown in FIG. 219, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol changes at high speed) is displayed in the main effect for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, and then the reach effect (the two left and right third symbols are changed). The same number is stopped, and the effect of changing only the third symbol inside) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, a super reach effect for 30 seconds in the main effect (for example, the variation of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the character is opposed in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the super reach effect is started, the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high (for example, a ally character avoids an attack of an opponent character, a weapon different from a normal one). The timing of generating an effect of attacking the opponent's character by using) or an effect indicating that the winning result is out (for example, an effect of going down due to the attack of the opponent's character) is set. At a timing, the player is made to pay attention to what kind of effect is executed.

The reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect (point A) in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm in accordance with the timing at which the super reach effect is displayed. The detailed content of this reach navigation effect is the same as that of the above-mentioned first control example, and therefore its explanation is omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern of 20 seconds for the first reach navigation effect and 10 seconds for the second reach navigation effect is set, and the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (super reach effect is The timing 20 seconds after the display) is associated with the timing at which the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect.

In this reach navigation effect, similarly to the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided on the way, and when the character reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, this time, As an effect that suggests that the result of the main effect is a big hit, the characters "chance" are displayed, or the indicator attached to the rotating notification display unit Dm4c can be switched (point B and point). C).

Then, when the production branch timing of the super reach production, which is the main production, that is, the timing (point D) 20 seconds after the display of the super reach production is reached, the production display in which the super reach production continues to develop in the main production. At the same time, the reach navigation effect is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set to a half period (10 seconds) with respect to the period of the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. It starts from the half point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, among the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the guide display portion Dm4e through which the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass in the second reach navigation effect is passed again (point E), and various types are displayed. The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect is ended in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach effect (stop display timing of the third symbol) (point F).

In this way, among the third symbol variation effects that notify the lottery result of the special symbol using the variable display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is obtained. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is the sub effect, at the timing of the main effect, it is possible for the player to visually understand the progress of the aspect of the main effect, and to notify or suggest it in stages. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect, and FIG. 220(b) is the point D shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. 220C is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed by FIG. 220C is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. The parts described in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 220(a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display section Dm4d, a “chance” with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed, and guidance is given. When passing through the display portion Dm4e, “chance” is not displayed, but “x” is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation that the jackpot is won on the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined to produce this time. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220(b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect production will be described. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) is started from the half position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b will pass the guide display portion Dm4e again during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, by setting the guide display unit that has passed through the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b will pass again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guide display unit without a sense of discomfort. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 220(c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portion Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display portion Dm4e is changed and the "chance" is displayed. In this way, when the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect, the effect is set so that the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section that was passed in the first reach navigation effect again, so that the first reach navigation effect is achieved. Because the player will pay attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect will be set again so as to pass through the guide display section that was not highly anticipated (“chance”). , The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, since it is possible to efficiently use the same data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as display data used for effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for effect.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect may be provided in which the notification content is not changed even when the character Dm4b passes again. .. In this case, it is preferable that the character Dm4b be set to perform an action (jump, for example) of avoiding the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early and to prevent the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where the guidance display section that has been notified with a high jackpot expectation (“chance”) in the effect is started, the effect that reduces the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223.

FIG. 221( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc are added. The difference is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the result of judgment of the pachinko machine 10, and is different from the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above. The difference is that the process for determining whether or not the winning is based on the winning information held and stored is not executed.

Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is “win” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “2” is selected as the internal level, and when the value is “150 to 198”. , "3" is selected as the internal level. When the win/no decision result is “out” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “1” is selected as the internal level, and when it is “150 to 198”, the internal level is selected. “2” is selected as the level.

As a result, about 25% of the internal level when the hit/fail judgment result is “win” is set to “3”, about 75% when the hit/miss judgment result is “win”, and when the hit/miss judgment result is “out” It is possible to set about 25% of the cases to “2” and about 75% when the result of the judgment is “miss” to “1”. By setting the internal level in this way and executing the effect corresponding to the internal level, it is possible to easily set a plurality of jackpot expectations for the effect as compared to the case where the effect is executed only in response to the result of the judgment. It will be possible.

In this control example, the internal level is set to three stages, but the number of internal level stages is not limited to this and may be set to four or more stages. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level in which only about 1% of the case where the hit/miss determination result is “win” is set and the effect corresponding to the internal level is executed, it is rarely displayed. Staging can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. This effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of effect scenarios for reach navigation effects are stored, and is referred to when an effect scenario is selected in reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. This is the area where the scenario is stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the production scenario storage area 222bb is a scenario pattern of the production scenario, and is an expectation display that is informed (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm4e (second point). Both of the guidance display section Dm4d and the guidance display section Dm4e are set as the return position of the character Dm4b when the high-chance “chance” or the low-degree “x” is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. The return position "1" which is a passable position or the return position "2" which is a position which can pass only the guidance display portion Dm4e is set.

Specifically, in scenario 1, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation effect, the process returns to the return position "1", and the first point "during the second reach navigation effect. This is a scenario in which the "chance" and the second point "chance" are displayed. In scenario 2, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the production of the first reach navigation, and up to the return position "1". Returning to the scenario, the first point “chance” and the second point “x” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect, and scenario 3 is the first point “x” and the second point “during the first reach navigation effect. In this scenario, “X” is displayed, the return position is returned to “1”, and the first point “X” and the second point “X” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different are facilitated, and the scenario is set in correspondence with the above-mentioned internal level. Thus, it is possible to easily execute an effect according to the jackpot expectation.

The display modes shown in FIG. 223(a) are similarly set for scenarios 4 to 12. It should be noted that “super” displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation effect in scenario 11 indicates a display having a significantly higher jackpot expectation than the “chance” display (for example, “super hot”). ..

In addition, in this control example, scenario 1 to scenario 12 are used as the scenario patterns of the reach navigation effect, but more scenarios may be used. Further, the type of the character Dm4b and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, so that the display data used for the effect is made common, but the display data is made common by other methods. Alternatively, for example, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect may be displayed side by side when the second reach navigation effect is started. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in accordance with the moving direction of the character Dm4b, it is possible to reduce the display area in which the reach navigation effect is executed.

Further, although the time gauge Dm4a for one route is used in the moving direction of the character Dm4b in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of routes may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to set the scenario pattern such that the route through which the character Dm4b moves is different between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. As a result, the contents of the reach navigation effect can be made more diverse.

Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario selection table 222bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when an effect scenario is selected in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 of FIG. 224) described later.

As shown in FIG. 223(b), each scenario is selected in the production scenario selection table 222bc based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the value of the production counter 223f. Is set.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", the scenario "5" is selected and " In the case of "130-198", the scenario "4" is selected. When the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "2" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "3" is selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the internal level is “2”, the fluctuation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “7” is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "8" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "10" is selected. When the value of the internal level is “2”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “9” is selected and the effect counter 223f is set. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "1" is selected.

When the value of the internal level is "3", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 198", the scenario "12" is selected. When the value of the internal level is “3”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “1” is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "11" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 221, the explanation is continued. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the above-mentioned second internal level selection table 222ba on the basis of the winning/deciding result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. Area. The second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) with the internal level determined in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224 (S2153), initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed in place of the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. The reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is for executing the reach navigation effect, and is an aspect of the reach navigation effect. Is determined.

When the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , And is set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol by using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect executed in the central part of (see).

When the process of S2151 is finished, the internal level is then determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the production scenario selection table 222bc are set. Based on, the effect scenario is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

When the process of S2153 is completed, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed similarly to the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the above-described first control example, and the present process is completed.

Next, a modified example of the display mode of the reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. 225(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 1 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 2 of the fourth control example, and FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the 4th control example typically, FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example. FIG. 226(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. It should be noted that the present modified examples 1 to 3 are modified examples of the display mode used in the reach navigation effect, and the configuration described in the above-described first control example or fourth control example is used as the control content. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the modified example 1 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(a), in this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a in the second reach navigation effect. By doing so, the display data used for the presentation can be diverted.

Next, FIG. 225(b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continuously moves is executed. .. In this case, the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of places for notifying the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed, and it is possible to widely notify the player of the expectation for the jackpot.

In this modification, the guide display units Dm4f and Dm4e are displayed separately from the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. However, for example, the first reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the progress of the second reach navigation effect. Scrolling may be performed in the moving direction of the character Dm4b (rightward from the viewpoint in FIG. 225(b)) so that the area is erased. As a result, the effect of this modification can be executed without enlarging the area of the small area Dm4.

Further, in this case, only the display results of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed in the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed. And Dm4g may be displayed instead, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation effect.

Next, FIG. 226(a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the third modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the reach navigation effect of this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a branched into two routes is used, and the first route that finally reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 and the second route A second route reaching the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Of these, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. ..

When the reach navigation effect is executed in this modified example, either the first route or the second route is moved in the first navigation effect and reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. Then, it is returned to the return position which is set to a position before the branch point where the first route and the second route branch, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves on either one of the route on which the character Dm4b has moved in the first navigation effect and the route on which the character Dm4b has not moved in the first navigation effect. As a result, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result on the guidance display portion Dm4e that the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It becomes possible.

Also, when different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, it is possible to display the display result on the three guidance display units Dm4d, dm4e, Dm4f as the reach navigation effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226(b), as a result of the selection of the first route in the first navigation effect, a “chance” is displayed on the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e to notify that the jackpot expectation is high. When the second route is selected as the second navigation effect in the state, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portion Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route, and the jackpot expectation level is increased. A "chance" is displayed to inform you that it is high. When different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation effect is currently in the second navigation effect. "Development" indicating that it is in progress is displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the current situation.

In addition, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is “x” in the first navigation effect, the second navigation effect is generated. May change the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4e to "chance".

That is, in the case where the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the first navigation effect is "x", if the second navigation effect is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226(b), to the player, The presentation mode of the second navigation effect is the one in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4e in which "x" is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to "chance". In the case where a route different from the case of the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e remains “x”, the guidance display unit Dm4f displays the “chance” display result. Both can be expected.

In this case, it may be set so that it is more advantageous for the player to move the second navigation effect on a different route from the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that the "chance" is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed from "x" to "chance". It is advisable to set such that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the display result of the guide display unit Dm4f is displayed as “chance” than in the guide display unit Dm4e. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to select a route different from the first navigation effect as the route selected in the second navigation effect, so that the reach navigation effect can be continuously watched. It will be possible.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect according to the present modification, the time gauge Dm4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) paths, and the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) , The route expected by the player can be changed in the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, the position (return position) at which the second navigation effect is started is described as one position (position before the branching of the route), but as in the above-described fourth control example, the return position is returned. You may provide two or more. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guide display unit Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guide display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation effect (the passing guide display unit) changes depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guide display unit) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

Furthermore, in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two routes, but it may be branched into more than three routes (three or more), or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Further, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route along which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. As a result, the reach navigation effect can be made more versatile.

In addition, in the present modification, a plurality of routes is displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation effect is executed, but for example, the route along which the character Dm4b moves during the first navigation effect. (For example, only the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first route and second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. Good. With such a configuration, the player is not informed in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route the route passes in the second navigation effect, so that the player can predict the effect. , The interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the content of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the effect description of the main effect, the variation time, and the degree of expectation of a big hit) is the sub effect. By displaying using, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (the timing 20 seconds after the super reach effect is displayed) and the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect are associated with each other. Since it is configured, among the third symbol variation effect (main effect) that notifies the special symbol lottery result using the variable display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect with a high expectation of a big hit (super reach effect) The player can visually understand the progress status of the main production mode by executing the reach navigation production that is the sub production in accordance with the timing of the main production (production branch timing) that is (or special reach production). Therefore, it is possible to notify or suggest in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by notifying the degree of expectation that the jackpot is won on the plurality of guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined to produce this time. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by setting the guide display unit that has passed through the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b will pass again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guide display unit without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section that has passed in the first reach navigation effect again, the guidance that is not highly anticipated (“chance”) in the first reach navigation effect is not provided. Since the player looks at the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass through the display section again, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect may be provided in which the notification content is not changed even when the character Dm4b passes again. .. In this case, it is preferable that the character Dm4b be set to perform an action (jump, for example) of avoiding the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early and to prevent the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where the guidance display section that has been notified with a high jackpot expectation (“chance”) in the effect is started, the effect that reduces the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

Furthermore, since the same data can be efficiently used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the above-described second control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds) as the continuous slot effect, the slot to be subsequently executed depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. The production mode of the production is set.

On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added to the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. Differences in points.

The fifth control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed and the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 227 and FIG. 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in the slot effect can be set, and types of slot effects to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened) Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect, extended slot effect) and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols “A” are stopped and displayed, and a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols inside are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, the player presses the frame button 22, and when the left, middle and right pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line, the pseudo symbol “A” is acquired. As described in the second control example, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times in the continuous slot effect, a plurality of types (3 types) of the pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” are acquired. In this case, it is notified that the privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player has been won (the privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, another example set as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and since the pseudo symbols can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes, it is possible for the player to perform slot production. It is possible to prompt the user to press the frame button 22. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically participate in the operation effect (slot effect) of operating the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(b), in this control example, as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbol used for the slot effect is displayed is one can be set. There is. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed in the limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number of reels may be reduced to two, and the number of reels may be set to two. Further, in the present control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is enlarged, but it is also possible to adopt a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without being enlarged and displayed. In this case, in a vacant area (area where the left and right reels are normally displayed), a display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, at a timing when the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line) Display or display of the degree of expectation in which the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line by pressing the frame button 22) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(c), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol. doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed in a larger size than the other symbols so that the player can easily understand it. However, for example, the other symbols are reduced and displayed relatively, The pseudo symbol “A” may be in a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than the other symbols. As a result, the pseudo symbol “A” can be easily recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227(d) is a schematic view showing an example in which the symbol array of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227(d), in the present control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, if the symbol array of the reel (middle reel) for displaying the pseudo symbol in the dynamic display is different, The dynamic display mode is settable. Specifically, in the dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols “A”) to be stopped and displayed this time is increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this control example, the player can easily understand the pseudo symbol “A” by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol “A”) to be stopped and displayed this time. Other than this, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display this time, that is, the number of symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols “B” and “C”), The number of pseudo symbols “A” may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, it is possible to easily identify each symbol that is dynamically displayed (rotationally displayed).

FIG. 227(e) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotation speed) of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed is changed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(e), in the present control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed. The dynamic display mode in which the (rotation speed) is lowered is settable. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol which is the current stop display target, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and the period in which the reel makes a round can be shortened.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo-symbol is dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the reel is rotated and displayed for a predetermined number of times (for example, two laps), and thereafter (for example, the third lap) is described above. As described above, the dynamic display speed may be slowed down. As a result, the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two turns) can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target this time, and the frame button It is possible to prompt to operate 22.

As described above, in this control example, the pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, so that the player is motivated. Can operate the frame button 22.

In each of the dynamic display modes described above, only the pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is displayed with higher brightness than the other symbols, or the display mode in which the edge of the symbol is emphasized is changed. This may make it easier for the player to grasp.

In addition, the frame button 22 is operated even when the number of rotations of the reel has reached a predetermined number (dynamic display as if the reel has rotated a predetermined number) or a predetermined period has elapsed since the slot effect was started. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. Thereby, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can motivate the frame button 22 to be operated.

Next, a stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the judgment result of the special symbol, and when the judgment result of the special symbol is a hit. Is set so that three types of pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” can be acquired in a plurality of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect, and the result of the determination of the special symbol is In the case of disengagement, the number that can be acquired is set to any of 0 to 2 out of the three types of pseudo symbols in a plurality of times of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effects.

Therefore, if the special symbol hit determination result is out, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not stopped and displayed on the line. Controlled to stop. Specifically, a symbol different from the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is set before and after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated aiming, stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed before or after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it is possible to display the out-of-stop display mode without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the stop control described above, by changing the start position of the dynamically displayed reel without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reel, the player does not feel uncomfortable. The stop control for displaying the discontinued stop display mode is also configured to be executable. Next, the stop control described above will be described with reference to FIG. 228.

FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the symbol arrangement and the stop position of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), the place where the pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol “A”) that is the subject of the present stop display is not set as the symbol array (the pseudo symbol that is not the subject of the present stop display is set). The place) is a continuous pattern arrangement. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which the pseudo symbol “A” is set (see FIG. 228(b)).

By using the reels with such a symbol arrangement, the stop control for displaying the out-of-stop display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable simply by changing the start position of the reel or the dynamic display speed in each slot effect. It is feasible.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a). As shown in FIG. 228( b ), in this dynamic display mode, as the symbol array of the reels dynamically displayed, the pseudo symbol “A” which is the currently stopped display target is set in the array 4, and other than that. Is set to a pseudo symbol "-" different from the current stop display target.

And in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the rotation start position 1 which is the array 1 of the symbol array, and the rotation start position 2 which is the array 9 of the symbol array. Is set. Two types of speed, "high" and "ultra low", are set as the speed of the dynamically displayed reels. The reel speed "high" is specifically set at a speed at which it takes 0.7 seconds to move one dynamically displayed symbol, and the reel speed "ultra low" is specifically set. Is set at a speed at which the time required to move one dynamically displayed symbol is 1.2 seconds.

That is, when the slot effect in which the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (button operation valid period) is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is “high”. When the reel speed is "ultra-low", the effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, only by changing the position at which the dynamic display of the reel is started or the reel speed, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo symbol dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period without changing the symbol arrangement. Therefore, various dynamic display modes can be set without increasing the types of symbol data, and the data amount of effect data can be reduced.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228(b). When the rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed "high" or the reel speed "ultra low" is set. Also, the dynamic display mode capable of displaying the pseudo symbol “A” which is the stop display target is executed. In this case, the reel speed "high" (the period for which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds) is longer than the period for which the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed. The reel speed is "ultra low" (one symbol is displayed. A period of 1.2 seconds) makes it possible for the player to easily understand the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target this time.

Further, when the rotation start position 2 is set, when the reel speed "high" is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of the button operation are in the range of array 9 to array 5, so the stop display The dynamic display mode in which the target pseudo symbol “A” can be displayed, and when the reel speed “ultra low” is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period are in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” which is the stop display target cannot be displayed.

As a result, if the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out is performed, the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbol "A" is not displayed by starting the dynamic display set to the reel speed "ultra low" from the rotation start position 2 is executed. It becomes possible to do. Further, when such a stop control is executed, it is preferable that the symbols set other than the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are the same symbols. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect this time is a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed is set to other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the dynamic display content of the symbols.

Further, in the case where the reel speed is "ultra low", when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target (the dynamic display mode ( Dynamic display mode that is advantageous to the player), and when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” that is the stop display target cannot be displayed (is disadvantageous to the player) Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to know whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by only understanding the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. Can be prevented.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

FIG. 229(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , And other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. This display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of reel dynamic display modes of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the display mode storage area 222ca, a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) having different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and different symbol arrangements are stored as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. Has been done. As a result, when continuous slot effects are executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the dynamically displayed symbol is displayed in the display area in which the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, 1 symbol is 0.7 seconds at the rotation speed "high". It is set to be displayed. Further, at the rotation speed "low", one symbol is set to be displayed for one second. Furthermore, at the rotation speed "ultra low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotation speed of the reel in three stages in this way, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set the dynamic display in which the player can easily distinguish the pseudo symbol and the dynamic display in which it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo symbol. It will be possible. Therefore, even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement, different effects can be executed.

Furthermore, by providing the reel rotation speed in three stages, it is possible to change the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect. For example, when the period of one slot effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "high", and the rotation speed " In the "low", 6 pseudo symbols can be displayed, and in the rotation speed "ultra low", 5 pseudo symbols can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol which is the stop display mode this time is displayed, depending on the rotation speed of the reel.

Specifically, the display mode 1 is that the rotation speed is “high” and the symbol arrangement is a stop display target pseudo symbol (displayed by “circle mark” in FIG. 230) and a stop display target pseudo symbol. (Displayed in FIG. 230 with “x”) are set to be displayed alternately. In display mode 2, the rotation speed is “low”, and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 1 is set. Is done.

The display mode 3 is the same rotation speed as the display mode 1, and for the pseudo symbol whose symbol array is to be stopped and displayed (indicated by “circle mark” in FIG. 230), the pseudo symbol that is not to be stopped and displayed ( In FIG. 230, two "x" are set to be displayed side by side, and the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed (indicated by "star" in FIG. 230) is emphasized (enlarged, It is set so as to be displayed by emitting light). In display mode 4, the rotation speed is “low”, and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 3 is set.

The display mode 5 is set so that the rotation speed is "ultra low" and the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed in the array 4 in the symbol array, and the pseudo symbols other than the stopped and displayed are displayed in the other arrays. The display mode 6 is that the rotation speed is "ultra low", and as the symbol array, the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 11, and the other sequences are the pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

It should be noted that the display modes 5 and 6 use the same symbol arrangement data, and the display positions at which the dynamic display is started are different. That is, in the display mode 6, the dynamic display is started from the array 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display modes 5 and 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described with reference to FIG. 228 is executed.

In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes in the middle, the rotation speed is “low” during the period in which the arrays 1 to 6 of the symbol array are displayed, and the rotation speed during the period in which the arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. "High", as the pattern array, the pseudo symbols that are not the stop display target and the pseudo symbols that are the stop display target are alternately displayed for the arrays 1 to 6, and the pseudo symbols that are not the stop display target for the arrays 7 to 11 are It is set to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed in the range in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed (arrays 1 to 6), and the rotation speed in the range in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed (arrays 7 to 11) are not displayed. By making it faster, the speed of the dynamic display is changed to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period in which the pseudo-pattern to be stopped and displayed is displayed, the player is motivated. The frame button 22 can be operated.

Further, in the range (arrays 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed, since the rotation speed is increased, it is possible to shorten the period of one round of the reel and one slot effect period ( In a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective), the range (arrays 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed can be dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the player is enthusiastic about the frame. The button 22 can be operated.

The display mode 8 is one in which the rotation speed changes as the symbol array circulates, the rotation speed is “high” in the first cycle and the rotation speed is “low” in the second and subsequent cycles, which is the same as the display mode 7. The display mode 9 is set to be displayed, and the display mode 9 is such that the pseudo pattern which is the stop display target is highlighted by the rotation of the symbol array, and the rotation speed is “high” in the first cycle. In the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 7, the pseudo symbol “star” emphasizing the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed is set to be displayed after the second lap.

In the present control example, the above-described 9 types of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) can be set as the dynamic display modes executed in the slot effect. However, more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. The display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. If it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the process is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231(a), the display mode selection table 222cb includes a display mode selection table 222cb1 for winning and a display mode selection table 222cb2 for disengagement, and whether or not a special symbol is won A dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the judgment result of the special symbol, so by grasping the effect contents of the continuous slot effect, the special symbol can be a big hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the player has won.

FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning display mode selection table 222cb1. Based on the hit display mode selection table 222cb1, each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, and "display is the first shortened slot effect". When "mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect, and "display mode 2" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is determined as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1", "Display mode 2" as the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" as the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" as the second shortened slot effect, and "Display as extended slot effect" When "mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 8" is the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is If "display mode 4" is set as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 5" is set as the extended slot effect and "display mode 5" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as an effect, "display mode 9" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 4" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 7" as a second shortened slot effect, and an extended slot effect "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment display mode selection table 222cb2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) that is executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f is displayed by the disengagement display mode selection table 222cb2. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, and "display is the first shortened slot effect". When “display mode 2” is set as the second shortened slot effect and “display mode 2” is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is “50 to 99”, it is determined as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1", "Display mode 2" as the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" as the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" as the second shortened slot effect, and "Display as extended slot effect" When "mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "display mode 2" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. If the "display mode 7" is set to "display mode 6" as the second shortened slot effect and the "display mode 6" is set to the extended slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as an effect, "display mode 4" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 8" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 9" as a second shortened slot effect, and an extended slot effect "Display mode 7" is set.

As described above, in the present control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all the slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effects, so in the continuous slot effects. No matter which timing the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. The stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting a stop mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and if there is a slot effect in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When the determination is made (S2034: Yes in FIG. 233), the reference is made.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), the stop mode selection table 222cc includes a hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 and a disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2, which is a table corresponding to the result of the determination of the special symbol. The stop mode is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hitting stop mode selection table 222cc1. The hitting stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of winning symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "0", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “2” is set as the number of winning symbols “2” as an extension slot effect.

If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "1", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “1” is set, and the number of winning symbols “1” is set as an extension slot effect.

In this way, in the case where the result of the hit/damage determination is a hit, three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. This informs the player that the player has won.

Further, in the present control example, since a plurality of stop patterns for each slot effect when the hit determination result is a hit are provided, when the hit determination result is a hit in the continuous slot effect this time during execution of the slot effects. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the executed continuous slot production is performed.

FIG. 232(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment stop mode selection table 222cc2. The disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of winning symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. As for this stop pattern 1, the number of winning symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of winning symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, the number of winning symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect The number of winning symbols “0” is set, and the number of winning symbols “0” is set as an extension slot effect.

If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "0", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "1", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “0” is set, and the number of winning symbols “0” is set as an extension slot effect.

As described above, in the present control example, since the same stop mode is applied in the first slot effect executed first in the continuous slot effect, whether the hit determination result is a hit or a miss, the continuous slot effect is started. Immediately after being played (at the end of the first slot effect), a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit. Can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 229, the description will be continued. FIG. 229(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2071 of FIG. 233), and the slot effect for display corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect. Information related to the display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238), and stored when the continuous slot effect ends. Is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the above-described stop mode selection table 222cc. In the stop mode storage area 223cb, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the slot effect for display corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is created. Display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851 and S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238), and stored when the continuous slot effect ends Information is initialized.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 233. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2006 is completed, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is changed based on the display mode selection table 222cb. It is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the process of S2071 is finished, the stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the above-described second control example, the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238, various effect mid-effect processes of the slot effect process (see FIG. 174) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example. Will be explained.

First, the process 2 during the first slot effect will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process 2 during the first slot effect. When the process 2 during the first slot effect is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed similarly to the process during the first slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. When the process of S4707 is finished, next, the display slot stop effect command of the set stop mode is set (S4751), and the display slot effect command according to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The setting is made (S4752), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current time is not the button press valid period (S4701: No), similarly to the process during the first slot effect in the second control example (see FIG. 175), S4710. The processes of steps S4712 to S4712 are executed, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the normal slot effect mid-processing 2 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot effecting process 2. When the normal slot effect mid-process 2 is executed, similarly to the normal slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 176) in the above-described second control example, the processes of S4801 to S4803 are executed, and in the process of S4803, the slot effect counter is executed. If it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is waited for completion. The state is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

When the process of S4809 is finished, next, the display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and the process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, similarly to the first shortened slot effect production process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908. The process of is executed.

When the processing of S4904 is finished, next, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the second shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4610) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot effect producing process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, similarly to the second shortened slot effect producing process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed. , S5002 is completed, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The display slot effect command to be performed is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and this processing is ended.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension slot effect production process 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect production process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed similarly to the extension slot effect production process (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above, and then the stop mode is stored. The display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and the display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152). ), the slot effect state is set to an end waiting state (S5104), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, various dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols are displayed. Since it can be displayed by, the player can motivate the frame button 22 to be operated.

Further, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of turns of the symbol array displayed on the reel or the lapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied even during the production of one slot. On the other hand, the operation means (frame button 22) can be operated more enthusiastically.

As a plurality of dynamic display modes, the number of reels dynamically displayed may be changed. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed in the limited display space. Further, the size of the pseudo pattern may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this case, it may be possible to adopt a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol which is the target of the stop display is easier to visually recognize than the other symbol by displaying the other symbol in a reduced size. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the predetermined pseudo symbol without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. This allows the player to easily grasp the predetermined symbol. Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased by decreasing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display). In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of symbols that are dynamically displayed, it is possible to easily identify each symbol that is dynamically displayed.

Further, as the dynamic display mode, it is possible to change the symbol array of the dynamically displayed reels and set a range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect is changeable. As a result, it is possible to set a dynamic display that is easy to grasp and a dynamic display that is difficult to grasp a predetermined pseudo-symbol (pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed) even with the same symbol arrangement, so various effects are possible. Can be executed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed in a range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol array.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels is set to a normal speed until the reels reach a predetermined number (for example, two laps), and thereafter (dynamically displayed as described above) as described above. You may make it slow down. This allows a player who has not operated the operation means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two turns) to easily grasp a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed). It is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation means (frame button 22).

Further, in the present control example, since the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the result of judgment of the special symbol, the effect contents of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are determined. Based on this, it is possible to predict whether or not the special symbol is judged to be right or wrong. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect contents of the continuous slot effect can be made interesting.

In this control example, dynamics are preliminarily set for each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect. Since the display mode is set, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. You can

Further, in the present control example, the same stop mode is used in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect regardless of whether the hit/miss judgment result is a hit or not. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit (at the time when the slot effect ends). ..

In this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are set in advance, but when the slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is determined. The dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set (when the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect).

Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot effect is being executed are at the same timing as other slot effects. It may be set.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example is a detailed description of the composite press effect of the second control example described above. The composite press effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the present control example, a composite press effect executed based on one special symbol change and a composite effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol changes are configured to be executed. They differ in points. Further, a detailed description is added on the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the combined pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the pressing effect executed.

The sixth control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, a rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the back image data (“mountain” stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. 8] is a schematic diagram showing an example (“sea” stage) of rear surface image data stored in a character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example.

In this control example, the player can select the stage shown in FIGS. 239(a) and 239(b) by operating the frame button 22. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation of the special symbol is started, and a game is played during that period. When the person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be switched.

In addition, in this control example, an effect corresponding to the displayed stage is executed. Therefore, the player can change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 during a period in which the stage can be changed (for example, 5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started). As a result, a new effect can be executed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the composite press effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of the composite press effect in this control example. In the composite press effect of the present control example, the same elements as those of the above-described composite press effect of the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. Period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous hit effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 s) is 12 seconds remaining to the time when it is 2 seconds remaining.

When the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of continuous hits is 50 times or more) on the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the background (stage) to be executed in the next special symbol variation is set. The operation mode to be changed is configured to be changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c).

241(b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the special symbol variation being executed can be changed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241(c) is executed as the background change operation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation mode which can change the background of the next special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241(b), a rear image corresponding to the currently selected background (“sea” stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub-display area Ds is small. Stages (“sea” stage and “mountain” stage) that can be selected as a background selection screen are displayed in the area Ds2, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the unselected stage.

Then, below the main display area Dm, "I will change the background when the button is pressed" is displayed as a background change notification display for informing the player that the present time is the background changeable period, and next to it. A display imitating a “button” indicating that the current period is the operation valid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid is displayed.

This allows the player to easily understand that it is a period in which the background can be changed, and allows the player to select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 for a predetermined period until the special symbol fluctuation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) (for example, continuous hit effect) May be executed. In this case, as a result of the player enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, the player operates the frame button 22 even after the next special symbol variation is started, and unintentionally changes the background in the next special symbol variation. There was a problem that it would end up.

If this problem occurs, for example, in a state in which an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations is being executed, it becomes impossible for the player to see the effect that the player is looking forward to. There was a risk that the player would be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in the present control example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends)) When it is determined that the continuous stroke operation) has been executed, the background changing operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background changing operation mode.

Here, the specific background changing operation mode described above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 241(c), this particular background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241(b), and even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol variation currently being executed is changed. The background does not change until the end. On the lower side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Please select the background of the next change by pressing the button" is displayed as a display notifying the player that the current background is a specific background change operation mode. In the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds that is displayed, the selection content indicating the background displayed in the next change is displayed.

In this way, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change, a situation in which the player is dissatisfied It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

In the present control example, when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the predetermined period until the special symbol change ends, the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change Although a configuration in which the operation mode of the effect for operating (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number, the aspect of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol change may be changed, or this time. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In such a case, the aspect of the subsequent frame button operation effect may be changed based on the determination that the operation content of the frame button operation effect performed before is the predetermined operation content.

Furthermore, in the present control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed, Although it is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only in a situation where the above-mentioned problem may actually occur, the present invention is not limited to this and is executed in the special symbol change this time. Based on that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the result of the judgment on whether or not the special symbol changes this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from being started and an unintended background change being executed in a state in which is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

As described above, in this control example, in a plurality of frame button operation effects executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations (continuous hit effect of special symbol fluctuation 1 and background change effect of special symbol fluctuation 2 in FIG. 240) On the other hand, the aspect of the frame button operation effect executed later can be changed based on the operation content in the frame button operation effect executed before.

In addition, similarly to the second control example described above, even for a plurality of frame button operation effects (composite pressing effect) executed during one special symbol change, during the frame button operation effects executed before. The aspect of the frame button operation effect executed later is configured to be changeable based on the operation content.

Returning to FIG. 240, the composite press effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a composite press effect is executed in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed. This composite press effect is the same effect as the composite press effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 in each frame button operation effect executed in the composite press effect and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the composite press effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the composite press effect is executed, the press effect 1 is first executed. This pressing effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 as in the second control example (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the operation effective period is 5 seconds after the effect starts). 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157(b)).

During the pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period). Based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is repeatedly operated (operation 3), and when the number of times of continuous operation is small (50 times or less), "weak continuous operation" and that continuous operation are determined. The "automatic continuous hitting function" is executed by "strong continuous hitting" which is determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and the operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more in the pressing effect 1. “Long press” is determined, “No operation” is determined when the frame button 22 is desired to be operated even once during the press effect 1, and unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the press effect 1. There are five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1, the mode of the press effect 2 which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when it is determined in the pressing effect 1 that "weak repeated hits", "timing pressing effect" (see FIG. 158(a)) is set in the pressing effect 2 and when it is determined that "strong hits". Is set to "pressing effect 2" (see FIG. 243(a)), and if "long press" is determined, "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158(b)) is set, When it is determined that "no operation", "timing push effect" is set in the pressing effect 2 as in the case where it is determined that "soft continuous hit" described above, and when it is determined as "other operation", press The "timing push effect (difficulty)" (refer to FIG. 243(b)), which has increased the difficulty level of the above-mentioned "timing push effect", is set as the effect 2.

In this way, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, the pressing effect 1 exceeds the predetermined number (50 times) of the frame button. The player who presses 22 (the player who is good at continuous hitting operation) can continuously participate in the frame button operation effect by continuously performing the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22.

Further, for the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function in the pressing effect 1 (the player who is continuously pressing the frame button 22), not the effect of pressing the button but the effect of releasing the button. By executing, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the current button operation state (the pressed state), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the effect.

Further, for a player who is performing an unnecessary frame button operation on the pressing effect 1, it is possible to execute, as a penalty, an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the pressing effect 2 to succeed.

Then, when the press effect 2 is completed, the continuous hit effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation effective period is 5 seconds from the effect start) is executed similarly to the composite press effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159(b). )), the composite press effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243(a), description will be given of the continuous press effect of the press effect 2 executed when it is determined in the press effect 1 of FIG. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. The same elements as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), when the continuous hitting effect is started in the pressing effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment field and the display mode of the meter display portion D1 is suggested to change. "May the meter go through!?" is displayed. In addition, “continuous hit” indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is the continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display portion D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the continuous hit effect executed in the press effect 2, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is based on the game result of the composite press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol, as in the press effect 2 of the second control example described above. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159(a)). Specifically, when the number of times the frame button is pressed during the period (3 seconds) in which the press effect 2 is executed exceeds 20 times. The display of the meter display portion D1 is changed based on the result of judgment whether or not the special symbol for which the operation condition is satisfied and the composite press effect has been executed. For example, when the special symbol of this time is won as a jackpot as the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the special symbol is also won as a jackpot in the winning information that is held and stored, as shown in FIG. 159(a), the meter display The meter of section D1 is extended.

In this way, for the player who has performed a sufficient continuous hitting operation in the pressing effect 1, the consecutive hitting operation can be continuously executed in the pressing effect 2 as well, and is performed based on the continuous hitting operation. Since the press effect 1 and the press effect 2 are different from each other, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the favorite frame button 22.

In the present control example, the effect mode is configured to be changed based on the number of consecutive hit operations on the frame button 22, but, for example, the number of consecutive hits (operation condition) for changing the effect mode is set to a plurality of operation conditions. Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined by lottery. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the operation condition in the pressing effect this time, and thus the frame button operation can be positively executed until the end.

The timing press effect (difficulty) of the press effect 2 executed when the "press operation 1" of FIG. 242 determines "another operation" will be described. FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. The same elements as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the timing push effect (difficulty) is a display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing push effect of the second control example described above (see FIG. 158(a)). The difference is that the position is different, and the moving body D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of success (the degree of difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db3) with respect to the normal timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who does not intentionally participate in the combined press effect to succeed in the timing press effect (difficult to satisfy the operation condition), and the effect displayed when the operation condition is satisfied (special It is possible to make it difficult to execute the effect that suggests the drawing result of the symbols.

The method of increasing the success difficulty level is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing push effect is being executed, the target Db3 may be moved at high speed in the timing gauge to make the push timing difficult to understand. The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily deleted, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or reduced to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, as a condition for setting the timing push effect (difficulty), the result of the operation determination and the press effect 2 are started in addition to the case where the result of the operation determination in the press effect 1 is determined as "other operation". If the operation status at the time point is different, for example, in the pressing effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed at the time point when the pressing effect 2 is executed, although “long press” is set as the operation determination result. The timing push effect (difficulty) may be set even when it is determined that there is not.

Further, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is executed for the player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the combined pressing effect, but in addition to that, For example, it is executed when the operation content for the frame button 22 in the pressing effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the continuous hit number is 7), and the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is successful. In this case (when the operation conditions are met), a player who notifies the result of the special symbol lottery, displays a specific effect (image or video), or provides information that the player can accumulate. It may be configured to give a privilege that is advantageous to the.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 244. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, the RAM 223 in this control example has a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a confirming flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd in addition to the RAM 223 in each control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, "sea" stage, "mountain" stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is used when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation effective period which is the operation period during which the background can be changed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247). , Background information based on the operation content is stored, and in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), when the confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON, the display information is displayed based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the change of the special symbol, and when it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 is being operated, and when it is off. Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247), this operation change flag 223bd is determined to be a frame button input within 5 seconds (pre-completion valid period) until the special symbol variation ends (( It is set to ON in S6810: Yes of FIG. 247 (S6811 of FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that it is the first frame button operation valid period (S6802 of FIG. 247: Yes), and the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to OFF. When the determination is made (S6803 of FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6805 of FIG. 247).

The in-confirmation flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether an effect (see FIG. 241(c)) for changing the background of the next change is being executed as the background change effect, and when it is on, the background of the next change is changed. If the effect is off, it means that the effect of changing the background of the next change is not executed. The confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804 in FIG. 247), In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when setting the display background command (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to OFF after setting the display background command (S2083).

The press count counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the press effect 1 of the composite press effect. This press count counter 223dd is incremented by 1 (S4551 in FIG. 246) when it is determined in the automatic press effect setting process 2 that the press effect 1 is in progress (normal press) (S4510). When it is determined that the number of presses during the effect 1 has reached the predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 of FIG. 246) and it is determined that the predetermined number of times (50 times) has been reached (FIG. 246, S4552: Yes), and the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Although not shown, the counter value is also initialized to 0 at the timing when the press effect 1 of the composite press effect ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Sixth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247. In the present control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) is executed in place of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 245), and the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173). (See FIG. 246) in place of the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 246), and detailed description of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) is made. Other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed are set based on the acquired variation pattern. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to 2033 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

After finishing the process of S2040, next, it is determined whether or not the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and if it is determined to be set to ON (that is, during the last change of the special symbol, When the effect of changing the background due to the next special symbol change is executed) (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ( S2082).

Then, the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. The process ends.

With such a configuration, based on the information (the information set in the background information storage area 223da) of the background of the next special symbol variation, the third at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. The background (“sea” stage, “mountain” stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This automatic press-down effect setting process 2 (S4410) is performed when the normal press-down is performed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246) with respect to the automatic press-down effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. The processing contents are different.

When the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed similarly to the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, when it is determined in the process of S4510 that it is the normal pressing period (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), the display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is incremented by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether or not the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and when the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552: No in FIG. 246). ), and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4522, when the value of the press count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552 of FIG. 246: Yes), the press effect scenario is changed to 2 for non-auto pressing (4553), and the press count is set. The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this processing ends.

Next, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is an input of a signal based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In this case (S6801: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), then the current frame selection period is the first frame button operation valid period, which is the period during which the background can be selected. It is determined (S6802). In the processing of S6802, if it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is not set (set to OFF) (S6803: No), it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the confirming flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), and proceeds to the processing of S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processes of S6804 to S6806 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6807.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether the confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is the operation of the frame button 22 while the effect of setting the background of the fluctuation is being executed next time. In the process of S6807, there is a confirmation operation (the frame button 22 has been operated). If determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this processing ends.

Here, the processing of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241(c). When the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the fluctuation is being executed next time, the display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds by one. The background display (“sea” or “mountain”) enlarged and displayed in the small area Ds2 becomes the background to be shifted when the next fluctuation starts. In other words, in the processing of S6808, if the confirmation operation is performed once for the background information (the “mountain” stage in FIG. 241(c)) that is currently set (due to the current change), the process moves to the next change. When the background information corresponding to the “sea” stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background and the confirmation operation is performed twice, the background information corresponding to the “mountain” stage is the background as the background to be changed with the next change. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6804, when it is determined that the operation change flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6804: No), the display corresponding to the background next to the currently set background is displayed. A background command is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

The process of S6809 is a state in which the operation change flag 223db and the confirming flag 223dc are both set to OFF during the first frame button operation valid period, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241(b)). (See) is executed when the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

In the processing of S6802, if it is determined that the present is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the present is the pre-termination period (S6810). This pre-completion period is a period that indicates that the remaining period until the special symbol fluctuation is completed is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and if it is determined that it is not the pre-completion period (S6810: No). ), if this process is terminated and it is determined that it is the period before termination (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and the process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, a continuous stroke operation) during a predetermined period until the special symbol fluctuation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) ) Is executed, it is configured to change the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation to a specific background change operation mode, so a situation that makes the player dissatisfied Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the change of the special symbol, a situation occurs in which the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to suppress this.

In addition, the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation based on the setting made in. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the result of the judgment on whether or not the special symbol changes this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from being started and an unintended background change being executed in a state in which is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

In addition, in this control example, the timing release effect is executed in the press effect 2 when it is determined to be “long press” in the press effect 1 of the composite press effect, but for example, the player May be configured to be able to execute all of the composite pressing effects while continuously pressing the frame button 22. The effect executed in the pressing effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the press effect 2 that is executed as the composite press effect when it is determined to be “long press” at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses the frame button 22 for a long time and reaches the operation determination point in the state where the automatic continuous hitting function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, when the operation judgment point is reached, the comment column says “automatic timing set by long pressing button. ”Is displayed, and next to it, a schematic diagram imitating a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating a rate at which timing is set are displayed.

In this case, the operation timing of the timing push effect is displayed on the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while performing the effect that the meter of the meter display portion D1 is raised by executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the press effect 1. The effect selected by lottery is executed.

Then, the automatic timing is set until the pressing effect 2 is started, and in the timing pressing effect executed in the pressing effect 2 (see FIG. 158(a)), the frame button 22 is operated at the set automatic timing. The same effect as that performed is executed. With such a configuration, the player can execute the continuous hit effect and the timing press effect by simply pressing the frame button 22 continuously (long pressing).

In the example described above, the degree of expectation at which the automatic timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the player may or may not be notified of the degree of expectation. Further, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (by the time the press effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. Good.

For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the press effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined to be “long press” at the previous determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the later determination timing. The player may be informed of the automatic timing setting result. With such a configuration, when the set content of the automatic timing is bad, the operation content is changed from that (for example, continuous hitting operation), so that the normal timing push effect can be executed as the press effect 2.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In the seventh control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the press effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in the present control example), the interval ( In this control example, the additional effect is executed for 10 seconds. Specifically, if the pressing effect (first pressing effect) ends and a short interval (for example, 10 seconds) is opened, the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) is started. It is configured to execute an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second press effect and the second press effect. As a result, from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect, the press effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed.

Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 to release the first press effect, a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) is opened and the second press effect is executed. The player must move his hand again to the frame button 22 at short intervals, which increases the operation load on the player and may prevent him from concentrating on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the press effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second pressing effect is completed, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

First, with reference to FIG. 249, a flow of setting the additional effect in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the additional effect is set. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, a plurality of operation effects by a third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (Production of allowing the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be settable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, with respect to the special symbol variation 1 (variation of the special symbol with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts). ~ Fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of 30 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the start of the special symbol fluctuation), and the third fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation is It is configured such that the third symbol variation effect is set separately from the variation pattern corresponding to the period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start.

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, it is required to increase the types of effect patterns of the third symbol variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the applicant, as in the present control example, divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought about the process.

With such a configuration, it is possible to create the same type of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where a series of effect patterns are stored respectively. Therefore, more effect patterns are created using the same amount of data when storing a series of effect patterns, or the amount of data used for the third symbol variation effect is reduced, and other effects (for example, a character It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, bonus effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and it is possible to set various effects within a limited data capacity, and the player can There was an effect that it was possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

However, in the case of creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, in the case of setting an operation effect in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each of the continuous variation patterns. was there. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the variation pattern that is executed first among the continuous variation patterns. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

Furthermore, by setting the period of the operation effect executed in at least one of the plurality of variation patterns to be long, the period during which the player is motivated to play the game is continued, and the player can play the game. It may be possible to suppress getting tired at an early stage, but when such a configuration is used, it is easy to create an effect pattern in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Met.

As described above, this control example solves the problem that occurs when processing that can create a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

In the first variation pattern, the operation effect of effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is 10 seconds (“fluctuation B”), and in the second fluctuation pattern, the operation effect of which the operation validity period is 25 seconds (“SP2”). However, in the third variation pattern, the operation effect (“SSP2”) having the operation effective period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, the "variation B" that can be set as the first variation pattern is that the operation valid period (10 seconds) is 17 seconds after the first variation pattern is started (after the special symbol variation is started). It is set, and ends 3 seconds after the operation valid period has elapsed. In the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol changes at high speed in the first 17 seconds, and after the reach state in which the third symbols on the left and right stop at the same number, the operation effect that suggests the expectation of the jackpot ( An operation valid period of 10 seconds) is executed, and an effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect for the remaining 3 seconds is executed.

“SP2” that can be set as the second variation pattern is an operation effect that is executed next for 3 seconds after the first variation pattern ends (after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) ( A display explaining the effect contents of the operation effective period (23 seconds) is executed, then the operation effective period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation effective period elapses and ends 4 seconds later. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (color change, (Changes in comments, etc.), the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is variable (color change, brightness change, change in presence or absence of lighting), and drive provided in the pachinko machine 10 The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change of presence or absence of drive, change of drive speed, change of drive range). Therefore, the player can change various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period (23 seconds in this control example).

"SSP2" that can be set as the third variation pattern is an operation effect to be executed next for 4 seconds after the second variation pattern is completed (after 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) ( A display explaining the effect contents of the operation valid period 10 seconds) is executed, then the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period elapses, that is, after the special symbol variation is started. It ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed during the operation valid period. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the winning/decision determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol is a period in which the operation effective period is not set (from the lapse of 15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern to the end thereof). Period).

When "variation B" is set in the first variation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern, the operation valid period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period and the effective period is 6 seconds. The interval of 6 seconds is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed. When “SP2” is set in the second variation pattern and “SSP2” is set in the third variation pattern, the operation valid period set in “SP2” and the “SSP2” are set. The interval between the operation valid period is 8 seconds. The interval of 8 seconds is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation valid period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "Variation B" is set to "SP2" is started is the predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of the operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (10 seconds) set to “variation B” is within 4 seconds, the additional effect is executed. It will be. Further, an operation in which the remaining period until the operation valid period (10 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2" is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example) In the case of timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set to “SP2” is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects in which the operation effective period is set are executed, the additional effect is generated based on the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated). By using the configuration for determining whether to execute, a problem in the case where a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set is executed (that is, the action of operating the frame button 22 and the action of not operating the frame button 22 are repeated in a short period of time). As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation load on the player increases and the player cannot concentrate on the game.

As described above, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether the frame button 22 is operated or not). ), it is determined whether or not the additional effect is to be executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the additional effect may be executed at the predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the operation effect when “SP2” is set as the second variation pattern, and FIG. 250(b) is between “SP2” and “SSP2”. FIG. 250C is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which the “additional effect” is not executed during the period in which the set “additional effect” can be executed. FIG. 250(c) shows a case where “SSP2” is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), during "SP2", an effective period informing section S1 (a diagram imitating a frame button) for informing the third symbol display device 81 that it is the operation effective period of the frame button 22. The period display portion M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display portion M1. Then, in the comment column, the characters "press the button" that urges the player to operate the frame button 22 are displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the character "chance" is displayed in the comment field as the operation result, as shown in FIG. 250(b). Note that the timing shown in FIG. 250(b) is the timing at which the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), so the valid period notification unit S1 and the period display unit M1 display. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(c), "SSP2" is started, and the effective period informing unit S1 (a diagram simulating the frame button that informs the third symbol display device 81 that the operation period of the frame button 22 is in effect. ) And a period display section M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display section M2. Further, the characters "repeated hits" indicating the operation contents in "SSP2" and the characters "change the meter to MAX" indicating the effect contents are displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250(a) to 250(c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the operation valid period of the frame button 22 in the period (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed) between them. Since the display of the effective period informing section S1 for notifying that is, the period display section M2 for indicating the operation effective period, and the display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are not performed, the player once The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250(c) is made. If such a display (effect) is executed in a short period of time, the player's operation on the frame button 22 becomes complicated, and the player's willingness to play may decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-mentioned problem occurs by executing the additional effects during the period (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed). It has been suppressed. Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described.

251(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. 251(c) is a schematic diagram showing still another example displayed as the additional effect in this control example.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 251(a), an additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the operation effective period set by the additional effect and an addition that indicates the additional operation effective period are added to the display content illustrated in FIG. 250(b). The difference is that the period display portion Ma is displayed, and the additional period display portion Ma displays the remaining period of the operation valid period (b in the figure). By executing the additional effect in this way, after the operation valid period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250(a)), the operation valid period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250(c)). Since it is possible to notify the player that the operation is valid for the period up to (), the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated and the player's willingness to play decreases. Can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251(a), the display mode (display form or display position) of the additional effective period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation effective period is the same as the display mode of the effective period notification unit S1 or S2. , There is no sense of incongruity that the additional effect is being executed. Furthermore, since the player operates the frame button 22 as an additional effect, the additional comment is displayed with respect to the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The player does not feel uncomfortable with the displayed effect (operation effect).

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 251(a), only the additional period display portion Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251(b) and 251(c).

FIG. 251(b) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SP2" shown in FIG. 250(a) is continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251(b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display portion M1 showing the operation valid period of "SP2" is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period, and the side ( The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the left side of the viewpoint in FIG. 251 (b). As a result, the remaining period a decreases in "SP2" (moves to the left side of the period display portion M1), and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, the additional effect is produced. When it is started, the additional period display portion Ma can be displayed, and the player can be made aware that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is the extension of the operation effect of "SP2". ..

Further, since the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect in which the character of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" is rewritten (updated), is added. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect executed by the effect is the extension of the operation effect of “SP2”.

FIG. 251(c) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SSP2" shown in FIG. 250(c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251(c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display portion M2 indicating the operation valid period of "SSP2" is displayed, and next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251(b)). The additional period display portion Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display portion Ma), and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, "SSP2". When the operation valid period is started, the remaining period of the period display portion M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect is “SSP2” for the player. It is possible to recognize that the effect is being executed in advance.

In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect in which the display form of the meter increased by the operation effect of "SSP2" is changed (for example, the color of the meter is changed or the effect around the meter is changed). By changing the value, an effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2" is executed), so that the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are more related to each other. Can be recognized.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 are changed and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the second control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the above are changed and the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252(a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed variation pattern according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. Has been done. Specifically, the first fluctuation for selecting a performance mode (first fluctuation pattern) for a period of 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts (that is, a period from 0 second to 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts) The pattern selection table 222a1, the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the presentation mode (second variation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting a production mode (third variation pattern) for a period until elapse, and an additional production selection table 222a4 for determining a production mode of additional production are provided.

In the present control example, the first to third variation patterns and the additional effect are selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the main control device 110, and the variation pattern is a combination thereof. Based on this, one variation effect is executed. For example, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 and one fluctuation is selected based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Perform the performance. On the other hand, when the main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 and the second fluctuation pattern is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. The pattern is selected, the third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the additional production is selected from the additional production selection table 222a4, and one of the first to third variation patterns and the additional production are selected. Change effect is executed.

Although illustration is omitted, when a variation time other than the variation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) described above is selected in the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern according to the variation time is displayed. Will be selected. For example, in the main controller 110, when short deviation (variation time of 7 seconds) is selected, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in which the variation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 252(b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (the presentation mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252(b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the production mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) corresponds to the value of the first production counter 223f1. It is prescribed by.

Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the first effect counter 223f1, the variation A, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of effect modes of the variation A are defined, and the variation A is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation A can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the first effect counter 223f1, variation B, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of effect modes of the variation B are defined similarly to the variation A, and the variation B is executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variation B can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (production mode in the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252(c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the effect mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation is defined in correspondence with the value of the second effect counter 223f2. There is.

Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the second effect counter 223f2, the variation SP1 that is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined. Similar to the variation A, the variation SP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are performed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SP1 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the second effect counter 223f2, the variation SP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Similar to the variation B, the variation SP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SP2 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the presentation mode in the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252(d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the effect form from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation is defined in correspondence with the value of the third effect counter 223f3. There is.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3, the variation SSP1 is defined as an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. Similar to the variation A, the variation SSP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are performed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SSP1 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the third effect counter 223f3, the variation SSP2 that is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. Similar to the variation B, the variation SSP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variable SSP2 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Although details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are independently updated. With these independent counters, each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and 61 seconds to 90 seconds) as a detailed fluctuation pattern. Since the production mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, the variation of the production mode can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Here, in each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and third fluctuation pattern that is a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) When the press effect of pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the press effect is executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds and a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, the press effect executed first. If the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the (press effect executed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds), the frame button 22 is pressed and then the press effect is opened with a short interval (the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds). The press effect) that is executed in step 1) is executed. In this case, the second press effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds), even though the frame button 22 has been pressed in the first press effect and the hand has been released from the frame button 22. Then, the player moves his/her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may not be able to concentrate on the game.

On the other hand, in the present control example, when the press effect is continuously executed in one variation effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first press effect, the first press effect ends. It is configured to select and execute an additional effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed in the period from the subsequent time until the start of the next (second) pressing effect. As a result, the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 or the additional effect is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. It is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the end, and the problem described above can be suppressed (prevented).

Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is for selecting an additional effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first press effect in the case where the press effect is continuously executed in one variation effect described above. Table.

As shown in FIG. 253, when the variation pattern (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect is a specific combination (when the pressing effect is continuous), the additional effect is defined. In the case where the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the press effect executed first among the continuous press effects, in the period from the end of the press effect executed first to the start of the press effect executed next, The specified additional effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of the respective variation periods in one variation effect are not a specific combination (when the press effects are not continuous), the additional effect is not specified and the addition is added. The production is never executed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first variation pattern is “variation A (no press effect)” will be described.

When the first variation pattern is “variation A (no pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (no pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (that is, 60). Whether the variation effect is finished in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect. Therefore, the additional effect is not defined and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (without pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1". (No pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variation effect, and thus the additional effect is not specified. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with press effect)”, the press effect is continuously executed in the second change pattern and the third change pattern, so that the additional effect 2 is added. It is prescribed.

If this additional effect 2 is defined, in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern, the additional effect 2 will be executed when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which the comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to operate the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

Next, a case where the first variation pattern is “variation B (with press effect)” will be described.

When the first variation pattern is “variation B (with pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (without pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (that is, 60). Whether the variation effect is finished in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect. Therefore, the additional effect is not defined and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1". In either case (without pressing effect) or “variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, since the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, Additional effect 1 is specified.

Further, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. Therefore, in this case, In addition to the additional effect 1, the additional effect 2 is defined.

When the additional effect 1 is defined, in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern, the additional effect 1 is executed if the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to operate the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the effect counter 223f are changed and in that an effective period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is used to select the first variation counter 223f1 used to select the first variation pattern, the second variation counter 223f2 used to select the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern. The third variation counters 223f3 are provided respectively (see FIG. 254(b)).

The effective period storage area 223ea is a region for determining whether or not the effect is executed based on the depression of the frame button 22 (that is, the period in which the depression of the frame button 22 is effective). The period during which the pressing of the button 22 is effective is set by the value of the elapsed time (ms) after the variation effect is started. This effective period storage area 223ea is used as a press effect to be executed when a change pattern command for executing press effect is set in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256). The period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (see FIG. 257), when the additional effect is set (S6854 of FIG. 257: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 according to the additional effect is valid. Is set (S6855 of FIG. 257). Although not shown, the contents of the effective period storage area 223ea are cleared when one variation effect is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration inside the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the above-described second control example in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. In the variation pattern command processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)), the additional effect data storage area 233n stores the received command if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes). Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260 ), if execution of the additional effect is decided at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is ON), it is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The effect data being displayed is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the additional effect is executed.

The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, and is off. In some cases, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 1 has not been decided. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260 ), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes) (S3852), the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is ON. If determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and is off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been decided. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) receives the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 (S6902). Then, in the pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes) (S3856), the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is ON. When determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the frame button input monitoring It is different in that the frame button input monitoring/production process 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the production process (see S1707 in FIG. 137), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256. In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when the variation pattern in which the press effect is executed is set in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the above-described second control example (S2031). : Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the executed press effect is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In the seventh control example, the press effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed and the processes corresponding to those effects are not executed. However, the press effect in the second control example is not performed. The slot effect and the point effect may be executed, and the processing corresponding to these effects may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the variation pattern received from the main control device 110) is changed to the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table). 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and the display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the process of S2006 ends, the process proceeds to S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute the press effect (S2031: Yes), the variation patterns selected in the process of S2091 are set. The valid operation period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the valid period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute the press effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 is performed. Move to processing.

When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed, and this processing is completed, as in the second control example.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 257, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707) will be described. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707), the frame button press command is set based on the detection of the press of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period of the press effect, the period until the next press effect is started is determined, and the period until the next press effect is started is short. When it is determined that (10 seconds or less in this control example), the additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the effective period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid). It is determined whether or not it is (period) (S6851). In the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation is not valid (S6851: No), the process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851, when it is determined that the frame button operation valid period is reached (S6851: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

In the processing of S6801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: YES), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to step S6853. Transition. The display frame button press command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 (S1702). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines the period in which the command is set from the received command (for example, the pressing effect period in the second variation pattern), and the effect according to the period ( For example, the comment display effect (see FIG. 250(b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S6852 is finished, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: No), the present process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6853, when it is determined that the current period is the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in S6854, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the start of the next press effect is 10 seconds or less. In the processing of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressed effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), the additional display effect command for display is executed in order to execute the additional effect. After setting (S6855), the effective period storage area 223ea is updated based on the pressed effective period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next press effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped, and the present process is performed. To finish.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260, the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described. In the present control example, the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146). Instead of (a), variable pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 259(a)) is executed, additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) is added, and pointer update processing is performed. The difference is that pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the command determination processing 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 258. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in the present control example, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) is used instead of the variation pattern command process in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) is executed and the addition effect command processing (see FIG. S259(b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, similarly to the second control example, the processes of S2601 to S2604 are executed. When it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), the variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 259(a). In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in the present control example, in the case where there is additional effect data, in the variation pattern command process in the second control example (see FIG. 146(a)), the additional effect data is additionally effected. The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In the fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command includes additional effect data (S2751). When the additional effect data is set as the change pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the press effect is continuously set (selected) in the first change pattern to the third change pattern. Is.

In the processing of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2) is set. It is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command does not include additional effect data (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2701.

When the process shifts to S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed similarly to the second control example described above, and the present process is ended.

In this way, when the variation pattern command that may execute the additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n in advance, When executing (displaying) additional effects, you can execute (display) additional effects without delay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n only when the additional effect is executed. Thereby, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed similarly to the second control example.

In the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the additional effect command is received (S2639). In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has been received (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 259(b). The additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when the additional effect command indicating the execution of the additional effect is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the process of S6901, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and the present process To finish. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

By the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 being set to ON by the process of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated so as to be (displayed).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this processing is ended. .. As described above, the additional effect 2 is an additional effect that is executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

By the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 being set to ON by the process of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated so as to be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to S2601.

Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 260. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined with respect to the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the above-described second control example, and the additional effect update timing (in each variation pattern). The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and the other points are the same.

In the pointer update processing 2 (S3605), first, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851). ).

In the processing of S3851, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case where the additional effect 1 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Alternatively, since the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), it is a case of executing the additional effect 1 (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressed effect). Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to OFF. (S3854), the process ends.

In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d where the display data to be executed 1 second later is stored. As a result, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) from the time 1 second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed appropriately. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed according to the change.

In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). It is determined whether or not (S3855).

In the processing of S3855, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the case where the additional effect 2 is executed (the frame button 22 was pressed early or not). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), so this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the additional effect 2 is executed (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressed effect). Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to OFF. (S3858), the process ends.

In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processes of S3802 to S3806 are executed as in the second control example described above, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), at the update timing of each additional effect, the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer in advance, thereby adding. The production can be executed (displayed) without delay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table buffer may be updated at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. The data table buffer 233d may be overwritten (updated).

Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is on). It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is to be executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, a configuration for setting an additional effect for the intervals therebetween is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed with a predetermined interval, by performing processing so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect that is executed first by a predetermined interval, the plurality of operation effects are continuously performed. The processing may be performed, or the processing may be performed such that the start timing of the operation effect to be performed later is moved forward by a predetermined interval.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting additional effects between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is advisable to set the above-mentioned additional effect after the end of the operation effect to be executed later or set the effect period for displaying the result of the operation effect to be long.

<Modification of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the above-described seventh control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect executed for one special symbol variation has been described, but in the present modification, continuous special symbol variations are described. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. The same elements as those in the above control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow of setting the additional effect in the present modification will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set across a plurality of special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set to a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the special symbol variation is started. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

Then, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), the first variation pattern “variation A” and the second variation pattern “SP2” are set (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27. The operation effect is executed in the period of 2 seconds to 4 seconds (23 seconds). Special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 seconds), because the end of the special symbol fluctuation is the end timing of the second fluctuation pattern "SP2", the end timing of the operation valid period of "SP2" in the special symbol fluctuation 1 and the special symbol fluctuation The period between the start timing of the operation valid period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Even in this 5 seconds, the same control as the seventh control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display content of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be described.

FIG. 262 is a view for explaining the display content of the additional effect when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol fluctuations, and FIG. 262(a) is an example of the display content in the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262(c) is a display content during the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 262(a), in this modification, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed as in the sixth control example described above. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 241(b) of the sixth control example described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the effective period set by the additional effect 3 and the additional period display that indicates the additional operation effective period. The section Ma is displayed, and the additional period display section Ma displays the remaining period of the operation valid period (b in the figure). Then, the characters "Get new background with MAX" for explaining the game contents in the additional effect 3 and the variable meter by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, a background that cannot be normally selected can be selected by the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in FIG. 262(c), normally, two types of backgrounds, “Sea” stage or “Mountain” stage, were selectable (see FIG. 262(a)), but a new background was acquired by the additional effect 3. , "River" stage is displayed as selectable.

As described above, in the present modified example, the additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed in the same manner as in the seventh control example described above even in a plurality of operation effects set to span a plurality of special symbol variations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button performed by the player from straddling a plurality of special symbol variations from becoming complicated.

Incidentally, in the additional effect 3, the condition that the meter is MAX may be a case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result of the special symbol variation 2 (the result of the judgment) is preliminarily obtained. It is also possible to make a determination (so-called prefetching) and the determination result is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Also, both may be combined.

Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example is to additionally set both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation valid period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a case will be described in which only the effect mode is changed as an additional effect without changing the operation valid period of the frame button 22. FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display unit Ma showing the additional operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251(a) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. 263(b) is a display obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display part Ma showing the additional operation effective period and the display of the period display part M1 from the display contents of FIG. 251(b) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. FIG. 263(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 263(c) shows the additional period display section Ma and the period display section M2 showing the additional operation effective period from the display content of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

As shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(c), since the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is not changed as the additional effect, the period in which the additional effect is executed is the period in which the operation effective period is not set. Therefore, the period display parts M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display part Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

However, as an effect mode, since the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the effective period notification section Sa shown in FIG. 251, as an information prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, the operation is effective. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22 in the period (operation invalid period) between the period and the operation valid period.

In this way, by executing the notification (display of the operation display unit Sb) that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as the effect mode, without changing the operation effective period as the additional effect, the player is informed. It is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 over a plurality of operation valid periods, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the action of operating the frame button 22 and the action of stopping the frame button 22 are frequently repeated. ..

In this case, as an effect mode of the additional effect, it is preferable to use an effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. This makes it possible to make the player think that the display mode is variable based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22, although the operation is actually the invalid period.

Specifically, as an effect that is actually executed during the operation valid period, an effect that an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(a), or an effect that is shown in FIG. 251(b). The effect of changing the content of the comment on the way based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the effect of accumulating the meter based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(c) is the operation of the frame button 22. It is advisable to execute a pseudo effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the situation.

This makes it possible to make the user think that the display mode is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the above-described pseudo effect mode is changed may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval or number of operations) performed on the frame button 22 performed during the actual operation valid period. As a result, it is possible to think that the presentation mode during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. Each of the control examples described above constitutes various effects as an operation effect for the player to operate the frame button 22. The present control example is different in that the effect mode control when the operation effect in each control example described above is executed is different.

Specifically, based on the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect, control for changing the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated is executed. With this configuration, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes equal to or less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes the predetermined time. Execution of an effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode (the amount of increase in the meter, the amount of increase in the numerical value, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) than in the above case (more than 5 seconds, for example). So, you can entertain the operation production to the end.

Further, in the operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, long-press operation) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the remaining period of the operation effective period is equal to or less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When it is less than or equal to 2 seconds), the period for determining that a long press operation is performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). With such a configuration, it is possible to experience a change in the presentation mode based on the long press operation even at the end of the operation presentation, so that the operation presentation can be enjoyed to the end.

In the eighth control example, a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the above-described control examples, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is performed. It differs from the changed point. About other points, it is the same as each control example mentioned above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the respective control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 264(a) and 264(b), the operation effect in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 264(a), during the variable display of the third symbol, a display mode that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, a remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time for which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the pattern imitating the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is changed based on the decrease of the remaining time. In the present control example, the remaining time period is set to a red display color, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is variably displayed in white (the part displayed in red decreases) ( See FIG. 264(b)).

Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time, it is controlled (determined) to be in the same state as the automatic continuous hitting. The characters are displayed. Then, an indicator whose color is changed based on repeated hits of the frame button 22 is displayed above the display area. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the degree of expectation that the result of the determination of the special symbol whose scale is changing is a hit is set. When the color of the indicator is variably displayed (variable from white to red) by hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly until the scale of the indicator has a larger value, the player cannot judge whether or not the special symbol is changing. You can expect it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 264(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or 1 second), the pattern button imitating the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time. The character “automatic continuous hitting” is displayed, which indicates that the automatic hitting has been set. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be long-pressed is variably set according to the remaining time when the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds until then, the setting determined to be a long press is set for 1 second continuously. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined to be a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time becomes short, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed according to the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured. Further, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less), when the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value which is a value at which the indicator is changed or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX If the effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be varied up to the scale 1 and the like).

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, regarding the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707) which is one process in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time (frame button operation valid period) is greater than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW valid time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is incremented by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 in the range of the effect value set in the variation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. A display command is set (S7042). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. It is determined whether or not (S7043). When it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW press counter (not shown) is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S7044). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the present control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after being pressed, it is determined that the continuous pressing is performed, and the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is incremented by one. Update. Then, when it becomes equal to or longer than the long press determination value, the SW indicator is set to be variable. The amount by which the SW indicator varies is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set so as to represent the degree of expectation of the win/fail judgment result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator even if the player presses the button for a long time or repeatedly hits it. Further, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, it is possible to show the player the effect of changing the indicator even when the SW effective time is short. The speed at which the indicator is changed may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

The SW press counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and further to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a pressing frequency measurement counter) and a counter that measures the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the press of the frame button 22 is started, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count measurement counter is not added, but the value of the press period measurement counter is added, and the value of the press period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value has reached 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the pressing period determination means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed. May be.

As described above, by providing the pressing count measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 independently.

Next, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) described above, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is the predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time. Even if the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short, the long press operation is shortened by shortening the long press judgment value that is a value for determining that (Auto continuous hit) can be executed, and when the long press judgment value is shortened, the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is changed. The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that is variably set) by the long-pressing operation (automatic continuous hitting) executed in the above.

On the other hand, in the present modification, when the long press operation (automatic hit) is executed in the state where the long press determination value is shortened, the long press operation (auto It is different in that the value of the SW pressing counter is added more than that of continuous hitting.

In this modified example, when a long press operation (automatic continuous hit) is performed in a state where the long press determination value is shortened, a large value of the SW press counter is added (the automatic continuous hit interval is short. However, other configurations may be used, for example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large value of the SW pressing counter by automatic continuous hitting may be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of the present modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, similarly to the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above, steps S7031 to S7037 are performed. The process is executed. Then, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051), and not 1 second. When it is determined to be (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processes of S7038, S7041 and S7042 are executed similarly to the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7051, if it is determined that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is added by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is added by 2 ( In step S7053, a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (step S7042), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), it is the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Then, the processes of S7043 and S7044 are executed and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present modified example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is less than or equal to the predetermined period (5 seconds or less). The value (time) to be used is shortened (reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter that is added by the automatic continuous hit operation is added more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range preset to be variable) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hit) executed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

Further, unlike the above-described eighth control example, the value added to the SW press counter is configured to increase, so that the value of the SW press counter and the value of the SW indicator can be associated with each other, and the control load can be increased. There is also an effect that can reduce.

The SW press counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and further to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a pressing frequency measurement counter) and a counter that measures the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the press of the frame button 22 is started, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count measurement counter is not added, but the value of the press period measurement counter is added, and the value of the press period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value has reached 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the pressing period determination means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed. May be.

As described above, by providing the pressing count measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 independently.

As described above, the configurations described in each control example may be appropriately combined, and in particular, each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example and each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example are combined. Alternatively, each configuration of the composite press effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configuration of each press effect in the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each configuration of the continuous slot effect described above is combined with each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, and each configuration of the point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. You may combine with each structure of the point production which performed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, and an abutting member that is abuttable to the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. A first member that is linearly displaceable in the member, a pinion gear that is rotatably disposed in the first member, and a rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and that is linearly displaceable in the first member. A second member provided, the base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is in contact with the contact member. Gaming machine A1.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member that is linearly displaceable on the base member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or the contact member is provided at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , Which causes the displacement member to contact the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper) when the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. Are known.

However, the above-described conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is contacted with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is reduced in order to suppress damage, the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the abutting member while ensuring the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member. Since the rack gear of the base member is engaged with the rack gear through the pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased more than the first member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect produced by the displacement can be secured. On the other hand, the displacement member causes the first member, which has a lower displacement speed than the second member, to abut against the abutting member, so that the impact at the time of abutment is weakened and the displacement member and the abutting member are prevented from being damaged. can do.

As a mode of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a rack gear formed on the first member is meshed with a pinion gear arranged on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to drive the first member to the base member. A member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member, or a distal end of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member, and the arm member is rotationally driven to move the first member to the base member. For example, a linear displacement may be used.

The contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the protruding direction with respect to the first member, or Alternatively, it may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In any case, the first member, which has a lower displacement speed than the second member, is brought into contact with the abutting member, so that the impact at the time of the abutting is weakened, and the displacement member and the abutting member Damage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A gaming machine A2, which is in a direction in which displacement is allowed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. At this time, since the displacement member is in a direction in which the displacement member is allowed to displace, the contact member receives the displacement of the displacement member and escapes, whereby a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

In addition, the direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component of the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacing member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to the direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is contacted. At this time, the abutting member can smoothly escape. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert the cushioning effect and to easily prevent the displacement member and the contact member from being damaged.

The gaming machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member, so that the overall size of the device is small. Can be promoted. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. In that case, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement increases correspondingly, leading to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, since the one guide member is also used, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 can be arranged at a position where the abutting member does not abut the displacing member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where it does not contact the displacement member, so that the displacement member contacts the contact member. It is possible to form a non-contact state. That is, when linearly displacing the displacement member at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the contact position of the displacement member is easily matched to the target position. It is placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member, and by not contacting them, the number of times of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and their life is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A gaming machine A6, which is formed to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging with the rack gear of the base member through the pinion gear rotatably arranged in the first member, the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member is utilized to move the second member from the first member. Also, since the structure is such that it is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, at the time of the initial operation of the displacement member (when the linear displacement starts from the stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of the linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be impaired.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect produced by the displacement.

The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least the component of the linear displacement direction of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts the first member of the displacement members. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, among the displacement members Since the first member is brought into contact with the first member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, the abutting member is brought into contact with the first member having a lower displacement speed than the second member and pushes back the first member, so that an assisting force acts from the abutting member to the displacing member (first member). Longer (that is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state is pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member until the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased.

In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. A game machine A8, characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the abutting member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism of the first member Since the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, the displacement member can be quickly and linearly displaced from the stopped state, and after the linear displacement is started, the displacement member ( The speed of the linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect produced by the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, so that the force of pushing back the displacement member by the contact member is increased and the displacement is increased. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the linear displacement speed of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. The speed can be increased.

Note that a large gear ratio (small) means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one revolution is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slower. That is, it is impossible to achieve both the speeding up of the initial movement of the displacement member and the speed of the linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement at the same time. By adopting a structure in which the displacement member is pushed back, it is possible to achieve such compatibility for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention with the lower united unit 600 as an example>
Drive means, a displacement member driven by the drive means and formed to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member against which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts In the gaming machine, the gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are displaceable between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. A gaming machine to be formed is known (for example, JP-A-2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, by displacing a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position in a direction in which they approach each other and abutting (joining) them at a contact position, the pair of displacement members are integrated. The production of one character is realized.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, a shock occurs, and the postures become unstable, for example, they bounce each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of abutting, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character increases, and it extends. The effect of production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the displacement speed of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the contacted member to form one character, and it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member that is stopped at the first position, or may be a member that is formed to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is arranged at the first position before the displacing member (that is, the displacing member is moved with respect to the abutted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state). Abutting), and is disposed at the first position substantially at the same time as the displacing member (that is, the displacing member and the abutted member that are in a mutually displaced state are abutting at the first position). May be

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases near the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position, or a form in which the component decreases gradually toward the first position , A combination of these is exemplified.

Further, the reduction of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is decreased but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes zero, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is one of the velocity components of the displacement member in a state where the drive state of the drive means is constant. A gaming machine B2, wherein at least a component of the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means reduces the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state in which the driving state is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving unit according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the driving means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

In addition, as a state in which the driving state is constant, for example, when the driving unit is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. It However, the change of state in the transient response at the time of starting and stopping shall be ignored.

In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member displaceably disposed, and the transmission means is provided at a position distant from the rotation base portion rotatably connected to the base member and a predetermined distance from the rotation base portion. A connecting member having a connecting tip that is rotatably connected to the displacement member, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in a direction to bring the connecting tip closer to the first position. By doing so, the displacement member is displaced toward the first position, and the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, the connecting member is provided between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in the direction of bringing the connecting tip toward the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) in the velocity component of the displacement member is rotated. The component in the direction toward can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is such that the connecting member is provided between the base member and the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced through the connecting member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission is performed. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member displaceably disposed, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending in the base member and guiding the displacement member, and the displacement member includes: A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the abutted member. Is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes the guide groove that is extended to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes the guided portion that is guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease near the first position. Thus, the transmission means is provided with the guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means is provided. The structure of can be simplified.

The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided with an interposing member having one side displaceably coupled to the base member and the other side displaceably coupled to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. The driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission unit, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of the displacement caused by the action of the transmission means and the displacement caused by the action of the interposition member. This makes it possible to complicate the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

In the gaming machine B5, the interposing member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member on the one side and the other side by a pivotal support.

According to the gaming machine B6, the interposing member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member on one side and the other side. Therefore, when the displacing member is displaced, the interposing member is unilateral. With the center of rotation as the center of rotation, the other side is displaced along an arcuate trajectory. Therefore, the arcuate displacement (that is, the displacement in which the displacement direction is constantly changed along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the interposed member member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the form of the displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means causes the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member to be at least approximately zero at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Amusement machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction of moving away from the contacted member at the first position, when the displacement member displaced to the first position contacts the contacted member, the displacement member Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

Further, if the value is a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, Since it is possible to increase the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value), it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of impact.

Any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8 is provided with a second drive means for driving the abutted member and a second transmission means for transmitting a driving force of the second drive means to the abutting member, and The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means controls the velocity component of the abutted member while the driving state of the second driving means is constant. A game machine B9, wherein at least a component of the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and therefore the effect by abutting the pair of members. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacing member in the direction of approaching each other and abutting (joining) at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmission means is at least one of the speed components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from bouncing back to each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the displacement speed of the abutting member can be increased, the time required to integrate the abutted member with the displacing member to form one character is reduced for both the abutting member and the displacing member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. Since it can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second drive means and reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the gaming machine B9 can be applied by replacing them with the displacement member, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the gaming machines B2 to B8. Therefore, the interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be provided between the base member and the contacted member.

<About the concept of the invention with the protrusion unit 700 as an example>
Driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and first transmitting means and second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. And a first predetermined section in which the first driving force is applied to the drive section, and the first drive section is loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means, and the second transmission means is configured to form a second predetermined section in which the second driving force is applied to the driving means. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force applied in the second predetermined section is applied to the driving means, and the first transmission means is provided with the first transmission means. In a state in which one predetermined section is formed, the second transmission unit forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and the second transmission unit forms the second predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the drive means, the first member and the second member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and the first transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine including a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-53958). According to such a gaming machine, the two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one driving means, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the structure in which the second member is displaced by the first driving means, the driving force for driving both members is overlapped, so that the load of the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is deteriorated. It was On the other hand, in the configuration in which the second member (the first member and the second member) is displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed. The staging effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section in which the load of the driving means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first transmission section can be formed. In the state where the second transmission means can form the second predetermined section and the second suppression section in which the load of the driving means can be smaller than that of the second predetermined section, and the first transmission section forms the first predetermined section, In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression zone and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined zone in at least a part of the first predetermined zone, the second transmission means forms the second suppression zone in at least a part of the second predetermined zone. 1 transmission means forms a 1st suppression area, namely, when one is comparatively high load, the other is comparatively low load, and when the other is comparatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, the load of the driving unit can be distributed, and the load of the driving unit can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced, so that it is possible to reduce the load of the driving means. The staging effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a cam member that is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and the first member is rubbed against the peripheral surface of the cam member. A cam friction contact member for imparting a displacement to the second member, wherein the displacement amount of the cam friction contact member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined value in the first suppression section or the second suppression section. A game machine C2 characterized by reducing the load of the drive means by reducing the displacement amount of the cam contact member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a crank member having a pin portion eccentrically located from the center of rotation of the main body. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides and which displaces the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement amount of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member is calculated as the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. A game machine C3 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by interlocking the cam member and the cam rubbing member or interlocking the crank member and crank rubbing member, Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The displacement amount of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving unit (for example, the electric power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is enhanced while enhancing the effect of production. In the section, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the second suppression section. In the two suppression sections, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, the first member or the second member is used to utilize its own weight to The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member in this way, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When changing the load of the driving means as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the driving means can be changed while maintaining the above.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the peripheral surface of the cam member to impart a displacement to the first member. And a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion eccentric to the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank rubbing member for providing a displacement to the second member when the pin portion of the member has a guide groove for sliding and the pin portion slides along the guide groove; A game machine C5, wherein the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so a space for disposing the cam member and the crank member separately. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a non-transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, or the first member or the second member. A non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means does not apply the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, it is possible to form a non-transmission section that maintains the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that it is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means increases due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. Since it is difficult to smoothly displace, the non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state by not transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum has been imparted (that is, after passing through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission section, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each non-transmission section. A gaming machine C7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form non-transmission sections, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the drive means can be idly rotated under a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, in a state where one of the first member and the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member and the second member is a displacement component in the downward direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, in the state where one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other of the first member and the second member is displaced. Has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement when displacing the other of the first member and the second member while maintaining the other in the stopped state. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member and the second member can be displaced while one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both of the first member and the second member stop. It is possible to improve the effect by avoiding the state.

In any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart a displacement to the first member or the second member. A crank rubbing member, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. When the first member or the second member starts to be displaced by passing through the transmission section and reaches the predetermined position of the guide groove, the pin portion changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. In this case, the game machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank contact member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is a non-transmission section. , The pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin section reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When it is slid toward the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed). In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section and changes its direction at a predetermined position, so that the shape of the non-transmitting section is an arc that is convex toward the rotation center of the crank member. Becomes Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance becomes large, but also the displacement amount of the crank scraping member per unit rotation of the crank member becomes large, so that the driving means Is overloaded. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to slide the displacement, the slide member is rotatable. And a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational movement of the rotation member, wherein the conversion means includes a rotation displacement of the rotation member. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being capable of forming a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a base member, a slide member slidably arranged on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the slide member to slide the slide member. (For example, JP2013-236802A). Further, there is also known a gaming machine in which a rotary member and a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotary member are provided on a slide member. According to this gaming machine, while the slide member is slidingly displaced (linear movement), the rotary member arranged on the slide member can be rotationally moved, and an effect combining linear movement and rotary movement can be performed. You can

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged in the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, since the gaming machine D1 includes the rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member, and the conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotating member, The rotary member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing it.

In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, since the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the sliding member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the sliding member is slid and displaced while the rotating member remains unrotated. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear, and a release means that is formed to be able to release the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear and that is disposed on the base member. A gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the slide member so as to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slidable displacement can be converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member. Further, since the converting means includes the releasing means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. That is, not only can the rotation member be rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide member can be slid and displaced while the rotation member remains unrotated. The number of combinations of member movements (linear and rotary) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is provided on the base member, and it is not necessary to provide means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to a tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby engaging the gear between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the releasing means causes the rack gear to rotate by rotating at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. Of at least the rack gear is rotated along an axis of rotation parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to a tooth surface of the rack gear. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby forming the rack gear and the pinion gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear, and a gaming machine D6, characterized in that a part of the rack gear has teeth missing.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack member, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational movement of the rotary member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, when the pinion gear passes through a part of the rack gear lacking teeth, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion where the tooth of the rack gear is missing, while the tooth of the rack gear is rotated. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the part where the mark is missing, the rotation of the rotary member can be continued by its inertial force.

Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the state in which the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped It is possible to form a configuration in which the rotating member is rotated, and it is possible to increase the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine D6, a part of the teeth of the rack gear is omitted, so that the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released. A means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to arrange the slide member, it is possible to reduce the weight of the slide member as a whole. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D6, the teeth of the teeth of the rack gear that are adjacent to the missing portion have higher rigidity than the other teeth.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than other teeth, so that the durability thereof is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing part collide with the teeth of the pinion gear passing through the missing part of the rack gear, so that the teeth are likely to be damaged, and the rigidity is increased to improve the durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a mode in which the tooth width of the teeth is increased is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without deteriorating the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear and a one-way clutch arranged in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, the one-way clutch is changed between a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the transmission is blocked. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being formed possible.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack member, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational movement of the rotary member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that it can be switched between a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the transmission is blocked. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only is the one-way clutch in a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and the rotation member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, but for example, the one-way clutch is in a state in which the transmission of rotation is cut off. The slide member is slid and displaced without rotating, or the slide member is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which the transmission is blocked when the displacement of the slide member is stopped, It is possible to form a configuration in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by the inertial force of the rotating member when the rotation is stopped.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is not rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotary member is displaced or a form in which the rotary member is rotated in a state where the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member You can increase. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the slide member, and drive means disposed on the slide member for driving the displacement member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A gaming machine D9, which is provided with an operating element that is operated to change a state in which the operation is allowed and a state in which the operating state is cut off, and the operating element is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, the gaming machine D9 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a drive unit that drives the displacement member and that is disposed on the slide member. In addition to the movements of the slide member and the rotary member (linear movement and rotary movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of the combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operating element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing an effect by displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a means for operating the operating element of the one-way clutch on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch is provided with an operator that is operated to change a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the rotation is blocked, and the base member is provided when the slide member is slid and displaced. A gaming machine D10, comprising: an engaging portion positioned on a displacement locus of the operating element, wherein the operating element is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, the base member is provided with the engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slid and displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slid and displaced. Since the manipulator is operated by the joint portion, it is not necessary to dispose a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the manipulator) on the slide member. Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

It should be noted that the disposition position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the above-described displacement trajectory of the operator. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement trajectory, or may be in the middle of the displacement trajectory.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. A gaming machine D11, wherein the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position at which the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position at which the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the permitted state. Thereby, the position at which the rotation state of the rotary member is changed when the slide member is slid and displaced, and the position at which the rotary member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped are determined according to, for example, a game state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since it also has a role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. A gaming machine D12, wherein the position of the engagement portion is formed to be changeable between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot operate with the sliding displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch can be switched and a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch cannot be switched when the slide member is slid and displaced. That is, the rotation state of the rotary member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and the rotation state of the rotary member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. Can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since it also has a role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be provided on the second slide member or the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second slide member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shielded state that shields a predetermined area of the base member and an open state that opens the predetermined area, the shield opening means includes: A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second rack gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear. A second rack member that has the first member and is linearly displaceable on the first member; and a base rack gear that is formed on the base member and meshes with the first pinion gear. By linearly displacing the two members to one side, the shielding state is formed, and by linearly displacing the first member and the second member to the other side opposite to the one side, A gaming machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shielded state in which a predetermined region of the base member is shielded and a shielded state in which a predetermined region is opened. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotary plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotary plates are directed to the front to shield the predetermined region. On the other hand, each of the rotating plates is rotated 90 degrees to turn the plate thickness portion (side surface) toward the front, thereby forming a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state). Is disclosed.

However, according to the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the open state is formed, the rotary plate remains rotated in the predetermined region by 90 degrees and the plate thickness portion (side surface) faces forward. However, there is a problem that the area to be released is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotary plate is made thin, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-shaped body having the same area as the predetermined area is displaceably arranged, and the plate-shaped body is displaced (disposed) to the predetermined area to shield the predetermined area (shielding). On the other hand, there is also known a gaming machine having a structure in which a predetermined area is opened (an open state is formed) by retracting a plate-shaped body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area). There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined area, the predetermined area can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for disposing the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. However, there is a problem in that it becomes necessary and leads to an increase in size. Further, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area or to place the plate-shaped body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shield opening means includes the first member rotatably arranged on the base member, the first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and the first member. A second side rack gear having a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed, and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and meshing with the first side pinion gear. And the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, the open state is formed.

That is, the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to suppress the space for doing so and achieve miniaturization.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined area or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In addition, the shielding state in which the predetermined area is shielded does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and an area opened in a part of the predetermined area. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is formed by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is linearly displaceably supported by the base member, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the A second main body part having the second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement part connected to the second main body part. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. The second member is provided, and the second member has a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is linearly displaceably supported by the first member, and is connected to the second body part. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first main body part of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region. In addition, only the loci of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be overlapped on the predetermined region. That is, the first main body portion and the second main body portion can be passed outside the predetermined region, and the locus thereof can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined region. Accordingly, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and the first member and the second member are not partially left in the predetermined area. The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is the first member. Since the first member is provided in the first main body part and the first gear is driven by the drive gear to linearly displace the first member with respect to the base member, the structure for linearly displacing the first member is small. Can be converted. That is, of the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, it is possible to reduce the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a second side pinion gear thereof. A gaming machine E4, comprising: a third member having a third rack gear meshed with the third member; and a third member linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear to form the second side pinion gear. And a third member having a third rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side along with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are evacuated from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area. ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas by that amount. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) as described above, compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for disposing the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superposing three divided areas than by superposing a predetermined divided area.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member, and Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined area or from the retracted position. It is possible to shorten the time required to dispose in a predetermined area and switch between the shielded state and the open state more quickly.

In the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and a third main body portion thereof. A gaming machine E5, comprising: a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body part and the third displacement part connected to the third main body part are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be overlapped on the predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion, and the third main body portion can be passed outside the predetermined region, and their loci can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third member are placed in the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member to the second member) in the gaming machine E4 or E5 may be expanded to provide a gaming machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member,..., An n-th member.

That is, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed. A configuration in which a second member is provided so as to be linearly displaceable and a third member is extended so that the shield opening means is rotatably provided at the n-th member and meshes with the base-side rack gear. The nth side pinion gear and the (n+1)th side rack gear meshed with the nth side pinion gear, and the (n+1)th member linearly displaceable with respect to the nth member may be further provided. However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is connected to the third main body part supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. By expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the (n+1)th member has an (n+1)th side rack gear with which the nth side pinion gear is meshed, and is also supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an (n+1)th displacement portion connected to the (n+1)th main body portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a third member that is linearly displaceable in the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. Third linear displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when linearly displaced. A gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, when the shield opening means is linearly displaced toward the one side or the other side, the third member disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. And a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved.

That is, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are evacuated from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area. ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas by that amount. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In addition, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) as described above, compared with the case where the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for disposing the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area becomes smaller when the three areas are superposed than when the predetermined area is divided into two.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilizing means linearly displaces the third member in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is accelerated because the second member is accelerated. The linear displacement of can be accelerated at least as compared with the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or arranging the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state is further improved. Can be done quickly.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. The gaming machine F1 is disposed, and the second member is disposed at the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member that are linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, by displacing the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position to the projecting position and bringing them into close proximity or contact with each other, the two are associated (integrated). , The effect of allowing the player to visually recognize it as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the projecting position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are each displaced to the bulging position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are increased in size, they move to the bulging position. They may interfere with each other during the displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. Therefore, it takes time until the character is formed, and the character is extended. There was a problem that the effect of production was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to be arranged at the extended position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. As a result, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced in a combination of a rotational displacement and a linear displacement.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the second member is displaced in a combined manner of the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, so that the second member is arranged in the projecting position, and thus the curved shape is obtained. The trajectory of can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

In the gaming machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the second member is displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. A game machine F3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are performed. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the bulging position, and the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be freely adjusted. You can increase the degree. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the bulging position by the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not moved to the bulging position, but to the first position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member in the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture in the extended position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member in the retracted position can be increased.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, a liquid crystal display device provided in the game area is provided, and the retreat position of the second member is set to one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4, wherein the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position and is vertically arranged at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape and is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhang position to form a character together with the first member, it is not possible to form a large-sized character, and sufficient effect is produced. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically long, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow, and the space for disposing the members is small. Is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the extended position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for disposing the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the second member can be increased in size accordingly, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the extended position. Can be made larger.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with a drive means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Amusement machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member are synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the extended position can be made larger. .. For example, even in areas such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing the members, the second member is retracted to the areas. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a third member that is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position is provided, and the third member includes the first member and the second member in the extended position. A gaming machine F6, which is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes the third member that is displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so that the first member and the second member are provided. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the staging effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, the third member is arranged in the front-back direction at a position different from that of the first member and the second member at the projecting position, and thus does not contact the first member and the second member at the projecting position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the projecting position, or when they are likely to be brought into contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of damage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent third member is displaced so as to catch up with the starting first member and the second member at the projecting position, and the staging effect when forming the character can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine F6, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed to overhang the first member and the second member in the same front-back direction position.

Here, if the positions of the first member and the second member and the third member are different from each other in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension of the gaming machine is correspondingly increased and the size is increased. If the front-back dimension of each of the first member and the second member and the third member is reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the front-back dimension, it becomes difficult to secure rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member is provided with an overhanging portion formed by overhanging on the side having the same front-back direction position as the first member and the second member. The total size of the second member and the third member) is suppressed, and the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction is reduced, while the size of the third member is increased in the front-rear direction to secure its rigidity. can do.

The gaming machine F8 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, which includes a contacted member that is disposed on the first member and abuts a part of the second member at the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is contacted at the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly contacted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the projecting position, or the first member and It may be formed at a position where the second member abuts when the second member is closer to the reference position than the reference position due to control fluctuations and dimensional fluctuations when the second member is arranged at the projecting position.

In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction in which the contacted member approaches and separates from the first member, and the first member has the contacted member separated from the first member. A gaming machine F9, which is arranged in an overhang position.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is the abutted member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the bulging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to reliably contact the second member at the bulging position. Further, since the contacted member is displaced in the direction in which it is separated from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

In the gaming machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction of approaching the first member, the gaming machine F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the abutted member is displaced in a direction in which the first member is brought closer to the first member after the first member is arranged at the projecting position. A space for displacing the member can be formed. That is, when the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the contacted member is separated from the first member, and the role of receiving the displacement of the second member is exerted. It is possible to displace the contacted member in the direction of approaching it, and use the space formed with the displacement as the displacement space for the second member, and the displacement of the second member can enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction in which the abutted member comes close to and away from the first member, and the first member is such that the abutted member is the first member at least in the retracted position. A gaming machine F11 characterized in that the gaming machine F11 is brought into a state of being close to.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is abutted at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being close to the first member, it is possible to suppress the installation space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the abutted member is displaced in the protruding position in the direction away from the first member, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the abutted member is brought close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. ..

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of production.

In any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Accordingly, in the other set, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member, and the gaming machine F13.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and the contacted member is contacted by the second member in one set. When contacted, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set due to the contact, so that, for example, in one set, the second member is positioned at the reference position. When it is displaced beyond and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member in the other set can be displaced toward the second member in association with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member in the other set contacts the second member, the impact caused by the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the one set may not be received by only the first member. Instead, the second member in the other set can be received. Thereby, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Note that, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member as a result of the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set causes the displacement of the contacted member in the other set. The structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, With the transmission, the first member is displaced, so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure in which these members are combined. Is exemplified.

One of the gaming machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position and that is capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be capable of contacting the first member and the second member at the extended position. Since the periodic displacement is possible, it is possible to periodically displace the first member and the second member by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, it is possible to vibrate the character formed by the first member and the second member, and the cyclically displacing member, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, in this case, the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first member and the second member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other or may be in a separated state (non-contact) at the extended position.

In the gaming machine F14, the gaming machine F15 is characterized in that the cyclically displacing member is arranged at a position in which the front-rear direction position in the projecting position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14, the cyclically displacing member is arranged such that the front-rear direction position in the projecting position is located in front of the first member and the second member. It is possible to periodically displace (vibrate) a member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the user. That is, since the character on the front side, which is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, vibrates the character, it is possible to perform an effect in which the power of the vibration is easily transmitted to the player.

In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16, wherein the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14 or F15, since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position, the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is reduced to the first. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes without relating to each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700 and the lower united unit 800 as an example>
A first group composed of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group composed of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the projecting position, a first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and In the gaming machine in which when the respective displacement means are arranged at the projecting position, the second effect mode is formed by the respective displacement means of the second group, one displacement means of the first group and the above A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a combined means which also serves as one displacement means of the second group.

Here, from a first group of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position and a plurality of displacement means formed displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine having a second group consisting of the following is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this gaming machine, when the respective displacement means of the first group are arranged at the projecting position, the respective displacement means of the first group are associated (integrated) with each other so that one character (first While letting the player recognize it as a production mode), when the respective displacement means of the second group are arranged at the projecting position, the respective displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated) with each other to create another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of causing the player to recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, while displacing each displacing means of the second group to the retracted position, arranging each displacing means of the first group to the projecting position, each of the first group The first character is formed in the game area by the displacing means, and in the second gaming state, the displacing means of the first group are evacuated to the retracted position, while the displacing means of the second group are extended to the extended position. By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area is performed by the respective displacement means of the second group.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger character in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (effect modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters also increases, and thus each displacement means is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means because the area (space) for keeping them is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (effect mode).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the dual-purpose means that doubles as one displacing means of the first group and one displacing means of the second group is provided, a plurality of (second It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second) rendering modes, and it is possible to increase the size of each displacement means. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is a position in which an overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and an overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. A gaming machine G2 characterized by the following.

Here, when the combined means is arranged at the same projecting position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are generated. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (combined means) is used in the presentation mode, which hinders interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means forms the overhang position and the second rendering mode which are arranged when the first rendering mode is formed. Since the overhanging position arranged at this time is set to a different position, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the combined use means is used for both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed. Moreover, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position).

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combined use means is configured such that a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. Gaming machine G3.

Here, when the combination means has the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is used, and this hinders interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively by using the combined means having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced correspondingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the effect mode of (1).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since different postures are used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the combined use means is used for both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being disturbed. . Further, the degree of freedom can be increased because the combined means can have different postures in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement) (Position position) can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, it is moved forward and backward with respect to at least one displacing means of the first group. A gaming machine G4, which has different directional positions and at least partially overlaps each other in a front view.

Here, the dual-purpose means forms different stop positions and/or different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect mode is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stopped state (arrangement position or (and/or) posture) easily varies. In this case, in the structure in which the combined use device abuts the one displacement device at the extended position (at least a part of the front-rear direction positions match each other), the combined use device does not reach the target position unless the combined position or the posture reaches the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacing means and the displacing means, when the disposition position or posture exceeds the target position, one displacing means is pushed out to cause displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when forming the first effect mode, The position in the front-rear direction is different from at least one of the displacement means, and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps with each other in a front view. Therefore, even if the stop state (the bulging position or (and) posture) varies, The relation between the displacement means and the combined use means can be easily maintained. That is, even when the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the overlapping in part when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the different front-rear direction positions. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of one displacement means being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined use means.

In the gaming machine G4, the one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) with each other so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined use means is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (extended position or (and) posture), and when the combined use means is in the extended position when forming the first effect mode. , In the structure in which the displacement means is brought into contact (at least a part of the front-rear direction positions thereof coincide with each other), the gap between the displacement means and the displacement means must be reached unless the arrangement position or posture of the dual purpose means reaches the target position. Are formed, and association (integration) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or the posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a positional deviation, which hinders the association (integration). That is, when one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are in contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is shown). Is partially effective).

In the gaming machine G5, when the dual purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, the dual purpose means is positioned on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap with each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, it is more effective than the one displacing means and the other displacing means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction, and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap with each other in a front view, for example, the one displacement means and/or the other displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position and a gap is formed between the displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relation between the one displacement means and the other displacement means from being disturbed, and to easily maintain the relation between both the displacement means and the combined use means.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. And a projecting position of the dual-purpose means arranged when forming the first effect mode, and a projecting position of the dual-purpose means arranged when forming the second effect mode. Are different positions, and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the first effect mode is different from the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the second effect mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

In the gaming machine G7, the front-rear direction position of one displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the dual purpose means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the shared use means, so that the combined use is possible. By arranging the means on the front side further and making it easier for the player to visually recognize, the front-rear direction positions of the one displacing means and the combined use means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the one displacing means and the combined use means.

In the gaming machine G8, the one displacing means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view in a state in which the one displacing means and the dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. A gaming machine G9 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G8, the one displacing means and the linear base member are arranged in a state in which the one displacing means and the combined use means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the projecting position in order to form the first effect mode, the one displacement means is arranged in a straight line because they are arranged at the overlapping position in the front view. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the gaming machine G9, the other displacing means is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the linear base member in a front view in a state where the other displacing means and the combined use means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. The other displacing means and the other displacing means are arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view in the middle of being displaced toward the projecting position, and the linear base member is A gaming machine G10, wherein at least an area in which the other displacing means overlaps in front view has a front-back dimension smaller than an area in which the one displacing means overlaps in front view.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, in the state where the other displacing means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retreat position, the other displacing means are arranged in front of the linear base member. Are arranged at positions that do not overlap with each other when viewed, and while the other displacing means and the combined means are being displaced toward the projecting position, the other displacing means are arranged at a position that overlaps with the linear base member when viewed from the front, and the linear base member Has a dimension in the front-back direction in which at least another displacement means overlaps in front view is smaller than a region in which one displacement means overlaps in front view. Therefore, in order to form the first effect mode, another displacement means is formed. Also, when the linear base member (combined means) is displaced to the projecting position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

In the gaming machine G10, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace the linear base member, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose member, and the conversion mechanism, The gaming machine G11, wherein the one displacing means of the linear base member is arranged in an overlapping region in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G10, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the combined use unit. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the dual purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the displacing means and the combined use means.

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined use means, the combined use means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the extended position can be made larger. For example, even in areas such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing members, the dual-purpose means material is retracted in such areas. It is possible to form the combined use device in a large size while setting the position.

In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in a region where one of the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the retracted position in a front view, and accordingly, in another region of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged. The front-back dimension of the area can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacing means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the projecting position, it is possible to prevent the other displacing means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
Performance mode setting means capable of setting any performance mode among a plurality of performance modes, display means capable of displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and stage information of a plurality of stages on the display means. A step information display means for displaying the step information, a step information variable means for changing the step information displayed by the step information display means, and a case where the step information is changed to predetermined step information by the step information changing means. Switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to the display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. And a gaming machine H1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to set a plurality of effect modes as effect modes displayed on the display device, and a predetermined score is given to the player when a specific effect mode is set, There is one in which an effect based on the accumulated value of the given points is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-215579).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the score is given only in a specific effect mode, the accumulated value of the score obtained when the mode is changed to another effect mode is discarded, so that the player is There was a problem that the player's motivation to score points decreased and he became tired of the game early. Further, in order to surely execute the effect using the given score, it is necessary to fix the effect mode to a specific effect mode from the time when the score is applied until the effect based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production was monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, one of the plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting unit, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display unit. On the display means, stage information of a plurality of stages is variably displayed by the stage information changing means by the stage information displaying means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information, a specific effect is produced by the specific effect executing means. Is executed. The display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display unit is switched by the switching unit to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit.

Thereby, even if a different presentation mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set presentation mode, and thus the stage information is continuously used even if the production mode is changed. It is possible to execute the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

The gaming machine H1 has a stage information storage unit for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display unit, and the stage information display unit, when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, A gaming machine H2, which displays the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. The stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored in the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display unit based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit.

Accordingly, even when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit. Therefore, even if a different effect mode is set, it is possible to continuously execute the effect using the stage information, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

The display mode corresponding to the rendering mode is, for example, the number, the character, the symbol used in the currently set rendering mode, or the character appearing in the rendering mode, which is the identification information that can identify the given score. It is conceivable that the display mode using is used. Further, it is considered that the image associated with the identification information with which the given score can be identified has a display mode using an image corresponding to the motif (for example, sea or mountain) used in the currently set rendering mode. Be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is changed while the effect displaying the step information is being executed, the changed effect mode It is possible to display the stage information without giving a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, at least predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that different presentation modes are set in a state in which the predetermined stage information is displayed, Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the predetermined stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information approximate to the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, at least the approximate stage information which approximates the predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if a different presentation mode is set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, in a state where the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is about to be displayed is displayed, when the effect mode is switched, the stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

Here, as the approximation stage information in the gaming machine H4, for example, when an indicator capable of displaying the stage information in seven stages is used, the stage information indicating the seventh stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information, and the approximation is performed. The stage information indicating the sixth stage may be set as the stage information.

A plurality of pieces of this approximation stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when different display modes are set and the display modes are switched.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means has a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode when the specific step information is displayed by the step information display means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means.

As a result, the effect mode can be switched according to the displayed step information, so that the effect of the effect of displaying the step information can be enhanced.

Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the effect mode is switched in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

Further, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the effect mode is switched in a state in which the approximate stage information is not displayed, and therefore, the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine H5, the stage information display means displays the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific production mode is set by the specific production mode setting means. A gaming machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5, when the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means, the predetermined level information is displayed as the level information by the level information display means. ..

Thereby, when the specific stage information is displayed, the specific effect mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, the predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect in which the stage information is displayed, the player can be expected to switch the display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing this, since the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the predetermined stage information is changed by switching the production mode in a state where neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, the state where the expectation of the jackpot is low in the stage information display. Is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the stage information varied by the stage information varying means, and the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the stage information based on the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. A gaming machine H7, comprising: variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

The gaming machine H7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6. That is, the variable amount of the stage information that is varied by the stage information varying unit is determined by the variable amount determining unit, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit is changed. It is displayed by the variable information display means.

Thereby, the player can easily grasp the variable amount by which the stage information is varied by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since the variable amount by which the stage information is changed is displayed as the variable information corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is switched, the variable information is displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. The effect is that you can.

The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information specifically indicating the variable amount or information suggesting the variable amount (for example, information such as large variable amount or small variable amount). If the step information is displayed, the step information may be information indicating the variable step information among the plurality of step information.

Further, the timing of displaying the variable information may be appropriately set based on the displayed variable information. For example, when the information specifically showing the variable amount is displayed as the variable information, the step information changing means. The variable information may be displayed after the step information is changed by. This allows the player to gaze at the mode in which the stage information changes, and enhances the effect of production.

On the other hand, if the information indicating the variable amount or the information indicating the step information to be changed is displayed as the variable information, the variable information may be displayed before the step information is changed by the step information changing means. With this, it is possible to focus on how the step information is specifically changed after grasping the displayed variable information, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine H7, variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. A gaming machine H8, comprising: display timing setting means for setting timing.

The gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is divided into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiating means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display variable information for varying the stage information in a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a method of differentiating the variable information by the variable information differentiating means, when the variable information displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is set to a plurality of numerical values (small score). ), or if the variable information is a display that suggests a variable content of the stage information (for example, a variable degree or a variable target), divide it so that the suggested content is displayed step by step. Good. As a result, the player can be continuously focused on the effect in which the stage information is changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiating means is displayed, the variable information that is advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation that the step information is changed to the predetermined step information is high. (Variable information) may be displayed later. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect can be executed while keeping the player expecting until the end.

In the gaming machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means has a setting restricting means for restricting setting of the predetermined effect mode according to the effect mode being set. Gaming machine H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, setting regulation means regulates that a predetermined representation mode is set according to the set representation mode. Therefore, various productions can be executed by using a plurality of production modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of the predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching unit, it is possible to suppress the setting of the production mode in which it is difficult to convey to the player that the production of displaying the stage information is continuously executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the gaming machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any one of the setting conditions is satisfied. If there are a plurality of the setting conditions, the priority setting means for setting the priority order is set, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the performance is performed based on the setting condition with the higher priority set by the priority setting means. A gaming machine H10 characterized by setting a mode.

The gaming machine H10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H9. That is, when one of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting condition. Then, the priority is set by the priority setting means with respect to the plurality of setting conditions, and when a plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the performance is performed based on the setting condition with the higher priority set by the priority setting means. Aspect is set.

As a result, the effect mode is set based on the setting condition having a high priority, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (Direction display position setting)
Display means having a display area, first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a predetermined first effect execution means for the display means while the first effect execution means is being executed. In a gaming machine provided with a second effect executing means for executing two effects, the second effect executing means has the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes an effect in which points showing a predetermined value are displayed on a display device and gives a bonus effect when the number of points reaches a predetermined number (for example, , JP 2012-179176 A).

In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem in that a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and the mode in which the points are displayed becomes monotonous. Further, if the points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the points on the display device, the display of the different effects executed on the display device and the display of the points will overlap and the effect of the effects will be reduced. There was a problem of doing.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the first effect executing means executes the predetermined first effect on the display means having the display area for a predetermined period, and while the first effect executing means executes the second effect. The effect execution means causes the display means to execute a predetermined second effect in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.

Thereby, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect that is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the first effect and the second effect from being displayed in duplicate. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine J1, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means, and the second effect when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it has area changing means for changing the allowable area based on a display mode of one effect.

The gaming machine J2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means. Then, the permissible area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

As a result, it is possible to change the permissible area in which the second effect is executed based on the display area in which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, the second effect can be executed in the area related to the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J2, a first effect determination unit that determines a main subject display area in which an image serving as a main subject is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution unit, The area changing means is for changing the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed, based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2. That is, of the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main effect display area in which the image serving as the subject is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined by the area varying means as the main display area by the first effect determining means.

As a result, it is possible to change the permissible area in which the second effect is executed, based on the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the area changing means sets the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means as a prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to execute, and allows the area other than the main display area to be allowed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being an area.

The gaming machine J4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means is set as the prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to be executed by the area changing means. Then, the area changing means sets the area other than the main display area to be the allowable area.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display area in which the image that is the main subject of the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed from overlapping and the effect of the effect from being reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine J3, the first effect determination unit determines a specific subject display region, in the display region determined to be the subject display region, a specific subject display region in which the image of the subject is not displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. A gaming machine J5, further comprising: a discriminating unit, wherein the region changing unit sets the display region discriminated as the specific subject display region by the specific subject display region discriminating unit to the permissible region.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3. That is, of the display areas determined to be the main subject display area, the specific main subject display area determining unit determines the specific main subject display area in which the image of the main subject is not displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period, and the display determined to be the specific main subject display area. The area is set as an allowable area by the area changing means.

As a result, it is possible to set the display area after the lapse of the predetermined period as the allowable area as the display area for executing the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing for executing the second effect can be widened, a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and second value information having a higher value than the first value information. And a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, and the second effect execution means includes the first permissible area. A gaming machine J6, characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first allowable area and the second value information is displayed in the second allowable area.

The gaming machine J6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5. That is, the first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and the second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowance area is set by the allowance area setting means. The first allowable area and the second allowable area different from the first allowable area are set. Then, the second effect executing means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

As a result, the value information can be displayed in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since it is possible to display the value information indicating different values in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, the first value information is displayed in the first allowable area multiple times. It is possible to set a plurality of display methods such as displaying or displaying the second value information only once in the second permissible area. Therefore, since the player sees the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the place where the value information is displayed and the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. There is.

Any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7 has a display image creating means for creating a display image displayed on the display means, and the display image creating means has at least a first layer on which the first effect is displayed. And a second image layer on which the second effect is displayed to create the display image, and a first combining process of overlapping the first image layer on the front side of the second image layer. And a second synthesizing process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer, the game machine J8.

The gaming machine J8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7. That is, the display image displayed on the display unit is created by the display image creating unit by synthesizing at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed and the second layer on which the second effect is displayed. .. Then, the first composition process causes the first image layer to overlap the front surface side of the second image layer, and the second composition process causes the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed to be transparent. To be done.

As a result, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display device at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine J8, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas. A gaming machine J9.

The gaming machine J9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J8. That is, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, it is not necessary to change the display content of the second layer in accordance with the area in which the second effect is displayed, and the display area corresponding to the display area of the transparent first layer of the second layer is displayed. Only the second effect displayed is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display unit at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Change the production navigation on the way)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the determination result by the determination means In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an effect based on, and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executed by the effect executing means. Displayed by the period information display means for displaying the specific period information indicating the specific period of the performance, the progress information display means for displaying the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period, and the progress information display means. Specific performance mode information display means for displaying specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode given to the player when the progress information satisfies a predetermined condition, and the progress displayed by the progress information display means. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a presentation mode changing means for changing the specific performance mode information based on the information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a time gauge for displaying the progress status of the effect and displaying the progress status of the effect to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-6280). In such a conventional game machine, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game, but if the fluctuation ends in the middle of the meter or reaches the end of the meter, Furthermore, since the production is continued, there is a problem that the motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter is reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the determination means performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. The effect based on the result of the determination made by the determining means is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect executed by the effect execution unit is displayed by the period information display unit, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the progress information display unit. .. Further, the specific effect mode information indicating the specific effect mode given to the player when the elapsed information displayed by the elapsed time information displaying unit satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific effect mode information displaying unit, and the progress information is displayed. The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode that is given when the elapsed information indicating the elapsed time after the start of the specific period satisfies the predetermined condition can be changed based on the elapsed information. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the pseudo specific effect mode of the specific effect mode information.

The gaming machine K2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1. That is, the specific effect mode display unit displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode. The pseudo specific effect mode of the information is changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, the pseudo specific effect mode that is displayed in a pseudo manner based on the progress information is changed, so that it is possible for the player to pay attention to the display content based on the progress information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that it has a degree display means, and the effect mode changing means is capable of changing the specific effect mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

The gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, when the degree of expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result is displayed by the progress information display means and the progress information satisfies a specific display condition, it is possible to display by the expectation degree display means, and the progress information is displayed. When the specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, it is possible to execute two of the expectation display and the change of the specific effect mode information at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized by having a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined rendering mode is given as the specific rendering mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific period extension means extends the specific period when a predetermined production mode is given as the specific production mode. , It is possible to set a specific period according to the performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine K4 has an extension period information display unit for displaying the extension period extended by the specific period extension unit by using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display unit. Gaming machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4, the extended period extended by the specific period extending means is displayed by the extended period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the amount of display data for displaying the extension period.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means is used as progress information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it has an extended progress information display means for displaying as.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extended period extended by the specific period extension means is extended by using at least part of the progress information. Since the information is displayed by the information display means, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extension period.

Any one of the gaming machines K4 to K6 has an expectation level display conversion unit capable of converting the expectation level displayed by the expectation level display unit when the specific period extension unit extends the specific period. A gaming machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extending means, the expectation degree displayed by the expectation degree display means is converted by the expectation degree converting means. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the specific period is extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display unit displays the extension period is the specific display for the expectation degree display unit to display the expectation level. The expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means when the extension progress information display means includes the establishment period in which the condition can be satisfied and the extension progress information exceeds the establishment period. A gaming machine K8 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the extension period information display unit displays the extension period, the specific period information including the established period in which the specific display condition for the expectation degree display unit to display the expectation is satisfied is used. When the extension progress information has passed the establishment period, the expectation conversion unit converts the expectation.

Thereby, when the degree of expectation is converted by the degree-of-expectation conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the degree-of-expectation display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is being executed. Becomes Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand that the expectation level is changed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves on the time gauge. A gaming machine K9 characterized by displaying a body.

The gaming machine K9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8. That is, the period information display means displays the time gauge indicating the period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means displays the moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period by the time gauge, and to easily grasp the progress information by the moving state of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K9, the expectation degree display means displays the expectation degree when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the satisfaction condition is satisfied, and the extension period information display means. Is for displaying the extension period by using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge. A gaming machine K10 characterized by being displayed.

According to the gaming machine K10, the satisfaction condition is met when the mobile body reaches the specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree is displayed by the expectation degree display means. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Further, the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge.

Thereby, it becomes possible to display the extension period by using the time gauge and the moving body. Therefore, the extended period can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be used as the display data for displaying the extended period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K9 or K10, the time gauge has a plurality of paths along which the moving body can move, and the gaming machine K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K9 or K10, the moving body has a plurality of routes along which the moving body can move. Therefore, the player can predict which route the moving body will travel on. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass a branch position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of routes. Gaming machine K12.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of routes. When the specific period is extended, the player can be made to predict again which route the mobile body will travel. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Variable effect modes of continuous slot effects)
An operating means operable by the player, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on an operation on the operating means, and a displaying means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, And the effect execution means is for performing an operation effect in which an operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set, and a specific effect that can be executed a plurality of times within a specific period. Of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect, there is an effect mode changing means for changing an effect mode of another operation effect based on information about an operation for at least one operation effect. Gaming machine L1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which operating means operable by a player is provided, and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operating means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223651 gazette).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the effective period, and the game is monotonous. Then, there was a problem that the game gets tired of playing at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, the effect execution means executes the effect based on the operation on the operation means operable by the player, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means is displayed on the display means. Is displayed. Furthermore, at least the operation effect in which the operation effective period in which the operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific effect capable of being executed a plurality of times within the specific period, Based on the information regarding the operation for at least one operation effect among the plurality of operation effects executed during the effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode changing means.

Accordingly, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of another operation effect can be changed based on the operation content of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine L1, the effect mode changing means is for changing the operation valid period of the other operation effect, the gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the operation effective period of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the effect mode changing means changes the number of times of the other operation effect, the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation effect is to execute a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, A gaming machine L4 having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by the plurality of operation effects in the specific effect are a predetermined combination.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, a design effect that dynamically displays a design that is stopped and displayed is executed as an operation effect, and a design that is stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation effects in a specific effect is predetermined. In the case of a combination, the privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the symbols that are stopped and displayed for each of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early while the specific effect is being executed.

Any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has an operation timing determination unit that determines a timing at which the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect, and the effect mode changing unit is the A gaming machine L5, characterized in that an effect mode of the other operation effect is changed based on a determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the operation timing determination means determines the timing at which the operation means is operated during the effective operation period set in the operation effect. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of another operation effect.

This makes it possible to change the effect mode of another operation effect according to the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine L5, when the operation mode determination means determines that the operation timing determination means has operated the operation means within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started. The gaming machine L6, which increases the number of other operation effects.

According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5. That is, when it is determined by the operation timing determination means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started, the number of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means. Will be increased.

As a result, it is possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means early. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the operation means eagerly, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the effect execution means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and after the operation timing determination means starts the operation effective period of the one operation effect. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated over a predetermined period of time, the first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation timing determination means enables the operation of the first operation effect. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the period has started, it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect has started. A gaming machine L7, characterized in that it performs the same number of operation effects as the case.

The gaming machine L7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5 or L6. That is, in the case where it is determined that the other operation effects have been executed a plurality of times by the effect execution means, and the operation timing determination means has operated the operation means for more than a predetermined period from the start of the operation valid period of one operation effect. In addition, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect executing means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of the first operation effect is started, within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started. The same number of operation effects as the case where it is determined that the operation means is operated are executed.

As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation effect, one operation can be performed by operating the operation means within a predetermined period during the first operation effect executed next. It is possible to execute the same number of operation effects as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period in the effect. Therefore, an opportunity to increase the number of operation effects can be provided to a player who does not notice that the operation effects have been executed or who cannot watch the operation effects and operate the operation means early. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the effect execution means provides a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of the one operation effect. A gaming machine L8 characterized by being executed.

The gaming machine L8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect executing means executes the normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set.

As a result, the player who does not operate the operation means during the valid operation period, that is, the player who does not like the operation effect, repeatedly executes the operation effect, which reduces the player's willingness to play the game. There is an effect that can suppress.

The gaming machine L9 in any one of the gaming machines L4 to L8, wherein the more the number of the operation effects executed by the effect executing means, the easier the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L4 to L8, the more the number of operation effects executed by the effect executing means, the more easily the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and thus the player is motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating means can be operated and the player's motivation for playing can be prevented from being lowered.

<Characteristic M group> (Change the mode of slot effect based on the remaining period of the operation valid period)
Operation means operable by a player, operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which an operation on the operation means is effectively discriminated, and performance executing means for executing an effect in which the operation effective period is set. In the gaming machine having a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executing means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A dynamic display effect is displayed in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed from the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information by displaying and by operating the operating means when the operation valid period is set. And dynamically changing the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period to a variable dynamic display mode when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period. A gaming machine M1 characterized by the following.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which an operating means operable by a player is provided and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operating means (for example, JP 2012-2012A). No. 223651).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the effective period, and the game is monotonous. Then, there was a problem that the game gets tired of playing at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation unit operable by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation effective period setting unit, and the production in which the operation effective period is set is executed. Is performed by the means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the performance executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation valid period is set, the plurality of identifications dynamically displayed by operating the operation means. When the dynamic display effect of stopping the predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect becomes the predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is changed. It is displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed can be changed depending on the remaining period of the operation valid period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. Becomes Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and the remaining operation valid period in the dynamic display effect. Remaining period determining means for determining a period, and when the remaining period determining means determines the predetermined remaining period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M2 characterized by having a dynamic display mode changing means for performing.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, the performance executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display performance is determined by the remaining period determining means. It When the remaining period determination means determines that the predetermined remaining period is reached, at least part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches the predetermined remaining period, and it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode includes the plurality of The gaming machine M3, wherein the specific identification information among the identification information is in a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to the gaming machine M3, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the specific identification of the plurality of identification information is performed as the variable dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode makes it easier to identify the information than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information in which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is performed becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than the other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It is possible to raise it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine M3, the effect execution means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect execution means executes during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed when a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of dynamic display effects that meet a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the dynamic of the 1 above. A game machine M4, which is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the display effect.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, by the effect execution means, the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means when the combination of #1 and #2 satisfies the predetermined condition. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable display satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the one dynamic display effect.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in one dynamic display effect. It Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to operate the operation means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is executed, and the remaining period determination means, A gaming machine M5, which determines whether or not the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of operation valid periods.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effect is produced. That is, the operation effective period setting means sets the operation effective period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed. Then, the remaining period determination means determines the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of operation valid periods.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, array information storage means for storing array information in which the plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array, and the array information stored in the array information storage means are used. A start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is configured by the operation valid period setting means. A first start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display unit and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display unit within the operation valid period that is set. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that and can be set.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effect is achieved. That is, array information in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined array is stored by the array information storage means, and the start position of the dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means is the start position setting means. Set by. Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information. A first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display device and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display device within the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means. Is set by the start position setting means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display unit and the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is difficult to be displayed using the same array information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the display data for executing the dynamic display.

The gaming machine M7 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, wherein the effect executing means has a dynamic display speed changing means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6, the speed of dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed changing means, so that the number of times the predetermined identification information is displayed within the operation valid period. Can be varied. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

<Characteristic N group> (Determine the next button effect based on the content of the button operation)
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and An operation effect executing unit capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on the result of the judgment by the judging unit, and a judgment result judged by the judging unit during the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect executing unit. And a case where the operation effect execution means executes the second operation effect mode within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed. A gaming machine N1 comprising: an execution control unit that switches the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and executes the operation operation mode, based on a determination result by the determination unit.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, an operation of actually pressing the operation button and an operation of automatically performing a repeated hit operation by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period There is one having (for example, JP-A-2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect that requires operating the operation button multiple times (for example, continuous hit effect), the operation button is actually pressed multiple times or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. Although it was possible to enjoy the operation effect by automatically performing the continuous hit operation, when the operation effect is continuously executed multiple times, during the operation effect that is executed first, There is a case where the executed operation on the frame button is executed in an operation effect executed later, and there is a problem that the effect effect of the operation effect executed later is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, as an operation effect of operating the operation button, the above-mentioned operation effect (continuous hit effect) or the operation effect of operating the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, timing push effect) is given to the player. There are some which are provided with an operation effect of making different operations. In this case, when the timing push effect is executed after the continuous hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. However, there is a problem that the operation button is operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing push effect, and the effect of the timing push effect is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, since the effect is generally executed based on the changing period of the special symbol, in order to execute a plurality of operation effects within the limited period of the changing period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it cannot be solved by a simple method of lengthening the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and is determined by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the operation effect executing means executes a predetermined operation effect mode. The determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit during the period in which the operation production execution unit is executing the operation production mode. When the second operation production mode is executed by the operation production execution unit within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation production mode is executed, the execution control unit displays the determination result by the determination unit. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to the specific operation effect mode and executed.

As a result, when the second operation effect mode is executed within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, It is possible to switch the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and execute the operation based on the content of the operation performed on the operation means by the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine N1, the determination unit determines that the determination result determined by the determination unit is at least the first determination result and the first determination result is different during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. When the determination unit determines that the first determination result is the second determination result, the execution control unit determines that the first determination result is the specific operation effect mode. A gaming machine N2, which executes a corresponding operation effect mode.

The gaming machine N2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit to be the first determination result and the second determination result different from the first determination result during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. .. When the determination means determines that the result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes the operation effect mode based on the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode.

Thereby, as the second operation effect mode, it is possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined in the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation effect mode is continuously executed, the effect effect does not deteriorate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of effect by continuing the operation effect mode.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times, and the execution control means sets the specific operation effect mode to the above. A game machine N3, characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2. That is, the determination unit determines that the operation of the operation unit has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control unit switches the operation operation mode to the operation operation mode in which the operation unit is operated multiple times as the specific operation effect mode. Be done.

Thereby, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. ..

In the gaming machine N3, an operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated and a number of times measured by the operation number measuring means are determined while the first operation effect mode is being executed. A number of times determination means, and the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number of times determination means. A gaming machine N4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the number-of-operations measuring means, and the number of times measured by the number-of-operations measuring means is determined by the number-of-times determining means during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. .. Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and the third determination result different from the first determination result.

This makes it possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines the first determination result when the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is determined to be greater than a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is more than the predetermined number of times, the determining means determines the first determination result. Thereby, when the operation means is operated more than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue the state in which he/she is actively operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines the third determination result when the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is less than a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determining means determines the third determination result. As a result, when the operating means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from running.

In the gaming machine N2, the determining means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operating means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means controls the specific operation effect mode. As a game machine N7, the operation mode is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated continuously.

According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period as the first determination result. Then, the execution control means switches the specific operation effect mode to the operation effect mode for continuously operating the operation means.

As a result, when the player continuously operates the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated is executed as the second operation effect mode. .. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. ..

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has an informing means for informing that the specific operation effect mode is executed, and the informing means executes the second operation effect mode. A gaming machine N8, which notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the time.

The gaming machine N8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode will be executed by the execution control means by the time the second operation effect mode is executed. As a result, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, it becomes possible for the player to execute the game without confusion. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In the gaming machine N8, the determination means is for performing the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification means is for performing the determination after the determination by the determination means is executed. A gaming machine N9 for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed until the operation effect mode 1 is finished.

The gaming machine N9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination of the determination means is performed, and the specific operation effect mode is changed from the execution of the determination to the end of the first operation effect mode. The notification is notified by the notification means.

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably notify that the specific operation effect mode is executed before the second operation effect mode is started.

In the gaming machine N8 or N9, a mode display unit for displaying the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution unit, and an operation content display unit for displaying the operation content of the operation unit corresponding to the operation effect mode, A gaming machine N10, characterized in that the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

According to the gaming machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content display means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode.

As a result, since the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, it becomes possible for the player to execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation effect execution means is capable of executing a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine N11, the operation effect execution means executes the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to execute an effect in which the operation means can be operated in a short period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine N11 has an effect result display means for displaying an effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect executing means, and the effect result display means has the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. A gaming machine N12, which displays the effect result based on the operation effect mode of No.

According to the gaming machine N12, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N11. That is, the effect result display means displays the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated with each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group> (changing the interval of automatic continuous hits)
Operation means operable by the player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal When the determination result by the determination means satisfies the first condition, the first determination means sets a first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the signal determination in a state in which the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect every first period, and the first effect mode And a period variable setting means for variably setting an execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period, based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. And a gaming machine P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, there is one in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2014-180364). Publication).

In such a conventional game machine, in an effect that requires operating the operation button a plurality of times (for example, continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect (for example, the timing push effect), the automatic continuous hit operation is executed, so that the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect are impaired, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, the signal output means outputs a signal based on the operation means operable by the player being operated, and the output signal is determined by the signal determination means. When the determination result by the signal determining means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means sets the first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the signal determining unit satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing unit executes the specific effect every first period. Further, when the first effect mode is being executed, the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit by the period variable setting unit is the first period based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Are variably set in different second periods.

This makes it possible to change the interval of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, various effects using the operation means can be executed while the specific effect execution means is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine P1, a discriminating means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result. A gaming machine P2, which has a predetermined variable condition based on a result of the determination made by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the result of the determination is the predetermined determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Then, the predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the determination result of the determination unit based on the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage by paying attention to a specific effect executed based on the operation of the player.

The gaming machine P1 or P2 has a notifying means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means, the gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notification means informs that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means, so that the player operates the operating means to make the second operation. When the conditions are satisfied, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period in the specific effect is changed.

In the gaming machine P3, the informing means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means. It will be possible to guide you. Therefore, even if the execution period in the specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for effectively discriminating the operation of the operating means, and a remaining period for discriminating the remaining period of the valid period set by the valid period setting means. The signal determining means determines that the second condition is met when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determining period, and the remaining period is When the remaining time period is determined to be a predetermined time period by the determination means, it has a determination period variable means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period. A gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effective period for effectively discriminating the operation of the operating means is set by the effective period setting means, and the remaining period of the effective period is discriminated by the remaining period discriminating means. When the operation means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period, The discriminating period changing means changes the first discriminating period to a second discriminating period shorter than the first discriminating period.

Accordingly, when the remaining period of the effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined is the predetermined period, it is possible to easily execute the specific effect that is changed in the second period, which is amusement of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period, the gaming machine P6.

According to the gaming machine P6, the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period as the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the remaining effective period is short, the specification is changed to the second period. The effect can be executed, and the effect can be enhanced until the end of the effective period.

<Characteristic Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
Operating means operable by a player, determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated, and effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means. An informing means for informing a player of an operation informing mode for operating the operating means, and an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect based on the operation of the operating means being discriminated by the discriminating means, When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the valid period is specified over the first valid period and the second valid period. And a notification control unit that notifies the operation notification mode of the notification unit by the notification unit.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines can execute a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, JP-A-2014-180364).

Since a plurality of operation effects are executed in such a conventional game machine, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to operate the operation button and increase the motivation of the game, but the operation operations are frequently set. If this happens, the player will frequently repeat the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, an effective period during which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and within the effective period, the effect based on the operation of the operation button is executed, and even if it is not the effective period, that is, the ineffective period. For example, because the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button multiple times, some of the multiple operations will be operations in the invalid period. However, there is a problem in that the performance is not executed even though the operation button is operated, and the motivation for playing the game is reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, and the determination means determines the operation of the operation means effectively. Is set by the means, and the notification means notifies the operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means being judged by the judging means.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting unit under a predetermined condition, the notification control unit spans the first valid period and the second valid period. In this way, the notification means is caused to notify the specific operation notification mode.

Accordingly, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a specific operation informing mode is informed across the first effective period and the second effective period. It is possible to notify that the effective period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the operation means between the first effective period and the second effective period. Therefore, by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In addition, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period in this case, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such conditions, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in game motivation.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a method of determining an actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. A method of determining that the combination is set may be used.

Further, as an operation effect in the gaming machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the gaming machine, a driving mode of a driving object provided in the gaming machine, or an output from an audio output device provided in the gaming machine. It is possible to use a voice mode or a light mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game machine. In this way, it is sufficient that the player who operates the operating means can recognize the effect executed based on the determination of the operation on the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in the gaming machine Q1 may be any one that can be operated by the player, for example, a button device that can be pressed by the player, or a reaction when a contact or proximity of the player is detected. A sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, a lever device that the player can operate in the front, rear, left, and right directions can be considered.

A game machine Q2, comprising: a game mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode on the basis of the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means, so the first effective period It is possible to set a specific operation notification mode to be notified over the second effective period based on the operation effect executed during the first effective period or the second effective period.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be easily informed of the specific operation informing mode informed over the first effective period and the second effective period.

In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means provides the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the extension effect mode based on the above is set, it is possible to make the first effective period appear to continue until the second effective period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a second pre-production mode based on the second operation effect that is executed when the second effective period is set. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means performs the second operation executed when the second effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the pre-production mode based on the production is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second effective period is continuously set with the first effective period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to further suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period. A gaming machine Q5 having a pseudo effect executing means for executing.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effect is produced. That is, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing unit is pseudo-executed by the pseudo effect executing unit.

As a result, since the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, the player can be made to appear as if the first effective period and the second effective period are continuously set, and the operation button is pressed. There is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in game motivation due to frequent repetition of an act of operating and an act of not operating.

In addition, as the pseudo operation effect in the gaming machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. As a result, in the period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the invalid period is actually set, the operating means is operated for the player who continuously operates the operating means. This makes it possible to make the user think that the presentation mode is variable, and has the effect of increasing the motivation for the game.

Furthermore, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q3, it becomes possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first effective period is extended, and it is possible for the player to perform the operation operation. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a more understandable presentation.

Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is executed such that the operation effect executed in the second effective period is continuously executed in the first effective period. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more easily understandable effect.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means sets the specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination means that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first valid period. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by being notified by the notifying means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination unit that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first valid period.

Thereby, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, a specific operation notification is given. The mode is not notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player who does not like the operation effect from being informed of a specific operation notification mode unnecessarily, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the problem described above, that is, Since the problem itself of decreasing the willingness to play due to the frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it does not occur, the player's willingness to play the game does not increase even if the specific operation notification mode is not notified. It does not decrease. On the contrary, it is possible to reduce the processing for informing the specific operation informing mode and to provide the player with the effect executed in the normal state.

As the predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it may be set that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game motivation of the player who is eagerly operating the operation means from decreasing. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first effective period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is within a predetermined remaining period (for example, remaining 5 seconds or less). A state in which a certain remaining period (for example, remaining 10 seconds or less) is discriminated by the means, which is set as an operation condition, and means for discriminating the period until the second effective period is started is provided. It may be set that the operation means is operated as the operation condition. Even in the case of such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation due to frequent repetition of an act of operating the operating means and an act of not operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine Q6, the determining means has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and the operation number measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first valid period. The gaming machine Q7, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied when the gaming condition is met.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times the operating device is operated is measured by the operation number measuring device included in the determining device. Then, the operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

As a result, the specific operation notification mode is notified when a predetermined number of operations are performed during the first valid period. Therefore, for example, when the operation effect of repeatedly hitting the operation means is executed during the first effective period, the player who is eagerly operating the operation means is informed of the specific operation notification mode. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who is eagerly operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, and thus suppressing the player's willingness to play. There is an effect that can be done.

Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q5, by causing the player to execute a pseudo operation effect by executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is frequently changed as the operation effect that is pseudo executed. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness. Further, it is preferable that the pseudo effect execution means can execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is changed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation number measurement means. ..

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first effective period. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the second valid period is set until the first valid period ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect produced by the player understanding the operation effect that will be executed later.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, if the valid period setting means sets at least the first valid period and the second valid period under the predetermined condition, the first valid period A gaming machine Q9, comprising: valid period changing means for changing the valid period so that the second valid period continues.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are produced. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the valid period is set to be continuous with the first valid period and the second valid period. The effective period is changed by the changing means.

Accordingly, when a plurality of valid periods are set, the plurality of valid periods can be set as continuous valid periods. That is, it is possible to eliminate the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation due to the fact that the effect is not changed despite the operation of the operation means. There is an effect that can be done.

Here, to make the effective period in the gaming machine Q9 continuous means that a period during which the effect is not changed is set between the first effective period and the second effective period, even though the player operates the operation means. The valid period may be changed so that the first valid period and the second valid period are actually connected, or the first valid period and the second valid period may be changed. In between, a period shorter than the period necessary for determining that the operating means has been operated may be available.

In the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets a period between the first valid period and the second valid period to the valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets the valid period between the first valid period and the second valid period. Accordingly, a plurality of valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so that there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the valid period changing means delays the start of the first valid period, and the gaming machine Q11.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first valid period is delayed by the valid period changing means. As a result, the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, so that there is no need to set a new valid period, and the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means is for accelerating the start of the second valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means accelerates the start of the second valid period. As a result, the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, so that there is no need to set a new valid period, and the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has an effective period display means for displaying the operation informing mode on the display means, and the effective period is changed by the effective period changing means. A gaming machine Q13 having a valid period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period displaying means.

According to the gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effect is produced. That is, the effective period display means displays the operation notification mode on the display means, and the effective period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the effective period changing means changing the effective period.

As a result, the fact that the valid period has been changed by the valid period changing means can be displayed to the player, and thus an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine Q13, the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the lapse of the first valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the effective period display changing means based on the lapse of the first effective period. As a result, the player grasps the content of the operation effect (the operation effect for which the second effective period is set) executed later in the state where the first effective period has not elapsed, and the effect is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege granting a benefit to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means, and period effect executing means for executing a period effect of a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the period effect executing means performs a compound effect in which a plurality of the effective period is set. A gaming machine Q15, wherein the notification control means allows the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine Q15, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14. That is, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting device when the result of the determination performed by the determining device based on the satisfaction of the determination condition is the specific determination result. Then, based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, the composite effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as the period effect of the predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a composite effect based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege granting a benefit to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means and period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining means, and the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. In the case where the first effective period set in the first period effect and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later are set under predetermined conditions. A game machine Q16, which causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

According to the gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting device when the result of the determination performed by the determining device based on the satisfaction of the determination condition is the specific determination result. Further, the period effect executing unit executes the period effect for the predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining unit. Then, of the continuous period effects, the first effective period set in the first period effect executed first and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later. When and are set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

Thereby, even when the first effective period and the second effective period are set over a plurality of period effects, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game willingness.

In the gaming machine Q16, a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and an advance determination means for determining the determination information stored in the determination condition storage means in advance. The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on a determination result of the advance determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

According to the gaming machine Q17, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q16. That is, a plurality of pieces of discrimination information based on the satisfaction of the discrimination conditions are stored in the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of stored pieces of discrimination information are judged by the pre-judgment means. Then, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit for the second period effect.

As a result, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set over the first period effect and the second period effect, the preliminary determination corresponding to the second period effect executed later. A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, Any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large amount of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 operation means 113 voice lamp control device (operation effect execution means, effect execution means)
114 display control device (informing means, informing mode setting means)
S3605 Notification control means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, operating means (e.g., operation buttons) the operation effect using the executable gaming machine is known (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-180364, A

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement in interest has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operating means operable by the player, the operation determining means capable of determining that the operating means has been operated, and the operation by the operation determining means. as an active period of operation to means is effectively judged, and the first validity period, and the second validity period is set after than its first valid period, and at least settable effective period setting means, the effective wherein the displayable display means display effect including operation notification manner for causing the operation of the operation means, the operation to the operating means is discriminated by said operation discriminating unit to the player while the period is set Based on the operation effect execution means capable of executing operation effect during the effective period , the display means, when a plurality of the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, a plurality of At least a part of the display effect can be displayed over an effective period, and the gaming machine has the first effective period, a non-effective period in which the discrimination by the operation discriminating means is ineffective, and A second effective period, and a first variable effect that changes the specific effect mode by the operation effect, as a variable effect that changes a specific effect mode executed in the effect period of the display effect, It is possible to execute a second variable effect that changes the specific effect mode during the ineffective period .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , the operating means operable by the player, the operation determining means capable of determining that the operating means has been operated, and the operation determining means can operate the operating means. As a valid period that is determined to be valid, a valid period setting unit that can set at least a first valid period and a second valid period that is set after the first valid period, and the valid period is set. The display means capable of displaying a display effect including an operation notification mode for allowing the player to operate the operation means while the player is operating, and the operation based on the operation to the operation means being discriminated by the operation discriminating means. An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect during a period, and the display means straddles a plurality of effective periods when the effective period setting means sets a plurality of the effective periods. Therefore, at least a part of the display effect can be displayed, and the gaming machine has the first valid period, a non-valid period in which the determination by the operation determination means is ineffective, and the second valid period. , A first variable effect that changes the specific effect mode by the operation effect as a variable effect that changes the specific effect mode executed in the effect period of the display effect, and during the non-effective period. And a second variable effect for changing the specific effect mode .

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of Yu technique.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of an upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper united unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper united unit. It is a front view of an upper united unit. It is a rear view of an upper united unit. It is a front view of a lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a lower united unit. It is a front view of a lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a drive arm in a retracted rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a vertical rotation position, and an extension rotation position. It is a partial enlarged front schematic diagram of a drive arm at the time of being rotated from a retracting rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising/lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising/lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a raising/lowering base and a rotating member. It is a front view of a raising/lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange|positioned in a 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange|positioned in a 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of a lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lifting unit. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of a transmission member, a slide member, and a link member in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of a transmission member, a slide member, and a link member in a 2nd state, (c) 8] is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. FIG. It is a front view of the operation unit in a combined state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising/lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit. 65A is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper united unit, and a lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 65B is a slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65B. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. 66A is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit, and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66A, and FIG. 66B is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66B. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic diagram of a front view of a slide unit in a state where a rotation transmission member and a transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear is released. It is the schematic diagram which looked the slide unit front view. 72A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72A, and FIG. 72B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72B. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is a bottom view of the main body base member due to displacement of the accommodating member. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the engagement between the first side rack gear and the transmission gear has been released. 75A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75B. It is a front view of the base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear meshed, and (b) is the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the opened state. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which front-viewed the left slide member in the state before operating a switching plate, (b) front-viewed the left slide member in the state after operating a switching plate. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state before a switching plate is operated, and (b) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state after the switching plate was operated. is there. 84A is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 84B is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84A. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of a slide unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. 93A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93A, and FIG. 93B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93B. FIG. 93C is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93C. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. 97A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 97B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97B. FIG. 97C is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. (A) is a front view of the raising/lowering unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a raising/lowering unit, (c) is a side view of a raising/lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting unit. It is an operation unit in a combined state. 101A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 101B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit along the line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in a state where the drive body is arranged at the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the drive body is arranged at the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize apparatus of La-La section in a 1st control example, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a variable winning a prize device in the 1st control example. FIG. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area|region division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. .. (A) is a figure which showed the area division of a display screen when a reach navigation production is displayed, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the production display mode of a reach navigation production. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the effect display mode of reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, (b), the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the navigation production selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st navigation production selection table typically, (c). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second navigation effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 1st control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an informing process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an abnormal process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the reach navigation production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b) is performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows stop classification command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related command process for a display performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a round performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows a several command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a V executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows production command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a resident process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows an image transfer setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the composite press effect is started in the second control example, and (b) is a time point when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the composite press effect in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the time when the timing press period Db1 was reached in the compound press production in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a timing press period Db1 in the compound press production in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed another example of the time of arrival. (A) is a figure showing an example when operating frame button 22 during a timing pushing period in compound press production in the 2nd control example, and (b) is the compound press production in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the time of reaching the 2 continuous hit period Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot production performed in the 2nd control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot production in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing a display example of a "normal mode" in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing a display example of the "Sugoroku mode" in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the main display area Dm in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation display of the point production in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal pressing scenario in the second control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the long-pressing and pressing scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the compound-pressing scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit character selection table typically, (c) is the omission. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the for-use character selection table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the point selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit point selection table typically, (c) is a detachment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table for use. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows the point production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows slot production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the first slot production performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during normal slot production performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the 1st shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the 2nd shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during extension slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press production relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the press command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example, (b) is a long-time performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows push command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the auto-pressing start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an automatic push command processing according to the present invention. (A) is a flow chart showing an auto-press termination command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 7 is a flowchart showing release command processing according to the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows slot production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows the point production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 2nd control. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing scenario table in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example, (b) the model which showed the content of the 1st compound pressing scenario typically. It is a figure and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd compound pressing scenario. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows slot production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically each mode used for the point production in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing a display example of "normal mode A" in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing a display example of "Sugoroku mode" in the 3rd control example. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a display example of a “normal mode” in the third control example, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a display example of a “bingo mode” in the third control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the layer in which the character in the 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is an example of the layer in which the point in the 3rd control example is displayed FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are combined. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the frequency|count selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit frequency selection table in a 3rd control example typically. It is a figure, (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the number selection table for omissions in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the use score selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) showed typically the structure of the final display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the final 1st display mode selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) shows the content of the final 2nd display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the final 3rd display mode selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the character display selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display data table in a 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the drawing list in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production initial setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transfer process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the point production relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example, (b) is performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a point command process according to the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the other example of the layer in which the character in a 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is another example of the layer in which the point in a 3rd control example is displayed. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are combined. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a reach navigation effect executed in a fourth control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect in the 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd internal level selection table in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production scenario storage area in the 4th control example, (b) The model which showed typically the content of the production scenario selection table in the 4th control example. It is a figure. It is a flow chart which shows reach navigation production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 4th example of control. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a 4th control example typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a 4th control example typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the 4th control example typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 5th control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed in a slot effect in the 5th control example, and (b) is a timing showing a flow of a display mode displayed in a slot effect in the 5th control example. It is a chart. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display mode storage area in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the display mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows the content of the hit display mode selection table typically in a 5th control example. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment display mode selection table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the stop mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows typically the content of the hit stop mode selection table in a 5th control example. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the disengagement stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during the first slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during normal slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the processing 2 during the 1st shortening slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during the 2nd shortening slot production performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows processing 2 during extension slot production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. (A) And (b) is an example of the schematic diagram of the display mode of the back surface image in a 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the composite press production performed in the 6th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of the background change operation mode of the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. (A) is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing the button operation content and the effect mode executed in the composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the press production 2 in the compound press production performed in the 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the press production 2 in the composite press production performed in the 6th control example. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set in the seventh control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of the additional production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the 1st variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example, (d) showed typically the content of the 3rd fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production selection table in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example, (b) showed the structure of the production counter in the 7th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the example of a 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring / production processing 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 7th control example. (B) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set in a modified example of the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change production in the modification of the 7th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the additional production in the modification of the 7th control example. (C) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change production in the modification of the 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of additional production. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring / production processing 5 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the example of the 8th control.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 4, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 4 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 4, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. To support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the rear surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper face open, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34 is provided in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is played according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and general prizes. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed by tapping screws from the front side.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rails 76 formed in 1 are planted. The inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper portion of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate a force. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, if the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while if the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first winning The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 1 is in positive change, shortening time, or in normal operation by a lighting state, or by indicating whether or not it is changing. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, the lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and is in a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 140. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor time saving (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

During the probability change or time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. Time is set. When the first electric auditors product 140a is in the opened state (opened state), as compared with the case where the first electric auditors product 140a is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning hole 140 The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Therefore, the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the first electric auditors product per hit. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened, or the first electric auditors product 140a and the second electric auditors product 82 are opened per hit. Instead of the number of times to do, only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. And a second symbol display device (not shown) configured with.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device, every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, a symbol "○" and a symbol "×" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately alternated for a predetermined time. The variable display to be turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortened time, the winning probability is increased by other methods such as increasing the winning probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric auditors object 140a per hit. When it is in a state where the ball can easily win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the spheres flowing down the game board can pass through among the spheres fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (because of the turning on of the second winning opening switch) Big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 140 may be set to 5.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric auditors product 140a is It is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the shortening of the time, the time for which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 140, as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 140 in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always ready to win.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric auditors product 140a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning hole 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the process of being probabilistically changing, shortening time, or being in normal operation). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is a big hit, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed. While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to become a symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times as a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 441, 475, 476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200.

Note that, in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are respectively moved to the retracted position. In the displaced state, in FIG. 8, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid to the right slide member 450 side, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the projecting position. 9 shows a state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating/lowering member 820 are displaced to the extended position from the state shown in FIG. 7, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, in the inner space of the rear case 300. The protrusion unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. One side (front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a rectangular shape in a front view, which is disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion of which is slidably displaceable in the base member 410. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300, each slide member 430 is independently and horizontally (base member). It is formed such that an effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be capable of contacting each other, but in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are contacted with each other, they are not damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

A guide member 419 having a rectangular shape in a front view is provided in a position parallel to the base member 410 in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are disposed. When slide-displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. This can prevent the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper united unit 500 includes a base member 510 which is arranged in front of the base member 410 of the slide unit 400 and has a rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper displacement member 530 which is displaceably arranged on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower united unit 600 includes a base member 610 that is substantially L-shaped in a front view and is disposed in the left side portion and the lower side portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the lower base member 610. And a lower displacing member 640 that is displaceably disposed.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301 a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are When the displacement members 530 and 640 are extended to the extended position, the side surfaces of the displacement members 530 and 640 (the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643) are brought into contact (coalesce) with each other.

In this case, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 that are displaced in the directions approaching each other are brought into contact with each other, a shock may occur and the postures may become unstable, such as bouncing each other, In this embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of contact is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

The protrusion unit 700 includes a base member 710 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is disposed in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an elevating unit which is vertically movable in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720 are provided. The elevating base 720 together with the rotating member 730 is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) between the opening 301a and the projecting position that projects to the front side.

The projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is arranged in the rotating member 730 to be retractable (sliding displacement), a swinging member 732 that is swingable in the rotating member 730, and these projecting members 735 and A drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swinging member 732.

The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by the single drive motor 763. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to swing the rocking member 732 are overlapped with each other, resulting in a large load, which may lead to deterioration in durability of the drive motor 763. In the form, the structure which suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. This structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is horizontally long in a front view and is arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500, and an elevating member 820 that is arranged in the base member 810 so as to be vertically movable. The elevating member 820 is formed such that it can be displaced (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, a detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12, a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. A member 420, a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 along the slide rod member 420. And a drive mechanism for driving.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, on the base member 410, a plate-like protruding plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The rack gear 412 on the base side is engraved on the right side, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the projecting plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a rod-shaped body made of a metal having a circular cross section for guiding the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. As a result, both slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base-side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are connected to the left side slide member 430 and the right side slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is rectangular and oblong in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side that is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. A second member 433 having a laterally long rectangular shape in front view having a side rack gear 433a, a base member 434 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and rotatable to the front side of the base member 434. And a displacement member 436 that is disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435 and a movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 are transmitted to the rotation member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear with which a left drive gear 471 described later is meshed, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid and displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (axially supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (front side of the first member 431). A cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in a front view is disposed in the. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first rack member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 along with the slidable displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is disposed (connected) to the first member 431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the distal end side, so that the second member 433 is relatively opposed to the first member 431. While being displaced, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, a second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 433, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated along with the sliding displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is After being converted into a linear motion by the second side rack gear 433a and transmitted to the second member 433), the second member 433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 431.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 431. You can

A left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of these slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be brought into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed such that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. It

The right slide member 450 is rotatable in the front side of the base member 454, and in the front side of the base member 454, the rack member 451 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, the base member 454 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. For transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotation member 455. And transmission gears 457a to 457f.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably arranged on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is formed on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational movement thereof is converted into a linear movement by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid and displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the respective drive gears 471 and 472, A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the respective pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, by rotating the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476, the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a are passed. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be independently slid and displaced.

A cover member 416 is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471, 472 and the pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. The drive motors 475, 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is formed with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475, 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473, 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a rear side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear side base member 434a. The base member 434b is provided, and the transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back surface side base member 434a and the front surface side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a shaft support hole 434b1 which is circular in a front view.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotation member 435, and are connected in series (engagement) with each other. , The transmission gear 437a is at the top, and the transmission gear 437f is at the rear, forming one gear train (gear train).

As described above, the front transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and its rotation is The rotation member 435 can be rotated by transmission to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

The rotary member 435 includes a rotary shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b that are coaxially provided so as to project from the back surface. The rotating shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially coupled to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 437f causes the rotation member 435 to rotate with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. The E-ring is fitted into the fitting groove provided at the tip of the support shaft 435b to prevent the displacement member 436 from coming off the support shaft 435b.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably disposed on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a clearance hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the rotation member 435 is formed. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotation member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 435 can be performed. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 435 about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made

In this case, the rotation member 435 is formed such that its front view shape is a substantially elongated shape having a dimension in the length direction larger than a dimension in the width direction, and is a position substantially at the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotary shaft 435a is arranged in the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed into a shape in which the rotating member 435 is roughly divided into two at the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. You can

Further, since the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotating member 435 is provided. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

Note that in the present embodiment, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is visibly projected to the side of the rotation member 435), The center of gravity of the structure described above can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the protrusion of the displacement member 436. Thereby, the center of gravity position can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435, the center of gravity of the above-described structure moves downward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) starts. When the displacement member 436 is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the structure body is rotated by its own weight, thereby The rotation can be assisted. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435, the displacement of the left slide member 430 is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) is started. If the displacement member 436 is located on the rotation side, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435 (rotated in the other direction) to bring the center of gravity of the above-described structure close to (match with) the rotation shaft 435a. Thus, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. Accordingly, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

In addition, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435, the gravity center of the structure is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side where the rotation is performed, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped due to its own weight. Thus, when the driving of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped immediately.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a rear side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the rear side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposed surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front-side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the front-side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected in series (engagement) with each other. , The transmission gear 457a is at the top, and the transmission gear 457f is at the rear, forming one gear train (gear train).

As described above, the front transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotation member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation thereof is It is possible to rotate the rotating member 455 by transmitting to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e and rotating the rear transmission gear 457f.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that are coaxially provided so as to project from the back surface. The rotating shaft 455a is a part that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially coupled to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 457f causes the rotation member 455 to rotate with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the rear surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. The E-ring is fitted in the fitting groove formed at the tip of the support shaft 455b to prevent the displacement member 456 from coming off the support shaft 455b.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a clearance hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width of the rotation member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the escape hole 456b, and the displacement member 455 and the rotation member 455 are displaced. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centering on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is provided on the back surface of the rotating member 455, a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated with respect to the rotation member 455 in one direction or the other direction about the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed such that its front view shape is a substantially elongated shape having a dimension in the lengthwise direction larger than a dimension in the widthwise direction, and the rotating shaft 455a is provided at one end side in the lengthwise direction. The drive motor 461 is provided on the other end side. Further, since the displacing member 456 is disposed on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the rotating member 455 has a structure in which the displacing member 456 and the driving motor 461 are disposed. The center of gravity position can be arranged at a position eccentric to the one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 455) is started, the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By arranging it on the side, the self-weight of the structure can act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. Accordingly, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the structure described above is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the self-weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act and it can be made easy to stop rotation of a structure value. Accordingly, when the driving of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as described later, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), whereby the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). When the center of gravity of the structure is located on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the self-weight of the structure acts as a resistance, and the buffering effect by rotation of the structure value is exerted. Can be made

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and show transition states when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced. 17 and 18, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, in the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extending direction to the maximum, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position most apart from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a cause the first member 431 to move to the right (see the figure) with respect to the base member 410. 17(a) is slid and displaced to the right, in the direction approaching the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a. Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while slidingly displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a, whereby the second member 433 is rotated. Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 moves to the second member 431 with respect to the second member 431. The member 433 is partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 moves further rightward with respect to the base member 410 (rightward in FIG. 17A, direction closer to the right slide member 450). 18A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction as shown in FIG. 18A, and the base member 434 is moved to the right end (FIG. 18) of the movable range. (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the protruding position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the reverse direction opposite to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. By the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (the left side in FIG. 18A, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, as in the case described above, the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. As a result, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the entire lengths of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction are made longer than the entire length in the projecting position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (leftward in FIG. 17B, direction away from the right slide member 450). 17A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 431 in the extending direction as shown in FIG. 17A, and the base member 434 is moved to the left end (FIG. 17) of the movable range. (A) The left side, the position most apart from the right slide member 450), that is, the protruding position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 (left slide member 430) can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected sensor detects the detected portion. Is detected, it is determined that the left slide member 430 is located at the retracted position, and the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

On the other hand, the driving of the left drive motor 475 at the extended position is stopped by accumulating the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after starting the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches the predetermined value, it is determined that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, and the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) overlaps the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be enlarged, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

However, when the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, due to variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) due to variations in component dimensions/assembly and tolerances, or poor control (for example, Due to the occurrence of (cumulative addition error of the number of driving steps), the left slide member 430 that is slid to the projecting position may come into contact with the right slide member 450 and cause damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress damage, the effect produced by the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is formed so that damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be suppressed while ensuring the effect produced by the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the action of the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 causes the second member to move. 433 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and rotating member 435 and Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect produced by the slide displacement can be secured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 causes the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 to contact the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) on the side closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the extended position. When this is done, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, and the left slide member 430 pushes the right slide member 450 in the slide displacement direction, thereby performing an effect of slidingly displacing the both. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to reduce the impact of the above and suppress the damage of both.

The right slide member 450 is slidably arranged on the base member 410, and the slide displacement direction of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430. That is, in the state in which the right slide member 450 is arranged in a position where it can contact the left slide member 430 arranged in the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the direction in which the right slide member 450 separates from the left slide member 430 ( There is a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side in FIG. 18A, and the direction in which the right sliding member 450 can slide is such that the left sliding member 430 is in contact with the left sliding member 430. This is the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (removed rearward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, the buffering effect can be exerted (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the slide displacement directions of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel to each other, when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450. It is possible to smoothly perform the escape action of. Therefore, it is possible to surely exhibit the cushioning effect and to easily prevent the both from being damaged.

Further, in this case, since the sliding rod member 420 is shared by the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the sliding displacement directions of the both are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. In that case, the space becomes larger and the size becomes larger. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, both sliding members 430 and 450 serve as one sliding rod member 420, so that space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in the direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the projecting position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not in contact with the left slide member 430. It can be arranged at the position where it comes into contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variations and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, the stop position thereof is easily matched with the target position. Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not contact the left slide member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of times of contact and reduce fatigue due to contact. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, in the left slide member 430, both the members 431 and 433 are separately provided in order to accelerate the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear 430 are provided. Since it is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a, the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, and the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 becomes relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial speed when the slide displacement starts from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be impaired.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to contact the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back from the contacted state to the retracted position (see FIG. ) It is formed so as to be slidable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be accelerated, and the effect of the slide displacement can be improved.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 contacts the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

That is, the right slide member 450 is brought into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430, which has a slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433, and pushes back the first member 431. To the left slide member 430 (first member 431) from the time (that is, the speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after starting to push back the left slide member 430 in the stopped state). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) for converting the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into a linear motion and slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio of the right drive motor 476 and the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into a linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a). The gear ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to be larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In this embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is equal to that of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (the first side rack gear 431a or the rack gear 451a) is displaced in the sliding displacement direction when the drive shaft of the drive motor (the left drive motor 475 or the right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means a large amount.

Accordingly, the left slide member 430 can be quickly and easily displaced from the stopped state, and after the slide displacement is started, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect produced by the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited, so that the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect produced by the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (becomes slow). That is, it is possible to both smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 and increase the sliding displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation. By adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which has been impossible in the past, such compatibility can be achieved for the first time.

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

19A is a front view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper combined unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper united unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

The base member 510 includes a rear side base 511 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and a front side base 512 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511. The rear base 511 and the front base The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the facing surfaces of 512 (internal space).

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member protruding to the front side. And a support shaft 511c which is inserted into the guide groove 522 of 520.

The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed (in parallel) along the longitudinal direction of the back base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced along with the sliding displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521 that is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening that is linearly extended. The guide groove 522 and the rack gear 523 engraved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522 are provided, and are formed as a rectangular laterally long plate-shaped body.

The support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is set to the rear base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the sliding displacement direction of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connection hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that are provided to project from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 521 of the rack member 520 through the connecting hole 511 a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is a guide pin of the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that is in contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is provided on the side surface (on the tip side) opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532. It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 having a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542. Prepare The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid and displaced along the extending direction of the connection hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are a front view and a rear view of the upper united unit 500, and show the transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 move the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b at one end side ( 23 (right side in FIG. 23), the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in a horizontal posture and hidden behind the back surface of the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the normal direction from such a state, the coupling shaft 531 is displaced in the horizontal direction along the coupling hole 511a as the rack member 520 slides, and the guide pin 532 is guided. 22(b) and 23(b), the upper displacement member 530 is slanted obliquely (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) while being guided in the horizontal direction. Is displaced to. That is, the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further displaced in the horizontal direction while being inclined further (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), and FIG. As shown in FIG. 23(c), a vertical posture is formed with its tip side (upper contact portion 533) facing downward. That is, it is arranged at the projecting position (first position).

Next, the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower united unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. Attached to the drive arm 630, a drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 which connects the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and A biasing spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-shaped member having a substantially L shape in a front view, and has a protruding base portion 611 protruding from the front surface at the lower end of the substantially L shape and a protruding base portion 611 protruding from the front surface at the upper end portion of the substantially L shape. And the connecting shaft 612. The protruding base portion 611 is a portion for disposing the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where the drive arm holding member 620 is projected from the front surface of the base member 610 (raised to the front side), and extends along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. It is projected.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is disposed at the projecting tip of the projecting base 611 of the base member 610, the projecting height of the projecting base 611 is equal to the projecting height of the projecting base 611. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position can be housed in the space, the outer shape of the lower united unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

The drive arm 630 has a plurality of teeth formed along the outer peripheral surface of a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a columnar portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member including a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end portion on the opposite side of the gear portion 632, the shaft supporting hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 that are provided to project from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

A lower contact portion 643 is formed on the side surface of the lower displacement member 640. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that contacts the upper contact portion 533 (see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the side in the projecting direction (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed at one end side and the other end side, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610 are provided in the connecting holes 651 and 652. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is determined by the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape with the center.

The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and has one leg portion extending from the winding portion engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg portion engaged with the drive arm 630, and the drive arm 630. Is urged in the rotation direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsion deformation) of the biasing spring 660 becomes maximum, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to move. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (right rotation in FIG. 27A) for displacing the 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the projecting direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a, and a front surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). And a drive motor 672 installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and by connecting (meshing) in series with each other, the transmission gear 671a is at the top and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. Accordingly, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c is applied to the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the lower united unit 600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower united unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (the left rotation direction in FIG. 27A) to the maximum. It is located at a rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “retraction rotation position”), and has a tilted posture in which it descends and inclines from the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) toward the tip end side (connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the position most distant from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, left side in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is the lowest position. (The position that is most distant in the vertical direction from the overhang position, the lower side in FIG. 27A) is arranged.

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in a front view, as shown in FIG. 27B, the lower displacement member 640 and its vicinity near the drive arm connecting shaft 641. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27B), and the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (right side in FIG. 27A).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further moved as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in a front view. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the projecting position.

At the extended position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the “extended rotational position”) that is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the clockwise rotational direction in FIG. 27C). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged such that the tip end side (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 exceeds the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted to the highest position. Therefore, the lower displacing member 640 is arranged at the rightmost position in the horizontal direction (the position most distant from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27C), and the upper and lower position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position that is most distant in the vertical direction from the retracted position, that is, a position that is slightly lowered from the upper side of FIG.

Here, the displacement speed of the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 in the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extended rotation position. 29A to 29D are partial enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the extended rotation position. In the following, however, the drive arm 630 is rotated from the retracted rotation position by the angle θ1 so that the drive arm 630 is in the horizontal posture. The rotation position in which (the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction) is referred to as a “horizontal rotation position” and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in the upright posture (the posture in which the virtual line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is called the “vertical rotation position”. The overhanging rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29(a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29(b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29(c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29(d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. 29E corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and thus the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is maintained constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stop state of the drive arm 630 until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotation speed through rotation is sufficiently small and that there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(a) and 29(b), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position. Since the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is inclined so as to be positioned below the hole 631 and is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the circular arc shape of the connecting hole 633 is formed). The velocity in the tangential direction on the displacement locus of is gradually increased with respect to the velocity component (velocity Vv) directed upward, and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(b) to 29(d), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in a section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position. The connecting hole 633 is displaced further upward as it is inclined so as to be positioned above the hole 631 and is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in this section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed thereof is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(d) and 29(e), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position. The connection hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture to be positioned above the hole 631. Therefore, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. Therefore, as will be described later, the lower displaced member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displaced member 530 at the retracted position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the impact when being carried out. Therefore, the lower displacing member 640 and the upper displacing member 530 can be prevented from bouncing each other, and the postures of the displacing members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(a) to 29(d), in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is The speed component Vh heading to the left is gradually increased, while the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is the speed component Vh heading to the right in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position. Gradually increased.

As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced leftward in the vicinity of the coupling hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is reversed at the rotational position, and is displaced to the right (direction toward the retracted position) in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position.

That is, the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced leftward, and is stopped at the leftmost end (after the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is set to 0), and then the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It is possible to gradually displace in a horizontal direction in an accelerated state. As a result, an operation of flexing and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be brought out, and a dynamic effect can be given to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

Particularly, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal speed component Vh is reduced (range of angle θ1), the vertical speed component Vv is increased, while the horizontal speed component Vh is increased (angle In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-described motion of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player can be made to feel that the lower displacement member 640 is more vigorous. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displacement member 530, a section (range of angle θ2 between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position). ), in the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is decreased to 0, the effect produced by the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be impaired. On the other hand, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased. Therefore, instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (to the right) causes the lower displacement member to move. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be secured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is provided in the portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) which is separated upward from the portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 641) to which the driving arm 630 is connected. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (in the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right along with the rotation about the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the operation of flexing and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is revealed, the operation of flexing and expanding is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right due to the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be made larger. Further, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce an effect. Can be secured easily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an abutting (merging) operation of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the extended position will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden on the back side of the base member 510 to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the projecting position in a state in which the front end side (upper contact portion 533) is formed in a vertical posture with the downward direction. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position in which the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowest position, and the downward displacement member 640 is stretched. It is placed in the exit position.

As a result, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 arranged at the projecting position are united with the upper abutting portion 533 and the lower abutting portion 643 in contact with each other. Thereby, both can be integrated and a predetermined character can be formed. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the retracted position.

Here, in the retracted position, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other, the impact generated at the time of the abutment causes them to bounce back in a direction in which they are separated from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the two displacement members 530 and 640 are integrated to form one character. Becomes bulky and stretches out, which hinders the effect of production.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the projecting position, the speed of the lower displacement member 640 that is directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530). Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhang position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacing member 640 and the upper displacing member 530 from bouncing in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of these displacing members 530 and 640.

Further, the decrease of the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in the section (range of the angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, so that the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that is directed upward. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the tip of the drive arm 630 (connecting hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640, and when the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ), the upward velocity component Vv is gradually reduced by drawing an arcuate locus, so that the upward displacement velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is kept constant by keeping the driving state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, and the control cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhanging rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhanging position where the lower displacement member 640 contacts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be a negative value at the projecting position. That is, in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position, the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is directed downward (in the direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be escaped (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that a shock is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement members 530 and 640 from bouncing back in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and to stabilize their postures.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the projecting position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 has a negative value. With this configuration, even if the contact (coalescence) position is displaced due to dimensional tolerances/assembly tolerances or control variations in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, the upper displacement member 530 can be easily brought into contact with the impact member within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the protrusion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and illustrates a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 includes a base member 710, an elevating base 720 that is vertically movable on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 that is rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 are mainly provided.

First, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, a structure for elevating the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 opened as a hole having a circular shape in a front view at a substantially central portion in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front surface, and projecting from the back surface. And two supporting shafts 713 and 714. The rotary shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted through the insertion hole 711. The front support shaft 712 rotatably supports a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719, and the rear support shafts 713 and 714 rotatably support transmission gears 772b and 772c, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 provided on the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. 34). 35). A rear base 721 and a front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined distance by an amount corresponding to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is disposed between the opposed surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. Are rotatably accommodated (disposed).

One side in the width direction of the back base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its telescopic direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, a tip rail arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721), and an intermediary between the base end rail and the tip rail. An intermediate rail is provided which allows the base end rail and the front end rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL.

The rear surface 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a linearly extended along the width direction and a shaft supporting hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The slide pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the slide groove 721a. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771 and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 slides along the sliding groove 721a, so that the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721) is moved up and down. It

The connecting arm 719 is provided with a shaft support hole 719a that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear surface base 721) that is provided so as to project from the front surface at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ), a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a, and a driven groove 719c linearly extended along a direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the driven groove 719c. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 having a rotation shaft 771a rotatably supported in an insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and the drive shaft connected to the front transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and the drive arranged in front of the base member 710. A motor 773 is provided.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the transmission gear 772a is at the head and the transmission gear 772d. 1 is formed as a rear end of the gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state in which the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retraction position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force is transmitted at the beginning. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is lifted to the uppermost position (extended position) (FIG. 21(c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state in which the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)), the rotational drive force of the drive motor 773 is the first transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21(a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes the rear base 721 and the front base 722, and the intermediate base 723 provided on the lower end sides of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, and as described above. In addition, since the rotary shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (disposed) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of about 90 degrees around the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the gear. Therefore, as described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotation member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720, and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in the state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 (the protruding or retracting direction when protruding and retracting) to the vertical direction. The rotary position (hereinafter, referred to as “central rotary position”) is set (see FIG. 36B).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36(b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36(c)) (see FIG. 36(c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36(c)), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is rotated. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36(c)) about the rotation center 731a. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36A) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36A). ..

Next, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the projecting member 735 is retracted from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 swingably disposed on the front surface of the rear base 731, the swinging members 732 and the rear base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the front base 731, a front base 734 disposed in front of the rear base 731, a protruding member 735 slidably disposed on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. 734 and the rear base 731, and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and rocking) the projecting member 735 and the rocking member 732.

The back surface base 731 is formed in a substantially circular container shape in a front view with an open front surface, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is cut off, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is cut off. A part of the wall is projected upward. On the back surface of the back surface base 731, as described above, the rotation shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curve meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

In addition, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732 and a tip end of an actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e into which the slide pin 733b of the interposition member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape around the shaft center of the shaft support hole 731c as one end side and the other end side. Vertical positions are set to different positions. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the rocking member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the rocking member 732 can be rocked (rotated) so that its tip side moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, the axis of the rotating shaft 731a is located on the extension line of the extending direction, and the slide hole 734e of the front base 734 described below is formed. Formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The swinging member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an actuated shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and has a posture in which the base end sides where the rotating shaft 732a and the actuated shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is provided. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 731c of the rear base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted in the operating hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the rear base 731. To be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 732a so that the flange portion of the collar C prevents the rotary shaft 732a from coming off, and the body of the collar C connects the rotary shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. Slidably interposed therebetween. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C prevents the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body of the collar C is engaged with the actuated shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion that is interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swinging member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the ascending/descending (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, and the pair of the action holes 733a are in a C-shape when viewed from the front. They are arranged in line symmetry.

As will be described later, when the intervening member 733 is lifted (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 raises its tip side. When the intervening member 733 is lowered (slipped downward) while being swung (rotated) to, the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b downward, and the swing member 732 moves. The tip side is swung (rotated) in the direction to swing it down.

The slide pin 733b is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) protrusions are provided from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on a line of symmetry of the above-described pair of action holes 733a with a predetermined space therebetween. Therefore, the interposition member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-shaped portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the interposition member 733) and protruding from the front surface of the interposition member 733. A cam portion 761b of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intervening member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) in accordance with the change (increase/decrease). That is, when the cam diameter increases with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter decreases, the interposition member 733 increases. 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the urging spring 791 has an elastic recovery force. , And acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the interposition member 733. That is, the descending (sliding displacement downward) of the interposition member 733 is assisted not only by the action of gravity (the weight of the interposition member 733) but also by the urging force of the urging spring 791. Thereby, as will be described later, the swinging (rotating) of the swinging member 732 in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip end is lowered) can be swiftly performed.

The front base 734 is a plate-shaped member having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface (the end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a into which the slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back base 731.

The protruding member 735 is a long plate-like member that is slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) project from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined space therebetween. Therefore, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735, and a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted therein. It Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or pushed down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a torsion spring made of metal is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state where the urging spring 792 is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , As a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

A drive mechanism for displacing the protrusion member 735 and the swinging member 732 (sliding displacement and swinging) includes a driving body 761 rotatably arranged on the front surface of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. The transmission gears 762a to 762e, to which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a, and the drive shaft are connected to the leading transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and are arranged on the back surface of the back base 731. And a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a portion formed as a disc cam having a curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733, the interposition member 733 is driven (sliding displacement). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and, as described above, acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735 so that The member 735 is driven (sliding displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the driving body 761, and by connecting (meshing) in series with each other, the transmission gear 762a is set to the leading end and the transmission gear 762e. 1 is formed as a rear end of the gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the trailing gear 762e is moved. The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced and the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight. As a result, the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the working hole 733a of the interposition member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 lowers its tip end side by its own weight. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIG. 39(b) and FIG. 39(c)).

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is raised. As a result, the slide pin 761c pushes up the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and the projecting member 735 is lifted (slipped upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposition member 733 is raised, so that the actuating shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the interposition member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in the direction in which the tip end side is displaced upward.

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (slipped downward).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the driving body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the driving body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. 40(a) and 40(b), sliding of the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the interposing member 733 in a state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and at the cam surface (position P2) abutting against the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously reduced from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has a bottom surface (lower surface in FIG. 40A and FIG. 40B) in a horizontal direction (a direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the interposition member 733). It is formed in a linear shape along (a) and FIG. 40( b) left-right direction). Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposition member 733) becomes the highest position. When the driving body 761 is continuously lowered to the lower side and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, the driving body 761 is continuously raised from the lowermost side to the uppermost side.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending in a predetermined range from one end side (right side in FIG. 40(a)) of the sliding hole 735b, and the end of the curved portion 735b1 to the other end of the sliding hole 735b. The linear portion 735b2 is extended to the side (left side in FIG. 40A).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the driving body 761 when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes the bending portion 735b1), the driving body 761 slides from the driving body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, and thus the protruding member 735 is maintained in a state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) is referred to as the “predetermined rotation position”. ".

The straight line portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the projecting member 735, the horizontal direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is determined by the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2. When the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the uppermost portion to the lowermost portion.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40(b)), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1, and the predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 is set. It is located at the position (the end on the side connected to the bending portion 735b1).

That is, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and then enters the linear portion 735b2, and the linear portion 735b2 ends (slides). After sliding toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 40(a)) of the moving hole 735b, the direction is changed at the terminal end, and the linear portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight line portion 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing transition states when the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced and the swinging member 732 is swung. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 41(a), the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position is shown, and in FIG. 41(b), the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. In FIG. 42(b), a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between the predetermined rotation position and the second rotation position is shown, and a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position is shown in FIG. To be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is located at the uppermost position, and the projecting member 735 is located at the lowermost position. To be done. When the driving body 761 is rotated from this state to a predetermined rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the maximum radius R1 as shown in FIG. 41(b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41B, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the driving force is maintained in the stopped state at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the driving body 761 which has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41(b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42(a). By reducing the number (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. It

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the second rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2 as shown in FIG. 42(b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is located at the uppermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the driving body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the driving body 761 is arranged in the second rotation position), the state shown in FIG. ), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40(b)), so that the intermediate member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. As a result, the swinging member 732 is rotated in a direction of raising the tip thereof. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pressing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. It

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42(a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b has not reached the maximum diameter r1 yet, as shown in FIG. 41(b). The upward movement of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swinging member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is located at the lowermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the driving body 761 is rotated to the first rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is increased to the maximum radius R1 as shown in FIG. 41(a). As a result (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted to the protruding member 735, and the protruding member 735 is at the lowest position (that is, FIG. 41(b). The same position as)) is kept stopped.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the second member (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the single drive motor 763.

Here, in the conventional product, when the second member is displaced by the first drive motor, the driving force for driving the second member is overlapped, so that the load of the drive motor is increased and the durability thereof is deteriorated. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmitting means (the cam portion 761b and the interposing member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732. In a section (section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), the load of the drive motor 763 is raised in the section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is raised (the drive body 761 is set from the second rotation position to the first section). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section (rotating to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (the driving body 761 is rotated by the second rotation). Drive of the load of the drive motor 763 in the section from the position to the first rotation position) to the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Allows the second transmission means to have a relatively low load. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 763 can be dispersed, so that the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, since it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the effect produced by the displacement of both the members 732 and 735 while aiming.

Further, the first transmitting means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmitting means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. Displacement, and swinging per unit displacement amount of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761) depending on the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The displacement amounts of the member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply electric power) of the drive motor 763 is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced while suppressing the load on the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, a section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (a section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally displaced due to the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projection member 735. It is formed by providing a downward displacement component, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from being complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, since the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b are prevented from being complicated, the displacement speed of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 can be easily made constant, and the drive motor 763 can be correspondingly moved. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the cam portion 761b of the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c of the second transmission means are integrally formed, the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are separately arranged. A space for the rotation member 730 can be eliminated, and the rotation member 730 can be downsized accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be increased.

Here, when rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position, that is, when starting the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load of becomes large, the initial speed becomes slow, and the effect of production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) extends from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be urged accordingly, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is prevented. The upward sliding displacement can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the tip end is lowered (see FIGS. 41A and 41B). Therefore, when the swinging member 732 is swung while maintaining the protruding member 735 in a stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum for the rotation of the driving body 761 can be further increased, so that the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung while the projecting member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both of the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of the displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotation of the driving body 761 is performed using the curved portion 735b1. The projecting member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state by giving momentum to the.

In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the rotational driving of the driving body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the bending portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the driving body 761 is arranged in the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is located at a predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 (the end portion on the side connected to the curved portion 735b1). (FIG. 40(b) and FIG. 42(b)). As a result, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor 763.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed). In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section and changes its direction at a predetermined position, so that the shape of the non-transmitting section is an arc that is convex toward the rotation center of the crank member. Becomes Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the projecting member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 increases. And the load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving motor 763.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43A is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43B is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43C is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500, and the base member 810 is vertically movable. Lifting member 820, a drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the lifting member 820, a transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the driving motor 891, and one end of which is pivotally supported by the base member 810. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is slidably displaced by displacement of the link member 850, and It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed in the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43(b)) to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. And is mainly formed.

Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole which inserts each sliding pin 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860 mentioned later inside, and regulates the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is a gravity direction (FIG. 43(b) is formed in a long hole shape having a long opening in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811, 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are projections that are inserted into shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 described later to rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are attached to the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed therethrough.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 formed at one end of a link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. Is formed into a cylindrical shape.

The drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a drive force to the elevating member 820, as described above. The drive motor 891 is provided on the base member 810 on the back side of the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-shaped body. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted to the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844. As described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable with respect to the shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface side of the base member 810. Is pivotally supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, its driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, by driving the drive motor 891, the end gear 844 can be rotated.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The projection 844a is a projection for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850 described later, and is formed to project at a distance where the tip end overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 penetrating in a circular shape at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 penetrating in a long hole shape in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, the through hole 851 and the transmission. The connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854 is mainly provided.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole through which the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. The pin 817 has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter. Therefore, the link member 850 is irremovably connected to the base member 810 by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 from the back side and fastening them with a screw or the like. To be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 that protrudes in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43(b)). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member that forms a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850, and rotatably accommodates the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protrusion size is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

A torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by stacking a wire made of a metal material on a spiral of a column shape, and can apply a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion of the torsion spring SP1 that is wound around the spiral. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 collapses, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 causes the axial direction of the helical portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even in the case of the torsion spring SP1 having a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can prevent the spiral state from being collapsed and stabilize the biasing direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. You can

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 that projects like a hook from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is a locking portion 818 that projects like a hook from the back side of the base member 810. Engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and can apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the rotation axis.

The coupling side sliding groove 853 is a long hole into which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can slide and be displaced inside the coupling side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission-side sliding groove 854 is a hole that allows the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 to be inserted thereinto and displaces the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860, which is inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810, can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected with the base member 810 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. This makes it possible to reduce the overall size of the lifting unit 800 when viewed from the front.

The slide member 860 includes a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is formed mainly with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced along with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the sliding member 860, and are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are inserted. The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 by a screw or the like.

Therefore, the slide pins 862 and 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide holes 812 and 813 formed through the base member 810 in the shape of straight long holes, so that the slide member 860 The base member 810 is made non-rotatable, and is slidably connected in the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as an axis, whereby the slide member 860 can be displaced in the gravity direction (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which projections 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 to be described later are inserted, are formed in long holes in the direction of gravity, and have a width dimension in the short direction. The protrusions 871a to 871c are formed to have a smaller outer diameter.

The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and is engaged with a rack 872 that is extended in the direction of gravity and that is paired with the target rack 872, and a rack gear of each rack 872. Each pinion gear 873 and a second slide member 871 arranged between the respective pinion gears 873 are mainly provided and formed.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, a pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the center of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the side surface of each rack 872 on the opposite side and meshes with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the gravity direction, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the gravity direction. At this time, since the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and an upright portion 871e that is bent and erected on the front side at the lower end, and a rack gear 871d that is engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. A plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c protruding in a columnar shape are mainly provided and formed on the back surface side.

The upright portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the upright end surface of the upright portion 871, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw into the upright end portion 820 to fasten the elevating member 820 is penetrated. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

The upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and disposing a decoration member 830, which will be described later, in the gap. The vertical dimension is set larger than the thickness of. Accordingly, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the above-described pinion gear 873, and is formed on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and the slide members 860 are slid from the back side of the slide members 860 to the tip ends of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of each slide-side sliding hole 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated, as described above, and thus the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced with the rotation. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides and displaces in the gravity direction with respect to the slide member 860, so that the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860, and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit, and it is possible to suppress the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 from decreasing.

The elevating/lowering member 820 is a member that is vertically displaced along with the displacement of the second slide member 871 as described above, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects to the back side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion that is connected to the standing portion 871e of the second slide member 871 and is formed so as to project at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the standing portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the projecting tip surface, and the screw inserted into the inside of the coupling hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Accordingly, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the transmission member 870 from displacing to the front side, and thus can prevent the transmission member 870 from displacing to the front side and colliding with the decoration member 830.

The decoration member 830 is formed in a shape imitating a title or logo of a game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, light can be emitted from the title, logo, etc. to the player side to give the player amusement.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, a movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described.

46 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 52(a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52(b) is a transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52C is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located. The second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state, and is a state in which it is located below the decoration member 830 and the base member 810. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement loci of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the ends farthest from the rotation axes of the rotating members 435 and 455 are shown by a chain double-dashed line, and the reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52(a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is positioned above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the gravity direction. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end portion of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end portion of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned above. Therefore, the elevating/lowering member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also placed in the upper position.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the projection 844a, and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. And a virtual line KS2 that connects the intermediate position of the connecting-side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction is orthogonal to the position (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, the displacement of the link member 850 due to the load of the elevating member 820 can be suppressed. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 49, and FIG. 52(a) and the rotational driving force acts, as described above, the respective gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate, and The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced in accordance with the rotation driving. The protrusion 844a is inserted into and connected to the inside of the connecting-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, into which the sliding pin 861 is inserted and connected to the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slid and displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed in the rack 872 according to the displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 arranged between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid and displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 50 and FIG. 52( b ), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link motor 891 is rotated, whereby the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Is set Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the first state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52(c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged below and adjacent to the decorative member 830. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. Further, the elevating member 820 is adjacent to the lower part of the decorative member 830, so that the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 and the decorative member 830 are combined can be displayed in front of the game area. it can.

Furthermore, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the projection 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, damage to the gear 844 can be suppressed.

Next, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

The combined state shown in FIG. 53 means that the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800 is moved. 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing the respective members (the elevating base 720, the rotating members 435, 455, and the elevating member 820) of each movable unit (the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern ( It can be made visible to the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, each member of each movable unit is formed in a shape imitating a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating an animal's wings, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in an arc shape, and the elevating unit 800 is formed. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of a gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830. Therefore, in the combined state (extended state), the elevating base 720, the rotating members 435, 435. One pattern (character) can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms the one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (projection unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with a single display surface. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of display forms by making the displacement states of the movable units (the elevating unit 800, the protruding unit 700, and the slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200 different, which is of interest to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, part of each of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is arranged in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54) in the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800. It is placed in the overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed by including the protruding unit 700, which is displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800, and the elevating member 820 protrudes. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be respectively displaced to form one pattern, so that a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the staging effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, since the raising/lowering member 820 of the raising/lowering unit 800 is arranged in the projecting position with the front-rear direction position different from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, in the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members come into contact with each other or are likely to come into contact with each other in the projecting position, it is necessary to set in consideration of damage due to impact at the time of contact. Also, since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, the displacement speed thereof can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent lift member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 at the projecting position, and when the pattern (character) is formed, the effect is produced. Can be increased.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the rear side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or a malfunction, the rotating members 435 and 455 are moved to the protruding member 735. The contact can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) move and unite in the space of the central part of the gaming machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surface thereof There is a game machine that collides with each other and unites. However, when the side surfaces collide with each other to be united, a scratch is likely to be formed on the collision surface due to the collision. Therefore, there is a problem that the designability of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to reduce the collision speed, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the character It went down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces do not collide with each other when they are displaced into the central space of the game machine and combined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Furthermore, when the movable unit is displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and the side faces do not collide with each other, the displacement speed can be kept constant during the displacement of the united state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the combination operation of the accessory, and to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the elevating unit 800 includes a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871). 873, the slide unit 400 is configured such that the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). The speed of the displacement operation can be improved as compared with a conventional rack (a configuration configured by only a rack and a pinion) Therefore, by improving the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time during which the player can visually recognize the joining operation, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Here, when the movable units (the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the size in the front-rear direction increases and the size increases. If the front-rear dimensions of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 are made small (thin) in order to suppress the front-back dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes the second slide member 871 that is formed to extend to the side where the front-rear direction position is the same as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, the whole (elevating member 820, rotating member (The total of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the gaming machine 10 in the front-rear direction, while increasing the front-rear size of the elevating member 820 to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position projecting to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. They are arranged at overlapping positions. As a result, the space on the rear surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width that is increased in the front-rear direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the lifting unit 800 and the slide unit 400 are arranged. It is possible to reduce the width that increases in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference between and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 are Collision during displacement can be suppressed (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, a displacement mode when the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are displaced to a combined state will be described. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. 55 to 58, the displacement mode when the movable units are displaced to the combined state is sequentially illustrated with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be sequentially described from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. It is rotationally displaced, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swing member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the protrusion unit 700 slidingly displacing the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed while the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is being displaced with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 and the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455 and the elevating member 720 can be made substantially the same.

As described above, the slide members 430 and 450 are rotationally displaced as the rotary members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the slide displacement. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. It is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle with the (center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) interposed.

Here, a first member and a second member that are linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (extended) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the united position. There is a gaming machine that brings the player into visual contact as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member by bringing them into close proximity or abutting.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the projecting position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the first member and the second member have a structure in which they are displaced to the combined (bulging) position by linear displacement, respectively, when the first member and the second member are increased in size, they are mutually displaced during the displacement to the combined position. May interfere. Therefore, it is not possible to perform the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members at the same time. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is linearly displaced up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that the elevating base 720 is disposed at the combined position and the rotating members 435 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are arranged. Since the 455 is rotationally displaced from the retracted position and is disposed at the combined position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement loci of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotation trajectories that do not intersect with the displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end positions of the rotating trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 are the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the trailing end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720, the rotational trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotation trajectories having at least displacement components in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotational trajectories are combined (extended). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to be reduced as the position is displaced.

Accordingly, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set to a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that makes a linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 are deviated, their loci do not intersect with each other, so that it is possible to suppress mutual interference of the members. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, which shortens the time until a pattern (character) is formed, The staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape of the slide unit 700 which is linearly displaced is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720. It is possible to easily suppress the interference with the rotating members 435 and 455 even if the value is increased. Therefore, the lifting base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the slide-displaceable base members 434 and 454. That is, the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the combined (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved trajectory on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the combined position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (bulging) position by the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation to the combined position is performed. It can be used not as movement but as displacement for avoiding interference with the protrusion unit 700, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when the rotary members 435 and 455 are only rotationally displaced, the position of the rotary shaft is fixed, and therefore, when the rotary shafts of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set to the ends of the rotary members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, only the end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft is rotationally displaced, and thus it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotary shafts of the rotary members 435 and 455 are set at the centers of the rotary members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotary member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotary member is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the central positions of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation shafts of the base members 434 and 454 are slidable. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is not the attitude at the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 rotate only and are displaced between the retracted position and the combined position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhang position. Since the rotary members 435 and 455 combine the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture in the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture in the combined position by the amount of linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the postures of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal directions in the retracted position (positions where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space in the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the positions where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), the rotation is made to be substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position, and to make the central part of the game board 13 stick out at the combined position.

Further, here, in the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is arranged, as the third symbol display device 81 becomes larger, , The space on both sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (bulging) position, and the projection unit 700 forms a character, a large character cannot be formed, It is not possible to fully exert the effect of production. That is, the game area is formed vertically long, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure a space for disposing the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (bulging) position, whereas they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. The rotation space 435, 455 can be increased in size by effectively utilizing the installation space of the members on one side or the other side of the third pattern display device 81, and as a result, the rotation members 435, 455 are formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the retreat space for revolving members 435, 455 is reduced to secure a space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the gaming machine 10 and, at the combined position, to the central portion of the gaming machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protrusion unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotatably coupled to the base members 434, 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotary member with respect to the protrusion unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation members 435, 455 from interfering with the protrusion unit 700 during the displacement to the extended position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size correspondingly, and the protruding unit 700 can be formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (extended) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a region where it is relatively difficult to secure a space for disposing members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member 435 is arranged in such a region. , 455, the rotating members 435, 455 can be formed in a large size.

Further, the protrusion unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, since the swinging member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, it can be brought into contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 while approaching them. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by the contact with the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swinging member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be given later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700 can displace the swing member 732 according to the displacement thereof.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which the movable units are integrated (in a combined state) and give the player an excitement due to the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, the swinging member 732 between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 can be displaced. The gap (space) can be made larger than in the second operation.

Accordingly, when the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) are in a combined state, a displaceable space can be secured. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, it is possible to perform displacement by further rotating the rotating members 435, 455 (slide members 430, 450), and it is possible to increase variations in the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and while exerting the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, Displaces the swinging member 732 in a direction approaching the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as a displacement space for the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be increased.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining the operation units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when the respective members (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the respective operation units are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435, 455 imitate a bow, the rotating members 435, 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455, and the bow is moved. You can create a state in which the bow has been pulled or a bow has been released from the bow. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both end portions of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side of the arrow (the side opposite to the arrowhead), and the elevating member 820. Is the center of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59A and 59B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. 59(a) and 59(b) show transition states when the left slide member 430 is displaced from the stop position in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide.

59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotation member 435 will be described. It is assumed that 435 is symmetrically arranged around the central position of the operation unit 200 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally designed as shown in FIG. 59(a) due to poor control, rattling of each member, or error in sensor mounting position. There is a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700 without being stopped at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with each other and the parts may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, it is shown in FIG. 59(b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, it is possible to reduce the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 rotates with respect to the elevating base 720, so that the variation of the displacement mode of the protrusion unit 700 can be increased, and the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It is possible to suppress the breakage.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59B, when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 of the protrusion unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The swinging member 732 arranged in a pair with the swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to mitigate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to rotate further is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation member 730 from being further rotated.

That is, the rocking member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed in two sets on the left and right sides, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the rocking member 732 in one set, the pair of members is contacted. With the contact, the swinging member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is When it is displaced beyond the reference position and abutted against the rocking member 732, the rocking member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), whereby the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the one set. The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Thereby, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, since the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 07(b)) with respect to the rotating shaft, the rotating member 455 (rotating member) is rotated. When abutting against the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotation moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotation member 455 (rotation member 435). It is possible to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730 by utilizing the rotation moment of (1). Therefore, it is not necessary to supply the electric power for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 730, and the drive energy can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described. FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. 60(a) and 60(b) show transition states when the respective slide members 430 and 450 are displaced from each other and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 is displaced in the excess direction, the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455, and the swinging member 732 or each rotating member 435, 455 is collided. Could be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-described third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to mitigate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact generated when the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as the driving force for causing the protruding member 735 to protrude, so that the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, by transmitting the impact generated when the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 to the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, the driving body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can be made to act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be delayed for a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with the rotary members 435 and 455, the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are displaced. Due to the rotation resistance of the motor 763, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily stopped while the swinging member 732 is displaced.

Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy for driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of the rotary members 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61A and 61B are front views of the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotary member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 in the third operation. It should be noted that FIG. 61B shows a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation are displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the gaps between the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation are different from each other in the gap of the rotary member 730 when the third operation is displaced. The swinging member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the projecting member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than in the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 are further slid and displaced to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated, and It can be displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. As a result, it is possible to give a further sense of unity to the united (extended) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435, 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second combined state of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 62 to 64 each show a transition state in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 is projected to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are shown respectively.

Furthermore, each member (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) in the combined (extended) position will be described below as the first combined state. In the first combined state, the movable units of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are associated (integrated) with each other, and one pattern is used as the first rendering mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22(a). )), the lower unitary unit 600 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A). In the formation of the second united state by the operation unit 200, from the state shown in FIG. 62, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slid and displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is moved. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by the downward displacement and the downward displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the projecting position (the position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper uniting unit 500 is in the projecting position (the position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower uniting unit 600 is in the projecting position ( By being respectively displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27(c), the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second combined state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600) are associated (integrated) with each other, and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode is, for example, a pattern (character) imitating Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on a horse's body). In this case, the component forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower uniting unit 600, the component forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the component forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434, which is slidably arranged, is displaced to the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the slide end position. That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged with different distances to be slid from the retracted position. Further, since the rotary member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotary member 435 is arranged can be different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 moves from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently because the sliding displacement is different. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is different between the first combined state and the second combined state with the posture about 180° about the rotation axis.

As described above, the operation unit 200 is configured such that the members (rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and the elevating member 820) of the respective operation units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) are stretched. By the displacement to the projecting position, the respective members can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, the operation unit 200 only forms one pattern (character) by combining the respective members in the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) as the first effect mode. Instead, as a second effect mode, it is possible to combine the respective members in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from that of the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made Therefore, it is possible to increase the variations of the effects, so that it is possible to show the player various effects and provide the player with amusement.

Here, a first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units that is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the projecting position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) with one pattern ( While letting the player recognize (character) as the first effect mode, when the movable units of the second movable unit group are arranged at the projecting position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other. (Integrated), an effect of causing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as a second effect mode is performed. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed to the extended position, thereby A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the second movable unit group, and in the second game state, the first movable unit is retracted to the retracted position while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the projecting position, an effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger pattern (character) in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (modes of effect) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters increases accordingly, so each movable unit is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit because the area (space) for keeping it is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (effect mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as the movable unit, the number of movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) effect modes is correspondingly increased. The total number can be reduced and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is part of the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since there is a space in the retracted space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), each movable unit (slide) The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) can be increased in size.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (the rotating members 435, 455, the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and the elevating member 820) can be increased in size, It is possible to increase the size of the pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is part of the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the pattern (character that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode). ), the first movable mode and the second movable mode are arranged in the same position, and the first movable mode and the second movable mode are movable in common. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member (rotating member 435) of the unit is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom decreases correspondingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has a combination (extension) position that is arranged when forming the first effect mode and a combination (extension) that is arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since it is set to a position different from the (outward position), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, which hinders the interest. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, a pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at a different position (extended position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position) with

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for the player to see and hinders interest. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating member 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has different postures when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, since the rotating member 435 is arranged in different positions in the first and second performance modes, and in different positions (rotation angles), the rotation member 435 has different positions. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are combined, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being hindered.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is commonly used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode or the second effect mode is different. However, there is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since both the position and the posture to be arranged are different between the mode and the second effect mode, it is possible for the player to use the rotating member 435 in both the first combined state and the second combined state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the linearly displacing base member 434, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a combination of the rotational displacement and the linear displacement. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be enhanced. Therefore, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 can be associated (integrated) with each other so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving unit for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed in a larger size correspondingly, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be converted. For example, even if there is a region that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for disposing members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member is in such region. The rotary member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of 435.

In this case, since the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region such that the rotary member 435 for striking the base member 434 overlaps in the retracted position in a front view, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are correspondingly arranged in other regions of the base member 434 (the conversion mechanism). Can be made smaller in the front-rear direction of the region (where is not arranged). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 from contacting the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, referring to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65(a) to 66(b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 67(b) is shown in FIG. 65(b). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit 400, an upper united unit 500, and a lower united unit 600 when viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIb. 68(a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66(a), and FIG. 68(b) is of FIG. 66(b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view.

It should be noted that FIG. 65( a) to FIG. 66( b) sequentially show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second combined state. 65(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, and FIG. The slide units 400 in the retracted state are shown.

The displacement from the state shown in FIG. 65A to the first state shown in FIG. 65B is performed by sliding the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66(b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66(a), the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by that. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. The transition from the second state to the second coalesced state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper united unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower united unit 600, and the rotary member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 67A, in the retracted state (the state in which the retracted position is set), the upper united unit 500 has the upper displacement member 530 housed inside the base member 510. Thus, the lower united unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 of the left slide member 430.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed from the front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed to the back side is formed below the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b (lower side in FIG. 67(b)).

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600, and the lower side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is the entire back surface. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side, so that the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower combined unit 600 can be inserted into the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

In addition, since the thickness of the lower side of the base member 434 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the lower displacement member 640 and the opposing surface can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slid and displaced in the first state (state shown in FIG. 65(b)) described later, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, the transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotation member 435 can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction above the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 and is hung down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6 ), a force is exerted when the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65A). It is easy to make it possible to increase the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434, so that the base member 434 can be prevented from being deformed.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65(a)), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower united unit 600 abuts on the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower united unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be long in the up-down direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 that are connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 where the upper end portion easily falls in the front-rear direction. By bringing the lower displacement member 640 into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from tilting in the front-rear direction and stabilize the position of the lower united unit 600 in the front-rear direction at the retracted position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when slidingly displacing to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65B and 67B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced along with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount to rotate the rotary member 435 so that the rotary member 435 and the lower united unit 600 do not overlap each other in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower member 434 do not overlap. It may be a position where the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, when viewed from the front, inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65(b)) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower united unit 600, the lower base member 610 does not overlap in the front-rear direction. A portion of the lower displacement member 640 is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is easily tilted in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (rotating driving force) to displace the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500. It is arranged at a position overlapping 530 with the front-rear direction. This can prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 from colliding with the rotary shaft 435a that connects the base member 434 and the rotary member 435 when the second unit is displaced.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper united unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the upper displacement member 530 and the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for starting the displacement of the left slide member 430, it is possible to suppress the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. This can prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (on the upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and is projected and displaced as it slides in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction of FIG. 66B). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slid and displaced toward the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the rear side of the front side of the base member 434. Then, when the upper displacement member 530 is collided with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. It is possible to suppress the collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 68(a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. It is slid to the right side (the right side in FIG. 66(a)). Therefore, the rotary member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) in accordance with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. Accordingly, one end of the rotating member 435 positioned on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65B) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by slidingly displacing the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 66A) is increased, and by rotating the rotating member 435, the vertical direction of the region K2 (see FIG. 66( a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to suppress collision with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, at the time of displacement from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be placed on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530, and as described above, the other end portion of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion 533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, since the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 434 in a front view while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, it is displaced to the position forming the second combined state. Until the above, the upper displacement member 530 can be suppressed from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Furthermore, since the projecting position of the upper displacement member 530 is set between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 can be positioned further to the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the upper member. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) with each other to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66B and 68B, in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 68(b)) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower united unit 600.

Accordingly, the rotating member 435, the upper displacing member 530, and the lower displacing member 640 can be arranged in close proximity to each other so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, since the rotating member 435 has different overhanging positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stop states, control or The structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) easily varies. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, If the arrangement position or the posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper unit unit 500 and the lower unit unit 600, while if the arrangement position or the position of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper unit unit The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is configured such that the movable member (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protrusion unit 700) of the movable unit in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , The lifting unit 800) and the movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), lifting member 820) arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit in a front view. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member, the relation between the movable members of each movable unit even when the stop state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies. It is easy to maintain sex. That is, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient due to the overlapping of the portions in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the movable members of the movable units and the positions in the front-rear direction. Due to the difference, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable members of the movable units due to the extrusion of the movable members. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association with each movable member of each movable unit in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, since the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are arranged in contact with each other, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of them, By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435, the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be located at the same position in the front-rear direction, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (extended) state can be separated from each other. As a result of being integrated and easily visible to the player, the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be easily visible to the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and at the stopping position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode, the upper displacement member is formed. In the structure in which the rotating member 435 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 when the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position. ) Is blocked.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or the posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a positional deviation, which hinders the association (integration). That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact, the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. When the arrangement position or posture of 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 that are in contact with each other are displaced, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (bulging) position, the configuration in which the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 is adopted. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, part of the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least part of the part where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 contact. The rotation member 435 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the pattern (character) in the second effect mode and impairing the interest.

Next, a slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment are described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 according to the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. Composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a rectangular oblong shape in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the lower side edge portion on the front side of the game board. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with projecting portions 2481 projecting on the lower surface sides of both ends in the longitudinal direction.

On the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a base side rack gear 412 for energizing the first side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 according to the sliding displacement of the first member 431 is engraved.

As described above, the protrusions 2481 are formed on both ends of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. The protrusion 2481 is provided with a circular bearing hole 2481a in which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in a protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (right side of the gaming machine).

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the longitudinal center of the main body base member 2480 to the outside, and the shaft centers formed at both ends are concentric with each other.

The rotation transmitting member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape having a size slightly smaller than the distance dimension of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. A rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape in a side view and having a predetermined thickness is formed at both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, and a shaft portion 2486 of a shaft-like body is axially outward from a shaft center of the rotation portion 2487. Are formed to project.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Is set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed on both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485 are formed such that their respective axes are concentric with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protrusion 2481, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

Accordingly, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and disposed on the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (the right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (right side in front view).

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmitting member 2485, and the shaft center is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotation shaft inserted through the through hole 2481b of the protrusion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the surface opposite to the protrusion 2481.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed on the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. Accordingly, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2437a rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. Accordingly, the rotational drive can be applied to the rotating member 435 in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2457a rotates, the drive is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a is omitted.

71A is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71B is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a includes a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 having a tooth thickness that gradually decreases toward the back side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the thickness dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction) of the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion bulging in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the tooth thickness central portion as it goes toward the back side. The distance dimension at which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. This can prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from decreasing and prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The following description will be given with the left slide member 2430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

72(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a mesh with each other, and FIG. 72(b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 when viewed from the front in a state in which the meshing of is released. 73(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and FIG. 73(b) is a slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

Note that in FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmitting member 2485 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 73(a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned below (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission is performed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a and the gear 2437a mesh with each other is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the rotational driving force is applied to the rotary drive motor 2489 and the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated upward on the rear surface side, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. It

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72B and 73B, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates the rotation transmission member 2485. Is displaced upward with the rotation of. As a result, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slid with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, the driving force is not transmitted from the transmission gears 437b to 437f to the rotating member 435, so that even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, the rotating member 435 can be configured not to rotate.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left sliding member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is stopped to rotate. A third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force.

This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotating member 435, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to dispose a drive motor for applying a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 becomes large. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotary motion of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a driving unit for rotating the rotating member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 having the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, so that the left rotation transmission is performed. When the gear engagement between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the gear engagement is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gear is engaged, the gears cannot engage with each other and the side surfaces are not in contact with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not mesh with each other due to a collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the side surface area of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portions of the transmission gear 2437a when switching from the second drive state in which the tooth engagement is released to the first drive state in which the tooth engagement is performed. it can.

Further, since the bulging portion 2437a2 has a tooth thickness that gradually decreases toward the back side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along an inclined surface that gradually decreases. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, the meshing at the time of switching from the meshing-released second driving state to the meshed first driving state can be smoothly performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is formed such that the shaft center thereof is located on the front plane of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first driving state to the second driving state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotary member 455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is provided upright on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the lower surface side on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Is set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is vertically formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side.

The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge portion toward the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed such that the outer shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Thereby, the housing member 3490 can be arranged inside the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base rack gear 412 is formed on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the upper protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft of a telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490. The diameter is smaller than the diameter of the.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides the housing member 3490 up and down by its driving, and by applying electric power, the shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. Is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 in a state where its shaft portion is inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the projecting plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is vertically displaced, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be vertically displaced. That is, the containing member 3490 can be vertically displaced with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the containing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Also, the following description will be given with the left slide member 430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are meshed with each other, and FIG. 75B is a housing member 3490. 6 is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in which the slide unit 3400 is displaced and the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 76(b) is a slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that in FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding. In addition, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the accommodation member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodation member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are meshed with each other while being arranged in a sufficiently secured state.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to project from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, in the state where the containing member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the containing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged to be smaller than the distance dimension L1. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other (distance dimension L1>L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 is slid with respect to the base member 3410, the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotation member 435, it is possible to form a form in which the left slide member 430 does not rotate even if it is displaced.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotary member 435 remains unrotated, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, and the rotary member A third drive state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 430, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480, thereby It is possible to switch between the first drive state and the second drive state.

Therefore, when the second drive state is switched to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

That is, when the tooth portion of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a phase-shifted state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is moved. Since the transmission gear 437a rotates and meshes along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while the tooth surface of the left transmission transmission gear 437a and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a contact each other, There is no need to match the phases, and meshing can be performed smoothly.

Next, a slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 455 are rotated and a state in which the rotary member 455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a plate-shaped body having a rectangular oblong shape when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. .. A left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that imparts a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that imparts a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed on the bottom surface side of the projecting plate portion 411.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, notches 4413a are formed by cutting out the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 at both ends and the center. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are provided with small tooth portions 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 has cutout portions 4414a formed at both ends thereof by cutting out tooth surfaces thereof. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the cutout portion 4414a include small tooth portions 4414b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth that are not adjacent to each other.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. Also, the following description will be given with the left slide member 430 as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

78(a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a mesh with each other, and FIG. 78(b) shows the base member 4410. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 4400 from the front in the state where the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was cancelled|released. Note that, in FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. In addition, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the cutout portion 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates left. A state in which it meshes with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the cutout portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is not moved. The state in which the meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is released is formed.

That is, the rotation member 435 can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 where the teeth are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to rotate the rotation member 435 by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the rotary member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotary member 435 remains unrotated, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, and the rotary member A third drive state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 430, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is performed by removing a part of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for releasing the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with the small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the cutout portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly meshed when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that does not include the small tooth portion 4413b, when the phase of rotation with the transmission gear 437a is deviated when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, The teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 may be meshed with each other, and the teeth may not be meshed.

In this case, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase with each other by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a to have an outer shape smaller than the other teeth. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from meshing with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 5430 as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment are described. 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member 5455 is not rotated according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 penetratingly formed in a shaft center of a transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5435, and cam surfaces of the inner ring 5439c. Mainly comprises a plurality of rollers 5439d disposed in the above, a holder 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the holder 5439e for switching the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. 81(a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81(b) is a left view in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked the slide member 5430 from the front. Note that, in FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawing is simplified and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacing member 5436 are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. Bite into the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed with the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows transmission of rotation and a state in which transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains unrotated, and the one-way clutch when stopping the sliding displacement of the left slide member 5430. 5439 is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which it is blocked, so that the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped to form the third driving state. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined with the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 6430 as a representative example, and description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment are described. By switching the one-way clutch 5439, 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a state in which the rotating member 5435 is not rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotary shaft 5435a of the rotary member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 being inserted into the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. It

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to an operator 6438 described later. It

The operator 6438 is formed in the shape of a rod having a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The operating element 6438 has a connecting pin 6438a protruding forward at the lower end and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the center in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the back surface side of the back surface side base member 434a, and is formed with a hole diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 will be inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a rotatable state.

The connecting pin 6438a is a columnar body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and the outer diameter dimension thereof is smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Accordingly, when the operating pin 6438 rotates with the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 with the through hole 6438b as an axis, the connecting pin 6438a changes its position. The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434a and the other end is locked to the operating element 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always biased in the right rotation direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis center when viewed from the front. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driven state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435) when the external force is not applied to the operating element 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84(b) is a slide unit in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at 6400 from the front. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and FIG. 85(b) is a slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that, in FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, in the base member 6410, a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 is formed at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84( a) and 85 (a ), in a state where no external force is applied to the operating element 6438, the operating element 6438 has a longitudinal direction that matches the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Will be placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(b) and 85(b), the left slide member 6430 is slid and displaced, and the other end of the manipulator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 is located immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side in the front side (upper side) contacts the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the terminal end after the side surface of the operator 6438 and the base member 6410 contact each other, the operator 6438 is displaced in the left rotation direction in front view about the through hole 6438b.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 can be formed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, a state in which the rotation transmission of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the rotation transmission is cut off can be formed. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. When the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by its inertial force when the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, with reference to FIG. 86, a slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that the following description will be given with the left slide member 7430 as a typical example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment are described. By switching the one-way clutch 5439, the 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 and a non-rotation state. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which a second slide member 7460 described later is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. Mainly formed of a shaft portion 7463, a roller 7465 arranged in a state where the shaft portion 7463 is inserted, and a drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with a tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. It

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and a gear tooth surface 7461a is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed into a plate-shaped body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the side of the rack gear 7461 is formed on the side surface so as to be vertically long and recessed, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening with the rack gear 7461. A plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw with the fixing hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7463 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is held by being sandwiched between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and a shaft hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the shaft center of the roller 7465. The shaft portion 7463 of the roller 7465 is inserted into the shaft hole, and is disposed between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for engaging a tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force for slidingly displacing the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted into the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged on the front side is decorated (displaying a design etc.) on the plane arranged on the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be slidably displaced from a position overlapping with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position not overlapping with the left slide member 7430, so that the player can visually recognize the decorative surface.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operator 6438 before displacement, the through hole 6438b, and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not arranged between the 6434a2 and 6434a2, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction from the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is activated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced to the position (the position shown in FIG. 87(b)) where the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the left slide member 7430 is moved. The rotating member 5435 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87( b ), when the operator 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 becomes a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Abut. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is tilted to the right side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, while the roller 7465 is urged downward by the slid displacement, the manipulator 6438 can be rotated with the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operation element 6438 to rotate with the through hole 6438b as an axis while biasing the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is disposed in a state of being tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is disposed on the left side of the through hole 6438b. To be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in the neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 can be formed.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is rotated to the state of tilting to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 contacts the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the left side, further sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 can urge the roller 7465 upward by the sliding displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the shaft portion 7463 inserted through the roller 7465 is slid upward and displaced. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89(b).

The rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 blocks the rotation transmission as described above. The rotational inertia of the rotating member 5435 at the time of sliding displacement makes it possible to keep the rotation.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, a state in which the rotation transmission of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the rotation transmission is cut off can be formed. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430. In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can form a third driving state in which the rotation is continued due to its inertial force.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotation movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third drive state (for example, waiting until the inertial force ceases to act), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 does not act on the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, It is possible to form the second driving state in which the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 remains unrotated.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (the linear movement and the rotational movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is prevented. It is possible to change the position where the allowable state is changed from the permitted state to the regulated state or the permitted state is changed to the regulated state. Accordingly, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotation member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped are set. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the slide displacement of the second slide member 7460 is also possible, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are shared, it is not necessary to separately provide a unit for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is disposed on either the left or right side of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other side in the left or right direction while the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without slidingly displacing the left slide member 7430, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied. The first driving state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains unrotated. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of a slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. A member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420 are mainly provided. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 includes a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in the front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in the front view that hangs down from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. The second pinion gear 432 and the second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed have a vertically elongated second member 8433 in a front view, and a rectangular vertically long base member hung from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d that is rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 that is rectangular in a front view and has a third side rack gear 8445a that meshes with the second side pinion gear 8433d. , And a base member 8446 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is hung from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 is provided with a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, which extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 has a second side rack gear 433a formed on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

The second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 with the sliding displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably disposed on the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 has a third side rack gear 8445a formed on the lower surface thereof. The third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated along with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 receives the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d, and the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, The driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the second member 8433. You can

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93(a) to 93(c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, showing transition states when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and FIG. 94(b) is a slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b). 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93C. Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 94A, when the left slide member 8430 is in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. A third member 8445 is disposed inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 depending on the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b depending on the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed in front of the base member 8434. To be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slid and displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

Further, since the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect area K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93(a), the base member 8410). It is possible to secure a region where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left The left drive gear 471 that meshes with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid and displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a. Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 is engaged with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 are interposed. Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both 433a and 433a, the driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. A driving force associated with exercise can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is shortened. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged to face each other in a posture parallel to each other, and both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in the combined state is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are provided. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the second member 8433. You can

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the second member 8433 can be slid relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slid and displaced relative to the second member 8433.

Accordingly, the time required for slidingly displacing the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is reduced. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 8430 is in the projecting position, the second member 8433 leaves some overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433 with some overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface of the base member 8431b that is suspended from the first member 8431 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 8434 that is suspended from the second member 8433 on the right side in front view are substantially in the front-rear direction. It is placed in the same position. In addition, the side surface of the base member 8434 hanging from the second member 8433 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 8446 hanging from the third member 8445 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. It

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire effect area K.

Next, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 hangs down from the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b hangs down from the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 that is suspended is disposed. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. A member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove are mainly provided.

The left slide member 9430 includes a first member 8431 that is oblong in a rectangular shape in a front view, a base member 9431b that is vertically long in a front view and is hung from the first member 8431, and a first member that is rotatably arranged in the first member 8431. A second pinch gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a second member 9433 having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and a base member having a vertically long rectangle shape in front view suspended from the second member 9433. 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 that is vertically long in a rectangular shape in front view and is connected to the slide rail 9443, and a thread-shaped wire 9444 that is freely deformable. Consists of

The first member 8431 is provided with a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, which extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a recessed groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface of the upper end side on the left side in front view, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9431b1 that extends upward and downward is provided inside the recessed groove. Formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole of the upper end portion, so that the second member 9433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. , Can be slid along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

On the base member 9434, a notch 9434c is formed by cutting out the right side surface of the upper end side in a front view in the front-rear direction, and a disc-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. A slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 on the upper end side in a state where the extension/contraction direction is the left/right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described below, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed by two plates and the plates are slidably displaceable. A coil spring (not shown) is provided inside the slide rail 9443, and the slide rail 9443 is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The back side of the base member 9437 is fastened to the slide rail 9443 so that the base member 9437 is slidable with respect to the second member 9433.

The base member 9437 is formed with a recessed groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface of the upper end of the base member on the right side in front view, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a that is vertically extended is formed inside the recessed groove. To be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged such that its vertical position is substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, fishing line, or the like. The wire 9444 has one end connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member and the other end connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connection path connecting one end and the other end between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. Is arranged in a state where a part of the side surface of the sheet is in contact with the side surface of the sheet (see FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97(a) to 97(c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing transition states when the left slide member 9430 is slid and displaced. 98(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and FIG. 98(b) is a slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b). 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 98(a), when the left slide member 9430 is in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are different positions in the front-rear direction. Is located in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. A space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9446 is moved leftward with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446. Although a sliding force acts, by connecting the wire 9444 to the connection shaft 9431b1 and the connection shaft 9438 and setting the connection path between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, the base member 9434 causes the base member 9434 to operate. Sliding displacement of the 9446 to the left with respect to the base member 9434 can be suppressed.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is set to the dimension in which the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction is combined with the dimension dimensions of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. The state in which 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 overlap in the front-rear direction can be maintained.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left pinion gear 473 is rotated. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid and displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Since the second member 9433 is interposed, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member 8431. You can

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is reduced, and shielding is performed. It is possible to quickly switch between the open state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3>L4). Therefore, since the wire 9444 is loosened, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for slidingly displacing the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (opening state) is shortened, and It is possible to quickly switch the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), in a state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the projecting position, the side surface of the base member 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 9434 on the right side in front view are arranged. The side surface and the side surface are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire effect area K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444. Therefore, as in the eighth embodiment, the third member 8445 is provided above the base member 8446. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction between the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102, an elevating unit 800 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99(a) is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800, and FIG. 99(c) is a side view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extended) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. The same reference numerals are given to the parts and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 that is arranged in a base member 810 so as to be elevatable. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 projecting to the back side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 engage with each other when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state. It is formed so as to project from the rear surface side of 10820. The size of the engaging portion 10822 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance size between the facing members of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed to project to the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 102(a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and which penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the protruding member 735 in a top view. Accordingly, when the operation unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the tip end portion of the protruding member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102(b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. 101 is the operating unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 taken along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102(b) is the CIIb- in FIG. 101. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit 10200 in a CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 of the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102(a)).

Note that the engagement portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension thereof decreases in the rear view as the outer shape goes downward. That is, the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed to incline toward the central portion in the left-right direction as they go downward.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, on the back side of the projecting member 735, there is formed an inclined portion 10735a having a larger protruding distance as it goes downward, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be capable of contacting each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging unit 10822 can bring the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 into a state of contacting (connecting) with each other, so that each movable unit in the combined state (the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit It is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is vertically displaced (vibrated) by a relatively small distance by repeatedly causing a drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 to repeatedly perform a relatively small rotational drive.

In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the left and right side surfaces (the left and right sides in FIG. 99(b)) of the engaging portion 10822, the slanted shapes of the left and right side surfaces are associated with each other. The side in contact with the joint 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

It should be noted that the rotating members 435, 455 are provided with a rotational moment in a direction in which the side contacting the engaging portion 10822 due to its center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 at the united (bulging) position. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can again come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, in the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the inclined portion 10735a is in contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, so that the elevating member 10820 is periodically displaced, whereby the inclined portion 10735 is provided. The inner surface of the through-hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface. Therefore, due to the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (leftward in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the protruding member 735 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, since it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, 476, the driving energy can be suppressed.

That is, in the united (extended) position, the raising/lowering member 10820 is formed so as to be capable of contacting the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455. Since the raising/lowering member 10820 is formed so as to be periodically displaced, The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, which can enhance the dramatic effect. .. Further, in this case, by bringing them into contact with each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 is provided. No need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (not in contact with each other), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being influenced by each other. it can. That is, it is possible to easily transmit the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be disengaged (vibrated) cyclically in a manner different from each other without relating them. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they vibrate in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 in one character in different states. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 causes the rotating member to rotate in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotation member 730 can be cyclically repeated in the manner described above, and the rotation member 730 can be cyclically repeated in the front-back direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the protruding member 735 is connected to the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force for displacing (vibrating) the protruding member 735 is transmitted through the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the protruding member 735. In the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, since the elevating member 10820 is arranged at a position in the front-rear direction in the united (extended) position that is in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, it is arranged closer to the player. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect in which the force of the vibration is easily transmitted to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103(b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation position. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange|positioned in the position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving body 761 is moved so that the interposition member 733 descends in accordance with the rotation of the driving body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the projecting position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is moved along with the rotation of the driving body 11761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the projecting position (a state in which the protruding member 730 protrudes from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment has a sliding wall 733c when the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the contacting cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam contacting the sliding wall 733c in the state where the driving body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously increased from the position P1 toward the position P2.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposition member 733) is changed from the lowermost position to the lowermost position. When the driving body 761 is continuously raised to the upper side and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost side to the uppermost side.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the top. As a result, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to a combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially show the displacement modes when the movable units are displaced to the combined (extended) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. The tenth embodiment will be described as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protruding unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. It is rotationally displaced, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid and displaced upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protrusion unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, in the retracted state, the arrangement space for each movable unit can be reduced, and the amount of overhang during the overhang operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protrusion unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by slidingly moving the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. The member is displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is stored in the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip end of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to the lowered position which is close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in the state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is placed in the united state (extended position), so that the rotating member 11730 rotates during the displacement to the united position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by the movable units (the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730) is shortened, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the tip end of the swinging member 732 is in the descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating members 435, 435. 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern formed by combining the respective members (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730), and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) (character ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 can displace the swing member 732 according to the displacement thereof.

Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be lifted in the direction in which it is separated from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is set to the combined (extended) position, the tip end of the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating member). The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to abut against the base member 410.

In this case, the abutted portion is provided on the base member 410, and the abutted portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and variations in the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is abutted. The member is brought into contact (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that restricts the displacement of the left slide member 430). By abutting the abutted member with the first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, the impact at the time of the abutting is weakened and damage to both members is suppressed. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) that is the contact target (the member with which the first member 431 is contacted) is. The case where the displacement is the slide displacement (linear motion) and the displacement direction is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but the displacement is not limited to this. However, the contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be rotational movement or movement along a curve.

Thus, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the contact is made, the contact target can be moved back (released) by the above-mentioned parallel displacement component, and the buffering effect can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displacing the contact object in the opposite direction to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted.

The contact target does not have to be driven by the drive means. Instead of driving by driving means, or in addition to driving by driving means, it is formed so as to be biased by biasing means (elastic material such as rubber or urethane, spring such as coil spring or torsion spring). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact, the biasing means is elastically deformed, whereby the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted, and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position at substantially the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first arranged in the projecting position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the projecting position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 contacts the stopped upper contact portion 533. Contacted). Even in this case, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the change in velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (the target to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) at the extended position). Although the case where the 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact target may be a stopped one (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the change in velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the bulging position is set to the bulging rotational position in the lower united unit 600 has been described. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position may be the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed so as to contact the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. May be.

Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the extended position is set to a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 moves 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). It may be a rotated position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotational position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is set as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is moved to the upper displacement member. You may form so that it may contact|abut to 530.

In any of these configurations, a change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 can weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is provided so as to project from the rear surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the rear surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin is slidable is provided. A structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is extended between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove is exemplified.

In the case of such a structure, among the displacement (velocity) components of the lower displacement member 640, at least the component in the direction toward the contact target (the target to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so as to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. As a result, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the change in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (decrease) weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppresses rebound. can do.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, only the lower united unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper united unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 which is turned upside down may be disposed as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, the drive states (supply power) of the drive motors 543, 672 are constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. However, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased/decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased). For example, the electric power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the other of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 near the overhang position decreases. A mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced is exemplified. Note that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672 or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 contact each other is the rotation of the driving body 761 in a front view. Although the case of being located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40 ), the position is not necessarily limited to this, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface contact each other passes through the rotation center of the driving body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the oscillating member 732 and the interposition member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the oscillating member 732 and the interposition member 732 are arranged so that the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the protruding member 735 is raised. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the protruding member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the swinging member 732 and the interposition member 733 are raised. It is preferable that the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so that the weight of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 act on the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the own weight of the swinging member 732, the interposition member 733, and the protruding member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. It is preferable that the center angle of the predetermined range is set corresponding to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing when the displacement of the swinging member 732 is started can be matched with the timing when the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 has an upward displacement (speed) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). Direction has a downward displacement (velocity) component, and while one of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (gravity) component. In the above description, the load on the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming the drive motor 763 so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is not limited to this. The load of the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) in (1) and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761).

That is, in the region where the load required to exert the action from the cam portion 761b on the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the load required to exert the action from the sliding pin 761c to the sliding hole 735b is large. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action from the sliding pin 761c on the sliding hole 735b is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c becomes relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as the biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700, but this is not always the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may act as a biasing force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the protruding member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above, the initial speed when the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment described above, in the slide unit 2400, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, similar to the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when the meshing is released and the meshing is switched to the meshed first driving state.

Further, bulges may be formed on both sides of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, which are vertically arranged. In this case, since swelling portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when the second drive state is switched to the first drive state, the first drive that meshes with the gear from the second drive state where the mesh is released. It is possible to switch to the state more smoothly.

Further, in this case, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small by forming the bulging portion on both sides of the gear that meshes with each other so that the tooth thickness gradually decreases.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position at the center of the gaming machine). In the above, the case of displacing from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430, 430 extend from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position ( When it is displaced to the center position of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment described above, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the cutout portions 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are small tooth portions formed in a small size to improve the rigidity. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rigidity of the teeth may be increased by forming the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the cutout portions 4413a and 4414a to be large.

Also in this case, similarly to the fourth embodiment, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portions 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, in the slide unit 6400, the case in which the protrusion 6411a for displacing the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a may be formed on the rear case 300. It may be formed so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be any member formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine). In the above, the case of displacing from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are at the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine). It is also possible to displace from the second drive state to the first drive state when it is displaced from the to the extended position (position at the center of the gaming machine).

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the slide unit 7400, the roller 7465 for displacing the operator 6438 is provided in the second slide member 7640. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not limited thereto. A roller 7645 that gives a displacement to the base member 7410 is disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. It may be.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance for relative displacement and the distance for relative displacement of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, and the distance by which the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400 and 9400, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slid and displaced to the effect area K, the effect areas are generated. Although the case where K is invisible is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first members 8431, 9431, the second members 8432, 9432, and the third members 8445, 9445 may be used. It is also possible to form the light-transmitting material so that part or all of the effect area K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surfaces of the base members 8431b and 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the right side in front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the left side in front view and the side surfaces of the base members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction are described. The side surface of the members 8431b and 9431b on the left side in front view and the side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the right side in front view may be arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are in contact with each other is controlled and sized. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when the both approaches the reference position due to variation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be steadily collided with each other.

In this case, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly because the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member. That is, since the rotary members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the drive transmission path from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the stop operation is quickly stopped at the united (extended) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used to Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436, 456 arranged on the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated to the side opposite to the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), and the ascending/descending direction. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position. Although the case where the rotary members 435, 455 and the rotary member 11730 (elevating base 720) are arranged in contact with each other may be arranged, the case where the rotary members are arranged is not limited to this. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the combined position. It is easy to increase the size of the pattern (character).

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (bulging) position and the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. The case where the rotary members 435 and 455 absorb the shock when the swing member 732 collides has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lift base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotation member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. By rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with respect to the swinging member 732, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, it is possible to easily absorb the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

In the first embodiment, at the time of forming the second effect mode, at least a part of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 by the rotating member 435. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is not limited to this, and the entire contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. May be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of a region exceeding this.

In this case, the rotating member 435 can make the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 invisible to the player, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 form one pattern. As a result, it can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the pattern (character) in the second effect mode and impairing the interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13 as shown in FIG. 2, and a first winning opening 64 is provided below it. Further, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 (hereinafter, referred to as the right area) on which the balls shot so as to jump over the variable display device unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flow down, a through gate 66, The second winning opening 140, an open state that is associated with the second winning opening 140 and allows the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. The electric winning object 140a, the specific winning opening 65a, an open state associated with the specific winning opening 65a in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state There is provided a variable winning device 65 that can be changed to and.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result. The variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, an operation in which the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) is executed, so that the player aims at the right side region of the game board 13 , A right-handed game) is performed and a ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as a prize ball, so that the player can obtain a large number of prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state where the big hit game is not being executed, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 is performed, and in the big hit game state where the big hit game is executed, it can be changed by a right hitting game. It will aim at the winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she is playing the game by changing the area where the ball is shot according to the game state.

Furthermore, the variable winning a prize device 65 whose opening operation is executed during the big hit game is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball entered into the specific winning port 65a can pass. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball that has entered can pass, and a ball that has flowed down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Then, by passing the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter, the probability variation state. Will be given).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with a right side area unit (not shown) into which a ball that has been launched by a right-handed game and has passed through the through gate 66 provided in the right side area of the game board 13 flows in. There is. The right-side area unit is provided with a clune having three discharge holes through which the balls can pass, as a sorting means for sorting the incoming balls into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this clune, the balls that have passed through one discharge hole flow down the first path and are guided to the second winning opening 140. Then, the balls that have not entered the second winning opening 140 are guided to a specific general winning opening (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the balls that have passed through the other two discharge holes out of the three discharge holes formed in the clune flow down the second path and are guided to the variable winning device 65. Then, the balls that have not entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are discharged from the second path as they are, pass through the first outlet 71, and are discharged from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, for example, a ball that can enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening and a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are simultaneously generated during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make it possible to complicate the flow of the ball during the jackpot game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, if the prize balls are paid out to the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning openings, the winning balls may be paid out to the plurality of winning openings during the jackpot game. Since this is possible, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the big hit, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Furthermore, you may execute the effect based on the ball that entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, for example, when the number of balls that entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game exceeded a predetermined number. It is advisable to execute the effect based on this. In this case, a jackpot with a long period in which the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot that is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a) can increase the number of balls that enter the specific general winning opening. Even if the ball is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to give the player a privilege.

In addition, during the big hitting game, the ball is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (opening period, interval period, ending period) You may comprise so that an effect may be performed based on having entered. This allows the player to continuously execute a game in which a ball is shot during the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from being lowered.

As described above, in addition to the effect based on the ball entering the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, it is possible to enter a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a specific general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1). In the case of providing a sorting member for sorting the ball and the ball, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the specific general winning opening during the big hit game or one round game during the big hit game, that fact May be notified. As a result, when the jackpot game is not being executed by the normal right-handed game, or an abnormality of various devices (sorting members, etc.) provided on the game board 13 can be detected early.

Also, in the middle of the route until the ball that has flown into the right-side area unit (not shown) reaches the klune, the sphere can pass as a drop position changing means for making the position where the sphere falls into the klune undefined. A moving member having a different path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate within a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown), and the timing at which the sphere flows into the moving member. It is possible to change the position of discharging (the position of falling into the klune). As described above, by providing the moving member, which is the drop position changing means, above the klune, which is the sorting means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the klune. The above-mentioned moving speed of the moving member may be set to such a speed that the falling position of the balls, which are continuously fired, fall 10 mm or more when the balls fall on the klune. By setting in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the damage of the device due to the balls that have continuously dropped on the klune colliding and bouncing. Further, even if the distance between the clues and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball that has dropped first and the ball that has dropped later interfere with each other to cause ball clogging. It will be possible.

Although the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example uses the clune-shaped mechanism as the distribution means, any structure capable of distributing the spheres to a plurality of paths may be used. A flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be used, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the sphere may be used. Further, in the present control example, the moving member is used as the drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls into the clune does not become a fixed position, but any structure that can change the drop position of the ball may be used, for example, It may be configured to move the clune itself.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning a prize device 65 during the jackpot game, the probability variation state described above occurs, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 to 65, the normal game state in which the first winning port 64 is aimed is entered.

Here, in the probability variation state in the present control example, the probability that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit as described above is high, and the ordinary symbol that the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is a lottery. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time (hereinafter, referred to as variable time) until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is fixed is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the special symbol lottery is 100 times in succession after the jackpot game is over, until the lottery result other than the jackpot is reached, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100. It is set to shift from the probability changing state to the normal gaming state after the jackpot has been continuously except the big hit. By thus limiting the period during which the probability variation state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that you can. Note that the period in which the probability variation state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. You may perform the transfer lottery which transfers a probability change state to a normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period which a probability variation state continues by time.

Furthermore, in the probability variation state of the present control example, the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 140a that is driven to open when the winning is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 66 is the normal game state. It is set so that the opening pattern is more advantageous to the player. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability variation state is more spherical at the second winning opening 140 than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the open state period during which the player can enter the ball is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes the right-handed game in the probability variation state, and the game can be efficiently executed by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. Has been done. Therefore, the right-handed game may be continuously executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the probability variation state, and the player can be provided with easy-to-understand game playability.

<Regarding the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the variable winning device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. There is provided an LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening/closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g to play the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the passage solenoid 65k from the back side to fix the passage solenoid 65k to the back cover body 65j with a screw. There is.

FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 109(b), the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 109(b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110(b).

As shown in FIG. 109(b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state and a non-entering state in which a game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. Is configured. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140 while keeping the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 109(b). As shown in FIG. 109A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

FIG. 110(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. To be done.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be unable to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. There is. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 110(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning game ball won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round in a state where the gaming ball is not discharged, and the jackpot B is won in the probability variation switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, 15 balls per prize). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 111(b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of the range, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", a variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned is performed. In addition, if "big hit A", a variable display in which main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are arranged is performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a predetermined main symbol combination indicating a small hit (for example, on the activated line L1, the main symbol combination is “3” “4” in order from the left symbol column Z1). "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present control example, the ball to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

In addition, in the present control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, when the same reference numeral is given in the description of each effect described later, it indicates that the display or area has the same function, and the place (display form) where the display or area is arranged is different. Will be described with the same reference numerals.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a display mode of the effect executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol, and FIG. ) And FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. This reach navigation effect allows the player to visually recognize the progress of the aspect of the effect (main effect) executed by a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach), and notifies or suggests it step by step. It is a production (sub-production). In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (effect description of the main effect, variation time, and expectation of being a big hit) by using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide easy-to-understand games.

Next, the reach navigation effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 112(a). As shown in FIG. 112(a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. The small area Dm5 is reduced and variably displayed, and the main effect based on the variation pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, the reach navigation effect which is the sub effect is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, a time gauge Dm4a indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a character Dm4b as a moving display portion visually indicating the progress of the main effect, and the main effect. An informing section Dm4c for notifying at least a part of the effect result and guide display sections Dm4d, Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period in which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, advances from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a. When the character Dm4b moving corresponding to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification content is sent to the notification unit Dm4c. Is stopped. In addition, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display unit for indicating the period in which the main effect is executed, but other displays may be used, for example, a predetermined finished product (for example, a building). It may be configured to be able to display the process of creating foods and dishes.

The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move from the left side to the right side on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. In this way, by moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed, it is possible to make the player predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. Note that in the diagram shown in FIG. 112(a), only the image simulating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but in reality, a plurality of character images at different speeds on the time gauge Dm4a are stored. It is controlled so that the length of the time gauge Dm4a and the selected character are set on the basis of the length of the selected main effect (length of fluctuation time).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying the sub-effect in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of fluctuation patterns (main effects) with different fluctuation times. The expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, the color) of the character Dm4b that is the movement display unit or the effect accompanying the character is a big hit May be displayed, or the progress of the main effect may be suggested according to the display mode of the selected character. Thereby, it is possible to have both the function of notifying the degree of progress of the main effect and the function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to perform effect display with a high effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the effect result of the main effect, and a rotation display (see FIG. 112(b)) that rotates in the left-right direction is performed on the small area Dm4. The indicator Dm4c is configured to be able to display an index indicating the effect result of the main effect on both sides thereof, and when the rotation display of the alarm unit Dm4c is stopped, the effect displayed by the indicator is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4. Is notified.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an index for notifying the effect result of the main effect, "V" which is an index indicating that the jackpot is a big hit, "X" which is an index indicating that the jackpot is out, and the main effect "Development", which is an index indicating that the effect is further continuously executed, and "?", which is an index indicating not to notify the effect result of the main effect, are set, and two of these indexes are set. The index is selected, and one index (for example, “V”) is displayed on one surface side of the notification unit Dm4c, and another index (for example, “?”) is displayed on the multiple surface side, and the display is rotated.

With this configuration, for example, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotatably displayed with the "V" index and the "X" index displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b notifies the notification unit Dm4b. When it reaches the section Dm4c, it will be notified in advance that there is no further development, that is, to grasp in advance the production time of this main production (the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production). Therefore, it is possible to display a main effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed with the “V” index and the “development” index displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the jackpot is reached when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c. Or the main effect is further developed from there, it is informed in advance that the player expects at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c). However, you can see the main production with peace of mind.

In this control example, the player can grasp the plurality of indicators by rotating and displaying the plurality of indicators, but the player may grasp the plurality of indicators by using other configurations. For example, a configuration is used in which a plurality of indicators are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indices are simultaneously displayed on the notification unit Dm4c and the index that is desired to be selected in the present effect is deleted over time is used. May be.

The guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, guidance display indicating the effect contents of the main effect this time is executed. When the character Dm4b arrives at the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the word "chance" is displayed or rotated and displayed as an effect indicating that the result of the main effect this time is a big hit. The indicator attached to the notification unit Dm4c is switched. As described above, by providing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle of the main production progress, it is possible to notify the player of the information based on the result of the main production in a stepwise manner. On the other hand, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be constantly watched.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the guide display unit can notify the guide display indicating the result of the main effect and the guide display indicating the period of the main effect when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the information notified to the player by the guide display unit. Although the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guide display portions, it may be provided with one or three or more.

Next, a display mode at each timing of the reach navigation effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 112(b) and 113(a) to 113(c). FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113(a) is a small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. 113(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113(c) is a view after the main effect is continued in the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a movement display is performed in which the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point). Further, the notification unit Dm4c executes a rotation display so that the player can visually recognize the indexes displayed on both sides thereof. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, the player is provided with information regarding the effect period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect in the middle of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it becomes possible to notify in advance (before the special symbol lottery result is displayed).

Further, in FIG. 112(b), the character Dm4b has a chance below the guidance display portion Dm4d! ! Character is displayed. This is a display showing the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portion Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guide display portion Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to determine at what timing the display showing the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit is executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the index displayed on the notification section Dm4c can be changed at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, for example, although two indicators of “V” and “x” were displayed on the notification unit Dm4c at the timing when the reach navigation effect was executed, at the timing when the character Dm4b reached the guidance display unit Dm4d, It is possible to switch the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c to the display of two indicators of "V" and "development". Thus, by changing the display content of the notification section Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display section Dm4d), it is possible to diversify the production content of the reach navigation production that is the sub production. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting tired at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113A, a case where the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 113(a), when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification section Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” displayed on one surface of the notification section Dm4c is displayed in the small area Dm4. It will be stopped. When this "?" index is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113(b), an effect is performed in which the character Dm4b is flicked off and returned to the point on the timing gauge Dm4a where the guide display portion Dm4d is provided. It

The index “?” displayed on the notification section Dm4c is an index that prevents the player from ascertaining whether the main effect ends or continues at this timing, and when the main effect does not develop this time, FIG. After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b rising up. On the other hand, when the main effect this time develops and continues further, the character Dm4b gets up as shown in FIG. 113(c), and the reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (display mode of peripheral effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can understand that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

The position at which the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113(b) is returned is determined based on the period of the main effect after development. Specifically, the time until the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a and reaches the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time is the main production time after development (the remaining time of the main production is 10 seconds). It is returned to the center position of the gauge Dm4a. With this configuration, it is possible to display the reach navigation effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development, and in the sub effect. It is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach navigation effect.

Furthermore, it becomes possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after the development based on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. In the pachinko machine 10, since a long variation time is easily selected when the special symbol lottery is won as a jackpot, the character Dm4b is returned to a position closer to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a and the jackpot is more returned. It is possible to make people think that they have been won and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the indicator displayed in the notification section Dm4c is "?", it is not notified to the player whether or not the main effect this time is developed, and therefore the player returns the character Dm4b. After confirming the position (after predicting the effect period in the case of development), the effect of whether or not the character Dm4b stands up will be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the reach navigation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment as described above, since it is possible to notify the player in advance of the information regarding the main effect, which is the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to notify the player. Thus, there is an effect that the main effect can be watched in a state in which the progress destination of the main effect is predicted. In addition, by displaying the information on the main effect stepwise, the player can keep an eye on the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

It should be noted that the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation effect used in the present control example is for performing various other effect displays. For example, in the reach navigation effect described above, a character imitating a rabbit is used as the movement display unit, but as the other characters, a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. In this way, when the character used in the reach navigation effect this time is selected from the plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the display contents of the main effect and the sub effect relevant to each other, and it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of comfort. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the character is displayed in the reach navigation effect that is the sub effect before the character is displayed in the main effect. Thereby, the contents of the main effect can be grasped in advance by seeing the reach navigation effect, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed corresponding to the pre-developed main effect and the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed corresponding to the advanced main effect may be different. .. As a result, the main production period after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, so that the production period of the main production after development can be easily grasped. There is an effect that can suppress.

Further, the degree of expectation that the main effect will be developed may be indicated depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, even if a region with high development expectations and a region with low development expectations are provided on the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b is returned to the region with high development expectations, the main effect will develop with high probability. Good. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position where the character Dm4b is returned, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table, for low probability of special symbols (time period of low probability state of special symbols), and when the probability of high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special symbols) Of high random numbers) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a high-probability game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9" It is determined whether or not there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "9". If "9", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed form is a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, the first special symbol, at the time of low probability of the second special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, the random number value "0" is for low probability The first random number is stored in the random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/400”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/40".

It should be noted that a duplicated value between the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability In order not to become, it is possible to set the random number value which becomes the big hit of each. If there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and fraudulent jackpots are easily assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value to be a big jackpot, the jackpot of a special symbol Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that becomes, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 29" is "big hit A". In addition, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present control example, there are two types of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting the jackpot type that the number of rounds to be executed more, by setting the jackpot in the second special symbol to the player more You can expect it. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played longer.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “complete disconnection” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 storage ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 140.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely out".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation superreach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various kinds of "normal reach" and various kinds of "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown in the drawing, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed fluctuations corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. , Is stored in the ordinary symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number which is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a normal symbol hit. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, when the low probability of the normal symbol (the period that is the normal state of the normal symbol), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability time (the normal symbol It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state) and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol. In this control example, the special symbol is set to a high probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is also set to a low probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. Is prescribed. That is, there is no game state in which the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are a hit of the normal symbol, and the range thereof is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are a big hit is 24, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol “○” is displayed as, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is “0.2 seconds×1 time”. However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values to be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and is further attached to the second winning opening 140. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 140. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is "1 second x 2 times" only. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 115A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 115(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) is a table in which the value of the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

This first hit random number table 202a, the jackpot determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at the time of low probability of the special symbol (the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability), and the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of determination values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be a big hit, the probability of a big hit is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116(b)) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected, corresponding to the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Has been done. Specifically, the value "0-49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A in the special symbol 1, and the value "50-99" is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and the special symbol 2 is the big hit. As the determination value of A, the value (0 to 99) of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, it is determined whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, in the “big hit B”, it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation state is established is not performed).

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the special symbols 1 and the special symbols 2 are assigned different jackpot types, and in the special symbol 1, the percentage of the “big hit A” selected among the jackpots is 50%, and in the special symbol 2, the jackpot. Of these, "big hit A" is configured to be selected 100%. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which the lottery is executed by the ball entering the second winning opening 140 as described above, and the lottery is rarely executed in the normal gaming state. The lottery is executed in a probability variation state in which a ball easily enters the winning opening 140. In this control example, if the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without a big hit even after transitioning to the probability changing state, it is configured to shift to the normal gaming state, and thus shifts to the probability changing state. It is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the probability variation state by continuing to win the jackpot again until the special symbol lottery has been performed 100 times since the beginning. Therefore, even after the player shifts to the probability changing state, the player will eagerly play the game so as to win the next jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is usually determined as a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). While being displayed, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117(b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117(c)), At least the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117(d)) is specified.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 117D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation game state is higher than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when it is out of the normal is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. FIG. 115( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 115(b), special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability variation It has at least a valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. The respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning the prize, are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to fourth area) similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above. Since it is different only in that it is changed to the second special symbol, its detailed description is omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64. It is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the sphere enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases 1 up to a maximum value of 4 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the variable display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the second winning opening 140. It is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 2 hold sphere number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the second winning port 140 and the number of reserve balls of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 122).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times of variable display holding N1 in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number of holding times of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. Thereby, the number of spheres of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 is held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls displayed in the actual variable display has deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a variable display holding sphere number (waiting number) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 66, and the number of holding balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 126: No).

The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning a prize device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the probability variation counter 203t is turned off based on it being turned on. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the big hit game (13 rounds in the big hit A in this control example). .. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds on the basis of the start of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds on the basis of the start of 13 rounds in the jackpot B. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls winning in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1302 of the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of main controller 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is prompted to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is finished, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In addition, in the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 is shown so as to be shown to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, but may be configured to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so that the player can see. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12th round and informing the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the longest time until the operation of the switching member 65h ends (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) is set as the distracting effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag that indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is closed in one round and that the abnormal process described later can be executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game ball in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this control example, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, the fact that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65 can be notified at an early stage. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is. Also, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3. Since this remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed and a new round is executed until the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value. No winnings will occur.

If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It means that a certain amount of time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period in which the game ball may pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-described probability variation validity flag 203q is set to ON. After the passage solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability variation switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is changed illegally to allow the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball, or to push the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraudulently causing a magnetic sensor to be falsely detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. This probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when performing the special symbol lottery. (S213 of FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S221 of FIG. 122).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the decoration lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the other device 228, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

As shown in FIG. 118A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. ..

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, out-of-reach, various reach, etc.) are set in the counter value for not-shown variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting effect information used in the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used for setting a reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect will be briefly described. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation effect is an effect that suggests and informs the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and the small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). This is a sub-effect performed in (see). In this reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect, and a guide display. It is an effect display including parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

In the reach navigation effect described above, the character Dm4b is set to be able to move a plurality of times on the time gauge Dm4a, of which the effect related to the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect related to the movement of the second time is the second navigation. It is set as a performance. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured such that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b. A variety of performance patterns can be set.

The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected as the remaining variation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of variation, so when the super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, , The remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and when the special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect The fluctuation time becomes 60 seconds.

Then, if the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to". If it is "199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "70 to." If it is "199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by configuring selectable effect patterns at different times in the first navigation effect, it is possible to change the remaining fluctuation time when selecting the second navigation effect, which will be described later. Can be set more complicatedly. Furthermore, if the special reach with a high degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery has been won as a jackpot as the variation pattern of the special symbol is set (if the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), the super reach is set. Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the change pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is set to be larger than that (when the remaining change time is 30 seconds), the player can make the first change. Isn't this fluctuation developed into a special reach by watching the progress of the production navigation? You can play while predicting.

In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed to set an effect pattern of 20 seconds and an effect pattern of 30 seconds. It is possible. Specifically, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b in the effect pattern of 30 seconds, and a character imitating a rabbit is set in the effect pattern of 20 seconds. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set a plurality of effect patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach navigation effect. be able to.

Further, in this control example, as described above, the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the moving speed on the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, it is only necessary to see the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the expectation degree of the jackpot is predictable, the moving speed may be set to be different by using the same character. With such a configuration, only the player who has experienced the reach navigation effect a plurality of times can understand that the moving speed of the character in the current reach navigation effect is different from the speed of the character in the previous reach navigation effect. There is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced for a player who is playing a game for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm4b is set so as not to be changed midway during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Note that the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed midway during the first navigation effect without being limited thereto. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected on the basis of the remaining variation time stored in and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(c), when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further 20 in the first navigation effect. When the second effect pattern is selected, the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, so "second 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. The second time means that the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113A), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again. This shows that the effect starts (see FIG. 113(b)). In this control example, it is possible to set up to the third movement effect at the maximum.

Next, when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the production pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if "4 to 6", then “Second time 20 seconds, third time 10 seconds” is selected as the 2nd navigation effect, and if “7 to 9”, “2nd time 30 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect.

Then, when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect, If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if "4 to 6", then it is the second. “Second time 20 seconds, third time 20 seconds” is selected as the navigation effect, and if “7 to 9”, “second time 30 seconds, third time 10 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect.

As described above, when setting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complicated effect pattern by making it possible to select the effect period for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect separately. You can In addition, in the present control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the value in the lower one digit of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. With this, it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns in one process using one effect counter, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect patterns. There is an effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). As shown in FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop. At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 of FIG. 138). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game is executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining variation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect. When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the remaining time storage area 223h is set with the variable time based on the acquired variation pattern (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is displayed. The remaining variation time after the setting is updated (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the reach navigation effect setting is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using the remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol over a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the change time of the special symbol, first, information indicating that the remaining change time is 60 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds as the first effect. Then, when an effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining change time. After that, it is possible to select the second effect using the remaining period based on the remaining change time. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing when selecting the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect for gradually selecting the fluctuation pattern. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 of FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 of FIG. 141), and selected. The effect pattern of the first navigation effect is set (S2103 of FIG. 141), and then the effect pattern of the selected second navigation effect is set (S2106 of FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variable production) and notice production are controlled.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. There is. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, while using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (not shown) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed, and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data source size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when a ball is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear surface images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all third symbol display devices. It is an image horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and the image controller 237 causes the rear image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while being horizontally scrolled from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 has been entered, the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect, but changes in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol, which is composed of an attached symbol imitating the above, is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to write one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effect, jackpot-related A display data table corresponding to the command-related display, round effect, and demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the ordinary symbol starting port 66, so the chances of drawing the ordinary symbol increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. . Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be opened as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls can easily enter the second winning opening 140, and the special symbols can be easily selected. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, and the player can have it. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is entered, it becomes a jackpot of ordinary symbols and the electric accessory is opened, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 140, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession, or a state in which the number of balls in possession does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of a period when you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

Also, in the ending production, by notifying that the lottery result of one of the special symbols that are being held will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player will be a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol that is being held. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address that represents one frame of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in that image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image or characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image. This rear surface type displays any one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, which range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type is specified. The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified to create a drawing list described later. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table is associated with an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is listed. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list to be described later, and transfer data is created. From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. The drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 of FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 111B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 111(b) S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 123(b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the image drawing instruction contents for As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list in which the drawing instruction contents are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. )), the pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated as described above, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. And the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite that should start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is drawn. Add to list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of retained balls symbol 1, number of retained balls symbol 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 111(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 of FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting a display area (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) in which the display of the character symbol and the point symbol is prohibited in the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed in the point effect. . In the point effect, the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is set three times in total, so the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first period to third period). A storage area 223m is provided. With this, different prohibited areas can be set in each period, so that variations in production can be increased.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and other than the demo display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115(a)). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115(a)). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the present is in the confirmed display effect.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in this control example, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting prize) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 is accompanied by the passage of the sphere. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol. It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and is changed by calculation. A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If the jackpot B is a big hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the jackpot is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning hole is set (S217), and then the jackpot start setting (a jackpot of 16 rounds, etc.) Setting) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221). Then, when the processing of S218 or the processing of S221 described above is finished, a stop command is set (S219), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first This is processing for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302).

When the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, when the current is the probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special value for high probability Based on the symbol big hit random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big hit is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number to be hit are the same. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but it is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big hits.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, if the present is not the probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. Since it is (low probability game state), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the low first probability random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)), The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and the starting winning is performed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 116(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the probability-based second random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 116(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol is hit, the same as when the normal symbol is missed The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the electric accessory 140a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 140 is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the regular symbol variation process (FIG. 125, S106) is the regular symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the processing in S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the present process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 of FIG. 129. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) and the start winning process (see FIG. 124) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is performed. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 127 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S98 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 is completed, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S801). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 129), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S1101. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1102, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the number of rounds command of number of rounds is set (S1105), and this processing is ended. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the round number command. Then, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the round number command is added so that the current round number can be grasped. Thereby, there is an effect that the data amount of the command output from the main controller 110 can be reduced. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if there is a problem in the data related to the number of rounds on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 (the stored data is erased due to a power outage etc.), the latest data will be updated each time a new round is started. Since the round information can be received, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

130, the description will be continued. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1004: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1006). When it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present control example), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. If it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is turned off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). Then, this process is completed. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game ends without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to be off just in case in the process of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the endin production is after the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the final round ends (the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the final round ends. The ending effect may be executed immediately after. In this case, the abnormal process for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of the ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process ends.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. You can play games with interest.

130, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification processing is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made in the twelfth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1305: No), this process ends. Here, since the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the jackpot game ends, expecting that the probability variation game state is given.

In the present control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), the notification command is set. (S1304). Then, this process is completed. The notification command causes the audio lamp control device 113 to set the output of the audio "Look at the liquid crystal".

In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the present process is ended.

130, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1401). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1, and the winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is displayed. Set. Then, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1406). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). Then, the process of S1408 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1409). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). Then, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1415). Then, this process is completed. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, even if the game ball remaining in the special discharge passage 65e2 passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation is confirmed. The game can be controlled so that it is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1420), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a game ball illegally and being given a probability variation game state.

130, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1013). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality process (S1013), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). Then, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Then, the process of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is a big hit.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1716 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 137). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), the power-off process in S1716 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1714 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off at S1714 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decoration lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 of FIG. 137). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1604 to S1606 is followed to the process of S1608. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1604 when the processing of S1608 is reached through the processing of S1604 through S1606. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1701 this time is performed (S1701), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1702 to S1811, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the decoration lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later is achieved (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1707). The frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. In addition, the input of whether or not the touch operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 is also monitored.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1708), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, etc. are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

When the process of S1710 is completed, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 137) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination processing (FIG. 138, S1711), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the processing of S1808, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c that have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values. After the processing of S1808 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning), or the special symbol lottery Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time the start winning is detected or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1808. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809). In the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit is received (S1809: Yes), the big hit related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot is not received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1811.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

When it is determined that the notification command output from the main control device 110 is received by the processing of S1811, the notification sound corresponding to the received command (in the present control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , Set the display command for notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot-related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the big hit related process (S1810). The jackpot-related processing (S1810) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related processing, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1901). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S1903). When it is determined that the round number command is received in the process of S1903 (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S1903, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1903: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the ending command is received (S1906: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this processing is executed. finish.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command is received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 to execute the effect suggesting that the probability variation gaming state is given. A V effect command for display is set (S1910), and this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This fluctuation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2007 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the processing of S1803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 138), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach (S2004: Yes), the reach navigation effect setting process is then executed (S2005). This reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 141, but if the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, the third symbol display device 81. Is a process for setting a reach navigation effect (sub effect) that guides the main variable effect (main effect) executed in.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the acquired variation pattern type is not the variation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach, that is, if the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to the missing or the normal reach (S2004). : No), based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Here, the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting processing (S2005), the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired variation pattern type and the effect contents (expectation degree, effect period) of the main effect are guided to the player. The sub-effect to be set is set.

When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, The change pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol by using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect executed in the central part of (see).

After the processing of S2101, the remaining time storage area 223h is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S2102). In the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of stepwise setting sub effects based on the variation time corresponding to the obtained variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern acquired this time by this processing is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this processing.

Although not shown, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, so a fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, a process of subtracting 30 seconds, which is the sub-effect execution ineffective period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119(b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are selected. The first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and based on the set first navigation effect period, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation effect is 60 seconds and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

When the process of S2103 is completed, the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining change time for setting the reach navigation effect that is the sub effect is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected in a state where "60 seconds" is set as the remaining fluctuation time in the remaining time storage area 223h, the remaining time storage area 223h is determined by this processing. The remaining fluctuation time of is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105), and when it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation effect is displayed. The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is achieved only by the first navigation effect. Will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to super reach, and "30 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. This corresponds to the case where the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected.

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation production is selected from the second navigation production selection table, and the variation pattern is selected. Update to the temporary storage area. The second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119(c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are selected. Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the second navigation effect is selected, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds, and the value of the last one digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period “30 seconds”, the effect pattern information of “second time 10 seconds” and “third time 20 seconds” is selected, and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

In this way, the second navigation effect is configured to generate the effect pattern using the remaining variation time after the setting of the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than collectively setting the production pattern for all the periods in which the reach navigation effect can be set, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the second navigation effect period, and the effect patterns are respectively set. After setting, by combining, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect and to prevent the player from getting tired.

In this control example, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the other periods, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not use all of the remaining variation period, and after performing the process of S2016, the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h. It may be configured to determine again whether is 0 (S2105). As a result, the reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining variation time after the second navigation effect setting can be set by the same process as the process of setting the second navigation effect, and the process can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 141, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No) or if the process of S2106 is completed, then the variation pattern for display is displayed based on the information in the temporary variation pattern storage area. A command is set (S2107). Here, as the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area, the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101 and the sub effect Which corresponds to the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the process of S2103, which constitutes the reach navigation effect, and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the process of S2106. This is a display variation pattern command.

When the process of S2107 is finished, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information about the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

In the present control example, the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired variation pattern and the sub effect are set and output as one variation pattern command for display. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the display main effect variation pattern command and the display sub effect variation pattern command may be output as separate commands. Thereby, for example, the display control device 114 displays the main effect on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub effect can be displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. In this way, the player operates the frame button 22 to easily perform the control of displaying or deleting the sub-effect.

Further, by using the configuration described above, it is possible to easily perform control such that an additional command is output to the sub-effect and the effect pattern of the sub-effect is switched while the main effect is being variably displayed. Specifically, during the period from the execution of the main effect to the execution of the sub effect (30 seconds in this control example), it is used for the sub effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed. It is possible to change the displayed character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) and change the content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, which has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to play.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 142, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed following the process of S2302. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. Alternatively, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of this register or a partial area of the internal memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2205). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) that are the power-on images are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variation effect to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer it. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(b). FIG. 144(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2502) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption processing are analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505). , A drawing list is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop types indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, non-out-of-reach reach, complete disconnection, chance The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (eye) are compared, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on time image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and in S2504. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2502) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2701, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2702. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606), If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete omission, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-described task process (S2504), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the identified stop is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2802.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may confuse the pachinko machine 10 with "a special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, referring to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-described display jackpot-related command process (S2609), which is one process of the command determination process (S2502, see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command (S2901). (S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

Details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display round command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S2903: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the display jackpot related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149(a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3201, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2905, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and display is performed. If there is a V effect command for use (S2907: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot-related command processing ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149(b). FIG. 149(b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the process of S2907, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot-related command process is ended as it is.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. In the process of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the back image change command If there is (S2610: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150(a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3401). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3401 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3402. .. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S3402 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, there is no reception of two or more backside image change commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2612), and there is an error command. If (S2612: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3502), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the error frame command processing, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3501, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the processing of S3502, and the error type Processing is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S3502 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

In the processing of S2601 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), and the processes of S2602 to S2613 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146(b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3602 to S3604 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3602), and then S3603 to S3604. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3701).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3605.

In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3801, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S3803), and if it is the demo display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3806), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3802: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 151, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3606 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is ended as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3609).

As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the finalized display data table is not displayed yet, and the finalized display effect is generated. Is set (S3610), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3615, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off instead of on (S3609: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect, and therefore the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3617) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The drawing content can be set.

In the process of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3616: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that defines the stop display of (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2505) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 154(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S3901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3901, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 154(b). FIG. 154(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3902).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4002). In the processing of S4002, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4002 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4002: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Further, as a result of the processing in S4001, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the processing proceeds to S4003.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4003: No), the resident target image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154(a)).

By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) previously executed from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4103), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4102: No), the processes of S4103 and S4104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. .. If it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process is not completed (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Further, as a result of the processing of S4105, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4105: No), the processing proceeds to S4107.

In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). If the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S4108), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4107: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4109). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S4109: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4110), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

In the processing of S4113, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4113, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4114). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, and thus the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-described drawing process (S2506) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), a drawing list is generated (S4201). That is, in the process of S4201, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2504). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 that stores the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S4202, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4203). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the reach navigation effect is executed as the effect display executed in the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, as the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect is advanced by the operation of continuously pressing (continuously hitting) the frame button 22 and the operation of pressing at the right time. The combined press effect and the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped by pressing the frame button 22, and the slot effect is a continuous slot effect within a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). A predetermined value (point) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a point effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) is executed by accumulating a predetermined number of the points is configured. Thus, various effects can be provided to the player, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp controller 113 are partially changed from those in the first control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display controller 114 are partially modified. The difference lies in that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Of the effects executed in this control example, the composite press effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the composite press effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157(b) shows the composite press effect being executed at the effect notification timing D3b. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the time reaches, and FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time point when the compound press effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1. [Fig. 159] Fig. 159 is a diagram illustrating another example of the timing at which the combined press effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1, and Fig. 159(a) illustrates that the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period of the combined press effect being executed. FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case, and FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of a point in time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the second continuous hit period Dc.

This combined press effect is a press effect in which three press effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm is based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each press effect period. The effect of accumulating the meters of the meter display portion D1 displayed on the side is executed. When a predetermined amount of meters are accumulated in the meter display portion D1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

When the composite press effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157(a), the press effect corresponding to the first continuous stroke period is executed. On the third symbol display device 81, the above-described meter display portion D1, a button display D2 for urging the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding the composite press effect are displayed. In the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment field for guiding the effect contents in text is displayed.

The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the effect result of the composite press effect, and is controlled so that the meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each press effect (see FIG. 157(b)). .. Then, in the meter display portion D1, a comment of "collect meter" is displayed as a comment for prompting the player to participate in the game. In the meter display portion D1, "V" is displayed at the right end portion of the meter at an initial stage, and the special symbol jackpot is won as a privilege that is advantageous to the player by accumulating the meter up to "V". Is notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the composite press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159(a)). As shown in FIG. 159(a), when the meter area is extended, "VV" is displayed at the right end of the meter area, and the bonus is further advantageous to the player by accumulating the meter up to "VV" (for example, 2 You will be notified that you will be awarded in each jackpot.

It should be noted that the privilege given by the composite press effect is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and, for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or the player collects it. Value information (points) may be added. Further, the display form displayed by "V" and "VV" is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the condition for giving the privilege to the player is visually displayed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the privilege granted when the "V" is reached and the privilege granted when the "VV" is reached, and different benefits may be set. Good.

The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the operation content on the frame button 22, and is a schematic diagram for continuously pressing the frame button 22 in the first continuous stroke period shown in FIG. 157(a). The display and the comment of “repeated hits!!” are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operating condition of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player is not operating the frame button 22, the button display is made to blink. When the player is operating the frame button 22, it is reduced or erased to change to a non-highlighted display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game guide display to the player from becoming excessive. Furthermore, it is preferable to change the button display D2 to a display that is not emphasized even when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during which the player does not operate the frame button 22. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to perform the frame button operation from being continuously highlighted, and to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The effect gauge D3 is a display unit showing the overall flow of the composite press effect, and the composite press effect is time-series from the left side to the right side of the effect gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 157(a)). it's shown. The effect gauge D3 is divided into a first continuous hitting period Da, a timing pressing period Db1, and a second continuous hitting period Dc in the order in which the pressing effect is executed, and is currently displayed depending on the position of the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. It is configured so that the player can grasp the situation. In this way, in the combined press effect in which the press effects different in the operation method of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, by displaying the entire combined press effect and the situation of each press effect so that the player can grasp the game, It is possible to execute a production that is easy for a person to understand.

Further, since the moving object D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the entire period of the composite press effect based on the moving state of the moving object D3a. ..

Further, of the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first continuous hit period Da. The effect notification timing D3b is for notifying in advance the content of the pressing effect executed during the timing pressing period Db1 executed after the first continuous stroke period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the composite press effect, a guide for the press effect executed in the next press effect period is displayed in the comment field described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the mode of the pressing effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the composite pressing effect and an unintended operation is performed. In addition, you may make it determine the operation condition of the player with respect to the frame button 22 at the time of reaching this production|generation notification timing D3b, and set the production mode of the next press production period.

In the comment field provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the composite press effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157(a), a comment is displayed that "automatic repeated hits are executed by long pressing the button." The automatic continuous hitting means that the player performs a predetermined operation (long-pressing operation for 2 seconds or more) during the press effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 to artificially hit the frame button 22 in a pseudo manner. It is a control process. By executing this automatic continuous hit, it is possible to entertain the repeated hit effect even for a player who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22 multiple times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the composite pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period is started while continuing the pressing effect in the first continuous hit period Da. Specifically, the timing gauge Db2 in which the area of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be targeted by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "aim button at the center of X mark..." is displayed as a part of the game guide of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pushing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving body D3a moves the timing gauge Db2 at the same time as the moving time of the moving body D3a on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the moving speed of the moving body D3a faster than the moving speed of the moving body D3a on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, the moving speed of the moving body D3a can be made different. With such a configuration, when the player is displayed using the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a that moves on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, the player is informed of the period of the composite press effect, the player There is an effect that the effect of timing display can be diversified without giving a feeling of strangeness.

Furthermore, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 at the time when the performance notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing pressing performance executed this time, and it is possible to facilitate the timing. There is.

Note that in FIG. 157(b), the target Db3 that is the target for operating the frame button in the timing push effect is displayed at the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the displayed position is moved closer to the end of the timing gauge Db2 and the timing is pushed. You may make it possible to set the difficulty level of production. Further, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158(a) and 158(b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the timing press effect period will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the automatic continuous hit is not executed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158(a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts moving rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. Since the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the region of the timing pushing period Db1 is extended as described above, the time required for the moving body D3a to pass the timing pushing period Db1 and the moving body D3a passing the timing gauge Db2. The time required to do this is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158(a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length that is approximately eight times as long as the timing pushing period Db1, the speed of the moving body passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing pushing period Db1. This is about 8 times the speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, the target Db3, which indicates the timing of pressing the frame button 22 in the timing push effect, blinks and is highlighted. Furthermore, in the comment field, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed and a diagram schematically showing pressing the frame button 22 are displayed as a timing push effect.

On the other hand, FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous hits are executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from the above-mentioned FIG. 158 (a) is that the third symbol display device 81 has a display indicating that the automatic continuous hit is currently being made, and a comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column. It is changed to "Hanase". That is, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing push effect while pressing the button, and therefore cannot perform the action of pressing the button in that state.

Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic continuous hit is being performed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing push effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment field is changed from "press". While changing to “Hanase”, the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing push effect is separated from the pressed timing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22) Is turned off). As a result, in the composite press effect, even if the timing press effect is executed in a state where the automatic press operation has been performed in the previous press effect (first continuous hit effect Da), the effect is executed without hindering the player. can do.

In the timing press effect period Db1 described with reference to FIG. 158(a) or FIG. 158(b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158(a), 158 (b), the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment field. A comment "Perfect!!" is displayed to inform that the frame button 22 is often operated. Further, the meter display portion D1 is extendedly displayed as a privilege that succeeds in the timing pushing effect, and that effect is notified in the comment field.

Even at this timing, the moving body D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, while the result of the timing pressing effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2, the progress of the composite pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3. Therefore, there is an effect that both the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the composite pressing effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, a case where the timing push effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second continuous hit period Dc has been reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). When the second consecutive hit period Dc is reached, the display for causing the frame button 22 to be consecutively hit is executed as in the first consecutive hit period. The difference from the display of the first continuous hitting period described above is that the game result of the timing pressing effect is displayed in the area of the timing pressing period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the game result of the timing pressing effect is displayed on the meter display section D1. This is the point that the privilege based on it is given. Since the other display contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second continuous hit period elapses, the composite press effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the present composite press effect is notified. This completes the composite press effect. As described above, in the combined press effect of the present embodiment, as the operation of the frame button 22, the continuous hit effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 and the timing press of operating the frame button 22 with good timing. The timing push effect for performing the operation is set to be continuously executed, and the result of the entire composite press effect is set based on the result of each press effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to obtain a sufficient result of the effect, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

Further, since the player has an automatic continuous hitting function for assisting the continuous hitting operation, the player can easily operate the frame button. Here, if the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the continuous hitting effect rushes into the timing pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically pressed repeatedly after the timing pressing effect is started. The problem that the situation in which 22 is pressed occurs occurs. Therefore, a period during which the automatic continuous hitting function is valid and a period during which the automatic continuous hitting function is invalid are provided, and the automatic continuous hitting function is set to be invalid during the timing push effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed by automatic continuous hits from occurring during the timing push effect, and it is possible to produce an effect that the player does not intend.

Further, with the above-described solution alone, the player who has entered the timing press effect while the automatic continuous hit function is being executed, that is, the frame button 22 is being pressed, is prevented from being accidentally pressed by the automatic continuous hit. There was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, when the same timing push effect is executed by simply disabling the automatic repeated hitting function, a game having a content such as "press the button at the right time" is given to the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. There is a problem that the guide is displayed, the player is confused by the displayed content, and cannot enjoy the timing pushing effect.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing at which the timing push effect is executed, and when the automatic continuous hitting function is set to ON, the content of the timing push effect is set at a good timing. I changed it to the production of releasing the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released at a timely timing, so that the player can participate in the effect of performing the operation of the framed button 22 at the timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the pressing effect is switched in the state where the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is continued in the composite pressing effect, but the operation invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is advisable to inform the player of the content of the next press effect within the operation invalid period. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the information display regarding the pressed effect being executed and the information display related to the pressed effect to be executed next from being displayed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect. There is an effect.

Next, of the effects executed in this control example, continuous slot effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot effects executed in this control example. The continuous slot effect is an effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 to execute the slot effect in which the pseudo symbol that is rotationally displayed is stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds). The result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects executed a plurality of times. Specifically, all the combinations of predetermined symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) are stopped and displayed during the continuous slot effect, so that the player is provided with a privilege (big hit game). .

As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, first, the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is executed. In this slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the effect period is 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (between 2 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. Is set as a frame button operation valid period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1--5 seconds) during the last 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 2) Then, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 has elapsed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of the effective line 1 row). Display), then the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is entered, and the second slot effect is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) in the first 6 seconds of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (between 2 seconds and 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). 1-1), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of the first line of the effective line), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) ) Is executed. Then, when the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the pseudo symbol does not stop and is displayed and the special slot effect is directly transferred. To do.

This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set, and an effect is displayed in which the pseudo symbols that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed regardless of the operation of the player, Any one of the display modes of the 1st to 3rd effective lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

The frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set in the special slot effect described above because the frame button operation effective period of 11 seconds is set in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) even though the frame button operation effective period (BT) is set. Since the player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, the effect of operating the frame button 22 again is not displayed during continuous slot effects. Is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In this control example, the special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is executed as the effect without setting the frame button operation effective period, but the operation of the frame button 22 is not necessary. It suffices that the effect to be performed is executed, and for example, the slot effect may be ended and a different effect may be executed.

Next, the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the effect period is 10 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is performed for 6 seconds (12 to 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). The slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is generated only when the frame button 22 is operated within the predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot effect to be executed.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). During 18 to 20 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and then the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is entered.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the extended slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect has an effect period of 10 seconds, and a frame button operation for which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 6 seconds (22 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. It is set as a valid period (BT).

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) during the extension slot effect, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of two lines of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

Next, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the effect period is 10 seconds, and during that period, 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the frame button 22 is operated. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). is there.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). During 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (the continuous slot effect is executed). After 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), a combination of pseudo symbols which are stopped and displayed when the frame button 22 is operated and not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) is a predetermined combination ( The ratio of "AAA", "BBB", or "CCC") is set to be different, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the predetermined combination described above is set to be more easily stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

Finally, the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), the effect period is 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (17 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) during that time. It is set as a frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the last 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the slot button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). This is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during (between).

When the frame button 22 is operated in the latter half 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). , After the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one or two effective lines), and continuous slot effect Ends.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated within the first 2 seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after the lapse of 19 seconds, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of the first line of the activated line), and the above-described slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is performed.

Even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (the continuous slot effect is being executed). From 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one line of the activated line), and the continuous slot effect is finished. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol is in the effective line 1 line or 2 lines It is set to be decided by lottery, and one of them is selected at a ratio of 1:1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a display mode of the above-described continuous slot effect will be described. FIGS. 161(a) to 161(e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the first slot effect executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the first slot effect, a pseudo symbol row having a plurality of pseudo symbols is displayed in three rows in rotation, and a frame button 22 for guiding the depression of the frame button 22 is schematically shown below the row. The guide map and the time gauge showing the frame button valid operation period are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, there is displayed a history display section for displaying a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") stopped and displayed in the current continuous slot effect.

In this state, the player operates the frame button 22 to shift to the state shown in FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol arrays are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161(b), the three pseudo symbol strings that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed (“AAA”), and the guide map and the time gauge are deleted. When the symbol stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the above-described predetermined pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed at the corresponding position on the history display unit.

Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the initial slot effect is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161(c), and the normal slot effect is started. In this normal slot effect as well, the three pseudo symbol arrays are rotated and displayed as in the first slot effect described above, and the three pseudo symbol arrays that are rotationally displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 are stopped and displayed. Is. The point different from the first slot effect is that the stop display mode in which the effective line has two rows as shown in FIG. 161(c) is selected as the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol row stops. Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped 2 seconds after the normal slot effect is started, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the inside symbol rows.

When the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined combination of the pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed on the history display portion. Here, when all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed on the history display portion are acquired, a privilege (big hit game) is given after the end of the continuous slot effect.

In this way, when the continuous slot effect is executed by the normal frame button operation, the slot effect is performed twice (first time slot effect and normal slot effect), and three combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols are performed by the slot effect. The game nature to acquire is provided.

On the other hand, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the initial slot effect is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process moves to FIG. 161(d) and the first shortened slot effect is started. It In this first shortened slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are displayed in rotation as in the normal slot effect as in the first slot effect described above, and three pseudo symbols which are displayed in rotation by the player operating the frame button 22. The row is an effect of being stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed (“BBB”) in one effective line. Then, after that, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161(e) is executed.

This second shortened slot effect is the same effect as the above-described first shortened slot effect, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, It is configured such that the effect mode of the executed slot effect is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects performed during the continuous slot effects is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of times of slot production is increased, the production result of continuous slot production becomes more advantageous to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the slot effect executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect (first slot effect), even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. Up to this, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effects is small, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot effect, so that it can be displayed to the player. You can have expectations until the end.

For the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the operation of the frame button is executed after the first slot effect is finished, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

Next, of the effects executed in this control example, the point effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162(b) is the “die roll mode”. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a case.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will not be described in detail, but in the present control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 causes the game mode to be performed. In the case of winning the transition lottery), it is configured to transition between two game modes (“normal mode” and “die roll mode”) in which the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is different.

The "normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol becomes reach, a predetermined character ("rabbit" "turtle" "hero" ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of) appears is executed. Then, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) that cumulatively display the points acquired by the point effect executed in the present control example are displayed, and any one of the indicators ( In any of P1, P2, and P3), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a privilege (reach effect) is given to the player.

On the other hand, in the “die roll mode”, the variable display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5, and the player is informed of the special symbol lottery result due to the progress of the game (not shown) using the die in the main display area. This is a game mode in which the effect to be performed is executed. Then, as in the case of the above-mentioned "normal mode", two indicators (P4 to P5) displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P4 to P5) is displayed. In P4 or P5), the bonus (reach effect) is given to the player when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points).

First, the point effect executed in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 162(a). FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example in the “normal mode”. As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the “normal mode”, three indicators are displayed, and each indicator is associated with “rabbit”, “turtle”, and “hero”. This is, the type associated with each character is set to the points (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) given to the player in the point effect, and the type of points given to the player is set. Points are given to the respective indicators (P1 to P3) in accordance with the above.

In addition, the characters "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" associated with the respective indicators (P1 to P3) are the third symbol variation effect and the pending symbol display (not shown) executed in the "normal mode". ), the point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed based on the character being displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation in which the points in the point effect are accumulated. Note that it is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be randomly determined. As a result, the points associated with the characters other than the characters displayed in the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), which makes it possible to give the player a surprise.

Further, in this control example, any one of a plurality of characters (“rabbit”, “turtle”, “hero”) appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as the point effect, and the displayed character is at that time. Is set so that high points are awarded when the character matches the character displayed as the main body of the third symbol variable display.

Further, the period for displaying the character as the point effect is set three times during one point effect, and the points are set to be given at each timing. As a result, it is possible to further associate the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of the main character or the type of that character) with the point effect, and to make the compound effect easy for the player to understand. There is an effect.

In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. A display object (for example, a “sword” or the like related to “hero”) may be used. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can play the game while comparing the display object displayed in the point effect with the content of the third symbol variation effect and predicting the presence or absence of the relationship.

Note that the point effect may be associated with something other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or is output from the voice output device. It may be associated with the voice of the character. As described above, by associating some effect provided to the player with the point effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect.

In addition, in this control example, the points are configured to be accumulated in the indicator at various timings during the variation display of the special symbol (during the third symbol variation), and the maximum number of points (7th stage in FIG. 162). ) Is reached, at least an effect with a higher jackpot expectation degree is executed than the variable effect of the third symbol being executed at that time.

Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not one of the indicators reaches the maximum value by the point effect and can execute the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

The manner in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As described above, in the present control example, the "normal mode" and the "die roll mode" are set as the plurality of effect modes by the voice lamp control device 114 which is the effect mode setting means. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process which will be described later executed by the voice lamp control device 114. A plurality of effect modes may be set by operating the frame button 22.

Then, the indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as stage information of a plurality of stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points that are variable information on the third symbol display device 81. It

Next, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the point effect executed in the “die roll mode” will be described. FIG. 162( b) is a diagram showing a display example in the “die roll mode”. As shown in FIG. 162(b), in the “die roll mode”, two indicators simulating a die roll are displayed, and the cumulative value of points is displayed by the eyes of the die roll. The two dice associated with each of the indicators are configured in the same display mode as the dice used in the “dice effect” executed in the “dice mode”.

As described above, since the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed in the point effect of this control example, it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a feeling of strangeness in each effect. be able to.

Further, in each game mode, since the type of points accumulated by the point effect and the upper limit value are set to be different, different point effects can be enjoyed for each game mode. Regarding the points given in the point effect, the point reference value to be given in advance is determined, the point reference value is converted to correspond to the indicator display of the currently executed game mode, and the converted points are converted. It may be configured to be given to the player. As a result, the control for giving points can be simplified.

Furthermore, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points already stored in the indicator may be converted into the points corresponding to the game mode of the transfer destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already given during the point effect is stored in the storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114, which is the stage information storage means, and the game mode is set. It is advisable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of shift to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the shift destination, and to control the display. Thereby, the indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display region Dm, and FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of effect display executed in the main display region Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. I have decided. This prevents the point displayed in the main display area Dm and the third symbol variation effect from overlapping and giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. Has been done. The place where the points are displayed is determined for each of the divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying points in each small area unit is stored in advance, when the small area in which the point display is executed this time is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, only the process of determining the display portion is executed, and there is an effect that the process can be simplified.

A method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. Good.

Further, in the present control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine, but it may be divided into a larger number, and the point display is not executed in one small area, but a plurality of small areas are displayed. May be used to execute the point display.

Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). As the third symbol variation effect, when the points are displayed while the effect shown in FIG. 163(b) is being executed, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small area not used. The area is discriminated, and as a result of the discrimination, a small area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, an allowable area for allowing point display is set.

Then, an image relating to the "hero" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which points are currently given to the selected small area Dm12 among the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set as the allowable area. Then, two points are displayed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the image serving as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, two points of the indicator corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162(a) are accumulated.

In the present control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, the points that the player can obtain are higher than when other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect with the character image that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect before the points are displayed, and determines whether or not the points that can be obtained in the current point effect are high. Can be predicted. Therefore, the continuation of the production can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the character image is displayed in the point effect and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing at which the point is displayed. In, points may be accumulated in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect.

Furthermore, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the cause of the change of the hold image is due to the point effect or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed hold image indicates the expectation of a big hit. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed later.

As described above, the display location of the points is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and the points are distributed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect, so that the game is played. It is possible to perform point productions that are easy for the user to understand.

In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which points can be displayed, it is possible to select a location for point display based on the number of points to be given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, Point display is performed in the small area Dm13 that is in the vicinity of the "monster" that is the enemy as the main subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol is hit. In this case, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, points may be displayed in the small area Dm11 in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the protagonist as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect. With this, by grasping the place where the player displays points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, in the small area of 1 It is also possible to calculate the proportion occupied by the image, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area in which points can be displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

FIG. 164( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a pressing scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added, The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the pressing scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165(a), the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the long pressing scenario 222c2, and the composite pressing scenario 222c3 are set in the pressing scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal press scenario 222c1, the period during which the normal button press is valid (normal press period) is set according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). It is a scenario. The information of the normal press scenario 222c1 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the normal press effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is the normal press period based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

Further, the timing type is set for each period during which the button press is valid. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

Specifically, in the normal press scenario 222c1, the normal press period is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. “OK” is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display is started, and is incremented by 1 every 1 ms thereafter, so the period of 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the change is determined as the normal press period. Will be done.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the pressing effect ending process is executed.

When the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", the pressing period type is not set and the button pressing is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long-pressing scenario 222c2. In the long press and hold scenario 222c2, a period (long press and hold period) in which the long press button press is valid is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). It is a scenario that has been done. The information of the long press pressing scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storing area 223m when the long press pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the long press pressing period is set based on the information of the set press scenario storing area 223m. Is determined.

Specifically, in the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the long press pressing period is set as the pressing period type and the "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. There is. That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the long-pressing and pressing period. The long-push pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in the present control example) (long-pressed). In the long press depressing effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the characters “long press success!” is displayed) is executed based on the long pressing operation performed during the long pressing depressing period.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the pressing effect ending process is executed.

When the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", the pressing period type is not set and the button pressing is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the composite pressing scenario 222c3. The composite press scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which a plurality of types of button presses are valid is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of variable display). The information of the composite pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the composite pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and indicates various pressing periods based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined. In the present embodiment, only one type of compound pressing scenario is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the combined pressing scenario 222c3, the automatic pressing period is set as the pressing period type and the "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001-12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the automatic pressing period. The automatic pressing period is a period in which the automatic pressing is executed based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the long-press operation being performed during the auto-press period, the effect is that the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long-press operation is continued (for example, the frame button The effect of increasing the gauge by repeatedly hitting 22) is executed.

With respect to the value “12001 to 13200” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the automatic pressing is performed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, "NG" is set as the timing type.

With respect to the value “13201 to 13800” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the automatic pressing is performed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, “OK” is set as the timing type.

With respect to the value "13801 to 15000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the press period type when the automatic press is in progress, and the normal press effect is set when the non-auto press is in progress, "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when the automatic pressing is being performed, a release effect, which is an effect of releasing the frame button 22, is displayed, and by releasing the frame button 22 in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of variation, an effect based on the timing type of “OK” ( For example, the characters "Good timing!" are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, the character “Bad Timing!”) is displayed.

In the case of non-automatic pressing, a normal pressing effect that is an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of variation, based on the timing type of “OK”. An effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed during 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, the character “Bad Timing!”) is displayed.

For the value "15001 to 18000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the automatic press effect is set, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Then, for the value "20001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the ending process of the composite press effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a hit character selection table 222d1 and a removal character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166(b). FIG. 166(b) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table.

Although not shown in the figure, the effect counter 223f has three types of independent counters, and when selecting a character in each period, a different counter is used for selection. Thereby, the variation of the character displayed in the first period to the third period can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0-49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "50-100" of the effect counter 223f. “Rabbit” is defined as a character, and “turtle” is defined as a character corresponding to the values “101 to 149” of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of the point effect" is defined, and the character (hero, rabbit, turtle) performing the main effect in the point effect. The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point effect executed when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is easily displayed in the first to third periods, whereby the game is played. Since the person plays the game in the expectation that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166(c), the contents of the detachment character selection table will be described. FIG. 166(c) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is out of alignment, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table.

Specifically, in the disengagement character selection table 222d2, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0-65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "66-132" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "turtle" is defined as the character corresponding to the values "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a hitting point selection table 222e1 and a missing point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, and points corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is a prescribed table. In addition, when selecting points in each period, selection is performed using different counters as in the case of selecting characters. Thereby, the variation of the points displayed in the first period to the third period can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the last one digit value "0-2" of the effect counter 223f, and the last one digit value of the effect counter 223f. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to "3 to 6", and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last single digit value "7 to 9" of the effect counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the deviation point selection table 222e1 defines "1" as the point corresponding to the last digit "0-4" of the effect counter 223f, and the effect is defined. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "5-7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "8-9" of the effect counter 223f. It is prescribed.

Therefore, the hitting point selection table 222e1 is configured so that higher points can be selected more easily than the deviation point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, high points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the press effect flag 223j, the press effect scenario counter 223k, the press scenario storage area 223m, the slot effect flag 223n, and the slot effect counter 223p. The difference is that the slot effect state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (display). When it is on, it indicates that the pressing effect is being executed (display), and when it is off, the button is pressed. Indicates that the effect has not been executed (displayed). The pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired fluctuation pattern is the pressing effect (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170) (FIG. 170). See S2031). Then, in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172), it is referred to for determining whether or not the press effect is in progress (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to OFF at the end of the press effect (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The press effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the press effect is set. This press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined that the press effect is being performed in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 at the end of the press effect. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the press effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time from the start of the variable display) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later, is it a valid period for pressing the button? It is determined whether or not.

The pressing scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario table 222c described above. In the pressing scenario storage area 223m, when the fluctuation pattern in which the pressing effect is set is acquired in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the pressing scenario corresponding to the set pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is in a valid period.

The slot effect in progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, the slot effect is being generated. Indicates that the effect has not been executed (displayed). This slot effect flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired fluctuation pattern is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172) (FIG. 170). See S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining whether or not the slot effect is being performed (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is turned off when the slot effect is completed (see FIG. 174). (See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. The slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) when it is determined that the slot effect is being performed (S4601: Yes in FIG. 174) (S4603 in FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot effect counter 223p is the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the first slot effect during process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect during process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect during process (FIG. 177). Reference), second shortening slot effect production processing (see FIG. 178), and extension slot effect production processing (see FIG. 179).

The slot effect state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot effect is stored, and during the first slot effect, the normal slot effect, the first shortened slot effect, the second shortened slot effect, and the extended slot effect. The corresponding value is stored. In the slot effect state 223q, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is set to the slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170), the first slot effect is set. (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the process during the first slot effect (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first shortened slot is selected when the first shortened slot effect is selected. The effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and the special slot effect is set when the special slot effect is selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot production process (see FIG. 176), when the display slot stop command of the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot production is performed. When the display slot effect command corresponding to is set, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first shortened slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 177), when the second shortened slot effect is selected, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extended slot effect is selected. The extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot production process (see FIG. 178), when the display slot stop production command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extension slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 179), when the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared at the end of the slot effect (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the work RAM 233 in this control example, a prohibited area storage area 233m is added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163) of the display area, which is composed of a total of nine areas obtained by vertically dividing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 into three, and dividing the display screen into three horizontally. Is stored, and the character pattern and the point pattern are controlled so as not to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as the information indicating the display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, it does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, A character design and a point design (not displayed in Dm12 and Dm13) are selected, and a point effect is executed. Further, after the character symbol is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area in which the selected character symbol is displayed, and then the point symbol is selected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the character design and the point design from being displayed in the same display area in an overlapping manner. In addition, when all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m when selecting the point symbol, the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol are combined (or reduced) to display an overlapping display. This may be prevented, or one of the character symbol and the point symbol may not be displayed.

The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table that stores image data for displaying a character design in the point effect described above. This character data table 234a3 stores the display information of the character symbols displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, and in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186), the character information of the received command is used. The display information of the corresponding character design is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character symbol display information includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information matching with is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character design from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point design and the character design displayed in the point effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. You can prevent it from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point pattern in the above point effect is stored. This point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbols displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, and in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186), the point information of the received command is used. The display information of the corresponding point pattern is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The point symbol display information includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information matching with is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point symbol from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are overlapped and displayed. You can prevent it from happening.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), a change is made so as to execute the press effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732). The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169. In the main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1710 is completed, the press effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. This variable display setting process 2 (S1712) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example in that a process for executing a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect is added instead of the reach navigation effect. The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1712), first, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed, and then the variable pattern command for display is set (S2006).

When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is to execute the press effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is set (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the processing of S2033, for example, if the acquired variation pattern is for executing a normal pressing effect, a normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, the button effective period can be adjusted to the display of the effect based on the pressed scenario storage area 223m and the pressed effect scenario counter 223k.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2031, if it is determined that the pressing effect is not executed (S2031: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect is executed (S2034).

In the process of S2034, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is to execute the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q. Is set as the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2034, when it is determined that the slot effect is not executed (S2034: No), it is then determined whether or not the point effect is executed (S2037).

In the process of S2037, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is to execute the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to S2007. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2037, when it is determined that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the transition to S2007, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process is ended.

Details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described below with reference to FIG. 174. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the hit/miss determination result is a big hit (S4301). Then, the first to third character information is determined based on the type of point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying the character design in the three periods in which the character design set in the point effect and the point design are displayed. The first character information is the information of the character symbol displayed in the first period which is the earliest of the three periods (the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is the shortest), and the second character information is the first period. Is the information of the character symbol displayed in the second period which is the next period, and the third character information is the information of the character symbol displayed in the third period which is the period following the second period.

As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured to easily select the same character pattern as the predetermined character in the point effect. As a result, if the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character pattern displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, then let the player expect a big hit after that. You can

When the process of S4302 is finished, the first to third point information is determined based on the last one digit value of the effect counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The 1st to 3rd point information is information for displaying the point symbol in the 1st to 3rd periods set in the point effect, like the 1st to 3rd character information described above.

As described above, the hitting point selection table 222e1 is configured to easily select the point symbols having higher points than the deviation point selection table 222e2. As a result, a large number of high-point symbols are displayed in the point effect, which allows the player to expect a big hit thereafter.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if the result of the hit/miss determination is determined to be miss (S4301: No), the first to third characters are determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the miss character selection table 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the deviation point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is finished, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 receives the point effect based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. Is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, details of the press effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. The pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects pressing of the frame button 22 (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) according to the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and the command corresponding to the pressing is displayed and controlled. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

In the press effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the press effect in-progress flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the press effect is in effect) (S4401). In the process of S4401, when it is determined that the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is off (S4401: No), it is not necessary to perform the setting related to the pressing effect, and thus the process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to S4402 to execute the process related to the pressing effect.

In the process of S4402, the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to the process of S4403. Since the press effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is every 1 ms while the press effect is being executed. Is incremented by 1.

In the process of S4403, based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m, the frame button 22 whose current period is normal is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is the period to be detected (normal pressing period) (S4403).

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4404). If it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal press period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and the present process is ended.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and the display pressing command corresponding to the timing type is set. Accordingly, when different effects are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the pressing timing.

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a period for detecting the long pressing of the frame button 22 (long pressing pressing period). Yes (S4406). In the process of S4406, when it is determined that the current period is the long press and hold period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is long pressed (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is set ( (S4408), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed for a long time (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the current period is not the long press and hold period (S4406: No), it is then determined whether or not the current period is the automatic press and hold period (S4409). In the process of S4409, when it is determined that the current period is the automatic pressing period (S4409: Yes), the automatic pressing effect setting process is executed (S4410), and the present process is ended. Details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the automatic pressing period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. When it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is released (whether or not the pressed state is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state) (S4412). ..

When it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released is set during the release period, and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the processing of S4412, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the processing of S4413 is skipped and the present processing ends.

In the process of S4411, when it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), whether or not it is the end timing of the press effect period (obtained based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k). It is determined whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is information of "END" (S4414).

In the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the press effect effect flag 223j is set to OFF. Then (S4416), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173, the details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that it is the automatic press period will be described. .. This automatic press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a long time during the automatic press period, and the frame button 22 is pressed for a fixed period (every 1 second) during the long press period. This is processing for transmitting a command indicating that 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the auto-press effect, by long-pressing and holding the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed.

In the automatic press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is started. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for automatic pressing ( S4502). Then, in the auto-pressing period, an auto-pressing start command indicating that long pressing of the frame button 22 has been started (automatic pressing has been started) is set (S4503), and this processing ends. By changing the pressing scenario to the pressing scenario for the automatic pressing in the process of S4502, the effect mode displayed thereafter is changed to the effect mode on the assumption that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, the effect of pressing the button can be changed to the effect of releasing the button).

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the long pressing of the frame button 22 is being performed (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being long-pressed (S4504: Yes), the previous auto-press is performed in the period in which the auto-pressing started by the long-pressing the frame button 22 is being executed. It is determined whether or not a certain period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has elapsed since the previous automatic pressing was executed (S4504: Yes), the display automatic pressing command is set (S4506), and the The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the fixed period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous automatic pressing was executed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and the present process is executed. finish.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being long-pressed (S4504: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been long-pressed (S4507). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. This prevents erroneous determination that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has ended when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like. it can.

In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is finished (S4507: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for non-automatic pressing. (S4508). Then, a display auto-depression end command indicating that long pressing of the frame button 22 has been completed (auto-depression has been started) is set during the auto-depression period (S4509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 is not finished (S4507: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuous hit) during the automatic continuous hit period, and therefore, based on the timing type. A pressing command for display is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this processing is directly terminated.

Details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. The slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether the slot effect flag 223n is ON (whether the slot effect is in progress) (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S4601: No), it means that the slot effect has not been executed (displayed), and thus the process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during execution (display) of the slot effect. It

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is the value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (first slot effect) is being executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the first-time slot effect, the in-first-time slot effect process is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the process during the first slot effect (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 175. The first slot effect mid-process (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first slot effect of the slot effect. is there.

In the initial slot effect production process (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within a valid button pressing valid period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 13000 (that is, from 2 seconds to 13 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that the button pressing effective period. To do.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is reached (S4701: YES), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). When it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4702: No), this process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). .. In the processing of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press effective period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds). Since the frame button 22 is pressed during (for 8 seconds) and the remaining effect time of the slot press effect is long, the process proceeds to S4706 to execute the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value of 2000 to 8000 (that is, a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 for executing a normal slot effect. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4709), and the present process is ended. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that it is not the button press valid period (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press valid period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less in the process of S4710 (S4710: No), this process is directly terminated.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the first slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the normal slot effect during processing (S4606).

The process during normal slot effect is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect production process (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within a valid button pressing valid period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 17000 to 28000 (that is, from 17 seconds to 28 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that the button press effective period. Determine.

In the processing of S4801, if it is determined that it is not the button press valid period (S4801: No), the processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S4801: YES), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802).

In the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4802: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803).

In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect. This is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot effect whose time is 10 seconds. In this case, the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809), and the display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is set. A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to S4804 to end the slot effect.

In the processing of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined that it is an even number (S4804: Yes), a display slot in a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned The stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process of S4807 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the normal slot effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, in the second shortened slot effect, one symbol is stopped and displayed. Three symbols will be stopped and displayed together with the stop display in the slot effect. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed down slowly, it is determined whether two symbols or one symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the value of the effect counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, the possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed is increased, so that the player can be actively participated in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. Yes (S4607).

In the process of S4607, when it is determined that the first reduced slot effect production is set (S4607: Yes), the first reduced slot effect production process is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 177, the details of the first shortened slot effect production process will be described. The first shortened slot effect mid-process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. This is processing for.

In the first shortened slot effect production process (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect.

In the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect is determined (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

In the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4902: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is arranged is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the button press valid period is not reached (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has not been pressed during the button pressing effective period in the first shortened slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

When the process of S4905 or S4908 is completed, the display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4909), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then it is determined whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. It is determined whether or not (S4609).

In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect during process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the second shortened slot effect production process (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 178. The second shortened slot effect during processing (S4610) is processing executed in the slot effect setting processing (see FIG. 174) and corresponds to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. This is processing for performing processing.

In the second shortened slot effect mid-processing (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the processing of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing period is not valid (S5001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

In the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5002: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The process is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and the present process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then it is determined whether or not the extended slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. It is determined (S4611).

In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extension slot effect is being set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 179, the details of the extension slot effect production process (S4612) will be described. The extension slot effect mid-process (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the extension slot effect. Processing.

In the extension slot effect production process (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the extension slot effect (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the button pressing period is not valid (S5101: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102).

In the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5102: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The process is set to the end waiting state (S5104), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extended slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to S4613.

In the process of S4613, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 in order to determine whether it is the end timing of the slot effect (S4613). In the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), since it is not the end timing of the slot effect, this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect, and then the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the slot effect is already stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is the case where the special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to end the slot effect after the effect mode in the slot effect is stopped and displayed, a display slot effect forced termination command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot effect flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and the present process is ended.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180), a press effect related command process, a slot effect command process, and a point effect command process are added. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the processing of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the press effect related command is received (S2631).

In the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to press effect is received (S2631: Yes), the command process related to press effect is executed (S2632), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

On the other hand, in the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to the press effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect command has been received (S2633).

In the process of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command is received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

In the process of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command is received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command is not received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the processing of S2601. Return to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184, details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described. The press effect related command process (S2632) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) the press effect.

In the press effect related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S5201). In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Here, details of the press command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command processing. This push-down command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display push-down command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the press command processing, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the press display data table thus determined is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S5301). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5302).

Then, based on the pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5305), the press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether the display long pressing command has been received (S5203).

In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display long press command is received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

Here, details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the long press command processing. The long press command process is a process corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the long press command processing, first, the long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5402).

Then, based on the long press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5405), the long press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether the display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-press start command is received (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

Here, the details of the automatic press-down start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a flowchart showing the automatic press-down start command processing. This automatic press-down start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display automatic press-down start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press start command processing, first, the auto-press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press start command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502).

Then, based on the auto-press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5501, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S5504). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5505), the automatic press-start command processing is terminated, and the control returns to the press effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-pressing start command has not been received (S5205: No), it is then determined whether the display auto-pressing command has been received (S5207).

In the process of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

Here, the details of the auto-press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(b). FIG. 183(b) is a flowchart showing the automatic press command processing. This auto-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press command processing, first, an auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, the determined auto-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602).

Then, based on the automatic press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5605), the automatic press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), it is then determined whether the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

When it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command process is executed (S5210) and the process proceeds to S5211.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the details of the automatic pressing end command processing (S5210) will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a flow chart showing the automatic pressing end command processing. This automatic press-down end command processing executes processing corresponding to the display automatic press-down end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the automatic press end command processing, first, an automatic press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display automatic press end command is determined, and the determined automatic press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5702).

Then, based on the auto-pressing end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5705), the automatic pressing end command processing ends, and the processing returns to the pressing effect related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press termination command has not been received (S5209: No), it is then determined whether a display release command has been received (S5211).

In the processing of S5211, when it is determined that the display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), the release command processing is executed (S5212), and this processing ends.

Here, details of the release command process (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing the release command processing. This release command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display release command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the release command processing, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S5801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5805), the release command process is terminated, and the press effect related command process is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5211, if it is determined that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this processing ends.

Next, details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the slot effect command processing. The slot effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S5902).

Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S5905), the slot effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

Next, the details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the point effect command processing. The point effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display point effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, information on the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

Character data of the character pattern to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the processing of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information on the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command, the point data of the point symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6008), the point effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

As described above, since the composite press effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously performs different operation modes (continuous hitting, timing pressing) on the frame button 22, It is possible to increase the willingness to participate. Further, when it is determined that the player was executing the automatic pressing function during the composite press effect, the press effect mode of the composite press effect to be executed is switched, so that the player can be provided with an effect that is not uncomfortable. You can

In this control example, normally, as a composite press effect, a setting (timing press effect) in which the frame button 22 is pressed at a good timing after the press effect in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed (continuous hit effect) is set. If the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect switches from the continuous hit effect to the timing press effect, it is configured to switch the above-described timing press effect to the release effect that releases the button at a good timing. Other configurations may be used.

For example, when the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous hit effect to the timing push effect, the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the timing press effect may be automatically determined. The effect may be continuously executed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a feeling of strangeness to the player who is executing the automatic pressing function.

Further, in the second control example, the normal press effect, the timing press effect, and the release effect can be displayed as the composite press effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which the long press effect is executed may be provided as a part of the composite press effect.

Further, in the second control example, the timing of changing each pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect is the timing of switching the pressing effect, but the effect mode of the next pressing effect is the timing at which the previous pressing effect is executed. May be determined. This makes it possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the composite press effect.

Further, although the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the effect period of the composite press effect executed in the second control example, an invalid period is provided during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite press presentation using an invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period in which the composite press presentation is being executed, and thus it is easy for the player to understand. A performance can be provided.

In the composite press effect described in the second control example, the result of the composite press effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each press effect executed during the composite press effect. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play each pressing effect. Note that the method of displaying the effect result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the composite press effect.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, It is configured such that the effect mode of the executed slot effect is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects performed during the continuous slot effects is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of times of slot production is increased, the production result of continuous slot production becomes more advantageous to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the slot effect executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect (first slot effect), even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. Up to this, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effects is small, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot effect, so that it can be displayed to the player. You can have expectations until the end.

Further, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the operation of the frame button is executed after the first slot effect is finished, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

In the second control example, the slot effect is used as the plurality of operation effects executed during the continuous effect executed for the specific period, but based on the operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. Thus, as long as the configuration and the number of times of the other operation effects executed during the continuous effect can be changed, an effect other than the effect using slots may be used.

As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the display location of the point is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and further displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Since the points are distributed based on the character, it is possible to execute a point effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which points can be displayed, it is possible to select a location for point display based on the number of points to be given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, Point display is performed in the small area Dm13 that is in the vicinity of the "monster" that is the enemy as the main subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol is hit. In this case, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 capable of displaying points, points may be displayed in the small area Dm11 in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the protagonist as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect. With this, by grasping the place where the player displays points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 of FIG. 163(b)) may be a display mode for guiding the point display location (small area) to be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display mode in which the point display location (small area) is guided by the character's eyes.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, in the small area of 1 It is also possible to calculate the proportion occupied by the image, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area in which points can be displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

The following configuration may be used as the configuration for setting the display location of the point effect based on the location where the third symbol variation effect is displayed. That is, when the display control device 114 side receives the command for displaying the points, it controls so as to display the points in each of the small areas, and the small areas other than the small area for actually allowing the player to visually recognize the points are displayed. The point display displayed in the area may be masked so that the player cannot visually recognize it. With this configuration, for example, during the third symbol variation effect, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the permissible area are exchanged. The case can be easily processed.

Further, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying points is displayed in all the small areas, and the effect display image layer for displaying the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. Is provided, and it is preferable to execute a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer.

Further, in the second control example, the small area in which the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as the prohibited area in which the point display is prohibited, but the small area in which other display is executed is prohibited area. May be set as, for example, a small area in which game information such as the display of the number of holdings is displayed, or the pachinko machine 10 which is driven by a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection) being established. 3 In the gaming machine having a decorative accessory that covers a part of the front surface (specific small area) of the symbol display device 81, the specific small area described above when a predetermined condition is satisfied, or an abnormality when an abnormality is detected In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area in which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be the prohibited area.

Further, although the second control example describes the control example using the display area of one display device (third symbol display device 81), even if the same control is executed using a plurality of display devices. Of course, for example, when the movable (rotatable) sub display device is arranged at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and when it is arranged at other positions, it may be set as an allowable area.

<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. The first modified example of the second control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) is replaced. The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first modified example of the second control example, three types of automatic pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are different in each automatic pressing period. As a result, for example, an effect that requires the frame button 22 to be pressed a plurality of times during the button pressing period (continuous hitting effect), or pressing the frame button 22 only once with good timing during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect), Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

Further, in the first modified example, an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated/stopped is executed three times as the slot effect is displayed, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the depression of the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster as the pressing of the frame button 22 becomes slower. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and it becomes easier to align the targeted symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, The rotation speed in the rotation effect of becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the targeted patterns. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Modification of Second Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 187, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187(a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modified example is different from the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above in that instead of the compound pressing scenario 222c3, the first compound pressing scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first combined pressing scenario 222c4. The first compound pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the compound pressing scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the pressing interval during the automatic pressing period is different, and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 187(b), in the first combined pressing scenario 222c4, the automatic pressing period A (pressing interval of 1 second) is set as the pressing period type for the value “5001-12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. For the value "15001 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the automatic pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set.

In this way, by changing the pressing interval with respect to the automatic pressing period set to a different period depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the player executing the automatic pressing function executes the automatic pressing function. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of an effect based on the effect of being performed.

In this modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto-pressing period, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is set. When the auto-press period is reached, one auto-press pattern is selected from the auto-press pattern selection table that stores a plurality of auto-press patterns with different press intervals, and the press interval is based on the selected auto-press pattern. May be set. With this configuration, even if the composite press effect based on the same composite press scenario is executed, the automatic press function with different press intervals is executed, so the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, a predetermined automatic pressing pattern may be selected from the above-mentioned automatic pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, when the effect that the degree of progress increases according to the number of presses is executed, if the determination result of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, it is stored in the automatic press pattern selection table. It is advisable to select the automatic pressing pattern having the shortest pressing interval from the existing automatic pressing patterns. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the effect when the special symbol determination result is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the automatic pressing function predict the determination result of the special symbol according to the degree of progress of the effect.

Further, while the automatic pressing function is being executed, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the pressing interval. As a result, the player can visually recognize the pressing interval of the automatic pressing function being executed this time.

Next, the contents of the second combined pressing scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(c). FIG. 187(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second combined pressing scenario 222c5. The second combined pressing scenario 222c5 is a period corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) with respect to the above-described first combined pressing scenario 222c4, and the value "12001" to "" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. The difference is that the automatic pressing period is also set to "15000", and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

In the second combined pressing scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187(c), the automatic pressing period C (pressing interval 2 seconds) is set for the values "12001" to "15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. .. As described above, the automatic pressing function with the pressing interval of 2 seconds is executed during the period in which the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) is set to 3 seconds, so that the automatic pressing function is performed within a predetermined period. It is possible to realize a situation in which a button is pressed at a timing.

Specifically, for example, when the effect pressed by the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k during the automatic pressing period A is "14000", the pressing effect during the automatic pressing period C At the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing 2 seconds after the previous pressing effect, the next pressing effect is executed. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at a timing one second after the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)) is started.

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during automatic pressing, it is possible to preferably execute button pressing effects with different game characteristics while the automatic pressing function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is being pressed and held for a long time). It becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that a pressing number counter 223r is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing number counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed during execution (display) of the slot effect. In the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press valid period arrives (see FIG. 189). (See S6108). Then, when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 2 or less, the setting of the next rotation effect is executed, and when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Further, the button press valid period is set based on the value of the press count counter 223r.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , And other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). This slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which the rotation effect of rotating/stopping the slot is executed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the depression of the frame button 22. Perform processing. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to reduce the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and it becomes easier to align the targeted symbols.

In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), firstly, it is determined whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S6101: No), this means that the slot effect has not been executed (displayed), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is ON (S6101: YES), the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 because the slot effect is being executed (displayed) ( S6102), the process proceeds to S6103.

In the processing of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period (S6103). Specifically, the button press valid period is set by the process of S6115 described later. For example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is When the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, from 2001 ms after the slot effect is started until 8000 ms elapses), the button press valid period is set.

In the processing of S6103, when it is determined that the button is not in the valid period (S6103: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), the display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating design in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , S6108.

In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106). Specifically, when the pressing number counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

In the process of S6106, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S6106, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop production command for forcibly stopping the rotating design in the rotation production. Is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the pressing number counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added pressing number counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), it means that the rotation effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times. The process moves to S6113 for setting.

In the processing of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the pressing number counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot. The value of the effect counter 223p is 28000, and the remaining time is the value obtained by subtracting the current value of the slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p that is the upper limit time.

A display slot effect command in a display mode in which the rotation speed is 10 rotations with the remaining time calculated in the process of S6113 is set (S6114), and a button press valid period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is set. (S6115), this process is completed.

In the process of S6115, specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is from 12001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period, and the press count counter 223r is set. When the value of 2 is 2, the period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value from 22001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed in the final rotation effect of the slot effect (or the button press is effective). The period has expired). In this case, a display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the pressing number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112), This process ends.

As described above, in the first modification, in the slot effect in which the rotation effect is performed three times, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the target symbol is obtained. While it is easy to align the symbols, if the frame button 22 is pressed down slowly, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the targeted symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the length of the next button press effective period to be set may be varied depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button press effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, the button press period is set to be long in the next rotation effect, so even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, there are many times when the target symbol is stopped (that is, the chance increases). Since it is possible to give, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modified example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the frame button 22 is in the automatic pressing state, a pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, and the frame When the button 22 is in the non-automatic pressed state, a difference is that a frame button controller 290 that outputs a pressing signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is provided to the voice lamp controller 113, and the other difference. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modified example, the frame button control device 290 described above is in the state of being automatically pressed based on the predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During automatic pressing, a pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals without operating the frame button 22. Therefore, even when the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, and the operation load on the player is reduced. You can

<Electrical Configuration in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the second modified example.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modified example via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the processing of this MPU 291 detects pressing of the frame button 22 and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the detection result.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, and stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an automatic pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (whether the frame button 22 is pressed or not, a press signal is output at regular intervals). If it is, it is determined that it is in the state of being automatically pressed (while it is being automatically pressed), and if it is off, it is determined that it is not in the state of being automatically pressed (not being automatically pressed).

The automatic pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is pressed for 2 seconds or more. The auto-pressing flag 293a is referred to in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing state is set.

The pressing time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressed time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the automatic pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is completed.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during the automatic pressing. The period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, the auto-pressing state). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during the automatic pressing. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is voice lamp control. Sent to device 113. The period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches a predetermined value (1000). Therefore, every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time 1 second elapses), the button pressing signal is output. Will be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

By changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to change the interval at which the button pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the automatic pressing. For example, the predetermined value may be set to 500 or 2000, and the variable timing may be the timing at which a predetermined operation (long press, repeated hit, other button press, etc.) is executed. The timing should be switched. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the voice lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding Control Processing by Frame Button Control Device in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 291 regularly (every 1 ms in this modification). The timer interrupt process is a process for detecting pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When the long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the automatic press function is executed, and the press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modification). It is a process to do.

In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). In the processing of S6201, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressed time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the pressed time counter 293b is calculated. It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the processing of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), it means that 2 seconds have elapsed since the frame button 22 was pressed, so the automatic pressing flag 293a. It is determined whether or not is on (S6204).

In the processing of S6204, if it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), it means that the automatic pressing function is not executed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the automatic pressing function, The automatic pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating pressing of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. By the process of S6206, the pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the production based on the reception of the pressing signal is executed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that the automatic pressing is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. Note that the output is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notification that the automatic pressing is set is performed, and based on the notification, the effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set is executed by the voice lamp control device 113. May be.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6204, when it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is ON (S6204: No), it means that the automatic pressing function is being executed, and therefore the execution of the automatic pressing function is ended. Then, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

When it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 to S6207 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the processing of S6201, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208).

In the process of S6208, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, a pressing signal indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 is issued. In order to output, the process proceeds to S6209. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms) by the process of S6208, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Even when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a period of time (for example, 1 ms), the pressing of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

The processing of S6209 determines whether or not the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the process of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is normally pressed, and therefore the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113. To (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), it means that the frame button 22 is long-pressed, and thus the process of S6210 is skipped. , S6211 is performed.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). In the processing of S6212, when it is determined that the automatic pressing flag 293a is ON (S6212: Yes), it means that the automatic pressing function is being executed, and therefore the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by one. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the added value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) (S6214).

In the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), the press signal indicating the press of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 ( (S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the processing of S6212, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6212: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, the processing of S6213 to S6216 is executed, and The process ends.

As described above, in the second modified example of the second control example, by performing a predetermined operation (long pressing of the frame button 22), it is possible to switch the automatic pressing function on and off. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press the frame button 22 for a long time in order to execute the automatic pressing function, so that the operation load on the player can be reduced.

In the second modified example, the pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the automatic pressing function is started. This allows the player to easily recognize that the automatic pressing has been set. Note that the output is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notification that the automatic pressing is set is performed, and based on the notification, the effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set is executed by the voice lamp control device 113. May be.

The second modification is configured to detect the normal depression of the frame button 22 and output a depression signal to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the automatic depression function is executed. As a result, even when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the effect mode, and thus the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected when the automatic pressing function is executed. Further, when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the execution of the automatic pressing function may be terminated based on the normal pressing of the frame button 22. As a result, the execution of the automatic pressing function can be easily terminated, and a game machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

In the second modified example, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the process of the MPU, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is being pressed down, and when the voltage of the capacitor is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 5 V), it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time. May be.

<Other effect examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the control examples described above will be described. The same components as those used in the above-described control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the control examples described above, the mission effect is executed when a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113. This mission effect is an effect in which a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a privilege (for example, a big hit) is given when the effect contents executed thereafter satisfy the command.

In each control example described above, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of the command content (first command information) and the commander (second command information). The past command display can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are simultaneously displayed. Here, it is configured to indicate to the player whether or not the mission effect of this time will be successful, based on the relationship between the command display of this time and the past (previous) command display.

Specifically, if the current and previous command displays (first command information and second command information) are the same, it indicates that there is a high possibility that the mission performance of this time will be successful, and if they are different, this This suggests that mission production is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, when a part of the command display is matched (for example, the commander who is the second command information is matched), it is set so as to indicate that there is a high possibility of success if the mission performance progresses to the latter half. It

In this way, because the contents of the past mission effect and this mission effect overlap so that the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased, the same effect is repeatedly executed, and the player gets tired of the game. It is possible to make an easy situation into a situation where you can expect a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in this mission production, when a command such as “collect people” is displayed as the instruction content, if the result of the production is “0 person”, the instruction will fail and “1 person” to “100 person” will be displayed. The command is successful, and when the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, "1 person" command achievement rate 1% and "100 people" command achievement rate 100%) is set. By setting this command achievement rate, it is possible to set the expectation that will be a big hit in more detail. In addition, when the command content of the first command information is the same and the commander of the second command information is different between the command display of this time and the previous command, the performance is executed while the command achievement rate is taken over. Has been done. This makes it possible to change the content of the effect even if the effect having the same command content is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the above description, the effect based on the previous command display history and the current command display is executed, but, for example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided, and The player is provided with a selection means for selecting an arbitrary command display. Even if the command display selected by the selecting means is displayed on the display screen (third symbol display device 81), the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selecting means and the instruction display this time. Good. In addition, information corresponding to past instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 as a two-dimensional code so that the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information will be used when the pachinko machine is executed next time. By making it possible to input in 10, the command instructions executed in the past (for example, the day before) may be taken over and displayed.

<Chance up production>
In each of the control examples described above, in order to indicate the degree of expectation that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display or reach) The effect of changing the color pattern of the title name display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when a similar effect is executed, the player pays attention to the effect while expecting which color pattern is displayed in the partial display mode of the effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. It is restrained.

However, since the above-described partial display mode is displayed at various timings in one effect (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice the change in the partial display mode, or expects to see the effect. As a result, there was a problem that I felt dissatisfied by not being displayed in a color pattern with a high expectation of a big hit.

On the other hand, in each of the control examples described above, when the effect is executed, there is provided a color pattern advance notification means capable of notifying the player of the color pattern displayed in the current effect in advance. This allows the player to know in advance the color pattern provided in this presentation.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, a specific color pattern is automatically selected from a plurality of displayed color patterns as the color pattern advance notification means. As a result, a color pattern with a high jackpot expectation is displayed among the plurality of color patterns that have been once displayed, and the color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means in the expectation that the color pattern will be selected. It is possible to pay attention to the production that is performed.

Further, the color pattern advance notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the partial display mode described above. As a result, when a plurality of color patterns with high jackpot expectation are notified in advance, the player need only pay attention to the effect, and suppress distrust in the game caused by having excessive expectations for each effect. be able to.

In addition, since the plurality of partial display modes described above have different jackpot expectation degrees when the color patterns are changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern previously notified by the color pattern prior notification means. You can watch the production while enjoying how it is used.

<Hold change effect>
In each control example described above, an area (hereinafter, reserved display area) in which information (hereinafter, referred to as reserved number information) indicating the number of rights for which special symbol variation is executed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. , And an area (hereinafter, referred to as an execution display area) in which information (hereinafter, referred to as execution information) corresponding to the special symbol whose variation is currently executed is displayed. And, the so-called hold-ahead read-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol that represents the number-of-holds information displayed in the hold display area based on the information that pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol Is configured to be executable.

Conventionally, this hold prefetching effect was configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol when a new variation of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the hold prefetching effect if the information on the number of holdings equal to or more than a predetermined number is displayed, but if the number of holdings is small, entertain the effect sufficiently. There was a problem that I could not.

On the other hand, in the hold change effect of each control example described above, based on the information that pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, the time required for the reserved symbol to move to the execution display area is used. The display mode of the pending design is changed. Thereby, even if the number of holdings is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the holding design by using at least the time until the fluctuation of the special design that is currently being executed is completed.

Specifically, the hold design that is the target of the hold change (for example, the hold design displayed in the hold 3) is changed to a character, and the hold design changed to the character is a predetermined hold display area (eg, hold 2 is displayed. When it is displayed (shifted) in the area to be held), the pending change effect is started (for example, battle effect). Then, the longer the time until the hold change effect ends, the longer the hold change progresses.

That is, in the case where the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change is shifted to the pending 2, the length of the pending change effect based on the variation time of the special symbol being executed and the variation time of the pending symbol displayed in the pending 1 Is determined. As a result, even if the hold change effect is started in the state of hold 1, if the change time of the special symbol that is currently changing is long, the hold change can be sufficiently advanced by the hold change effect.

Further, the end of the hold change effect may be the timing at which the hold design subject to the hold change effect is moved to the execution display area, or may be ended before that.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, when the holding symbol which is the object of the holding change effect is moved to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for the pre-reading effect of the hold symbol displayed in the hold display area in the state where the hold symbol which is the target of the hold change effect is displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending symbol that is the object of the pending change effect has changed and the character displayed near the execution display area will execute the above-mentioned battle effect. With such a configuration, when the holding symbol is changed to a character in a state where the number of holdings is small, the character is used for the pending change effect of the later holding symbol, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that in the above-described battle effect, the degree of expectation may be suggested by a combination of characters to be confronted. Further, the frequency of the hold prefetching effect and the expectation degree of the big hit may be set to be different depending on the type of the character displayed near the execution display area.

<Button effect setting>
In each of the control examples described above, a plurality of frame button operation effects in which the frame button 22 can be operated can be executed as the variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114. Further, although detailed description is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set more in each control example described above (for example, by continuously pressing the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). , The effect of notifying the player by changing the colors emitted by the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the degree of expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the changing third symbol this time, and a voice lamp The effect of changing the decoration mode by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently executed and the action of the player operating the frame button 22 is complicated.

On the other hand, a unit that determines whether a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a plurality of the set button operations when it is determined that a plurality of frame button operation effects are set. Interval determination means for determining the interval of the frame button operation effect, and when the interval determination means makes the interval of the plurality of frame button operation effects a predetermined interval, the operation of the frame button 22 is also valid at the predetermined interval. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Accordingly, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid so as to span a plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from being complicated.

Note that, as the interval determination means described above, specifically, a period in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and the intervals of the plurality of frame button operation effects are set based on the set period. A storage means is provided for storing a combination of what is to be discriminated and a plurality of frame button operation effects at which intervals at which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed are less than a predetermined amount, and a combination of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means. There is one that determines whether or not is set.

Further, as the above-mentioned frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, a case where the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect executed first is set to be extended and a case where the frame button operation is executed later. In some cases, the effect operation effective period is set to be moved forward, and in another case, a new frame button operation effect is set.

When setting the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect that is executed first to be extended, the frame button operation effect that is executed first is displayed in a manner in which the operation effective period is extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation effective period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation effective period is predetermined. When the period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining) is reached, the operation valid period may be extended and displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has not been set until immediately before the completion of the frame button operation effect that is being executed earlier, so that more players The button 22 can be continuously operated, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from being complicated.

Further, the effect result of the frame button operation effect that is executed first at the timing when the normal operation effective period is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by the operation of the frame button 22 for the extended operation effective period, The display mode of the effect result of the previously executed frame button operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

When setting the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be executed ahead of time, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later. As is, the operation valid period set ahead of time may be used as the preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when a frame button operation effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, by performing the successive hit operation during the preparation period, a display indicating the degree of the consecutive hit operation is performed, During the preparation period, the automatic repeated hitting function can be set to ON.

Further, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect executed first or the frame button operation effect executed later is executed.

As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player's operation on the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, as a method of setting the frame button operation effect, a plurality of frame button operation effects may be set when setting one effect, or for each effect that may be close in execution time. A frame button operation effect may be set. For example, by continuously hitting the frame button 22 until the fluctuation of the third symbol based on the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), the special symbol of this time is expected to be a big hit. The degree is displayed in the light emission color of the decoration lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and when the predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol has a predetermined dynamic display. When a pattern (for example, SP reach) that is a display mode is selectable from a plurality of patterns (for example, three patterns), and a pattern in which the frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, 2 The interval at which one frame button operation effect is executed may be set to a predetermined interval.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. However, the operation is not limited to this, and an operation of providing a proximity sensor that can be operated by the player bringing the hand close Means, operating means that reacts when the player touches (detects changes in pressure and capacitance), operating means that allows the player to tilt forwards, backwards, leftward and rightward, and operating means that allows the player to rotate. Any configuration is acceptable as long as it is operable. Furthermore, in the above description, the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operation means, but the operation means may be constituted by using a plurality of devices.

Furthermore, in each control described above, a setting method of pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or more is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operating means, but the setting method is not limited to this, for example, a predetermined method. The operation may be set when the operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operation means is operated in a predetermined procedure. Also, a dedicated device for automatically switching to a state in which the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. In the second control example described above, as the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. A point effect in which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX), and the display mode of each indicator is changed in the point effect The control of the point display for displaying the predetermined value (for example, points) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the above-described second control example will be described. The third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference lies in that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with regard to the point effect executed in this control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, there are two types of modes used for point effects (“normal mode” and “die roll mode”), whereas in this control example, there are four modes used for point effects (FIG. 195). (See) is different.

Further, in the second control example described above, the points are evenly allocated to the respective indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the “normal mode”, whereas in the present control example, the “normal mode A” is set. The difference is that the points are distributed differently for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in accordance with the special symbol lottery result. Further, in this control example, a detailed description is added to the process relating to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram illustrating each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of this control example is an effect that is performed while the variation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the indicator display mode is similar to the point effect executed in the second control example described above. It is an effect that notifies the player that a privilege (an effect with a high jackpot expectation degree or a jackpot) is given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "die roll mode", and "bingo mode". In each of these modes, different indicators are displayed, and at the time of mode transition executed during point performance, the indicators are displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator displayed in the mode before the transition. Is configured. Specifically, it corresponds to a rabbit in the display mode (for example, in “normal mode A”) in which it is determined that the privilege 2 (for example, a performance with a high jackpot expectation degree) is fixed before the mode of the point performance is changed. In the case where the indicator P1 is in the maximum value (MAX) display mode, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition has been determined to be provided with the privilege 2 (effect with high jackpot expectation) (for example, A display mode showing a doublet in the "dice mode" is displayed.

Specifically, the display mode displayed by the indicator is determined in a plurality of stages (privilege 1 display mode (big hit confirmation display mode), and privilege 2 display mode (effect with high jackpot expectation is confirmed). Display mode) and a high standard display mode (a display mode showing a high standard state in which any privilege is given soon)), and the display can be determined and stored when the mode is changed. The display mode corresponding to the mode stage is the initial display mode after the mode transition.

With this configuration, when the mode transition occurs during the point performance, the player can easily understand that the privilege acquired by the point performance so far has not been lost, and the point performance It is possible to suppress the player from getting tired early by diversifying the effect by shifting to different indicators.

Here, details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode A" used for the point effect in the third control example. The "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the "normal mode" described above will be described. , And other explanations are omitted.

In the "normal mode A", the three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In the present control example, unlike the above-described second control example, the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "hero" is set higher than the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "rabbit" and "turtle". .. Specifically, the privilege given to the player when the value of the indicator reaches the maximum (MAX) is different, and the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to the "rabbit" and the "turtle" have the respective indicator values. When the maximum (MAX) is reached, it is informed that the effect 2 (main effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is transferred as the bonus 2. When the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to the "hero" is maximum (MAX), it is determined as the privilege 1. , It is configured to notify that the special symbol that is changing is a big hit.

In addition, as a display mode (high standard display mode) showing a high standard state in which a privilege is granted a little more, a display mode in which any of the display modes of each of the indicators P1 to P3 indicates the sixth step is set. As a result, when the mode is changed when any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is in the display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. It will be.

In addition, when "normal mode A" is set as the point effect, an effect in which "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" are displayed is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) are made to have a relationship between the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "die roll mode" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing a "dicing mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. The "die roll mode" has the same display form as the "die roll mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the above "die roll mode" will be described. Other description is omitted.

In the “die roll mode”, two indicators P4 and P5 simulating a die are used as in the “die roll mode” used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, double eyes), the player is provided with the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). .. Specifically, when the indicators P4 and P5 display the same display number (that is, the double-eye display mode), the bonus 2 is given an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the double-eye display mode. In the case of “6.6”, the bonus 1 is notified that the jackpot is won.

In the “die roll mode”, the indicators P4 and P5 simulating the dice are rotated and displayed, and when the double-sided display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. The display mode showing the numbers (that is, the non-double eye display mode) does not occur, and the rotation display that indicates whether or not the number stopped and displayed in the double eye display mode is increased is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-doublet display mode from being stopped and displayed once the doublet display mode has been stopped and displayed, so that the benefit given to the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Further, in the "during dice mode", the case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the "normal mode A", when the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed, when the "die roll mode" is selected, the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and an effect in which only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed is executed. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

Furthermore, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed at "5", "5.5" is stopped and displayed when the doublet display mode is displayed. Therefore, after the double-eye display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be predicted that the double-eye display mode “6.6” for notifying that the jackpot is won is close, and the effect can be enhanced.

When the “die roll mode” is set as the point effect, an effect using a die is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) are made to have a relationship between the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the “normal mode B” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode B" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 that represents 100% as a whole is used, and the display mode of the indicator P6 is a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). In this case, the player is set to be provided with a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 50% is displayed, an effect with a high expectation for a jackpot is given as the privilege 2, and a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 100% is displayed. Is notified that the jackpot is won as the privilege 1.

In the "normal mode B", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, when the “normal mode B” is set, The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to the display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

Next, the “bingo mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "bingo mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "bingo mode" uses an indicator P7 of 9 squares with numbers 1 to 9, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is erased (designated). The production to go is executed. Then, when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are aligned in a straight line is displayed, the player is provided with the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2).

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the indicator P7 is aligned with two lines is displayed, it is indicated that an effect having a high expectation of a jackpot is given as the privilege 2 and the indicator P7 is aligned with three or more lines. When the display mode is displayed, it is notified that the bonus 1 has been won as a bonus.

Further, in the "bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of the indicators P7 is aligned is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, when shifting to the “bingo mode”, The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to the high reference display mode indicating that one line is complete. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the indicator before the mode change is maintained.

As described above, the indicators having different display forms (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes for notifying the player that the privilege is given) are different in the plurality of modes used for the point effect in this control example. (P1 to P7) are used, and the effect of monotonous point effect can be enhanced by changing the mode during execution of point effect.

Further, even when the mode is changed during the point effect, the point effect after the mode change is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode change, so that the player can easily provide the point effect. You can

Further, as will be described in detail later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), a display mode (for example, the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4. 4.4"), but by changing to a different mode (for example, "die roll mode") while the display mode is being displayed, the player can display the indicator as a mode after the mode is changed. Is set to display a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “4.4”) indicating that the privilege (for example, privilege 2) is given.

In this way, by shifting to a mode in which the display mode of the indicator showing that the privilege is awarded to the player is changed, the privilege is granted from the display mode showing the low reference value with a low expectation level of the privilege. It is possible to change to a display mode (or a high standard display mode in which the degree of expectation of a privilege is high).

Furthermore, in the final stage of the point performance (for example, the state where the special symbol changes three times during the point performance), there is a low expectation that the privilege will be displayed in the current mode (for example, “normal mode A”). Even if each of the indicators P1 to P3 is in a display mode in which a low numerical value is displayed, the display mode in which the privilege is granted from the display mode in which the expectation level for the privilege is low and the reference value is low (or Since there is a possibility that the mode is switched to a high standard display mode in which the degree of expectation of a privilege is high, it is possible to entertain the player until the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from the "normal mode A", and the mode change is executed when it is determined that the mode is changed as a result of the mode change lottery executed during the point effect. (Hereinafter, referred to as first mode transition). In addition to the above-described determination of mode transition, the mode transition is executed based on the result of the hit/miss determination and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter referred to as the second mode transition).

Further, with respect to the mode transition destination, a restriction (that is, prohibition processing) is set based on the result of judgment or the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is lowered by executing the mode transition. It suppresses the occurrence of situations.

First, in the "normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode" are set as transition destinations of the first mode transition, as shown in FIG. 195, and when the mode transition lottery is won. Then, the mode is changed to the mode set as the transfer destination. That is, the "normal mode A" that is set as the first mode when the point effect is executed is set to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

In the case where the above-described first mode shift is executed and the display mode before the mode shift is a display mode that notifies that the privilege 2 is given, the display mode after the mode shift is also notified that the privilege 2 is given. When the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode transition is the high standard display mode (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the high standard display mode (high standard display mode). To be done. Thereby, even if the mode shift is executed in the middle of the point effect, the player can be informed easily of the status (display mode) of the indicator.

In addition, the "normal mode A" is the "dice mode" in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition. It is configured to be transferable to. In this case, in the "die roll mode" after the mode transition, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same appearance pattern (that is, doublet pattern) (for example, "3.3"). In this way, by performing both the first mode transition performed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition performed based on the display mode, the mode transition is performed in various situations in the point effect. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the "normal mode A", when the transition condition of the first mode transition and the transition condition of the second mode transition are satisfied at the same time, the second mode transition is preferentially executed. This is because the second mode transition is likely to be set to the mode transition based on the winning/decision result of the special symbol, as opposed to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the "normal mode A", if the special symbol lottery result (winning/absence determination result) is a big hit, the transition condition of the second mode transition is likely to be established. Is configured. That is, since the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied is a state in which the jackpot can be expected, by executing the second mode transition condition with priority over the first mode transition condition, the jackpot for the player is increased. It is possible to perform mode transitions that have expectations.

In this way, in the point effect that can transfer a plurality of modes, the satisfaction conditions of the plurality of mode transfer conditions are set so that the expectation of winning a jackpot is different, and further, when a plurality of mode transfer conditions are satisfied at the same time, By executing the mode transition based on the satisfaction of the mode transition condition with the higher expected degree of winning, it becomes possible for the player to execute the mode transition during the point effect as an effect in which the player expects a big hit, and enhance the effect of the effect. The effect is that you can.

Next, when the mode set during the point effect is the “die roll mode”, the “normal mode A” or the “bingo mode” is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set so as not to shift from the “die roll mode” to the “normal mode B”. This is a preset prohibition process, and the first mode is for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to have a relationship between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transfer and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transfer. Even when the transition condition for the transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode transition is set not to be performed. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when shifting from "Die Roll Mode" to "Normal Mode A", "Normal Mode A" displayed when shifting from "Normal Mode A" to "Dice Roll Mode" in this point effect The display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 are set so as not to be lower than the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 of (the numerical values of the respective indicators are not lowered). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode shift is stored, and the display mode of the mode shift destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode is changed a plurality of times during one point effect and the mode is changed to the initially set mode. Note that the number of times of mode transition executed during one point effect may be limited (for example, once) so that the mode does not transit to the mode already displayed during one point effect.

When "normal mode B" is set, only "normal mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition of the first mode transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won). When the "bingo mode" is set, only the "normal mode B" is set as the transfer destination when the transfer condition of the first mode transfer is satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in the present control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand by the plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and further has an expectation.

In the present control example, the second mode shift (mode shift based on the result of judgment of the special symbol and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to the “normal mode A”, but it is set in any other mode. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, and an upper limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed in one point effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of mode transition during the point effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the indicator display mode in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is created, a plurality of layers are overlaid and created (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a character image of a third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. 198(b) shows a plurality of layers. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub effect), and FIG. 198(c) combines a plurality of layers (a layer displaying a character image and a layer displaying a point image). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the image.

As shown in FIG. 198(a), the layer displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area in which the character is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) are discriminated from the small area (Dm11) where the character is not displayed, and the image processing is executed so that the small area (Dm11) where the character is not displayed is transparent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the layer displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small regions (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, like the layer displaying the character image. It is divided, and a point display process for displaying points is executed for all the small areas. In this point display process, by receiving a command indicating the number of points output from the voice lamp control device 113, the point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198(c), only the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed in the character image is combined on the back surface of the layer displaying the character image. The layer displaying the point image becomes visible, and the point can be displayed at a position where it does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the above-described image creating process, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, since the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, the allowable area in which the point can be displayed is one, the processing for directly transmitting the small area is performed. However, if there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is preferable to execute the process of selecting one small area from the small areas. For example, the type of the character image (main image) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character that imitates a hero as a character associated with an indicator of point effect). It is advisable to select one from the allowable areas adjacent to the small area in which Dc1) is displayed (small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, and Dm32 in the case of FIG. 198(a)). Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

Further, although the player is allowed to visually recognize the point display by transmitting one of the allowable areas, which are the small areas in which the character image is not displayed, of the layer displaying the character image, other control methods may be used. .. For example, in the image created this time, a small area in which the character is displayed but the character is not displayed later may be determined, and the transparent processing may be performed at the timing when the character is not displayed in the small area. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time lag from the reception of the command for the point display to the actual display of the point, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the point display. Furthermore, since the point display is performed based on the movement of the character that moves in the third symbol variation effect, the display in which the third symbol variation effect which is the main effect and the point effect which is the sub effect are associated with each other ( Production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

When such a control method is used, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters are confronted is executed, and an ally character (for example, the character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. If you do, the points will be displayed, and if the enemy character (for example, the character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, the points will not be displayed, or the points will be lower than the points displayed when the ally makes an attack (numerical value). It is better to display points. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In the above control example, the number of points having the same value is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Alternatively, the point display method described in the second control example may be used.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205.

FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in each control example described above with respect to the internal level selection table 222aa, the internal score selection table 222ab, the number of times selection table 222ac, the use score selection table 222ad, and the final score. The display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display mode selection table 222ae are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the judgment result of this time special figure variation and the judgment result of the winning information currently stored on hold, and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is a table for selecting an internal level. In addition, the hit/no hit determination result in the special figure change of this time is judged based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the hit/no hit determination result of the winning information currently held and stored is output from the main controller 110. It is determined based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the hit determination result of this time is “win”, the hit determination result of the hold is “win”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “3” is set. Is selected and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, the result of the present success/failure determination is "win", and the result of the success/failure determination in the hold is "miss", If the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. Moreover, if the hit/miss judgment result of this time is “miss”, the hit/miss judgment result of the hold is “win”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “2” is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the result of the hit/miss judgment of this time is "miss," and the result of the hit/miss judgment in the hold is "miss," and the effect counter 223f displays If the value is "0 to 149", the internal level "1" is selected, and if the value is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is selected such that a high numerical value is selected according to the advantageous state in which the game state is advantageous to the game (for example, the state where the jackpot is won). Is configured. In this way, by providing an index (internal level) according to the game state and executing an effect based on the index, it is possible to easily set the degree of expectation that the game state is advantageous for each effect to be executed. be able to.

Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referred to when selecting an internal score used when executing point production, based on the internal level and the value of the production counter 223f. Is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is Is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and if "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score. .. Also, when the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and when it is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". Is selected.

As described above, in the present control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set corresponding to the game state, so that the player can feel the expectation. It is possible to execute a point effect that gives

Next, the number-of-times selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201(a), the number-of-times selection table 222ac is set with a winning number-of-times selection table 222ac1 and a removal number-of-times selection table 222ac2. This number of times selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times of changing the special symbol that the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are configured to be referred to depending on the win/no win determination result or the win/no win determination result for the winning information held and stored.

FIG. 201(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning number selection table 222ac1. The hit number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects executed when the hit determination result is a hit, and the point effect is ended by a change in the special symbol which hits the hit determination result. The number of points is selected. Specifically, if the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol change this time is a hit, "1" as the number of point effects is the special symbol change after one rotation (that is, executed after the end of this special symbol change). If the hit determination result of (reserved storage) is a hit, “2 times” is selected as the number of point effects, and if the hit determination result of the special symbol variation after 2 turns is a hit, “3 times” is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of times of the point effect based on the timing when the special symbol variation to be won is executed, it is possible to suppress the hit game being started in the middle of the point effect, and the point effect The effect of can be enhanced.

FIG. 201(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the disconnection frequency selection table 222ac2. This miss count selection table 222ac2 is executed when the win/no win determination result is missed (that is, when the win/no win determination result of the special symbol variation this time is also no win/win determination result corresponding to the winning information that is stored on hold). It is a table for selecting the number of times of the point effect, and the number of times of the point effect is selected based on the number of winning information that is held and stored (hereinafter, referred to as the number of reserved balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point effects. This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute the point effect. With such a configuration, it is determined that the win/no determination result is wrong, and further, in the state where the number of reserved balls is "0", execution of a point effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variations is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect that is executed. In addition, in the present control example, it is configured that the win/no determination result is wrong and the point effect is not executed in the state where the number of reserved balls is “0”, but other configurations may be used, for example, The point effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (10%).

When the number of reserved balls is "1", the number of point effects is "2", and when the number of reserved balls is "2", the number of point effects is "3" and the number of reserved balls is "3". In the case of “”, “4” is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of holding balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the win/loss determination result is out and the point effect when the win/loss determination result is a hit. It is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the number of point effects.

In this control example, when the hit determination result is the number of times of the point effect, the hit determination result is selected based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that is hit is selected, and when the hit determination result is out, Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect when the result of the hit determination is out, the number of holding balls may be set as the maximum number of point effects, and the number may be selected by lottery within the range. With this configuration, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the use score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the usage score selection table 222ad. This use score selection table 222ad is for selecting a score used in each point production, and as shown in FIG. 202(a), the use score selection table 222ad shows the number of point productions (remaining number). And the used score is selected based on the internal score and the remaining score.

Specifically, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the usage score is "5". Is selected as "2", the remaining score is "6", the usage score is "3", and the remaining score is "7", the usage score is "-". When the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is “3” and the remaining score is “3”, the usage score is “1”, and when the remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “2”. , The remaining score is “5”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “6”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “7” , "-" is selected as the usage score.

Furthermore, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the use score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the use score is "2". , The remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “5”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “6”, the usage score is When the score is "5" and the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the use score. When the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the use score is "1", and when the remaining score is "2", the use score is "2". , The remaining score is “3”, the usage score is “3”, the remaining score is “4”, the usage score is “4”, and the remaining score is “5” , "5" is selected as the usage score, "6" is selected as the usage score when the remaining score is "6", and "7" is selected as the usage score when the remaining score is "7".

In this way, by selecting the use score used in the point effect executed during the special symbol change this time based on the remaining number of point effects and the remaining points, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of changes of the special symbol) ) Is prevented from being understood by the player in advance.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202(b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display. The mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and the final display mode of each mode when the point effect is executed. It is configured in advance so that the final display mode corresponding to the mode set in the final stage of the point effect (change of the last special symbol in which the point effect is executed) is displayed.

FIG. 203A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. The final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode A", and the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Based on this, the final display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.7” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4”. .4” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.7.7” is selected. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, the value is higher than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2) as the final display mode. The final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which the score is given has the maximum value is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.6.5” is selected, and “ In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.4" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are set to "5.4.7". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect When the value of the counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “6.3.1” is selected, and when the value is “50 to 99”, the indicators P1 to P3 are indicated. The display mode indicating “5.5.3” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.2” is selected, and “150 to 198”. In the case of, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4” is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected and "50" is selected. In the case of "~99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.5.1" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are set to "5.4.3". Is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is changed. It is possible to increase the expectation of winning by changing to a display mode in which the specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

In the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage is the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and this time. Since the indicator is selected according to the score, the value of the final display mode is high (the closer to the maximum value the display mode is), the value is likely to rise in the middle stage. Therefore, since the final display mode can be predicted by grasping how the indicator rises in the middle of the point effect, the point effect can be continuously watched.

FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “die roll mode”, and is based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Thus, the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, and " In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4". The mode is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. That is, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, it is a display form of an indicator to which a high value score is given as the final display form. “6.6” is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “5.3” is selected, and “50 to” is selected. In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" are selected. In the case of being selected and "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0". In the case of "49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" are selected. In the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1". The display mode indicating "" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99". In the case of ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" are selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of the respective indicators in the “die roll mode” is reduced according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference whether or not it is visible.

FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. The final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set when the point effect is executed. Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected and "150 to 198" is selected. In the case of ", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected. That is, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, it is a display form of an indicator to which a high value score is given as the final display form. "100%" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and "50 to 149" is selected. In this case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected and the internal score is "5". When the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the indicator P6 is "60". The display mode indicating "%" is selected, the display mode indicating the indicator P6 is "70%" in the case of "100 to 149", and the indicator P6 is "80" in the case of "150 to 198". The display mode indicating "%" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "40%" is selected, and the display mode is "50 to 99". , A display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “60%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198” , A display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “80%” is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the final display mode of the indicator in the “normal mode B” is determined according to the internal score. It will be possible to make a difference in how far it will rise.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. The character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is executed in the "normal mode A", and is made to appear in order to suggest an indicator of which the display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (mini character for sub-effect (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", "Kame" is selected as the character. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, and thus the character “hero” Is set so that it is easy to select.

Next, if the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "hero" is selected as the character, and if "100 to 149", the character is selected as the character. When "Rabbit" is selected and "150 to 198" is selected, "Kame" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". For, "hero" is selected as the character, "rabbit" is selected as the character in the case of "50 to 99", and "kame" is selected as the character in the case of "100 to 198".

Furthermore, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 198", "Rabbit" is selected as the character. "Kame" is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character that suggests an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the current time is changed depending on the displayed character. It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect of is a point effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

When changing the display mode of the indicator in the middle of the point effect for which "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. As a result, the display of the character and the change in the display mode of the indicator can be associated with each other, and the staging effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during point performance. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to (S6406 of FIG. 212: S6406) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is ON in the mode transfer process (see FIG. 212).

In the mode selection table 222ag, the destination mode is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode to which the prohibition is applied is set not to be selected as the mode transition destination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the mode transition between the modes in which it is difficult to find the relationship in the display mode of the indicator displayed corresponding to each mode.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode shift destination displayed at the time of mode shift. This display form selection table 222ah is referred to when determining the display form in the display form selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 in FIG. 213).

In the display form selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display form to the “highly expected form” is selected based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter set in the present point effect. This "highly expected form" is a display form for notifying the player that the point effect of this time is a point effect with a high expectation of jackpot.

Specifically, it is a display form in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". .. It should be noted that this "highly expected form" may be set to the contents common to the indicators (P1 to P7). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the "highly-expected form" is displayed regardless of which point effect the mode is changed to.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display mode only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, it is possible to expect the player to expect the mode transition during the point performance. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199(b), the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that the internal level storage area 223aa, the continuous production start flag 223ab, the production number counter 223ac, the score information storage area 223ad, and the remaining score. The information storage area 223ae, the display information storage area 223af, the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, the mode information storage area 223ah, the mode transition flag 223ai, the character information storage area 223aj are different, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates the value independently, but the description thereof is omitted, and the effect counter 223f is used as a generic term. do. Therefore, even when the process of referring to the value of the effect counter 223f is executed at a plurality of locations in one control process routine, different counter values are actually obtained in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In this internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the win/fail judgment result and the internal level selection table 222aa in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when the point effect ends in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210). If determined (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information about the internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point effect is being executed, and when it is off, the point effect is Indicates that it is not running. The continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the next point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), it is referred to when determining whether to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed when starting the continuous effect. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The effect number counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) executed this time. This effect number counter 223ac is set to a value corresponding to the determined number of effects in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect number counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when it is determined whether or not the point effect is a continuous effect (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process ( In FIG. 210), it is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the use score to be used in this change is determined. It is referred to when doing (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the internal score selection table 222ab described above and the usage score selected in the usage score selection table 222ad described above. In the score information storage area 223ad, the internal score determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211), and determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). The usage score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when determining the final display mode in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the character is displayed. It is referred to when determining (S6356 of FIG. 211), and referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) (S6404 of FIG. 212). The use score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214), When the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503 of FIG. 214: No), it is referred to when determining the display mode (S6507 of FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 of FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the already used use score from the internal score set in the continuous performance (point performance) being executed this time. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the use score in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect that is a continuous effect and the display mode displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 of FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is also configured to be able to set a display mode for a mode other than the currently set mode, and the indicator can be smoothly displayed even when the mode transition is executed during the point effect. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to be output to the display control device 114 by one display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is temporarily determined by the display mode changing process (see FIG. 213) and temporarily stores information regarding the determined display mode (indicator color, pattern, etc.) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information regarding the display mode (display mode displayed after the mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and the information regarding the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is temporarily stored (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214), and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and thereafter, the stored information regarding various effects is initialized ( S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. This mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the information corresponding to the mode after the transition when the mode transition is performed in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) (S6409 in FIG. 212), and the display background command is set. This is referred to (S6410 in FIG. 212) and is referred to in determining the display mode in the point effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 214) (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is completed (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is preset to be started from the “normal mode A”, when the point effect is executed, the information corresponding to the “normal mode A” is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. Is stored.

The mode shift flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether or not a mode shift condition (condition for satisfying the first mode shift) is satisfied during the point effect which is a continuous effect, and when it is on, the mode shift condition is satisfied. If it is off, it means that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), and the mode transition is performed. In the process (see FIG. 212), the process is referred to in order to determine whether the mode shift condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the process relating to the mode shift (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Is set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in this special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed (S6509 of FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed (winning the mode transition lottery) (S6509 of FIG. 214: Yes), the mode is set. The transition flag 223ai is set to ON. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. If it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), the process related to mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

In other words, in the point effect in this control example, since the mode is configured to be changed when the next special symbol variation is executed, for example, a lottery for whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed by the special symbol variation this time. By making a lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by, the player is made to recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol fluctuation, and the mode shifts at the next special symbol fluctuation Can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information regarding the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in this character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to indicate which of the indicators P1 to P3 the display mode of the indicators changes when the "normal mode A" is set. Is. In this character information storage area 223aj, information regarding the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when the display point effect command is set in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 of FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 of FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6314 of FIG. 210). In this control example, the character is displayed to indicate whether the display mode of the indicator changes only in the "normal mode A". However, whether the display mode of the indicator changes for each mode You may make it perform the effect which suggests, and you may use character information in order to suggest whether it is mode-shifted. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the “normal mode A” is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to the “normal mode A”.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, differences between the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example and the control examples described above will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example creates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to points is described on the back side of the character in the image for one frame. The difference is that they are set as follows. By generating the drawing list in this way, the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198 can be created.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variable display setting process 3, similar to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed.

After the process of S2006 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051), and when it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (S2051: No), it is set. It is determined whether or not the changed pattern command is for executing the point effect (S2052). Here, when it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is finished, the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, if it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if the point effect is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed and S2053 is performed. Process shifts to. This prevents a situation where a new point effect is executed while the point effect is being executed.

Further, in the processing of S2052, when it is determined that the variation pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the processing of S2053 is finished, the variation in the second control example described above. Similar to the display setting process 2, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting the display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. Processing.

In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined to be off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: YES), it means that the point effect which is the continuous effect has already been executed, and therefore, the point effect. The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

Here, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command set in the variable display setting process 3 (S1712 of FIG. 209) is to execute the point effect, and various kinds of cases in which the point effect is executed This is a process for executing the initial setting.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined by referring to the internal level selection table 222aa and set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). As a result, it is determined whether or not the point effect executed this time is a point effect that leads to hitting a special symbol.

Next, in S6351, the internal score used in the point effect executed this time is determined by referring to the internal score selection table 222ab based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa and the value of the effect counter 223f. , In the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and setting the character as described above. In addition, it is also used for setting the use score used each time the variation of the special symbol is started while the point effect is continuing, and for setting the remaining score.

When the process of S6352 is completed, the number of times of the point effect of this time is determined based on the number-of-times selection table 222ac (S6353), and the value corresponding to the determined number of effects is set in the effect number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number-of-times selection table 222ac is referred to by different tables depending on whether the hit/miss determination result is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the reserved storage executed after three rotations is a win, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to, and “4” is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set in the number-of-effects counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the number of times of effect “4”. The value of the effect number counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 of FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the value of the counter becomes “0”.

Next, based on the internal score and the final display mode selection table 222ae set by the process of S6352, the display mode of each indicator finally displayed in the present point effect is determined, and is stored in the display information storage area 223af. The setting is made (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to four modes (“normal mode A”, “die roll mode”, “normal mode B”, “bingo mode”) that are shifted during the point effect. Therefore, in this processing, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of which mode the point effect is finished.

When the process of S6355 is completed, the character used when the mode of the point effect is set to the “normal mode A” is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information is set. The storage area 223aj is set (S6356), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most aspects including the final display aspect of the point effect executed this time are set. By thus setting the aspect of the point effect in advance, it is possible to advance the aspect of the point effect in the middle stage according to the final display aspect, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Can be executed.

In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode, but for example, only the indicator related to the display mode for informing the player that the privilege is given is set to the final display mode. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set at random. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more versatile, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early. In this case, the prohibition process may be executed so that the notification that the privilege that is not randomly given is not given is given. As a result, it is possible to execute a point effect that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the present control example, when the point effect is executed, the internal level is set based on the hit/miss judgment result, but the internal level based on the hit/miss judgment result is always set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. You can With this configuration, it is possible to use the internal level when setting the production mode of the production other than the point production, and it is possible to easily set the production corresponding to the game state of the special symbol. is there.

Furthermore, in this control example, the winning/deciding result is determined by referring to not only the special symbol to be executed this time but also the winning information held and stored, but it is determined based on only the lottery result of the special symbol to be executed this time. The determination result may be determined and the internal level may be set.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is finished, a mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode shift process (S6304), a process of determining whether to shift to the mode during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode shifts are executed.

Here, the mode shift processing (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode shift processing (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, when it is determined that the mode is to be changed as a result of the predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 of FIG. 214) described later) (the mode change flag 223ai is turned on). There are two mode transition conditions: a case where the mode is changed to (when set to 1), a case where the mode is changed based on the set mode, the current display mode, and the internal score.

As described above, by performing the mode transition randomly performed by the lottery and the mode transition performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is fulfilled, the mode performed during the point performance It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

Note that, although details will be described later, in this control example, when there is a high possibility that the hit/miss judgment result is a hit (the internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in the “normal mode A” is zero. When the eye (“2.2.2” or “4.4.4”) is reached, the mode is changed to the “die roll mode”. This is a situation in which it is difficult to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player in the “normal mode A” (for example, notification that an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, notification that a jackpot is won) is given. Even if the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 has not reached the maximum value, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is likely to be given when the display mode becomes the predetermined display mode (double eye display mode). This is to make it into a state. As a result, even if the display mode of the indicator in the point effect is not good (for example, in the case of “normal mode A”, the points are not increased), the privilege that is advantageous to the player due to the mode transition is provided. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation to be given, it is possible to entertain the effect to the player to the end.

Further, in the present control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in the "normal mode A" is a doublet, the privilege that the display mode of the doublet is advantageous to the player is given in the "dice mode". Since it is possible to shift to “”, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect without making the player feel uncomfortable with the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode shift.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the mode transition processing (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is the “normal mode A”. Yes (S6402). When it is determined that the currently set mode is the “normal mode A” (S6402: Yes), the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is “2.2. It is determined whether it is "2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

In the processing of S6403, when it is determined that the current display mode is “2.2.2” or “4.4.4” (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is “6” or more. If it is determined (S6404) and it is determined to be “6” or more (S6404: Yes), the “die roll mode” is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, in the processing of S6404, when it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than "6" ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this processing ends. To do.

In addition, in the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the currently set mode is not the “normal mode A” (S6402: No), or in the processing of S6403, the current display mode is “2.2.2. If it is determined not to be “” or “4.4.4” (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

The mode shift flag 223ai is a flag set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when the mode shift flag 223ai is set to ON, the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210). ) Is referred to in the mode shift processing (S6304 of FIG. 212), and the mode shift is executed.

In the process of S6406, when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, in the process of S6406, when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process is directly terminated.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the processing of S6407 will be described. In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transfer destination is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a prohibition for limiting the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, in the state where the “die roll mode” is set, the mode transition to the “normal mode B” is not performed. When the "bingo mode" is set as described above, the mode is not set to the "die roll mode".

This prohibition process is intended to prevent the display mode of the indicator from being changed by the mode transition during the point effect, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. By configuring in this way, the merit of shifting the mode in point production (the point that the player can have expectations until the end of the production by changing the display mode of the indicator according to the mode transition) is utilized. However, it is possible to suppress disadvantages (points that are difficult for the player to understand due to the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition).

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the processing of S6405 or the processing of S6407 is completed, the display mode changing processing (S6408) is executed. This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode shift.

Next, the display mode changing process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode changing process (S6408). This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode shift based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift is predetermined. Display mode (display mode informing that the privilege is awarded to the player or display mode that is similar to the display mode informing that the privilege is awarded to the player), and the determination result The display mode after the mode change is set based on the.

When the display mode changing process (S6408) is executed, first, the display mode is determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). The display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the internal score and the value of the effect counter 223f set in the present point effect. Thereby, when the mode is changed in the point effect, the player can be watched not only in the display mode of the indicator after the mode change but also in the display mode (color, pattern), and the effect can be further enhanced. ..

In the beginning of the point effect, that is, even when the mode transition is executed in a state in which the display mode of the indicator is largely apart from the final display mode, the indicator display is based on the internal score set in the point effect. Since the display form is set, it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation of a big hit.

When the processing of S6451 is completed, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach correspondence (S6453). The SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that a performance (SP reach) with a high jackpot expectation degree will be executed, and specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", one of the indicators P1 and P2 is displayed. In the display mode in which the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), in the case of "the dice mode", in the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 are "double eyes (excluding 6.6)" and in the "normal mode B" In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", in the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is in the display mode "2 lines established".

In the processing of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the SP reach compatible display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454). This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode shift is the display mode corresponding to the SP reach, the display mode after the mode shift is also set to the display mode corresponding to the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege (notice of execution of SP reach) displayed before the mode shift disappears after the mode shift (a display mode that does not correspond to the SP reach is displayed). It is possible to execute a suitable effect that does not cause dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is not SP reach compatible (S6453: No), it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. Yes (S6455). As described above, the high standard is set as a display mode that is similar to the display mode in which the indicator display mode is not a display mode in which the player is provided with a privilege.

Specifically, in the "normal mode A", the display mode of any of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", and in the "dice mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5". In the display mode, the indicator P6 is "40%" in the "normal mode B".

With this configuration, even if the mode shift occurs during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is greatly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed in the point effect so far. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the accident.

For example, in the “normal mode A”, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates “6” is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard and the mode is switched to the “bingo mode”, Indicates that the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition is a display mode indicating "one line established". Therefore, it is possible to execute the point effect after the mode change while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode change is given to the player.

Returning to FIG. 213, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is set. Is set (S6456), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: No), the display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and the present process ends.

As described above, when the mode shift is executed in the point effect in this control example, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode shift. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator is displayed after the mode is changed in a mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, the display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In the present control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is to be given, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two levels, but it is divided into three or more levels. Alternatively, the display mode may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift and the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is applied. Although the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the display mode changing process (S6408 in FIG. 213) ends, then the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is set. The background command for display corresponding to is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is finished, next point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed. The point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator changed in the variable display executed this time.

Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, using the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac, the use score selection table 222ad is referred to this time. The use score to be used in the change of is determined (S6501).

Then, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated based on the determined usage score (S6502). Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new residual score information.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and when it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, when it is the end of the point effect, the display information storage area 223af is set. The final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in No. 1 and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, the display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the use score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. Based on the final display mode and the current display mode, the current display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), then it is determined whether or not the mode transition is executed (S6509), and if it is determined that the mode transition is present (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processing of S6505 and S6506 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no mode shift (S6509: No), the process of S6505 and S6506 described above is executed without setting the mode shift flag 223ai, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is finished, the value of the effect number counter 223ac is then decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. Yes (S6307). If it is determined that it is not equal to or less than "0" (is equal to or greater than 1) (S6307: No), this is the end of the process as it is because the point effect continues.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), it means that the point effect is finished this time, so the score information storage area 223ad is set. Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control 114 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the point effect-related command process is added in the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 215), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

Then, in the processing of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the display point effect related command is received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect related command has not been received (S2637: No), the various processes described in the control examples described above are executed as other command processes (S2614), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2637, when it is determined that the display point effect-related command is received (S2637: Yes), the point effect-related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, the point effect-related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216(a) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing (S2638). The point effect-related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to the point effect are output from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the point effect-related command processing (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and when it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command A process (S6602) is performed and it transfers to S6603. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603). If it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), the indicator command processing (S6604) is executed to display the indicator indicator. If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this processing ends.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216(b). FIG. 216(b) is a flowchart showing the point command processing (S6602). This point command processing (S6602) is for executing processing corresponding to the point command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a point that suggests a change in the display mode of each indicator during point performance (see FIG. 198). ) Is a process for displaying the third symbol display device 81.

In the point command processing (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. It is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, the indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point effect related command processing (see FIG. 216(a)) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). The indicator command process (S6604) is a process for executing a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the display mode information (for example, display mode or set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined, The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Is initialized to (S6754). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6755), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, a modification of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the point display in the third control example. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub-effect) among the plurality of layers in the present modification, and FIG. 218(b) is a plurality of layers in the present modification. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the image which combined the layer, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram which shows an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) for displaying a character image have points at different display positions (display positions in each small area). Data that can be displayed is stored, and a small area corresponding to the main effect to be executed this time is set, and point display processing for displaying the points of the set small area is executed. Then, an image in which the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image are combined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218(b)).

As shown in FIG. 218(b), in the image where the two characters (Dc1, Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started face each other, the points (displayed in the small area Dm31) executed in the point display processing are displayed. Displayed points are overlapped with the character Dc1 and display processing is performed so that the player cannot visually recognize the display of points.

Then, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218(c), when the character Dc1 moves, the point displayed in the small area Dc1 becomes visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of motion patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured such that whether or not the points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the progress content. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In this control example, the small area in which the points are displayed is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. However, for example, as described above, a plurality of motion patterns (each of the plurality of characters moves as the main effect). When the pattern) is settable, the points may be displayed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218(b), display processing is executed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping the character Dc2, and the main effect is displayed. You may make it display the point corresponding to the operation pattern set as. In this case, the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc1 which is the ally character moves and the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc2 which is the enemy character move are different. You can set the display settings to.

With such a configuration, it is possible to associate the motion pattern in the main effect with the value of the point to be displayed, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

As described above, in the present control example, when the display contents of the point effect are determined by the voice lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. Is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, when the points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or when the display mode of the indicator is changed and displayed, each command is respectively It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output every time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary to cause the display control device 114 to perform processing such as rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them are set as a common display command. The audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when the mode shift is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode shift. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator is displayed after the mode is changed in a mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, the display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In the present control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is to be given, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two levels, but it is divided into three or more levels. Alternatively, the display mode may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode shift and the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is applied. Although the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

The configuration used for the point effect of the present control example and the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above may of course be used in combination, and for example, the point effect of the second control example described above may be used. Similar to the third control example, four modes may be set and the mode transition processing configuration of the present control example may be added, or the second control described above regarding the method of determining the points to be displayed in the present control example. You may make it correspond to the display content of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) as in the example. Further, in the present control example, the configuration for determining the position for displaying the points may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more various effects.

Further, in the "normal mode A", the "bonus 1" given when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and the "bonus 2" given when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX are the jackpot expectations. Among the effect contents of the third symbol variation effect set in a stepwise manner, it is a privilege to notify that the stage is going to increase with respect to the effect content currently being executed. For example, "privilege 1" is the expectation degree of the jackpot. The privilege for notifying that a plurality of steps (two steps) will be raised, and the “privilege 2” may be, for example, a privilege for notifying that the expectation level of the jackpot will be increased by one step.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the effect contents executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing when the indicator becomes MAX, and the player can watch the effect. It becomes possible. In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the indicator is MAX and the timing at which the privilege is given are different. As a result, the indicator becomes MAX, and in the state where it is determined that the privilege is awarded, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while predicting which effect content is being executed and the privilege is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the above-described first control example, in order to suggest and inform the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is the sub effect, is described. In this reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a moving display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. It is an effect display including parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the above-described first control example will be described. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed and a plurality of patterns of reach navigation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are explained. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the change time of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined change pattern (super reach or special reach) of the change time of the special symbol. It is a sub-effect, which allows the player to visually recognize and informs or suggests in stages. In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (effect description of the main effect, variation time, and expectation of being a big hit) by using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide easy-to-understand games.

In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117(b)), and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the variation start, and 20 seconds later (that is, 50 seconds after the variation start). In the figure, the flow of the reach navigation effect when a variation pattern in which the main effect is further developed is selected is shown.

As shown in FIG. 219, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol changes at high speed) is displayed in the main effect for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, and then the reach effect (the two left and right third symbols are changed). The same number is stopped, and the effect of changing only the third symbol inside) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, a super reach effect for 30 seconds in the main effect (for example, the variation of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the character is opposed in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the super reach effect is started, the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high (for example, a ally character avoids an attack of an opponent character, a weapon different from a normal one). The timing of generating an effect of attacking the opponent's character by using) or an effect indicating that the winning result is out (for example, an effect of going down due to the attack of the opponent's character) is set. At a timing, the player is made to pay attention to what kind of effect is executed.

The reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect (point A) in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm in accordance with the timing at which the super reach effect is displayed. The detailed content of this reach navigation effect is the same as that of the above-mentioned first control example, and therefore its explanation is omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern of 20 seconds for the first reach navigation effect and 10 seconds for the second reach navigation effect is set, and the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (super reach effect is The timing 20 seconds after the display) is associated with the timing at which the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect.

In this reach navigation effect, similarly to the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided on the way, and when the character reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, this time, As an effect that suggests that the result of the main effect is a big hit, the characters "chance" are displayed, or the indicator attached to the rotating notification display unit Dm4c can be switched (point B and point). C).

Then, when the production branch timing of the super reach production, which is the main production, that is, the timing (point D) 20 seconds after the display of the super reach production is reached, the production display in which the super reach production continues to develop in the main production. At the same time, the reach navigation effect is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set to a half period (10 seconds) with respect to the period of the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. It starts from the half point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, among the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the guide display portion Dm4e through which the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass in the second reach navigation effect is passed again (point E), and various types are displayed. The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect is ended in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach effect (stop display timing of the third symbol) (point F).

In this way, among the third symbol variation effects that notify the lottery result of the special symbol using the variable display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is obtained. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is the sub effect, at the timing of the main effect, it is possible for the player to visually understand the progress of the aspect of the main effect, and to notify or suggest it in stages. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect, and FIG. 220(b) is the point D shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. 220C is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed by FIG. 220C is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. The parts described in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 220(a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display section Dm4d, a “chance” with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed, and guidance is given. When passing through the display portion Dm4e, “chance” is not displayed, but “x” is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation that the jackpot is won on the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined to produce this time. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220(b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect production will be described. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) is started from the half position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b will pass the guide display portion Dm4e again during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, by setting the guide display unit that has passed through the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b will pass again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guide display unit without a sense of discomfort. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 220(c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portion Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display portion Dm4e is changed and the "chance" is displayed. In this way, when the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect, the effect is set so that the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section that was passed in the first reach navigation effect again, so that the first reach navigation effect is achieved. Because the player will pay attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect will be set again so as to pass through the guide display section that was not highly anticipated (“chance”). , The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, since it is possible to efficiently use the same data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as display data used for effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for effect.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect may be provided in which the notification content is not changed even when the character Dm4b passes again. .. In this case, it is preferable that the character Dm4b be set to perform an action (jump, for example) of avoiding the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early and to prevent the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where the guidance display section that has been notified with a high jackpot expectation (“chance”) in the effect is started, the effect that reduces the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223.

FIG. 221( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc are added. The difference is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the result of judgment of the pachinko machine 10, and is different from the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above. The difference is that the process for determining whether or not the winning is based on the winning information held and stored is not executed.

Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is “win” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “2” is selected as the internal level, and when the value is “150 to 198”. , "3" is selected as the internal level. When the win/no decision result is “out” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “1” is selected as the internal level, and when it is “150 to 198”, the internal level is selected. “2” is selected as the level.

As a result, about 25% of the internal level when the hit/fail judgment result is “win” is set to “3”, about 75% when the hit/miss judgment result is “win”, and when the hit/miss judgment result is “out” It is possible to set about 25% of the cases to “2” and about 75% when the result of the judgment is “miss” to “1”. By setting the internal level in this way and executing the effect corresponding to the internal level, it is possible to easily set a plurality of jackpot expectations for the effect as compared to the case where the effect is executed only in response to the result of the judgment. It will be possible.

In this control example, the internal level is set to three stages, but the number of internal level stages is not limited to this and may be set to four or more stages. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level in which only about 1% of the case where the hit/miss determination result is “win” is set and the effect corresponding to the internal level is executed, it is rarely displayed. Staging can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. This effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of effect scenarios for reach navigation effects are stored, and is referred to when an effect scenario is selected in reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. This is the area where the scenario is stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the production scenario storage area 222bb is a scenario pattern of the production scenario, and is an expectation display that is informed (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm4e (second point). Both of the guidance display section Dm4d and the guidance display section Dm4e are set as the return position of the character Dm4b when the high-chance “chance” or the low-degree “x” is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. The return position "1" which is a passable position or the return position "2" which is a position which can pass only the guidance display portion Dm4e is set.

Specifically, in scenario 1, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation effect, the process returns to the return position "1", and the first point "during the second reach navigation effect. This is a scenario in which the "chance" and the second point "chance" are displayed. In scenario 2, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the production of the first reach navigation, and up to the return position "1". Returning to the scenario, the first point “chance” and the second point “x” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect, and scenario 3 is the first point “x” and the second point “during the first reach navigation effect. In this scenario, “X” is displayed, the return position is returned to “1”, and the first point “X” and the second point “X” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different are facilitated, and the scenario is set in correspondence with the above-mentioned internal level. Thus, it is possible to easily execute an effect according to the jackpot expectation.

The display modes shown in FIG. 223(a) are similarly set for scenarios 4 to 12. It should be noted that “super” displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation effect in scenario 11 indicates a display having a significantly higher jackpot expectation than the “chance” display (for example, “super hot”). ..

In addition, in this control example, scenario 1 to scenario 12 are used as the scenario patterns of the reach navigation effect, but more scenarios may be used. Further, the type of the character Dm4b and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, so that the display data used for the effect is made common, but the display data is made common by other methods. Alternatively, for example, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect may be displayed side by side when the second reach navigation effect is started. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in accordance with the moving direction of the character Dm4b, it is possible to reduce the display area in which the reach navigation effect is executed.

Further, although the time gauge Dm4a for one route is used in the moving direction of the character Dm4b in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of routes may be provided. In this case, the scenario pattern may be set such that the route through which the character Dm4b moves differs between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. As a result, the contents of the reach navigation effect can be made more diverse.

Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario selection table 222bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when an effect scenario is selected in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 of FIG. 224) described later.

As shown in FIG. 223(b), each scenario is selected in the production scenario selection table 222bc based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the value of the production counter 223f. Is set.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", the scenario "5" is selected and " In the case of "130-198", the scenario "4" is selected. When the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "2" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "3" is selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the internal level is “2”, the fluctuation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “7” is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "8" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "10" is selected. When the value of the internal level is “2”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “9” is selected and the effect counter 223f is set. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "1" is selected.

When the value of the internal level is "3", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 198", the scenario "12" is selected. When the value of the internal level is “3”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “1” is selected and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "11" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 221, the explanation is continued. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the above-mentioned second internal level selection table 222ba on the basis of the winning/deciding result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. Area. The second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) with the internal level determined in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224 (S2153), initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed in place of the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. The reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is for executing the reach navigation effect, and is an aspect of the reach navigation effect. Is determined.

When the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , And is set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol by using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect executed in the central part of (see).

When the process of S2151 is finished, the internal level is then determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the production scenario selection table 222bc are set. Based on, the effect scenario is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

When the process of S2153 is completed, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed similarly to the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the above-described first control example, and the present process is completed.

Next, a modified example of the display mode of the reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. 225(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 1 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 2 of the fourth control example, and FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the 4th control example typically, FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example. FIG. 226(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. It should be noted that the present modified examples 1 to 3 are modified examples of the display mode used in the reach navigation effect, and the configuration described in the above-described first control example or fourth control example is used as the control content. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the modified example 1 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(a), in this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a in the second reach navigation effect. By doing so, the display data used for the presentation can be diverted.

Next, FIG. 225(b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continuously moves is executed. .. In this case, the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of places for notifying the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed, and it is possible to widely notify the player of the expectation for the jackpot.

In this modification, the guide display units Dm4f and Dm4e are displayed separately from the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. However, for example, the first reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the progress of the second reach navigation effect. Scrolling may be performed in the moving direction of the character Dm4b (rightward from the viewpoint in FIG. 225(b)) so that the area is erased. As a result, the effect of this modification can be executed without enlarging the area of the small area Dm4.

Further, in this case, only the display results of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed in the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed. And Dm4g may be displayed instead, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation effect.

Next, FIG. 226(a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the third modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the reach navigation effect of this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a branched into two routes is used, and the first route that finally reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 and the second route A second route reaching the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Of these, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. ..

When the reach navigation effect is executed in this modified example, either the first route or the second route is moved in the first navigation effect and reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. Then, it is returned to the return position which is set to a position before the branch point where the first route and the second route branch, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves on either one of the route on which the character Dm4b has moved in the first navigation effect and the route on which the character Dm4b has not moved in the first navigation effect. As a result, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result on the guidance display portion Dm4e that the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It becomes possible.

Also, when different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, it is possible to display the display result on the three guidance display units Dm4d, dm4e, Dm4f as the reach navigation effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226(b), as a result of the selection of the first route in the first navigation effect, a “chance” is displayed on the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e to notify that the jackpot expectation is high. When the second route is selected as the second navigation effect in the state, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portion Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route, and the jackpot expectation level is increased. A "chance" is displayed to inform you that it is high. When different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation effect is currently in the second navigation effect. "Development" indicating that it is in progress is displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the current situation.

In addition, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is “x” in the first navigation effect, the second navigation effect is generated. May change the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4e to "chance".

That is, in the case where the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the first navigation effect is "x", if the second navigation effect is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226(b), to the player, The presentation mode of the second navigation effect is the one in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4e in which "x" is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to "chance". In the case where a route different from the case of the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e remains “x”, the guidance display unit Dm4f displays the “chance” display result. Both can be expected.

In this case, it may be set so that it is more advantageous for the player to move the second navigation effect on a different route from the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that the "chance" is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed from "x" to "chance". It is advisable to set such that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the display result of the guide display unit Dm4f is displayed as “chance” than in the guide display unit Dm4e. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to select a route different from the first navigation effect as the route selected in the second navigation effect, so that the reach navigation effect can be continuously watched. It will be possible.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect according to the present modification, the time gauge Dm4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) paths, and the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) , The route expected by the player can be changed in the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, the position (return position) at which the second navigation effect is started is described as one position (position before the branching of the route), but as in the above-described fourth control example, the return position is returned. You may provide two or more. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guide display unit Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guide display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation effect (the passing guide display unit) changes depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guide display unit) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

Furthermore, in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two routes, but it may be branched into more than three routes (three or more), or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Further, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route along which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. As a result, the reach navigation effect can be made more versatile.

In addition, in the present modification, a plurality of routes is displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation effect is executed, but for example, the route along which the character Dm4b moves during the first navigation effect. (For example, only the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first route and second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. Good. With such a configuration, the player is not informed in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route the route passes in the second navigation effect, so that the player can predict the effect. , The interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the content of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the effect description of the main effect, the variation time, and the degree of expectation of a big hit) is the sub effect. By displaying using, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (the timing 20 seconds after the super reach effect is displayed) and the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect are associated with each other. Since it is configured, among the third symbol variation effect (main effect) that notifies the special symbol lottery result using the variable display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect with a high expectation of a big hit (super reach effect) The player can visually understand the progress status of the main production mode by executing the reach navigation production that is the sub production in accordance with the timing of the main production (production branch timing) that is (or special reach production). Therefore, it is possible to notify or suggest in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by notifying the degree of expectation that the jackpot is won on the plurality of guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined to produce this time. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by setting the guide display unit that has passed through the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b will pass again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guide display unit without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section that has passed in the first reach navigation effect again, the guidance that is not highly anticipated (“chance”) in the first reach navigation effect is not provided. Since the player looks at the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass through the display section again, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect may be provided in which the notification content is not changed even when the character Dm4b passes again. .. In this case, it is preferable that the character Dm4b be set to perform an action (jump, for example) of avoiding the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early and to prevent the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where the guidance display section that has been notified with a high jackpot expectation (“chance”) in the effect is started, the effect that reduces the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

Furthermore, since the same data can be efficiently used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the above-described second control example, in the slot effect continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds) as the continuous slot effect, the slot to be executed next according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. The production mode of the production is set.

On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added to the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. Differences in points.

The fifth control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed and the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 227 and FIG. 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in the slot effect can be set, and types of slot effects to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened) Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect, extended slot effect) and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols “A” are stopped and displayed, and a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols inside are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, the player presses the frame button 22, and when the left, middle and right pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line, the pseudo symbol “A” is acquired. As described in the second control example, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times in the continuous slot effect, a plurality of types (3 types) of the pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” are acquired. In this case, it is notified that the privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player has been won (the privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, another example set as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and since the pseudo symbols can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes, it is possible for the player to perform slot production. It is possible to prompt the user to press the frame button 22. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically participate in the operation effect (slot effect) of operating the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(b), in this control example, as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbol used for the slot effect is displayed is one can be set. There is. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed in the limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number of reels may be reduced to two, and the number of reels may be set to two. Further, in the present control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is enlarged, but it is also possible to adopt a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without being enlarged and displayed. In this case, in a vacant area (area where the left and right reels are normally displayed), a display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, at a timing when the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line) Display or display of the degree of expectation in which the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line by pressing the frame button 22) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(c), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol. doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed in a larger size than the other symbols so that the player can easily understand it. However, for example, the other symbols are reduced and displayed relatively, The pseudo symbol “A” may be in a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than the other symbols. As a result, the pseudo symbol “A” can be easily recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227(d) is a schematic view showing an example in which the symbol array of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227(d), in the present control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, if the symbol array of the reel (middle reel) for displaying the pseudo symbol in the dynamic display is different, The dynamic display mode is settable. Specifically, in the dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols “A”) to be stopped and displayed this time is increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this control example, the player can easily understand the pseudo symbol “A” by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol “A”) to be stopped and displayed this time. Other than this, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display this time, that is, the number of symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols “B” and “C”), The number of pseudo symbols “A” may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, it is possible to easily identify each symbol that is dynamically displayed (rotationally displayed).

FIG. 227(e) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotation speed) of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed is changed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(e), in the present control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed. The dynamic display mode in which the (rotation speed) is lowered is settable. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol which is the current stop display target, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and the period in which the reel makes a round can be shortened.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo-symbol is dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the reel is rotated and displayed for a predetermined number of times (for example, two laps), and thereafter (for example, the third lap) is described above. As described above, the dynamic display speed may be slowed down. As a result, the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two turns) can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target this time, and the frame button It is possible to prompt to operate 22.

As described above, in this control example, the pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, so that the player is motivated. Can operate the frame button 22.

In each of the dynamic display modes described above, only the pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is displayed with higher brightness than the other symbols, or the display mode in which the edge of the symbol is emphasized is changed. This may make it easier for the player to grasp.

In addition, the frame button 22 is operated even when the number of rotations of the reel has reached a predetermined number (dynamic display as if the reel has rotated a predetermined number) or a predetermined period has elapsed since the slot effect was started. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. Thereby, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can motivate the frame button 22 to be operated.

Next, a stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the judgment result of the special symbol, and when the judgment result of the special symbol is a hit. Is set so that three types of pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” can be acquired in a plurality of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect, and the result of the determination of the special symbol is In the case of disengagement, the number that can be acquired is set to any of 0 to 2 out of the three types of pseudo symbols in a plurality of times of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effects.

Therefore, if the special symbol hit determination result is out, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not stopped and displayed on the line. Controlled to stop. Specifically, a symbol different from the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is set before and after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated aiming, stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed before or after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it is possible to display the out-of-stop display mode without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the stop control described above, by changing the start position of the dynamically displayed reel without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reel, the player does not feel uncomfortable. The stop control for displaying the discontinued stop display mode is also configured to be executable. Next, the stop control described above will be described with reference to FIG. 228.

FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the symbol arrangement and the stop position of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), the place where the pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol “A”) that is the subject of the present stop display is not set as the symbol array (the pseudo symbol that is not the subject of the present stop display is set). The place) is a continuous pattern arrangement. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which the pseudo symbol “A” is set (see FIG. 228(b)).

By using the reels with such a symbol arrangement, the stop control for displaying the out-of-stop display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable simply by changing the start position of the reel or the dynamic display speed in each slot effect. It is feasible.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a). As shown in FIG. 228( b ), in this dynamic display mode, as the symbol array of the reels dynamically displayed, the pseudo symbol “A” which is the currently stopped display target is set in the array 4, and other than that. Is set to a pseudo symbol "-" different from the current stop display target.

And in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the rotation start position 1 which is the array 1 of the symbol array, and the rotation start position 2 which is the array 9 of the symbol array. Is set. Two types of speed, "high" and "ultra low", are set as the speed of the dynamically displayed reels. The reel speed "high" is specifically set at a speed at which it takes 0.7 seconds to move one dynamically displayed symbol, and the reel speed "ultra low" is specifically set. Is set at a speed at which the time required to move one dynamically displayed symbol is 1.2 seconds.

That is, when the slot effect in which the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (button operation valid period) is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is “high”. When the reel speed is "ultra-low", the effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, only by changing the position at which the dynamic display of the reel is started or the reel speed, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo symbol dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period without changing the symbol arrangement. Therefore, various dynamic display modes can be set without increasing the types of symbol data, and the data amount of effect data can be reduced.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228(b). When the rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed "high" or the reel speed "ultra low" is set. Also, the dynamic display mode capable of displaying the pseudo symbol “A” which is the stop display target is executed. In this case, the reel speed "high" (the period for which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds) is longer than the period for which the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed. The reel speed is "ultra low" (one symbol is displayed. A period of 1.2 seconds) makes it possible for the player to easily understand the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target this time.

Further, when the rotation start position 2 is set, when the reel speed "high" is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of the button operation are in the range of array 9 to array 5, so the stop display The dynamic display mode in which the target pseudo symbol “A” can be displayed, and when the reel speed “ultra low” is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period are in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” which is the stop display target cannot be displayed.

As a result, if the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out is performed, the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbol "A" is not displayed by starting the dynamic display set to the reel speed "ultra low" from the rotation start position 2 is executed. It becomes possible to do. Further, when such a stop control is executed, it is preferable that the symbols set other than the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are the same symbols. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect this time is a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed is set to other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the dynamic display content of the symbols.

Further, in the case where the reel speed is "ultra low", when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target (the dynamic display mode ( Dynamic display mode that is advantageous to the player), and when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” that is the stop display target cannot be displayed (is disadvantageous to the player) Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to know whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by only understanding the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. Can be prevented.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

FIG. 229(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , And other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. This display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of reel dynamic display modes of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the display mode storage area 222ca, a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) having different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and different symbol arrangements are stored as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. Has been done. As a result, when continuous slot effects are executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the dynamically displayed symbol is displayed in the display area in which the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, 1 symbol is 0.7 seconds at the rotation speed "high". It is set to be displayed. Further, at the rotation speed "low", one symbol is set to be displayed for one second. Furthermore, at the rotation speed "ultra low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotation speed of the reel in three stages in this way, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set the dynamic display in which the player can easily distinguish the pseudo symbol and the dynamic display in which it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo symbol. It will be possible. Therefore, even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement, different effects can be executed.

Furthermore, by providing the reel rotation speed in three stages, it is possible to change the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect. For example, when the period of one slot effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "high", and the rotation speed " In the "low", 6 pseudo symbols can be displayed, and in the rotation speed "ultra low", 5 pseudo symbols can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol which is the stop display mode this time is displayed, depending on the rotation speed of the reel.

Specifically, the display mode 1 is that the rotation speed is “high” and the symbol arrangement is a stop display target pseudo symbol (displayed by “circle mark” in FIG. 230) and a stop display target pseudo symbol. (Displayed in FIG. 230 with “x”) are set to be displayed alternately. In display mode 2, the rotation speed is “low”, and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 1 is set. Is done.

The display mode 3 is the same rotation speed as the display mode 1, and for the pseudo symbol whose symbol array is to be stopped and displayed (indicated by “circle mark” in FIG. 230), the pseudo symbol that is not to be stopped and displayed ( In FIG. 230, two "x" are set to be displayed side by side, and the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed (indicated by "star" in FIG. 230) is emphasized (enlarged, It is set so as to be displayed by emitting light). In display mode 4, the rotation speed is “low”, and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 3 is set.

The display mode 5 is set so that the rotation speed is "ultra low" and the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed in the array 4 in the symbol array, and the pseudo symbols other than the stopped and displayed are displayed in the other arrays. The display mode 6 is that the rotation speed is "ultra low", and as the symbol array, the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 11, and the other sequences are the pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

It should be noted that the display modes 5 and 6 use the same symbol arrangement data, and the display positions at which the dynamic display is started are different. That is, in the display mode 6, the dynamic display is started from the array 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display modes 5 and 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described with reference to FIG. 228 is executed.

In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes in the middle, the rotation speed is “low” during the period in which the arrays 1 to 6 of the symbol array are displayed, and the rotation speed during the period in which the arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. "High", as the pattern array, the pseudo symbols that are not the stop display target and the pseudo symbols that are the stop display target are alternately displayed for the arrays 1 to 6, and the pseudo symbols that are not the stop display target for the arrays 7 to 11 are It is set to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed in the range in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed (arrays 1 to 6), and the rotation speed in the range in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed (arrays 7 to 11) are not displayed. By making it faster, the speed of the dynamic display is changed to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period in which the pseudo-pattern to be stopped and displayed is displayed, the player is motivated. The frame button 22 can be operated.

Further, in the range (arrays 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed, since the rotation speed is increased, it is possible to shorten the period of one round of the reel and one slot effect period ( In a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective), the range (arrays 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed can be dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the player is enthusiastic about the frame. The button 22 can be operated.

The display mode 8 is one in which the rotation speed changes as the symbol array circulates, the rotation speed is “high” in the first cycle and the rotation speed is “low” in the second and subsequent cycles, which is the same as the display mode 7. The display mode 9 is set to be displayed, and the display mode 9 is such that the pseudo pattern which is the stop display target is highlighted by the rotation of the symbol array, and the rotation speed is “high” in the first cycle. In the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 7, the pseudo symbol “star” emphasizing the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed is set to be displayed after the second lap.

In the present control example, the above-described 9 types of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) can be set as the dynamic display modes executed in the slot effect. However, more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. The display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. If it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the process is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231(a), the display mode selection table 222cb includes a display mode selection table 222cb1 for winning and a display mode selection table 222cb2 for disengagement, and whether or not a special symbol is won A dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the judgment result of the special symbol, so by grasping the effect contents of the continuous slot effect, the special symbol can be a big hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the player has won.

FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning display mode selection table 222cb1. Based on the hit display mode selection table 222cb1, each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, and "display is the first shortened slot effect". When "mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect, and "display mode 2" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is determined as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1", "Display mode 2" as the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" as the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" as the second shortened slot effect, and "Display as extended slot effect" When "mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 8" is the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is If "display mode 4" is set as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 5" is set as the extended slot effect and "display mode 5" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as an effect, "display mode 9" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 4" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 7" as a second shortened slot effect, and an extended slot effect "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment display mode selection table 222cb2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) that is executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f is displayed by the disengagement display mode selection table 222cb2. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is the first slot effect, "display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, and "display is the first shortened slot effect". When “display mode 2” is set as the second shortened slot effect and “display mode 2” is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is “50 to 99”, it is determined as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1", "Display mode 2" as the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" as the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" as the second shortened slot effect, and "Display as extended slot effect" When "mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "display mode 2" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. If the "display mode 7" is set to "display mode 6" as the second shortened slot effect and the "display mode 6" is set to the extended slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as an effect, "display mode 4" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 8" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 9" as a second shortened slot effect, and an extended slot effect "Display mode 7" is set.

As described above, in the present control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all the slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effects, so in the continuous slot effects. No matter which timing the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. The stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting a stop mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and if there is a slot effect in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When the determination is made (S2034: Yes in FIG. 233), the reference is made.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), the stop mode selection table 222cc includes a hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 and a disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2, which is a table corresponding to the result of the determination of the special symbol. The stop mode is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hitting stop mode selection table 222cc1. The hitting stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of winning symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "0", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “2” is set as the number of winning symbols “2” as an extension slot effect.

If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "1", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “1” is set, and the number of winning symbols “1” is set as an extension slot effect.

In this way, in the case where the result of the hit/damage determination is a hit, three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. This informs the player that the player has won.

Further, in the present control example, since a plurality of stop patterns for each slot effect when the hit determination result is a hit are provided, when the hit determination result is a hit in the continuous slot effect this time during execution of the slot effects. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the executed continuous slot production is performed.

FIG. 232(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment stop mode selection table 222cc2. The disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of winning symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. As for this stop pattern 1, the number of winning symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of winning symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, the number of winning symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect The number of winning symbols “0” is set, and the number of winning symbols “0” is set as an extension slot effect.

If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols achieved as the first slot effect is "1", the number of symbols achieved as the normal slot effect is "0", the number of symbols achieved as the first shortened slot effect is "1", and the second shortened slot effect is The number of winning symbols “0” is set, and the number of winning symbols “0” is set as an extension slot effect.

As described above, in the present control example, since the same stop mode is applied in the first slot effect executed first in the continuous slot effect, whether the hit determination result is a hit or a miss, the continuous slot effect is started. Immediately after being played (at the end of the first slot effect), a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit. Can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 229, the description will be continued. FIG. 229(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2071 of FIG. 233), and the slot effect for display corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect. Information related to the display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238), and stored when the continuous slot effect ends. Is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the above-described stop mode selection table 222cc. In the stop mode storage area 223cb, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the slot effect for display corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is created. Display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851 and S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238), and stored when the continuous slot effect ends Information is initialized.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 233. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2006 is completed, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is changed based on the display mode selection table 222cb. It is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the process of S2071 is finished, the stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the above-described second control example, the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238, various effect mid-effect processes of the slot effect process (see FIG. 174) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example. Will be explained.

First, the process 2 during the first slot effect will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process 2 during the first slot effect. When the process 2 during the first slot effect is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed similarly to the process during the first slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. When the process of S4707 is finished, next, the display slot stop effect command of the set stop mode is set (S4751), and the display slot effect command according to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The setting is made (S4752), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current time is not the button press valid period (S4701: No), similarly to the process during the first slot effect in the second control example (see FIG. 175), S4710. The processes of steps S4712 to S4712 are executed, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the normal slot effect mid-processing 2 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot effecting process 2. When the normal slot effect mid-process 2 is executed, similarly to the normal slot effect mid-process (see FIG. 176) in the above-described second control example, the processes of S4801 to S4803 are executed, and in the process of S4803, the slot effect counter is executed. If it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is waited for completion. The state is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

When the process of S4809 is finished, next, the display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and the process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, similarly to the first shortened slot effect production process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908. The process of is executed.

When the processing of S4904 is finished, next, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the second shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4610) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second shortened slot effect production process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot effect producing process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, similarly to the second shortened slot effect producing process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed. , S5002 is completed, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The display slot effect command to be performed is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and this processing is ended.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension slot effect production process 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect production process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed similarly to the extension slot effect production process (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above, and then the stop mode is stored. The display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and the display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152). ), the slot effect state is set to an end waiting state (S5104), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, various dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols are displayed. Since it can be displayed by, the player can motivate the frame button 22 to be operated.

Further, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of turns of the symbol array displayed on the reel or the lapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied even during the production of one slot. On the other hand, the operation means (frame button 22) can be operated more enthusiastically.

As a plurality of dynamic display modes, the number of reels dynamically displayed may be changed. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed in the limited display space. Further, the size of the pseudo pattern may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be pressed eagerly.

In this case, it may be possible to adopt a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol which is the target of the stop display is easier to visually recognize than the other symbol by displaying the other symbol in a reduced size. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the predetermined pseudo symbol without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. This allows the player to easily grasp the predetermined symbol. Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased by decreasing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display). In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of symbols that are dynamically displayed, it is possible to easily identify each symbol that is dynamically displayed.

Further, as the dynamic display mode, it is possible to change the symbol array of the dynamically displayed reels and set a range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect is changeable. As a result, it is possible to set a dynamic display that is easy to grasp and a dynamic display that is difficult to grasp a predetermined pseudo-symbol (pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed) even with the same symbol arrangement, so various effects are possible. Can be executed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed in a range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily recognize the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol array.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels is set to a normal speed until the reels reach a predetermined number (for example, two laps), and thereafter (dynamically displayed as described above) as described above. You may make it slow down. This allows a player who has not operated the operation means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two turns) to easily grasp a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed). It is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation means (frame button 22).

Further, in the present control example, since the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the result of judgment of the special symbol, the effect contents of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are determined. Based on this, it is possible to predict whether or not the special symbol is judged to be right or wrong. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect contents of the continuous slot effect can be made interesting.

In this control example, dynamics are preliminarily set for each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect. Since the display mode is set, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. You can

Further, in the present control example, the same stop mode is used in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect regardless of whether the hit/miss judgment result is a hit or not. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the result of the hit determination is a hit (at the time when the slot effect ends). ..

In this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are set in advance, but when the slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is determined. The dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set (when the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect).

Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot effect is being executed are at the same timing as other slot effects. It may be set.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example is a detailed description of the composite press effect of the second control example described above. The composite press effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the present control example, a composite press effect executed based on one special symbol change and a composite effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol changes are configured to be executed. They differ in points. Further, a detailed description is added on the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the combined pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the pressing effect executed.

The sixth control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the parts are changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, a rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the back image data (“mountain” stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. 8] is a schematic diagram showing an example (“sea” stage) of rear surface image data stored in a character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example.

In this control example, the player can select the stage shown in FIGS. 239(a) and 239(b) by operating the frame button 22. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation of the special symbol is started, and a game is played during that period. When the person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be switched.

In addition, in this control example, an effect corresponding to the displayed stage is executed. Therefore, the player can change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 during a period in which the stage can be changed (for example, 5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started). As a result, a new effect can be executed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the composite press effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of the composite press effect in this control example. In the composite press effect of the present control example, the same elements as those of the above-described composite press effect of the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. Period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous hit effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 s) is 12 seconds remaining to the time when it is 2 seconds remaining.

When the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of continuous hits is 50 times or more) on the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the background (stage) to be executed in the next special symbol variation is set. The operation mode to be changed is configured to be changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c).

241(b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the special symbol variation being executed can be changed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241(c) is executed as the background change operation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation mode which can change the background of the next special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241(b), a rear image corresponding to the currently selected background (“sea” stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub-display area Ds is small. Stages (“sea” stage and “mountain” stage) that can be selected as a background selection screen are displayed in the area Ds2, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the unselected stage.

Then, below the main display area Dm, "I will change the background when the button is pressed" is displayed as a background change notification display for informing the player that the present time is the background changeable period, and next to it. A display imitating a “button” indicating that the current period is the operation valid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid is displayed.

This allows the player to easily understand that it is a period in which the background can be changed, and allows the player to select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 for a predetermined period until the special symbol fluctuation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) (for example, continuous hit effect) May be executed. In this case, as a result of the player enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, the player operates the frame button 22 even after the next special symbol variation is started, and unintentionally changes the background in the next special symbol variation. There was a problem that it would end up.

If this problem occurs, for example, in a state in which an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations is being executed, it becomes impossible for the player to see the effect that the player is looking forward to. There was a risk that the player would be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in the present control example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends)) When it is determined that the continuous stroke operation) has been executed, the background changing operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background changing operation mode.

Here, the specific background changing operation mode described above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 241(c), this particular background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241(b), and even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol variation currently being executed is changed. The background does not change until the end. On the lower side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Please select the background of the next change by pressing the button" is displayed as a display notifying the player that the current background is a specific background change operation mode. In the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds that is displayed, the selection content indicating the background displayed in the next change is displayed.

In this way, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change, a situation in which the player is dissatisfied It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

In the present control example, when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the predetermined period until the special symbol change ends, the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change Although a configuration in which the operation mode of the effect for operating (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number, the aspect of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol change may be changed, or this time. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In such a case, the aspect of the subsequent frame button operation effect may be changed based on the determination that the operation content of the frame button operation effect performed before is the predetermined operation content.

Furthermore, in the present control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed, Although it is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only in a situation where the above-mentioned problem may actually occur, the present invention is not limited to this and is executed in the special symbol change this time. Based on that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the result of the judgment on whether or not the special symbol changes this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from being started and an unintended background change being executed in a state in which is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

As described above, in this control example, in a plurality of frame button operation effects executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations (continuous hit effect of special symbol fluctuation 1 and background change effect of special symbol fluctuation 2 in FIG. 240) On the other hand, the aspect of the frame button operation effect executed later can be changed based on the operation content in the frame button operation effect executed before.

In addition, similarly to the second control example described above, even for a plurality of frame button operation effects (composite pressing effect) executed during one special symbol change, during the frame button operation effects executed before. The aspect of the frame button operation effect executed later is configured to be changeable based on the operation content.

Returning to FIG. 240, the composite press effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a composite press effect is executed in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed. This composite press effect is the same effect as the composite press effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 in each frame button operation effect executed in the composite press effect and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the composite press effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the composite press effect is executed, the press effect 1 is first executed. This pressing effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 as in the second control example (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the operation effective period is 5 seconds after the effect starts). 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157(b)).

During the pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period). Based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is repeatedly operated (operation 3), and when the number of times of continuous operation is small (50 times or less), "weak continuous operation" and that continuous operation are determined. The "automatic continuous hitting function" is executed by "strong continuous hitting" which is determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and the operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more in the pressing effect 1. “Long press” is determined, “No operation” is determined when the frame button 22 is desired to be operated even once during the press effect 1, and unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the press effect 1. There are five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1, the mode of the press effect 2 which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when it is determined in the pressing effect 1 that "weak repeated hits", "timing pressing effect" (see FIG. 158(a)) is set in the pressing effect 2 and when it is determined that "strong hits". Is set to "pressing effect 2" (see FIG. 243(a)), and if "long press" is determined, "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158(b)) is set, When it is determined that "no operation", "timing push effect" is set in the pressing effect 2 as in the case where it is determined that "soft continuous hit" described above, and when it is determined as "other operation", press The "timing push effect (difficulty)" (refer to FIG. 243(b)), which has increased the difficulty level of the above-mentioned "timing push effect", is set as the effect 2.

In this way, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, the pressing effect 1 exceeds the predetermined number (50 times) of the frame button. The player who presses 22 (the player who is good at continuous hitting operation) can continuously participate in the frame button operation effect by continuously performing the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22.

Further, for the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function in the pressing effect 1 (the player who is continuously pressing the frame button 22), not the effect of pressing the button but the effect of releasing the button. By executing, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the current button operation state (the pressed state), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the effect.

Further, for a player who is performing an unnecessary frame button operation on the pressing effect 1, it is possible to execute, as a penalty, an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the pressing effect 2 to succeed.

Then, when the press effect 2 is completed, the continuous hit effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation effective period is 5 seconds from the effect start) is executed similarly to the composite press effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159(b). )), the composite press effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243(a), description will be given of the continuous press effect of the press effect 2 executed when it is determined in the press effect 1 of FIG. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. The same elements as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), when the continuous hitting effect is started in the pressing effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment field and the display mode of the meter display portion D1 is suggested to change. "May the meter go through!?" is displayed. In addition, “continuous hit” indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is the continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display portion D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the continuous hit effect executed in the press effect 2, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is based on the game result of the composite press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol, as in the press effect 2 of the second control example described above. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159(a)). Specifically, when the number of times the frame button is pressed during the period (3 seconds) in which the press effect 2 is executed exceeds 20 times. The display of the meter display portion D1 is changed based on the result of judgment whether or not the special symbol for which the operation condition is satisfied and the composite press effect has been executed. For example, when the special symbol of this time is won as a jackpot as the result of the winning/disapproval determination, and the special symbol is also won as a jackpot in the winning information that is held and stored, as shown in FIG. 159(a), the meter display The meter of section D1 is extended.

In this way, for the player who has performed a sufficient continuous hitting operation in the pressing effect 1, the consecutive hitting operation can be continuously executed in the pressing effect 2 as well, and is performed based on the continuous hitting operation. Since the press effect 1 and the press effect 2 are different from each other, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the favorite frame button 22.

In the present control example, the effect mode is configured to be changed based on the number of consecutive hit operations on the frame button 22, but, for example, the number of consecutive hits (operation condition) for changing the effect mode is set to a plurality of operation conditions. Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined by lottery. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the operation condition in the pressing effect this time, and thus the frame button operation can be positively executed until the end.

The timing press effect (difficulty) of the press effect 2 executed when the "press operation 1" of FIG. 242 determines "another operation" will be described. FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. The same elements as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the timing push effect (difficulty) is a display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing push effect of the second control example described above (see FIG. 158(a)). The difference is that the position is different, and the moving body D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of success (the degree of difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db3) with respect to the normal timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who does not intentionally participate in the combined press effect to succeed in the timing press effect (difficult to satisfy the operation condition), and the effect displayed when the operation condition is satisfied (special It is possible to make it difficult to execute the effect that suggests the drawing result of the symbols.

The method of increasing the success difficulty level is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing push effect is being executed, the target Db3 may be moved at high speed in the timing gauge to make the push timing difficult to understand. The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily deleted, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or reduced to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, as a condition for setting the timing push effect (difficulty), the result of the operation determination and the press effect 2 are started in addition to the case where the result of the operation determination in the press effect 1 is determined as "other operation". If the operation status at the time point is different, for example, in the pressing effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed at the time point when the pressing effect 2 is executed, although “long press” is set as the operation determination result. The timing push effect (difficulty) may be set even when it is determined that there is not.

Further, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is executed for the player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the combined pressing effect, but in addition to that, For example, it is executed when the operation content for the frame button 22 in the pressing effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the continuous hit number is 7), and the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is successful. In this case (when the operation conditions are met), a player who notifies the result of the special symbol lottery, displays a specific effect (image or video), or provides information that the player can accumulate. It may be configured to give a privilege that is advantageous to the.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 244. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, the RAM 223 in this control example has a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a confirming flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd in addition to the RAM 223 in each control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, "sea" stage, "mountain" stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is used when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation effective period which is the operation period during which the background can be changed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247). , Background information based on the operation content is stored, and in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), when the confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON, the display information is displayed based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the change of the special symbol, and when it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 is being operated, and when it is off. Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247), this operation change flag 223bd is determined to be a frame button input within 5 seconds (pre-completion valid period) until the special symbol variation ends (( It is set to ON in S6810: Yes of FIG. 247 (S6811 of FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that it is the first frame button operation valid period (S6802 of FIG. 247: Yes), and the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to OFF. When the determination is made (S6803 of FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6805 of FIG. 247).

The in-confirmation flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether an effect (see FIG. 241(c)) for changing the background of the next change is being executed as the background change effect, and when it is on, the background of the next change is changed. If the effect is off, it means that the effect of changing the background of the next change is not executed. The confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804 in FIG. 247), In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when setting the display background command (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to OFF after setting the display background command (S2083).

The press count counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the press effect 1 of the composite press effect. This press count counter 223dd is incremented by 1 (S4551 in FIG. 246) when it is determined in the automatic press effect setting process 2 that the press effect 1 is in progress (normal press) (S4510). When it is determined that the number of presses during the effect 1 has reached the predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 of FIG. 246) and it is determined that the predetermined number of times (50 times) has been reached (FIG. 246, S4552: Yes), and the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Although not shown, the counter value is also initialized to 0 at the timing when the press effect 1 of the composite press effect ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controlling Device 113 in Sixth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247. In the present control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) is executed in place of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 245), and the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173). (See FIG. 246) in place of the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 246), and detailed description of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) is made. Other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed are set based on the acquired variation pattern. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to 2033 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

After finishing the process of S2040, next, it is determined whether or not the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and if it is determined to be set to ON (that is, during the last change of the special symbol, When the effect of changing the background due to the next special symbol change is executed) (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ( S2082).

Then, the in-confirmation flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. The process ends.

With such a configuration, based on the information (the information set in the background information storage area 223da) of the background of the next special symbol variation, the third at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. The background (“sea” stage, “mountain” stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This automatic press-down effect setting process 2 (S4410) is performed when the normal press-down is performed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246) with respect to the automatic press-down effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. The processing contents are different.

When the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed similarly to the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, when it is determined in the process of S4510 that it is the normal pressing period (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), the display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is incremented by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether or not the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and when the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552: No in FIG. 246). ), and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4522, when the value of the press count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552 of FIG. 246: Yes), the press effect scenario is changed to 2 for non-auto pressing (4553), and the press count is set. The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this processing ends.

Next, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is an input of a signal based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In this case (S6801: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), then the current frame selection period is the first frame button operation valid period, which is the period during which the background can be selected. It is determined (S6802). In the processing of S6802, if it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is not set (set to OFF) (S6803: No), it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the confirming flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), and proceeds to the processing of S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processes of S6804 to S6806 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6807.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether the confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is the operation of the frame button 22 while the effect of setting the background of the fluctuation is being executed next time. In the process of S6807, there is a confirmation operation (the frame button 22 has been operated). If determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this processing ends.

Here, the processing of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241(c). When the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the fluctuation is being executed next time, the display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds by one. The background display (“sea” or “mountain”) enlarged and displayed in the small area Ds2 becomes the background to be shifted when the next fluctuation starts. In other words, in the processing of S6808, if the confirmation operation is performed once for the background information (the “mountain” stage in FIG. 241(c)) that is currently set (due to the current change), the process moves to the next change. When the background information corresponding to the “sea” stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background and the confirmation operation is performed twice, the background information corresponding to the “mountain” stage is the background as the background to be changed with the next change. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6804, when it is determined that the operation change flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6804: No), the display corresponding to the background next to the currently set background is displayed. A background command is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

The process of S6809 is a state in which the operation change flag 223db and the confirming flag 223dc are both set to OFF during the first frame button operation valid period, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241(b)). (See) is executed when the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

In the processing of S6802, if it is determined that the present is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the present is the pre-termination period (S6810). This pre-completion period is a period that indicates that the remaining period until the special symbol fluctuation is completed is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and if it is determined that it is not the pre-completion period (S6810: No). ), if this process is terminated and it is determined that it is the period before termination (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and the process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, a continuous stroke operation) during a predetermined period until the special symbol fluctuation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) ) Is executed, it is configured to change the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation to a specific background change operation mode, so a situation that makes the player dissatisfied Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the change of the special symbol, a situation occurs in which the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to suppress this.

In addition, the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol change are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation based on the setting made in. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the result of the judgment on whether or not the special symbol changes this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from being started and an unintended background change being executed in a state in which is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

In addition, in this control example, the timing release effect is executed in the press effect 2 when it is determined to be “long press” in the press effect 1 of the composite press effect, but for example, the player May be configured to be able to execute all of the composite pressing effects while continuously pressing the frame button 22. The effect executed in the pressing effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the press effect 2 that is executed as the composite press effect when it is determined to be “long press” at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses the frame button 22 for a long time and reaches the operation determination point in the state where the automatic continuous hitting function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, when the operation judgment point is reached, the comment column says “automatic timing set by long pressing button. ”Is displayed, and next to it, a schematic diagram imitating a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating a rate at which timing is set are displayed.

In this case, the operation timing of the timing push effect is displayed on the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while performing the effect that the meter of the meter display portion D1 is raised by executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the press effect 1. The effect selected by lottery is executed.

Then, the automatic timing is set until the pressing effect 2 is started, and in the timing pressing effect executed in the pressing effect 2 (see FIG. 158(a)), the frame button 22 is operated at the set automatic timing. The same effect as that performed is executed. With such a configuration, the player can execute the continuous hit effect and the timing press effect by simply pressing the frame button 22 continuously (long pressing).

In the example described above, the degree of expectation at which the automatic timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the player may or may not be notified of the degree of expectation. Further, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (by the time the press effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. Good.

For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the press effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined to be “long press” at the previous determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the later determination timing. The player may be informed of the automatic timing setting result. With such a configuration, when the set content of the automatic timing is bad, the operation content is changed from that (for example, continuous hitting operation), so that the normal timing push effect can be executed as the press effect 2.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In the seventh control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the press effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in the present control example), the interval ( In this control example, the additional effect is executed for 10 seconds. Specifically, if the pressing effect (first pressing effect) ends and a short interval (for example, 10 seconds) is opened, the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) is started. It is configured to execute an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second press effect and the second press effect. As a result, from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect, the press effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed.

Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 to release the first press effect, a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) is opened and the second press effect is executed. The player must move his hand again to the frame button 22 at short intervals, which increases the operation load on the player and may prevent him from concentrating on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the press effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second pressing effect is completed, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

First, with reference to FIG. 249, a flow of setting the additional effect in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the additional effect is set. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, a plurality of operation effects by a third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (Production of allowing the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be settable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, with respect to the special symbol variation 1 (variation of the special symbol with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts). ~ Fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of 30 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the start of the special symbol fluctuation), and the third fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation is It is configured such that the third symbol variation effect is set separately from the variation pattern corresponding to the period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start.

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, it is required to increase the types of effect patterns of the third symbol variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the applicant, as in the present control example, divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought about the process.

With such a configuration, it is possible to create the same type of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where a series of effect patterns are stored respectively. Therefore, more effect patterns are created using the same amount of data when storing a series of effect patterns, or the amount of data used for the third symbol variation effect is reduced, and other effects (for example, a character It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, bonus effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and it is possible to set various effects within a limited data capacity, and the player can There was an effect that it was possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

However, in the case of creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, in the case of setting an operation effect in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each of the continuous variation patterns. was there. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the variation pattern that is executed first among the continuous variation patterns. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

Furthermore, by setting the period of the operation effect executed in at least one of the plurality of variation patterns to be long, the period during which the player is motivated to play the game is continued, and the player can play the game. It may be possible to suppress getting tired at an early stage, but when such a configuration is used, it is easy to create an effect pattern in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Met.

As described above, this control example solves the problem that occurs when processing that can create a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

In the first variation pattern, the operation effect of effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is 10 seconds (“fluctuation B”), and in the second fluctuation pattern, the operation effect of which the operation validity period is 25 seconds (“SP2”). However, in the third variation pattern, the operation effect (“SSP2”) having the operation effective period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, the "variation B" that can be set as the first variation pattern is that the operation valid period (10 seconds) is 17 seconds after the first variation pattern is started (after the special symbol variation is started). It is set, and ends 3 seconds after the operation valid period has elapsed. In the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol changes at high speed in the first 17 seconds, and after the reach state in which the third symbols on the left and right stop at the same number, the operation effect that suggests the expectation of the jackpot ( An operation valid period of 10 seconds) is executed, and an effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect for the remaining 3 seconds is executed.

“SP2” that can be set as the second variation pattern is an operation effect that is executed next for 3 seconds after the first variation pattern ends (after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) ( A display explaining the effect contents of the operation effective period (23 seconds) is executed, then the operation effective period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation effective period elapses and ends 4 seconds later. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (color change, (Changes in comments, etc.), the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is variable (color change, brightness change, change in presence or absence of lighting), and drive provided in the pachinko machine 10 The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change of presence or absence of drive, change of drive speed, change of drive range). Therefore, the player can change various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period (23 seconds in this control example).

"SSP2" that can be set as the third variation pattern is an operation effect to be executed next for 4 seconds after the second variation pattern is completed (after 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) ( A display explaining the effect contents of the operation valid period 10 seconds) is executed, then the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period elapses, that is, after the special symbol variation is started. It ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed during the operation valid period. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the winning/decision determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol is a period in which the operation effective period is not set (from the lapse of 15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern to the end thereof). Period).

When "variation B" is set in the first variation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern, the operation valid period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period and the effective period is 6 seconds. The interval of 6 seconds is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed. When “SP2” is set in the second variation pattern and “SSP2” is set in the third variation pattern, the operation valid period set in “SP2” and the “SSP2” are set. The interval between the operation valid period is 8 seconds. The interval of 8 seconds is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation valid period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "Variation B" is set to "SP2" is started is the predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of the operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (10 seconds) set to “variation B” is within 4 seconds, the additional effect is executed. It will be. Further, an operation in which the remaining period until the operation valid period (10 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2" is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example) In the case of timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set to “SP2” is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects in which the operation effective period is set are executed, the additional effect is generated based on the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated). By using the configuration for determining whether to execute, a problem in the case where a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set is executed (that is, the action of operating the frame button 22 and the action of not operating the frame button 22 are repeated in a short period of time). As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation load on the player increases and the player cannot concentrate on the game.

As described above, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether the frame button 22 is operated or not). ), it is determined whether or not the additional effect is to be executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the additional effect may be executed at the predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the operation effect when “SP2” is set as the second variation pattern, and FIG. 250(b) is between “SP2” and “SSP2”. FIG. 250C is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which the “additional effect” is not executed during the period in which the set “additional effect” can be executed. FIG. 250(c) shows a case where “SSP2” is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), during "SP2", an effective period informing section S1 (a diagram imitating a frame button) for informing the third symbol display device 81 that it is the operation effective period of the frame button 22. The period display portion M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display portion M1. Then, in the comment column, the characters "press the button" that urges the player to operate the frame button 22 are displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the character "chance" is displayed in the comment field as the operation result, as shown in FIG. 250(b). Note that the timing shown in FIG. 250(b) is the timing at which the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), so the valid period notification unit S1 and the period display unit M1 display. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(c), "SSP2" is started, and the effective period informing unit S1 (a diagram simulating the frame button that informs the third symbol display device 81 that the operation period of the frame button 22 is in effect. ) And a period display section M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display section M2. Further, the characters "repeated hits" indicating the operation contents in "SSP2" and the characters "change the meter to MAX" indicating the effect contents are displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250(a) to 250(c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the operation valid period of the frame button 22 in the period (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed) between them. Since the display of the effective period informing section S1 for notifying that is, the period display section M2 for indicating the operation effective period, and the display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are not performed, the player once The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250(c) is made. If such a display (effect) is executed in a short period of time, the player's operation on the frame button 22 becomes complicated, and the player's willingness to play may decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-mentioned problem occurs by executing the additional effects during the period (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed). It has been suppressed. Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described.

251(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. 251(c) is a schematic diagram showing still another example displayed as the additional effect in this control example.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 251(a), an additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the operation effective period set by the additional effect and an addition that indicates the additional operation effective period are added to the display content illustrated in FIG. 250(b). The difference is that the period display portion Ma is displayed, and the additional period display portion Ma displays the remaining period of the operation valid period (b in the figure). By executing the additional effect in this way, after the operation valid period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250(a)), the operation valid period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250(c)). Since it is possible to notify the player that the operation is valid for the period up to (), the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated and the player's willingness to play decreases. Can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251(a), the display mode (display form or display position) of the additional effective period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation effective period is the same as the display mode of the effective period notification unit S1 or S2. , There is no sense of incongruity that the additional effect is being executed. Furthermore, since the player operates the frame button 22 as an additional effect, the additional comment is displayed with respect to the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The player does not feel uncomfortable with the displayed effect (operation effect).

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 251(a), only the additional period display portion Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251(b) and 251(c).

FIG. 251(b) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SP2" shown in FIG. 250(a) is continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251(b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display portion M1 showing the operation valid period of "SP2" is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period, and the side ( The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the left side of the viewpoint in FIG. 251 (b). As a result, the remaining period a decreases in "SP2" (moves to the left side of the period display portion M1), and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, the additional effect is produced. When it is started, the additional period display portion Ma can be displayed, and the player can be made aware that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is the extension of the operation effect of "SP2". ..

Further, since the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect in which the character of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" is rewritten (updated), is added. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect executed by the effect is the extension of the operation effect of “SP2”.

FIG. 251(c) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SSP2" shown in FIG. 250(c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251(c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display portion M2 indicating the operation valid period of "SSP2" is displayed, and next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251(b)). The additional period display portion Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display portion Ma), and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, "SSP2". When the operation valid period is started, the remaining period of the period display portion M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect is “SSP2” for the player. It is possible to recognize that the effect is being executed in advance.

In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect in which the display form of the meter increased by the operation effect of "SSP2" is changed (for example, the color of the meter is changed or the effect around the meter is changed). By changing the value, an effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2" is executed), so that the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are more related to each other. Can be recognized.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 are changed and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the second control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the above are changed and the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252(a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed variation pattern according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. Has been done. Specifically, the first fluctuation for selecting a performance mode (first fluctuation pattern) for a period of 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts (that is, a period from 0 second to 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts) The pattern selection table 222a1, the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the presentation mode (second variation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting a production mode (third variation pattern) for a period until elapse, and an additional production selection table 222a4 for determining a production mode of additional production are provided.

In the present control example, the first to third variation patterns and the additional effect are selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the main control device 110, and the variation pattern is a combination thereof. Based on this, one variation effect is executed. For example, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 and one fluctuation is selected based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Perform the performance. On the other hand, when the main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 and the second fluctuation pattern is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. The pattern is selected, the third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the additional production is selected from the additional production selection table 222a4, and one of the first to third variation patterns and the additional production are selected. Change effect is executed.

Although illustration is omitted, when a variation time other than the variation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) described above is selected in the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern according to the variation time is displayed. Will be selected. For example, in the main controller 110, when short deviation (variation time of 7 seconds) is selected, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in which the variation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 252(b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (the presentation mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252(b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the production mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) corresponds to the value of the first production counter 223f1. It is prescribed by.

Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the first effect counter 223f1, the variation A, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of effect modes of the variation A are defined, and the variation A is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation A can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the first effect counter 223f1, variation B, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of effect modes of the variation B are defined similarly to the variation A, and the variation B is executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variation B can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (production mode in the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252(c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the effect mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation is defined in correspondence with the value of the second effect counter 223f2. There is.

Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the second effect counter 223f2, the variation SP1 that is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined. Similar to the variation A, the variation SP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are performed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SP1 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the second effect counter 223f2, the variation SP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Similar to the variation B, the variation SP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SP2 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the presentation mode in the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252(d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the effect form from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation is defined in correspondence with the value of the third effect counter 223f3. There is.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3, the variation SSP1 is defined as an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. Similar to the variation A, the variation SSP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are performed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SSP1 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

For the value “100 to 198” of the third effect counter 223f3, the variation SSP2 that is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. Similar to the variation B, the variation SSP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the presentation mode of the variable SSP2 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Although details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are independently updated. With these independent counters, each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and 61 seconds to 90 seconds) as a detailed fluctuation pattern. Since the production mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, the variation of the production mode can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Here, in each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and third fluctuation pattern that is a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) When the press effect of pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the press effect is executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds and a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, the press effect executed first. If the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the (press effect executed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds), the frame button 22 is pressed and then the press effect is opened with a short interval (the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds). The press effect) that is executed in step 1) is executed. In this case, the second press effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds), even though the frame button 22 has been pressed in the first press effect and the hand has been released from the frame button 22. Then, the player moves his/her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may not be able to concentrate on the game.

On the other hand, in the present control example, when the press effect is continuously executed in one variation effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first press effect, the first press effect ends. It is configured to select and execute an additional effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed in the period from the subsequent time until the start of the next (second) pressing effect. As a result, the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 or the additional effect is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. It is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the end, and the problem described above can be suppressed (prevented).

Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is for selecting an additional effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first press effect in the case where the press effect is continuously executed in one variation effect described above. Table.

As shown in FIG. 253, when the variation pattern (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect is a specific combination (when the pressing effect is continuous), the additional effect is defined. In the case where the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the press effect executed first among the continuous press effects, in the period from the end of the press effect executed first to the start of the press effect executed next, The specified additional effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of the respective variation periods in one variation effect are not a specific combination (when the press effects are not continuous), the additional effect is not specified and the addition is added. The production is never executed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first variation pattern is “variation A (no press effect)” will be described.

When the first variation pattern is “variation A (no pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (no pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (that is, 60). Whether the variation effect is finished in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect. Therefore, the additional effect is not defined and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (without pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1". (No pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variation effect, and thus the additional effect is not specified. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with press effect)”, the press effect is continuously executed in the second change pattern and the third change pattern, so that the additional effect 2 is added. It is prescribed.

If this additional effect 2 is defined, in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern, the additional effect 2 will be executed when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which the comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to operate the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

Next, a case where the first variation pattern is “variation B (with press effect)” will be described.

When the first variation pattern is “variation B (with pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (without pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (that is, 60). Whether the variation effect is finished in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect. Therefore, the additional effect is not defined and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1". In either case (without pressing effect) or “variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, since the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, Additional effect 1 is specified.

Further, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. Therefore, in this case, In addition to the additional effect 1, the additional effect 2 is defined.

When the additional effect 1 is defined, in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern, the additional effect 1 is executed if the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to operate the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the effect counter 223f are changed and in that an effective period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is used to select the first variation counter 223f1 used to select the first variation pattern, the second variation counter 223f2 used to select the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern. The third variation counters 223f3 are provided respectively (see FIG. 254(b)).

The effective period storage area 223ea is a region for determining whether or not the effect is executed based on the depression of the frame button 22 (that is, the period in which the depression of the frame button 22 is effective). The period during which the pressing of the button 22 is effective is set by the value of the elapsed time (ms) after the variation effect is started. This effective period storage area 223ea is used as a press effect to be executed when a change pattern command for executing press effect is set in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256). The period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (see FIG. 257), when the additional effect is set (S6854 of FIG. 257: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 according to the additional effect is valid. Is set (S6855 of FIG. 257). Although not shown, the contents of the effective period storage area 223ea are cleared when one variation effect is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration inside the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the above-described second control example in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. In the variation pattern command processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)), the additional effect data storage area 233n stores the received command if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes). Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260 ), if execution of the additional effect is decided at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is ON), it is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The effect data being displayed is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the additional effect is executed.

The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, and is off. In some cases, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 1 has not been decided. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260 ), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes) (S3852), the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is ON. If determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and is off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been decided. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) receives the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 (S6902). Then, in the pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes) (S3856), the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is ON. When determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the frame button input monitoring It is different in that the frame button input monitoring/production process 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the production process (see S1707 in FIG. 137), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256. In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when the variation pattern in which the press effect is executed is set in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the above-described second control example (S2031). : Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the executed press effect is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In the seventh control example, the press effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed and the processes corresponding to those effects are not executed. However, the press effect in the second control example is not performed. The slot effect and the point effect may be executed, and the processing corresponding to these effects may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the variation pattern received from the main control device 110) is changed to the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table). 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and the display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the process of S2006 ends, the process proceeds to S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute the press effect (S2031: Yes), the variation patterns selected in the process of S2091 are set. The valid operation period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the valid period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute the press effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 is performed. Move to processing.

When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed, and this processing is completed, as in the second control example.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 257, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707) will be described. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707), the frame button press command is set based on the detection of the press of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period of the press effect, the period until the next press effect is started is determined, and the period until the next press effect is started is short. When it is determined that (10 seconds or less in this control example), the additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the effective period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid). It is determined whether or not it is (period) (S6851). In the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation is not valid (S6851: No), the process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851, when it is determined that the frame button operation valid period is reached (S6851: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

In the processing of S6801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: YES), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to step S6853. Transition. The display frame button press command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 (S1702). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines the period in which the command is set from the received command (for example, the pressing effect period in the second variation pattern), and the effect according to the period ( For example, the comment display effect (see FIG. 250(b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S6852 is finished, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: No), the present process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6853, when it is determined that the current period is the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in S6854, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the start of the next press effect is 10 seconds or less. In the processing of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressed effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), the additional display effect command for display is executed in order to execute the additional effect. After setting (S6855), the effective period storage area 223ea is updated based on the pressed effective period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next press effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped, and the present process is performed. To finish.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260, the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described. In the present control example, the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146). Instead of (a), variable pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 259(a)) is executed, additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) is added, and pointer update processing is performed. The difference is that pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the command determination processing 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 258. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in the present control example, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) is used instead of the variation pattern command process in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) is executed and the addition effect command processing (see FIG. S259(b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, similarly to the second control example, the processes of S2601 to S2604 are executed. When it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), the variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 259(a). In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in the present control example, in the case where there is additional effect data, in the variation pattern command process in the second control example (see FIG. 146(a)), the additional effect data is additionally effected. The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In the fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command includes additional effect data (S2751). When the additional effect data is set as the change pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the press effect is continuously set (selected) in the first change pattern to the third change pattern. Is.

In the processing of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2) is set. It is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command does not include additional effect data (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2701.

When the process shifts to S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed similarly to the second control example described above, and the present process is ended.

In this way, when the variation pattern command that may execute the additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n in advance, When executing (displaying) additional effects, you can execute (display) additional effects without delay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n only when the additional effect is executed. Thereby, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed similarly to the second control example.

In the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not the additional effect command is received (S2639). In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has been received (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 259(b). The additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when the additional effect command indicating the execution of the additional effect is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the process of S6901, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and the present process To finish. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

By the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 being set to ON by the process of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated so as to be (displayed).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this processing is ended. .. As described above, the additional effect 2 is an additional effect that is executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

By the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 being set to ON by the process of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated so as to be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to S2601.

Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 260. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined with respect to the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the above-described second control example, and the additional effect update timing (in each variation pattern). The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and the other points are the same.

In the pointer update processing 2 (S3605), first, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851). ).

In the processing of S3851, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case where the additional effect 1 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Alternatively, since the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), it is a case of executing the additional effect 1 (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressed effect). Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to OFF. (S3854), the process ends.

In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d where the display data to be executed 1 second later is stored. As a result, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) from the time 1 second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed appropriately. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed according to the change.

In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). It is determined whether or not (S3855).

In the processing of S3855, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the case where the additional effect 2 is executed (the frame button 22 was pressed early or not). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), so this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the additional effect 2 is executed (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressed effect). Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to OFF. (S3858), the process ends.

In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processes of S3802 to S3806 are executed as in the second control example described above, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), at the update timing of each additional effect, the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer in advance, thereby adding. The production can be executed (displayed) without delay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table buffer may be updated at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. The data table buffer 233d may be overwritten (updated).

Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is on). It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is to be executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, a configuration for setting an additional effect for the intervals therebetween is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed with a predetermined interval, by performing processing so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect that is executed first by a predetermined interval, the plurality of operation effects are continuously performed. The processing may be performed, or the processing may be performed such that the start timing of the operation effect to be performed later is moved forward by a predetermined interval.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting additional effects between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is advisable to set the above-mentioned additional effect after the end of the operation effect to be executed later or set the effect period for displaying the result of the operation effect to be long.

<Modification of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the above-described seventh control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect executed for one special symbol variation has been described, but in the present modification, continuous special symbol variations are described. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. The same elements as those in the above control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow of setting the additional effect in the present modification will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set across a plurality of special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set to a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the special symbol variation is started. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

Then, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), the first variation pattern “variation A” and the second variation pattern “SP2” are set (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27. The operation effect is executed in the period of 2 seconds to 4 seconds (23 seconds). Special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 seconds), because the end of the special symbol fluctuation is the end timing of the second fluctuation pattern "SP2", the end timing of the operation valid period of "SP2" in the special symbol fluctuation 1 and the special symbol fluctuation The period between the start timing of the operation valid period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Even in this 5 seconds, the same control as the seventh control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display content of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be described.

FIG. 262 is a view for explaining the display content of the additional effect when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol fluctuations, and FIG. 262(a) is an example of the display content in the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262(c) is a display content during the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 262(a), in this modification, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed as in the sixth control example described above. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 241(b) of the sixth control example described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the effective period set by the additional effect 3 and the additional period display that indicates the additional operation effective period. The section Ma is displayed, and the additional period display section Ma displays the remaining period of the operation valid period (b in the figure). Then, the characters "Get new background with MAX" for explaining the game contents in the additional effect 3 and the variable meter by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, a background that cannot be normally selected can be selected by the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in FIG. 262(c), normally, two types of backgrounds, “Sea” stage or “Mountain” stage, were selectable (see FIG. 262(a)), but a new background was acquired by the additional effect 3. , "River" stage is displayed as selectable.

As described above, in the present modified example, the additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed in the same manner as in the seventh control example described above even in a plurality of operation effects set to span a plurality of special symbol variations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button performed by the player from straddling a plurality of special symbol variations from becoming complicated.

Incidentally, in the additional effect 3, the condition that the meter is MAX may be a case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result of the special symbol variation 2 (the result of the judgment) is preliminarily obtained. It is also possible to make a determination (so-called prefetching) and the determination result is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Also, both may be combined.

Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example is to additionally set both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation valid period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a case will be described in which only the effect mode is changed as an additional effect without changing the operation valid period of the frame button 22. FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display unit Ma showing the additional operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251(a) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. 263(b) is a display obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display part Ma showing the additional operation effective period and the display of the period display part M1 from the display contents of FIG. 251(b) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. FIG. 263(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 263(c) shows the additional period display section Ma and the period display section M2 showing the additional operation effective period from the display content of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

As shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(c), since the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is not changed as the additional effect, the period in which the additional effect is executed is the period in which the operation effective period is not set. Therefore, the period display parts M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display part Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

However, as an effect mode, since the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the effective period notification section Sa shown in FIG. 251, as an information prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, the operation is effective. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22 in the period (operation invalid period) between the period and the operation valid period.

In this way, by executing the notification (display of the operation display unit Sb) that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as the effect mode, without changing the operation effective period as the additional effect, the player is informed. It is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 over a plurality of operation valid periods, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the action of operating the frame button 22 and the action of stopping the frame button 22 are frequently repeated. ..

In this case, as an effect mode of the additional effect, it is preferable to use an effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. This makes it possible to make the player think that the display mode is variable based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22, although the operation is actually the invalid period.

Specifically, as an effect that is actually executed during the operation valid period, an effect that an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(a), or an effect that is shown in FIG. 251(b). The effect of changing the content of the comment on the way based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the effect of accumulating the meter based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(c) is the operation of the frame button 22. It is advisable to execute a pseudo effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the situation.

This makes it possible to make the user think that the display mode is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the above-described pseudo effect mode is changed may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval or number of operations) performed on the frame button 22 performed during the actual operation valid period. As a result, it is possible to think that the presentation mode during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. Each of the control examples described above constitutes various effects as an operation effect for the player to operate the frame button 22. The present control example is different in that the effect mode control when the operation effect in each control example described above is executed is different.

Specifically, based on the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect, control for changing the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated is executed. With this configuration, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes equal to or less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes the predetermined time. Execution of an effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode (the amount of increase in the meter, the amount of increase in the numerical value, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) than in the above case (more than 5 seconds, for example). So, you can entertain the operation production to the end.

Further, in the operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, long-press operation) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the remaining period of the operation effective period is equal to or less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When it is less than or equal to 2 seconds), the period for determining that a long press operation is performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). With such a configuration, it is possible to experience a change in the presentation mode based on the long press operation even at the end of the operation presentation, so that the operation presentation can be enjoyed to the end.

In the eighth control example, a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the above-described control examples, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is performed. It differs from the changed point. About other points, it is the same as each control example mentioned above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the respective control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 264(a) and 264(b), the operation effect in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 264(a), during the variable display of the third symbol, a display mode that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, a remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time for which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the pattern imitating the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is changed based on the decrease of the remaining time. In the present control example, the remaining time period is set to a red display color, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is variably displayed in white (the part displayed in red decreases) ( See FIG. 264(b)).

Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time, it is controlled (determined) to be in the same state as the automatic continuous hitting. The characters are displayed. Then, an indicator whose color is changed based on repeated hits of the frame button 22 is displayed above the display area. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the degree of expectation that the result of the determination of the special symbol whose scale is changing is a hit is set. When the color of the indicator is variably displayed (variable from white to red) by hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly until the scale of the indicator has a larger value, the player cannot judge whether or not the special symbol is changing. You can expect it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 264(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or 1 second), the pattern button imitating the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time. The character “automatic continuous hitting” is displayed, which indicates that the automatic hitting has been set. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be long-pressed is variably set according to the remaining time when the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds until then, the setting determined to be a long press is set for 1 second continuously. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined to be a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time becomes short, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed according to the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured. Further, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less), when the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value which is a value at which the indicator is changed or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX If the effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be varied up to the scale 1 and the like).

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, regarding the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707) which is one process in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time (frame button operation valid period) is greater than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW valid time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is incremented by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 in the range of the effect value set in the variation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. A display command is set (S7042). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. It is determined whether or not (S7043). When it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW press counter (not shown) is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S7044). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the present control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after being pressed, it is determined that the continuous pressing is performed, and the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is incremented by one. Update. Then, when it becomes equal to or longer than the long press determination value, the SW indicator is set to be variable. The amount by which the SW indicator varies is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set so as to represent the degree of expectation of the win/fail judgment result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator even if the player presses the button for a long time or repeatedly hits it. Further, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, it is possible to show the player the effect of changing the indicator even when the SW effective time is short. The speed at which the indicator is changed may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

The SW press counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and further to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a pressing frequency measurement counter) and a counter that measures the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the press of the frame button 22 is started, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count measurement counter is not added, but the value of the press period measurement counter is added, and the value of the press period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value has reached 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the pressing period determination means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed. May be.

As described above, by providing the pressing count measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 independently.

Next, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) described above, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is the predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time. Even if the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short, the long press operation is shortened by shortening the long press judgment value that is a value for determining that (Auto continuous hit) can be executed, and when the long press judgment value is shortened, the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is changed. The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that is variably set) by the long-pressing operation (automatic continuous hitting) executed in the above.

On the other hand, in the present modification, when the long press operation (automatic hit) is executed in the state where the long press determination value is shortened, the long press operation (auto It is different in that the value of the SW pressing counter is added more than that of continuous hitting.

In this modified example, when a long press operation (automatic continuous hit) is performed in a state where the long press determination value is shortened, a large value of the SW press counter is added (the automatic continuous hit interval is short. However, other configurations may be used, for example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large value of the SW pressing counter by automatic continuous hitting may be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of the present modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, similarly to the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above, steps S7031 to S7037 are performed. The process is executed. Then, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051), and not 1 second. When it is determined to be (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processes of S7038, S7041 and S7042 are executed similarly to the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7051, if it is determined that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is added by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is added by 2 ( In step S7053, a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (step S7042), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), it is the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Then, the processes of S7043 and S7044 are executed and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present modified example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is less than or equal to the predetermined period (5 seconds or less). The value (time) to be used is shortened (reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter that is added by the automatic continuous hit operation is added more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range preset to be variable) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hit) executed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

Further, unlike the above-described eighth control example, the value added to the SW press counter is configured to increase, so that the value of the SW press counter and the value of the SW indicator can be associated with each other, and the control load can be increased. There is also an effect that can reduce.

The SW press counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and further to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a pressing frequency measurement counter) and a counter that measures the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the press of the frame button 22 is started, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count measurement counter is not added, but the value of the press period measurement counter is added, and the value of the press period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value has reached 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the pressing period determination means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed. May be.

As described above, by providing the pressing count measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 independently.

As described above, the configurations described in each control example may be appropriately combined, and in particular, each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example and each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example are combined. Alternatively, each configuration of the composite press effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configuration of each press effect in the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each configuration of the continuous slot effect described above is combined with each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, and each configuration of the point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. You may combine with each structure of the point production which performed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, and an abutting member that is abuttable to the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. A first member that is linearly displaceable in the member, a pinion gear that is rotatably disposed in the first member, and a rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and that is linearly displaceable in the first member. A second member provided, the base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is in contact with the contact member. Gaming machine A1.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member that is linearly displaceable on the base member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or the contact member is provided at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , Which causes the displacement member to contact the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper) when the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. Are known.

However, the above-described conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is contacted with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is reduced in order to suppress damage, the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the abutting member while ensuring the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member. Since the rack gear of the base member is engaged with the rack gear through the pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased more than the first member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect produced by the displacement can be secured. On the other hand, the displacement member causes the first member, which has a lower displacement speed than the second member, to abut against the abutting member, so that the impact at the time of abutment is weakened and the displacement member and the abutting member are prevented from being damaged. can do.

As a mode of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a rack gear formed on the first member is meshed with a pinion gear arranged on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to drive the first member to the base member. A member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member, or a distal end of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member, and the arm member is rotationally driven to move the first member to the base member. For example, a linear displacement may be used.

The contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the protruding direction with respect to the first member, or Alternatively, it may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In any case, the first member, which has a lower displacement speed than the second member, is brought into contact with the abutting member, so that the impact at the time of the abutting is weakened, and the displacement member and the abutting member Damage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A gaming machine A2, which is in a direction in which displacement is allowed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. At this time, since the displacement member is in a direction in which the displacement member is allowed to displace, the contact member receives the displacement of the displacement member and escapes, whereby a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

In addition, the direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component of the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacing member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to the direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is contacted. At this time, the abutting member can smoothly escape. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert the cushioning effect and to easily prevent the displacement member and the contact member from being damaged.

The gaming machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member, so that the overall size of the device is small. Can be promoted. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. In that case, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement increases correspondingly, leading to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, since the one guide member is also used, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 can be arranged at a position where the abutting member does not abut the displacing member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where it does not contact the displacement member, so that the displacement member contacts the contact member. It is possible to form a non-contact state. That is, when linearly displacing the displacement member at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the contact position of the displacement member is easily matched to the target position. It is placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member, and by not contacting them, the number of times of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and their life is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A gaming machine A6, which is formed to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging with the rack gear of the base member through the pinion gear rotatably arranged in the first member, the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member is utilized to move the second member from the first member. Also, since the structure is such that it is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, at the time of the initial operation of the displacement member (when the linear displacement starts from the stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of the linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be impaired.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect produced by the displacement.

The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least the component of the linear displacement direction of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts the first member of the displacement members. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, among the displacement members Since the first member is brought into contact with the first member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, the abutting member is brought into contact with the first member having a lower displacement speed than the second member and pushes back the first member, so that an assisting force acts from the abutting member to the displacing member (first member). Longer (that is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state is pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member until the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased.

In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. A game machine A8, characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the abutting member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism of the first member Since the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, the displacement member can be quickly and linearly displaced from the stopped state, and after the linear displacement is started, the displacement member ( The speed of the linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect produced by the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, so that the force of pushing back the displacement member by the contact member is increased and the displacement is increased. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be promptly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the linear displacement speed of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. The speed can be increased.

Note that a large gear ratio (small) means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one revolution is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slower. That is, it is impossible to achieve both the speeding up of the initial movement of the displacement member and the speed of the linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement at the same time. By adopting a structure in which the displacement member is pushed back, it is possible to achieve such compatibility for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention with the lower united unit 600 as an example>
Drive means, a displacement member driven by the drive means and formed to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member against which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts In the gaming machine, the gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are displaceable between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. A gaming machine to be formed is known (for example, JP-A-2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, by displacing a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position in a direction in which they approach each other and abutting (joining) them at a contact position, the pair of displacement members are integrated. The production of one character is realized.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, a shock occurs, and the postures become unstable, for example, they bounce each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of abutting, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character increases, and it extends. The effect of production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the displacement speed of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the contacted member to form one character, and it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member that is stopped at the first position, or may be a member that is formed to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is arranged at the first position before the displacing member (that is, the displacing member is moved with respect to the abutted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state). Abutting), and is disposed at the first position substantially at the same time as the displacing member (that is, the displacing member and the abutted member that are in a mutually displaced state are abutting at the first position). May be

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases near the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position, or a form in which the component decreases gradually toward the first position , A combination of these is exemplified.

Further, the reduction of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is decreased but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes zero, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is one of the velocity components of the displacement member in a state where the drive state of the drive means is constant. A gaming machine B2, wherein at least a component of the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means reduces the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state in which the driving state is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving unit according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the driving means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

In addition, as a state in which the driving state is constant, for example, when the driving unit is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. It However, the change of state in the transient response at the time of starting and stopping shall be ignored.

In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member displaceably disposed, and the transmission means is provided at a position distant from the rotation base portion rotatably connected to the base member and a predetermined distance from the rotation base portion. A connecting member having a connecting tip that is rotatably connected to the displacement member, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in a direction to bring the connecting tip closer to the first position. By doing so, the displacement member is displaced toward the first position, and the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, the connecting member is provided between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in the direction of bringing the connecting tip toward the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) in the velocity component of the displacement member is rotated. The component in the direction toward can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is such that the connecting member is provided between the base member and the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced through the connecting member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission is performed. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member displaceably disposed, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending in the base member and guiding the displacement member, and the displacement member includes: A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the abutted member. Is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes the guide groove that is extended to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes the guided portion that is guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease near the first position. Thus, the transmission means is provided with the guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means is provided. The structure of can be simplified.

The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided with an interposing member having one side displaceably coupled to the base member and the other side displaceably coupled to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. The driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission unit, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of the displacement caused by the action of the transmission means and the displacement caused by the action of the interposition member. This makes it possible to complicate the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

In the gaming machine B5, the interposing member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member on the one side and the other side by a pivotal support.

According to the gaming machine B6, the interposing member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member on one side and the other side. Therefore, when the displacing member is displaced, the interposing member is unilateral. With the center of rotation as the center of rotation, the other side is displaced along an arcuate trajectory. Therefore, the arcuate displacement (that is, the displacement in which the displacement direction is constantly changed along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the interposed member member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the form of the displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means causes the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member to be at least approximately zero at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Amusement machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction of moving away from the contacted member at the first position, when the displacement member displaced to the first position contacts the contacted member, the displacement member Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing back from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

Further, if the value is a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, Since it is possible to increase the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value), it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of impact.

Any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8 is provided with a second drive means for driving the abutted member and a second transmission means for transmitting a driving force of the second drive means to the abutting member, and The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means controls the velocity component of the abutted member while the driving state of the second driving means is constant. A game machine B9, wherein at least a component of the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and therefore the effect by abutting the pair of members. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacing member in the direction of approaching each other and abutting (joining) at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmission means is at least one of the speed components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from bouncing back to each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the displacement speed of the abutting member can be increased, the time required to integrate the abutted member with the displacing member to form one character is reduced for both the abutting member and the displacing member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the decrease of at least the component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. Since it can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second drive means and reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the gaming machine B9 can be applied by replacing them with the displacement member, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the gaming machines B2 to B8. Therefore, the interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be provided between the base member and the contacted member.

<About the concept of the invention with the protrusion unit 700 as an example>
Driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and first transmitting means and second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. And a first predetermined section in which the first driving force is applied to the drive section, and the first drive section is loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means, and the second transmission means is configured to form a second predetermined section in which the second driving force is applied to the driving means. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force applied in the second predetermined section is applied to the driving means, and the first transmission means is provided with the first transmission means. In a state in which one predetermined section is formed, the second transmission unit forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and the second transmission unit forms the second predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the drive means, the first member and the second member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and the first transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine including a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-53958). According to such a gaming machine, the two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one driving means, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the structure in which the second member is displaced by the first driving means, the driving force for driving both members is overlapped, so that the load of the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is deteriorated. It was On the other hand, in the configuration in which the second member (the first member and the second member) is displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed. The staging effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section in which the load of the driving means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first transmission section can be formed. In the state where the second transmission means can form the second predetermined section and the second suppression section in which the load of the driving means can be smaller than that of the second predetermined section, and the first transmission section forms the first predetermined section, In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression zone and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined zone in at least a part of the first predetermined zone, the second transmission means forms the second suppression zone in at least a part of the second predetermined zone. 1 transmission means forms a 1st suppression area, namely, when one is comparatively high load, the other is comparatively low load, and when the other is comparatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, the load of the driving unit can be distributed, and the load of the driving unit can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced, so that it is possible to reduce the load of the driving means. The staging effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a cam member that is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and the first member is rubbed against the peripheral surface of the cam member. A cam friction contact member for imparting a displacement to the second member, wherein the displacement amount of the cam friction contact member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined value in the first suppression section or the second suppression section. A game machine C2 characterized by reducing the load of the drive means by reducing the displacement amount of the cam contact member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a crank member having a pin portion eccentrically located from the center of rotation of the main body. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides and which displaces the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement amount of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member is calculated as the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. A game machine C3 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by interlocking the cam member and the cam rubbing member or interlocking the crank member and crank rubbing member, Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The displacement amount of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving unit (for example, the electric power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is enhanced while enhancing the effect of production. In the section, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the second suppression section. In the two suppression sections, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, the first member or the second member is used to utilize its own weight to The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member in this way, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When changing the load of the driving means as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the driving means can be changed while maintaining the above.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the peripheral surface of the cam member to impart a displacement to the first member. And a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion eccentric to the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank rubbing member for providing a displacement to the second member when the pin portion of the member has a guide groove for sliding and the pin portion slides along the guide groove; A game machine C5, wherein the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so a space for disposing the cam member and the crank member separately. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a non-transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, or the first member or the second member. A non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means does not apply the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, it is possible to form a non-transmission section that maintains the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that it is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means increases due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. Since it is difficult to smoothly displace, the non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state by not transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum has been imparted (that is, after passing through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission section, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each non-transmission section. A gaming machine C7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form non-transmission sections, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the drive means can be idly rotated under a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, in a state where one of the first member and the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member and the second member is a displacement component in the downward direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, in the state where one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other of the first member and the second member is displaced. Has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement when displacing the other of the first member and the second member while maintaining the other in the stopped state. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member and the second member can be displaced while one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both of the first member and the second member stop. It is possible to improve the effect by avoiding the state.

In any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart a displacement to the first member or the second member. A crank rubbing member, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. When the first member or the second member starts to be displaced by passing through the transmission section and reaches the predetermined position of the guide groove, the pin portion changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. In this case, the game machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank contact member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is a non-transmission section. , The pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin section reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When it is slid toward the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed). In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section and changes its direction at a predetermined position, so that the shape of the non-transmitting section is an arc that is convex toward the rotation center of the crank member. Becomes Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance becomes large, but also the displacement amount of the crank scraping member per unit rotation of the crank member becomes large, so that the driving means Is overloaded. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to slide the displacement, the slide member is rotatable. And a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational movement of the rotation member, wherein the conversion means includes a rotation displacement of the rotation member. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being capable of forming a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a base member, a slide member slidably arranged on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the slide member to slide the slide member. (For example, JP2013-236802A). Further, there is also known a gaming machine in which a rotary member and a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotary member are provided on a slide member. According to this gaming machine, while the slide member is slidingly displaced (linear movement), the rotary member arranged on the slide member can be rotationally moved, and an effect combining linear movement and rotary movement can be performed. You can

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged in the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, since the gaming machine D1 includes the rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member, and the conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotating member, The rotary member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing it.

In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, since the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the sliding member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the sliding member is slid and displaced while the rotating member remains unrotated. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear, and a release means that is formed to be able to release the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear and that is disposed on the base member. A gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the slide member so as to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slidable displacement can be converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member. Further, since the converting means includes the releasing means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. That is, not only can the rotation member be rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide member can be slid and displaced while the rotation member remains unrotated. The number of combinations of member movements (linear and rotary) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is provided on the base member, and it is not necessary to provide means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to a tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby engaging the gear between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the releasing means causes the rack gear to rotate by rotating at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. Of at least the rack gear is rotated along an axis of rotation parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to a tooth surface of the rack gear. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby forming the rack gear and the pinion gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear, and a gaming machine D6, characterized in that a part of the rack gear has teeth missing.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack member, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational movement of the rotary member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, when the pinion gear passes through a part of the rack gear lacking teeth, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion where the tooth of the rack gear is missing, while the tooth of the rack gear is rotated. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the part where the mark is missing, the rotation of the rotary member can be continued by its inertial force.

Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the state in which the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped It is possible to form a configuration in which the rotating member is rotated, and it is possible to increase the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine D6, a part of the teeth of the rack gear is omitted, so that the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released. A means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to arrange the slide member, it is possible to reduce the weight of the slide member as a whole. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D6, the teeth of the teeth of the rack gear that are adjacent to the missing portion have higher rigidity than the other teeth.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than other teeth, so that the durability thereof is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing part collide with the teeth of the pinion gear passing through the missing part of the rack gear, so that the teeth are likely to be damaged, and the rigidity is increased to improve the durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a mode in which the tooth width of the teeth is increased is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without deteriorating the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a gear that can be meshed with the rack gear and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear and a one-way clutch arranged in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, the one-way clutch is changed between a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the transmission is blocked. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being formed possible.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack member, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational movement of the rotary member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that it can be switched between a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the transmission is blocked. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only is the one-way clutch in a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and the rotation member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, but for example, the one-way clutch is in a state in which the transmission of rotation is cut off. The slide member is slid and displaced without rotating, or the slide member is changed from the state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to the state in which the transmission is blocked when the displacement of the slide member is stopped, It is possible to form a configuration in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by the inertial force of the rotating member when the rotation is stopped.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is not rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotary member is displaced or a form in which the rotary member is rotated in a state where the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the slide member and the rotary member You can increase. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the slide member, and drive means disposed on the slide member for driving the displacement member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A gaming machine D9, which is provided with an operating element that is operated to change a state in which the operation is allowed and a state in which the operating state is cut off, and the operating element is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, the gaming machine D9 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a drive unit that drives the displacement member and that is disposed on the slide member. In addition to the movements of the slide member and the rotary member (linear movement and rotary movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of the combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operating element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing an effect by displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a means for operating the operating element of the one-way clutch on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch is provided with an operator that is operated to change a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which the rotation is blocked, and the base member is provided when the slide member is slid and displaced. A gaming machine D10, comprising: an engaging portion positioned on a displacement locus of the operating element, wherein the operating element is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, the base member is provided with the engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slid and displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slid and displaced. Since the manipulator is operated by the joint portion, it is not necessary to dispose a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the manipulator) on the slide member. Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive unit for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member.

It should be noted that the disposition position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the above-described displacement trajectory of the operator. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement trajectory, or may be in the middle of the displacement trajectory.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. A gaming machine D11, wherein the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position at which the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position at which the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the permitted state. Thereby, the position at which the rotation state of the rotary member is changed when the slide member is slid and displaced, and the position at which the rotary member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped are determined according to, for example, a game state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since it also has a role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. A gaming machine D12, wherein the position of the engagement portion is formed to be changeable between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot operate with the sliding displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch can be switched and a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch cannot be switched when the slide member is slid and displaced. That is, the rotation state of the rotary member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and the rotation state of the rotary member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. Can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since it also has a role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be provided on the second slide member or the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second slide member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shielded state that shields a predetermined area of the base member and an open state that opens the predetermined area, the shield opening means includes: A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second rack gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear. A second rack member that has the first member and is linearly displaceable on the first member; and a base rack gear that is formed on the base member and meshes with the first pinion gear. By linearly displacing the two members to one side, the shielding state is formed, and by linearly displacing the first member and the second member to the other side opposite to the one side, A gaming machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shielded state in which a predetermined region of the base member is shielded and a shielded state in which a predetermined region is opened. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotary plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotary plates are directed to the front to shield the predetermined region. On the other hand, each of the rotating plates is rotated 90 degrees to turn the plate thickness portion (side surface) toward the front, thereby forming a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state). Is disclosed.

However, according to the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the open state is formed, the rotary plate remains rotated in the predetermined region by 90 degrees and the plate thickness portion (side surface) faces forward. However, there is a problem that the area to be released is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotary plate is made thin, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-shaped body having the same area as the predetermined area is displaceably arranged, and the plate-shaped body is displaced (disposed) to the predetermined area to shield the predetermined area (shielding). On the other hand, there is also known a gaming machine having a structure in which a predetermined area is opened (an open state is formed) by retracting a plate-shaped body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area). There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined area, the predetermined area can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for disposing the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. However, there is a problem in that it becomes necessary and leads to an increase in size. Further, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area or to place the plate-shaped body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shield opening means includes the first member rotatably arranged on the base member, the first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and the first member. A second side rack gear having a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed, and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and meshing with the first side pinion gear. And the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, the open state is formed.

That is, the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to suppress the space for doing so and achieve miniaturization.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined area or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In addition, the shielding state in which the predetermined area is shielded does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and an area opened in a part of the predetermined area. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is formed by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is linearly displaceably supported by the base member, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the A second main body part having the second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement part connected to the second main body part. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. The second member is provided, and the second member has a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is linearly displaceably supported by the first member, and is connected to the second body part. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first main body part of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region. In addition, only the loci of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be overlapped on the predetermined region. That is, the first main body portion and the second main body portion can be passed outside the predetermined region, and the locus thereof can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined region. Accordingly, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and the first member and the second member are not partially left in the predetermined area. The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is the first member. Since the first member is provided in the first main body part and the first gear is driven by the drive gear to linearly displace the first member with respect to the base member, the structure for linearly displacing the first member is small. Can be converted. That is, of the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, it is possible to reduce the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a second side pinion gear thereof. A gaming machine E4, comprising: a third member having a third rack gear meshed with the third member; and a third member linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear to form the second side pinion gear. And a third member having a third rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side along with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are evacuated from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area. ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas by that amount. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) as described above, compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for disposing the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superposing three divided areas than by superposing a predetermined divided area.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member, and Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined area or from the retracted position. It is possible to shorten the time required to dispose in a predetermined area and switch between the shielded state and the open state more quickly.

In the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and a third main body portion thereof. A gaming machine E5, comprising: a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body part and the third displacement part connected to the third main body part are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be overlapped on the predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion, and the third main body portion can be passed outside the predetermined region, and their loci can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third member are placed in the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member to the second member) in the gaming machine E4 or E5 may be expanded to provide a gaming machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member,..., An n-th member.

That is, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed. A configuration in which a second member is provided so as to be linearly displaceable and a third member is extended so that the shield opening means is rotatably provided at the n-th member and meshes with the base-side rack gear. The nth side pinion gear and the (n+1)th side rack gear meshed with the nth side pinion gear, and the (n+1)th member linearly displaceable with respect to the nth member may be further provided. However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is connected to the third main body part supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. By expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the (n+1)th member has an (n+1)th side rack gear with which the nth side pinion gear is meshed, and is also supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an (n+1)th displacement portion connected to the (n+1)th main body portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a third member that is linearly displaceable in the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. Third linear displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when linearly displaced. A gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, when the shield opening means is linearly displaced toward the one side or the other side, the third member disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. And a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved.

That is, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are evacuated from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area. ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined region can be opened wider. Further, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas by that amount. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

In addition, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) as described above, compared with the case where the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for disposing the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area becomes smaller when the three areas are superposed than when the predetermined area is divided into two.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilizing means linearly displaces the third member in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is accelerated because the second member is accelerated. The linear displacement of can be accelerated at least as compared with the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or arranging the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state is further improved. Can be done quickly.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. The gaming machine F1 is disposed, and the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least a rotational displacement.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member that are linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, by displacing the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position to the projecting position and bringing them into close proximity or contact with each other, the two are associated (integrated). , The effect of allowing the player to visually recognize it as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the projecting position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are each displaced to the bulging position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are increased in size, they move to the bulging position. They may interfere with each other during the displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. Therefore, it takes time until the character is formed, and the character is extended. There was a problem that the effect of production was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to be arranged at the extended position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. As a result, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced in a combination of a rotational displacement and a linear displacement.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the second member is displaced in a combined manner of the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, so that the second member is arranged in the projecting position, and thus the curved shape is obtained. The trajectory of can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

In the gaming machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the second member is displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. A game machine F3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are performed. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the bulging position, and the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be freely adjusted. You can increase the degree. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the bulging position by the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not moved to the bulging position, but to the first position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member in the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture in the extended position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member in the retracted position can be increased.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, a liquid crystal display device provided in the game area is provided, and the retreat position of the second member is set to one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4, wherein the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position and is vertically arranged at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape and is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhang position to form a character together with the first member, it is not possible to form a large-sized character, and sufficient effect is produced. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically long, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow, and the space for disposing the members is small. Is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the extended position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for disposing the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the second member can be increased in size accordingly, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the extended position. Can be made larger.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with a drive means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Amusement machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member are synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the extended position can be made larger. .. For example, even in areas such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing the members, the second member is retracted to the areas. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a third member that is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position is provided, and the third member includes the first member and the second member in the extended position. A gaming machine F6, which is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes the third member that is displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so that the first member and the second member are provided. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the staging effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, the third member is arranged in the front-back direction at a position different from that of the first member and the second member at the projecting position, and thus does not contact the first member and the second member at the projecting position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the projecting position, or when they are likely to be brought into contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of damage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent third member is displaced so as to catch up with the starting first member and the second member at the projecting position, and the staging effect when forming the character can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine F6, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed to overhang the first member and the second member in the same front-back direction position.

Here, if the positions of the first member and the second member and the third member are different from each other in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension of the gaming machine is correspondingly increased and the size is increased. If the front-back dimension of each of the first member and the second member and the third member is reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the front-back dimension, it becomes difficult to secure rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member is provided with an overhanging portion formed by overhanging on the side having the same front-back direction position as the first member and the second member. The total size of the second member and the third member) is suppressed, and the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction is reduced, while the size of the third member is increased in the front-rear direction to secure its rigidity. can do.

The gaming machine F8 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, which includes a contacted member that is disposed on the first member and abuts a part of the second member at the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is contacted at the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly contacted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the projecting position, or the first member and It may be formed at a position where the second member abuts when the second member is closer to the reference position than the reference position due to control fluctuations and dimensional fluctuations when the second member is arranged at the projecting position.

In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction in which the contacted member approaches and separates from the first member, and the first member has the contacted member separated from the first member. A gaming machine F9, which is arranged in an overhang position.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is the abutted member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the bulging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to reliably contact the second member at the bulging position. Further, since the contacted member is displaced in the direction in which it is separated from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

In the gaming machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction of approaching the first member, the gaming machine F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the abutted member is displaced in a direction in which the first member is brought closer to the first member after the first member is arranged at the projecting position. A space for displacing the member can be formed. That is, when the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the contacted member is separated from the first member, and the role of receiving the displacement of the second member is exerted. It is possible to displace the contacted member in the direction of approaching it, and use the space formed with the displacement as the displacement space for the second member, and the displacement of the second member can enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction in which the abutted member comes close to and away from the first member, and the first member is such that the abutted member is the first member at least in the retracted position. A gaming machine F11 characterized in that the gaming machine F11 is brought into a state of being close to.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is abutted at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being close to the first member, it is possible to suppress the installation space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the abutted member is displaced in the protruding position in the direction away from the first member, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the abutted member is brought close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. ..

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of production.

In any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Accordingly, in the other set, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member, and the gaming machine F13.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and the contacted member is contacted by the second member in one set. When contacted, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set due to the contact, so that, for example, in one set, the second member is positioned at the reference position. When it is displaced beyond and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member in the other set can be displaced toward the second member in association with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member in the other set contacts the second member, the impact caused by the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the one set may not be received by only the first member. Instead, the second member in the other set can be received. Thereby, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Note that, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member as a result of the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set causes the displacement of the contacted member in the other set. The structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, With the transmission, the first member is displaced, so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure in which these members are combined. Is exemplified.

One of the gaming machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position and that is capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be capable of contacting the first member and the second member at the extended position. Since the periodic displacement is possible, it is possible to periodically displace the first member and the second member by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, it is possible to vibrate the character formed by the first member and the second member, and the cyclically displacing member, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, in this case, the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first member and the second member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other or may be in a separated state (non-contact) at the extended position.

In the gaming machine F14, the gaming machine F15 is characterized in that the cyclically displacing member is arranged at a position in which the front-rear direction position in the projecting position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14, the cyclically displacing member is arranged such that the front-rear direction position in the projecting position is located in front of the first member and the second member. It is possible to periodically displace (vibrate) a member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the user. That is, since the character on the front side, which is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, vibrates the character, it is possible to perform an effect in which the power of the vibration is easily transmitted to the player.

In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16, wherein the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14 or F15, since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position, the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is reduced to the first. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes without relating to each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700 and the lower united unit 800 as an example>
A first group composed of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group composed of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the projecting position, a first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and In the gaming machine in which when the respective displacement means are arranged at the projecting position, the second effect mode is formed by the respective displacement means of the second group, one displacement means of the first group and the above A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a combined means which also serves as one displacement means of the second group.

Here, from a first group of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position and a plurality of displacement means formed displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine having a second group consisting of the following is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this gaming machine, when the respective displacement means of the first group are arranged at the projecting position, the respective displacement means of the first group are associated (integrated) with each other so that one character (first While letting the player recognize it as a production mode), when the respective displacement means of the second group are arranged at the projecting position, the respective displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated) with each other to create another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of causing the player to recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, while displacing each displacing means of the second group to the retracted position, arranging each displacing means of the first group to the projecting position, each of the first group The first character is formed in the game area by the displacing means, and in the second gaming state, the displacing means of the first group are evacuated to the retracted position, while the displacing means of the second group are extended to the extended position. By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area is performed by the respective displacement means of the second group.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger character in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (effect modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters also increases, and thus each displacement means is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means because the area (space) for keeping them is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (effect mode).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the dual-purpose means that doubles as one displacing means of the first group and one displacing means of the second group is provided, a plurality of (second It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second) rendering modes, and it is possible to increase the size of each displacement means. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is a position in which an overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and an overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. A gaming machine G2 characterized by the following.

Here, when the combined means is arranged at the same projecting position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are generated. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (combined means) is used in the presentation mode, which hinders interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means forms the overhang position and the second rendering mode which are arranged when the first rendering mode is formed. Since the overhanging position arranged at this time is set to a different position, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the combined use means is used for both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed. Moreover, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position).

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combined use means is configured such that a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. Gaming machine G3.

Here, when the combination means has the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is used, and this hinders interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively by using the combined means having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced correspondingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the effect mode of (1).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since different postures are used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the combined use means is used for both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being disturbed. . Further, the degree of freedom can be increased because the combined means can have different postures in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement) (Position position) can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, it is moved forward and backward with respect to at least one displacing means of the first group. A gaming machine G4, which has different directional positions and at least partially overlaps each other in a front view.

Here, the dual-purpose means forms different stop positions and/or different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect mode is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stopped state (arrangement position or (and/or) posture) easily varies. In this case, in the structure in which the combined use device abuts the one displacement device at the extended position (at least a part of the front-rear direction positions match each other), the combined use device does not reach the target position unless the combined position or the posture reaches the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacing means and the displacing means, when the disposition position or posture exceeds the target position, one displacing means is pushed out to cause displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when forming the first effect mode, The position in the front-rear direction is different from at least one of the displacement means, and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps with each other in a front view. Therefore, even if the stop state (the bulging position or (and) posture) varies, The relation between the displacement means and the combined use means can be easily maintained. That is, even when the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the overlapping in part when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the different front-rear direction positions. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of one displacement means being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined use means.

In the gaming machine G4, the one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) with each other so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined use means is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (extended position or (and) posture), and when the combined use means is in the extended position when forming the first effect mode. , In the structure in which the displacement means is brought into contact (at least a part of the front-rear direction positions thereof coincide with each other), the gap between the displacement means and the displacement means must be reached unless the arrangement position or posture of the dual purpose means reaches the target position. Are formed, and association (integration) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or the posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a positional deviation, which hinders the association (integration). That is, when one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are in contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is shown). Is partially effective).

In the gaming machine G5, when the dual purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, the dual purpose means is positioned on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap with each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the projecting position when the first effect mode is formed, it is more effective than the one displacing means and the other displacing means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction, and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap with each other in a front view, for example, the one displacement means and/or the other displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position and a gap is formed between the displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relation between the one displacement means and the other displacement means from being disturbed, and to easily maintain the relation between both the displacement means and the combined use means.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. And a projecting position of the dual-purpose means arranged when forming the first effect mode, and a projecting position of the dual-purpose means arranged when forming the second effect mode. Are different positions, and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the first effect mode is different from the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the second effect mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

In the gaming machine G7, the front-rear direction position of one displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the dual purpose means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the shared use means, so that the combined use is possible. By arranging the means on the front side further and making it easier for the player to visually recognize, the front-rear direction positions of the one displacing means and the combined use means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the one displacing means and the combined use means.

In the gaming machine G8, the one displacing means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view in a state in which the one displacing means and the dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. A gaming machine G9 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G8, the one displacing means and the linear base member are arranged in a state in which the one displacing means and the combined use means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the projecting position in order to form the first effect mode, the one displacement means is arranged in a straight line because they are arranged at the overlapping position in the front view. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the gaming machine G9, the other displacing means is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the linear base member in a front view in a state where the other displacing means and the combined use means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position. The other displacing means and the other displacing means are arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view in the middle of being displaced toward the projecting position, and the linear base member is A gaming machine G10, wherein at least an area in which the other displacing means overlaps in front view has a front-back dimension smaller than an area in which the one displacing means overlaps in front view.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, in the state where the other displacing means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retreat position, the other displacing means are arranged in front of the linear base member. Are arranged at positions that do not overlap with each other when viewed, and while the other displacing means and the combined means are being displaced toward the projecting position, the other displacing means are arranged at a position that overlaps with the linear base member when viewed from the front, and the linear base member Has a dimension in the front-back direction in which at least another displacement means overlaps in front view is smaller than a region in which one displacement means overlaps in front view. Therefore, in order to form the first effect mode, another displacement means is formed. Also, when the linear base member (combined means) is displaced to the projecting position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

In the gaming machine G10, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace the linear base member, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose member, and the conversion mechanism, The gaming machine G11, wherein the one displacing means of the linear base member is arranged in an overlapping region in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G10, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the combined use unit. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the dual purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the displacing means and the combined use means.

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined use means, the combined use means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the extended position can be made larger. For example, even in areas such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing members, the dual-purpose means material is retracted in such areas. It is possible to form the combined use device in a large size while setting the position.

In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in a region where one of the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the retracted position in a front view, and accordingly, in another region of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged. The front-back dimension of the area can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacing means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the projecting position, it is possible to prevent the other displacing means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
Performance mode setting means capable of setting any performance mode among a plurality of performance modes, display means capable of displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and stage information of a plurality of stages on the display means. A step information display means for displaying the step information, a step information variable means for changing the step information displayed by the step information display means, and a case where the step information is changed to predetermined step information by the step information changing means. Switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to the display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. And a gaming machine H1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to set a plurality of effect modes as effect modes displayed on the display device, and a predetermined score is given to the player when a specific effect mode is set, There is one in which an effect based on the accumulated value of the given points is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-215579).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the score is given only in a specific effect mode, the accumulated value of the score obtained when the mode is changed to another effect mode is discarded, so that the player is There was a problem that the player's motivation to score points decreased and he became tired of the game early. Further, in order to surely execute the effect using the given score, it is necessary to fix the effect mode to a specific effect mode from the time when the score is applied until the effect based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production was monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, one of the plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting unit, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display unit. On the display means, stage information of a plurality of stages is variably displayed by the stage information changing means by the stage information displaying means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information, a specific effect is produced by the specific effect executing means. Is executed. The display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display unit is switched by the switching unit to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit.

Thereby, even if a different presentation mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set presentation mode, and thus the stage information is continuously used even if the production mode is changed. It is possible to execute the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

The gaming machine H1 has a stage information storage unit for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display unit, and the stage information display unit, when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, A gaming machine H2, which displays the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. The stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored in the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display unit based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit.

Accordingly, even when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit. Therefore, even if a different effect mode is set, it is possible to continuously execute the effect using the stage information, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

The display mode corresponding to the rendering mode is, for example, the number, the character, the symbol used in the currently set rendering mode, or the character appearing in the rendering mode, which is the identification information that can identify the given score. It is conceivable that the display mode using is used. Further, it is considered that the image associated with the identification information with which the given score can be identified has a display mode using an image corresponding to the motif (for example, sea or mountain) used in the currently set rendering mode. Be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is changed while the effect displaying the step information is being executed, the changed effect mode It is possible to display the stage information without giving a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, at least predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that different presentation modes are set in a state in which the predetermined stage information is displayed, Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the predetermined stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information approximate to the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, at least the approximate stage information which approximates the predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if a different presentation mode is set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, in a state where the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is about to be displayed is displayed, when the effect mode is switched, the stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

Here, as the approximation stage information in the gaming machine H4, for example, when an indicator capable of displaying the stage information in seven stages is used, the stage information indicating the seventh stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information, and the approximation is performed. The stage information indicating the sixth stage may be set as the stage information.

A plurality of pieces of this approximation stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when different display modes are set and the display modes are switched.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means has a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode when the specific step information is displayed by the step information display means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means.

As a result, the effect mode can be switched according to the displayed step information, so that the effect of the effect of displaying the step information can be enhanced.

Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the effect mode is switched in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

Further, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the effect mode is switched in a state in which the approximate stage information is not displayed, and therefore, the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine H5, the stage information display means displays the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific production mode is set by the specific production mode setting means. A gaming machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5, when the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means, the predetermined level information is displayed as the level information by the level information display means. ..

Thereby, when the specific stage information is displayed, the specific effect mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, the predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect in which the stage information is displayed, the player can be expected to switch the display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing this, since the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the predetermined stage information is changed by switching the production mode in a state where neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, the state where the expectation of the jackpot is low in the stage information display. Is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the stage information varied by the stage information varying means, and the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the stage information based on the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. A gaming machine H7, comprising: variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

The gaming machine H7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6. That is, the variable amount of the stage information that is varied by the stage information varying unit is determined by the variable amount determining unit, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit is changed. It is displayed by the variable information display means.

Thereby, the player can easily grasp the variable amount by which the stage information is varied by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since the variable amount by which the stage information is changed is displayed as the variable information corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is switched, the variable information is displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. The effect is that you can.

The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information specifically indicating the variable amount or information suggesting the variable amount (for example, information such as large variable amount or small variable amount). If the step information is displayed, the step information may be information indicating the variable step information among the plurality of step information.

Further, the timing of displaying the variable information may be appropriately set based on the displayed variable information. For example, when the information specifically showing the variable amount is displayed as the variable information, the step information changing means. The variable information may be displayed after the step information is changed by. This allows the player to gaze at the mode in which the stage information changes, and enhances the effect of production.

On the other hand, if the information indicating the variable amount or the information indicating the step information to be changed is displayed as the variable information, the variable information may be displayed before the step information is changed by the step information changing means. With this, it is possible to focus on how the step information is specifically changed after grasping the displayed variable information, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine H7, variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. A gaming machine H8, comprising: display timing setting means for setting timing.

The gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is divided into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiating means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display variable information for varying the stage information in a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a method of differentiating the variable information by the variable information differentiating means, when the variable information displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is set to a plurality of numerical values (small score). ), or if the variable information is a display that suggests a variable content of the stage information (for example, a variable degree or a variable target), divide it so that the suggested content is displayed step by step. Good. As a result, the player can be continuously focused on the effect in which the stage information is changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiating means is displayed, the variable information that is advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation that the step information is changed to the predetermined step information is high. (Variable information) may be displayed later. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect can be executed while keeping the player expecting until the end.

In the gaming machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means has a setting restricting means for restricting setting of the predetermined effect mode according to the effect mode being set. Gaming machine H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, setting regulation means regulates that a predetermined representation mode is set according to the set representation mode. Therefore, various productions can be executed by using a plurality of production modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of the predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching unit, it is possible to suppress the setting of the production mode in which it is difficult to convey to the player that the production of displaying the stage information is continuously executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the gaming machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any one of the setting conditions is satisfied. If there are a plurality of the setting conditions, the priority setting means for setting the priority order is set, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the performance is performed based on the setting condition with the higher priority set by the priority setting means. A gaming machine H10 characterized by setting a mode.

The gaming machine H10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H9. That is, when one of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting condition. Then, the priority is set by the priority setting means with respect to the plurality of setting conditions, and when a plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the performance is performed based on the setting condition with the higher priority set by the priority setting means. Aspect is set.

As a result, the effect mode is set based on the setting condition having a high priority, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (Direction display position setting)
Display means having a display area, first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a predetermined first effect execution means for the display means while the first effect execution means is being executed. In a gaming machine provided with a second effect executing means for executing two effects, the second effect executing means has the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes an effect in which points showing a predetermined value are displayed on a display device and gives a bonus effect when the number of points reaches a predetermined number (for example, , JP 2012-179176 A).

In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem in that a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and the mode in which the points are displayed becomes monotonous. Further, if the points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the points on the display device, the display of the different effects executed on the display device and the display of the points will overlap and the effect of the effects will be reduced. There was a problem of doing.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the first effect executing means executes the predetermined first effect on the display means having the display area for a predetermined period, and while the first effect executing means executes the second effect. The effect execution means causes the display means to execute a predetermined second effect in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.

Thereby, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect that is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the first effect and the second effect from being displayed in duplicate. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine J1, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means, and the second effect when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it has area changing means for changing the allowable area based on a display mode of one effect.

The gaming machine J2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means. Then, the permissible area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

As a result, it is possible to change the permissible area in which the second effect is executed based on the display area in which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, the second effect can be executed in the area related to the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J2, a first effect determination unit that determines a main subject display area in which an image serving as a main subject is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution unit, The area changing means is for changing the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed, based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2. That is, of the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main effect display area in which the image serving as the subject is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined by the area varying means as the main display area by the first effect determining means.

As a result, it is possible to change the permissible area in which the second effect is executed, based on the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the area changing means sets the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means as a prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to execute, and allows the area other than the main display area to be allowed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being an area.

The gaming machine J4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means is set as the prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to be executed by the area changing means. Then, the area changing means sets the area other than the main display area to be the allowable area.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display area in which the image that is the main subject of the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed from overlapping and the effect of the effect from being reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine J3, the first effect determination unit determines a specific subject display region, in the display region determined to be the subject display region, a specific subject display region in which the image of the subject is not displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. A gaming machine J5, further comprising: a discriminating unit, wherein the region changing unit sets the display region discriminated as the specific subject display region by the specific subject display region discriminating unit to the permissible region.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3. That is, of the display areas determined to be the main subject display area, the specific main subject display area determining unit determines the specific main subject display area in which the image of the main subject is not displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period, and the display determined to be the specific main subject display area. The area is set as an allowable area by the area changing means.

As a result, it is possible to set the display area after the lapse of the predetermined period as the allowable area as the display area for executing the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing for executing the second effect can be widened, a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and second value information having a higher value than the first value information. And a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, and the second effect execution means includes the first permissible area. A gaming machine J6, characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first allowable area and the second value information is displayed in the second allowable area.

The gaming machine J6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5. That is, the first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and the second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowance area is set by the allowance area setting means. The first allowable area and the second allowable area different from the first allowable area are set. Then, the second effect executing means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

As a result, the value information can be displayed in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since it is possible to display the value information indicating different values in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, the first value information is displayed in the first allowable area multiple times. It is possible to set a plurality of display methods such as displaying or displaying the second value information only once in the second permissible area. Therefore, since the player sees the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the place where the value information is displayed and the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. There is.

Any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7 has a display image creating means for creating a display image displayed on the display means, and the display image creating means has at least a first layer on which the first effect is displayed. And a second image layer on which the second effect is displayed to create the display image, and a first combining process of overlapping the first image layer on the front side of the second image layer. And a second synthesizing process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer, the game machine J8.

The gaming machine J8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7. That is, the display image displayed on the display unit is created by the display image creating unit by synthesizing at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed and the second layer on which the second effect is displayed. .. Then, the first composition process causes the first image layer to overlap the front surface side of the second image layer, and the second composition process causes the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed to be transparent. To be done.

As a result, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display device at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine J8, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas. A gaming machine J9.

The gaming machine J9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J8. That is, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, it is not necessary to change the display content of the second layer in accordance with the area in which the second effect is displayed, and the display area corresponding to the display area of the transparent first layer of the second layer is displayed. Only the second effect displayed is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display unit at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Change the production navigation on the way)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the determination result by the determination means In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an effect based on, and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executed by the effect executing means. Displayed by the period information display means for displaying the specific period information indicating the specific period of the performance, the progress information display means for displaying the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period, and the progress information display means. Specific performance mode information display means for displaying specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode given to the player when the progress information satisfies a predetermined condition, and the progress displayed by the progress information display means. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a presentation mode changing means for changing the specific performance mode information based on the information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a time gauge for displaying the progress status of the effect and displaying the progress status of the effect to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-6280). In such a conventional game machine, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game, but if the fluctuation ends in the middle of the meter or reaches the end of the meter, Furthermore, since the production is continued, there is a problem that the motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter is reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the determination means performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. The effect based on the result of the determination made by the determining means is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect executed by the effect execution unit is displayed by the period information display unit, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the progress information display unit. .. Further, the specific effect mode information indicating the specific effect mode given to the player when the elapsed information displayed by the elapsed time information displaying unit satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific effect mode information displaying unit, and the progress information is displayed. The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode that is given when the elapsed information indicating the elapsed time after the start of the specific period satisfies the predetermined condition can be changed based on the elapsed information. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the pseudo specific effect mode of the specific effect mode information.

The gaming machine K2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1. That is, the specific effect mode display unit displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode. The pseudo specific effect mode of the information is changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, the pseudo specific effect mode that is displayed in a pseudo manner based on the progress information is changed, so that it is possible for the player to pay attention to the display content based on the progress information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that it has a degree display means, and the effect mode changing means is capable of changing the specific effect mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

The gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, when the degree of expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result is displayed by the progress information display means and the progress information satisfies a specific display condition, it is possible to display by the expectation degree display means, and the progress information is displayed. When the specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, it is possible to execute two of the expectation display and the change of the specific effect mode information at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized by having a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined rendering mode is given as the specific rendering mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific period extension means extends the specific period when a predetermined production mode is given as the specific production mode. , It is possible to set a specific period according to the performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play the game by watching the progress information, and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine K4 has an extension period information display unit for displaying the extension period extended by the specific period extension unit by using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display unit. Gaming machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4, the extended period extended by the specific period extending means is displayed by the extended period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the amount of display data for displaying the extension period.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means is used as progress information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it has an extended progress information display means for displaying as.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extended period extended by the specific period extension means is extended by using at least part of the progress information. Since the information is displayed by the information display means, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extension period.

Any one of the gaming machines K4 to K6 has an expectation level display conversion unit capable of converting the expectation level displayed by the expectation level display unit when the specific period extension unit extends the specific period. A gaming machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extending means, the expectation degree displayed by the expectation degree display means is converted by the expectation degree converting means. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the specific period is extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display unit displays the extension period is the specific display for the expectation degree display unit to display the expectation level. The expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means when the extension progress information display means includes the establishment period in which the condition can be satisfied and the extension progress information exceeds the establishment period. A gaming machine K8 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the extension period information display unit displays the extension period, the specific period information including the established period in which the specific display condition for the expectation degree display unit to display the expectation is satisfied is used. When the extension progress information has passed the establishment period, the expectation conversion unit converts the expectation.

Thereby, when the degree of expectation is converted by the degree-of-expectation conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the degree-of-expectation display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is being executed. Becomes Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand that the expectation level is changed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves on the time gauge. A gaming machine K9 characterized by displaying a body.

The gaming machine K9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8. That is, the period information display means displays the time gauge indicating the period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means displays the moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period by the time gauge, and to easily grasp the progress information by the moving state of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K9, the expectation degree display means displays the expectation degree when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the satisfaction condition is satisfied, and the extension period information display means. Is for displaying the extension period by using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge. A gaming machine K10 characterized by being displayed.

According to the gaming machine K10, the satisfaction condition is met when the mobile body reaches the specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree is displayed by the expectation degree display means. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Further, the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge.

Thereby, it becomes possible to display the extension period by using the time gauge and the moving body. Therefore, the extended period can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be used as the display data for displaying the extended period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K9 or K10, the time gauge has a plurality of paths along which the moving body can move, and the gaming machine K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K9 or K10, the moving body has a plurality of routes along which the moving body can move. Therefore, the player can predict which route the moving body will travel on. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass a branch position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of routes. Gaming machine K12.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of routes. When the specific period is extended, the player can be made to predict again which route the mobile body will travel. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Variable effect modes of continuous slot effects)
An operating means operable by the player, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on an operation on the operating means, and a displaying means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, And the effect execution means is for performing an operation effect in which an operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set, and a specific effect that can be executed a plurality of times within a specific period. Of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect, there is an effect mode changing means for changing an effect mode of another operation effect based on information about an operation for at least one operation effect. Gaming machine L1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which operating means operable by a player is provided, and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operating means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223651 gazette).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the effective period, and the game is monotonous. Then, there was a problem that the game gets tired of playing at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, the effect execution means executes the effect based on the operation on the operation means operable by the player, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means is displayed on the display means. Is displayed. Furthermore, at least the operation effect in which the operation effective period in which the operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific effect capable of being executed a plurality of times within the specific period, Based on the information regarding the operation for at least one operation effect among the plurality of operation effects executed during the effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode changing means.

Accordingly, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of another operation effect can be changed based on the operation content of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine L1, the effect mode changing means is for changing the operation valid period of the other operation effect, the gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the operation effective period of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the effect mode changing means changes the number of times of the other operation effect, the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation effect is to execute a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, A gaming machine L4 having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by the plurality of operation effects in the specific effect are a predetermined combination.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, a design effect that dynamically displays a design that is stopped and displayed is executed as an operation effect, and a design that is stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation effects in a specific effect is predetermined. In the case of a combination, the privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the symbols that are stopped and displayed for each of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early while the specific effect is being executed.

Any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has an operation timing determination unit that determines a timing at which the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect, and the effect mode changing unit is the A gaming machine L5, characterized in that an effect mode of the other operation effect is changed based on a determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the operation timing determination means determines the timing at which the operation means is operated during the effective operation period set in the operation effect. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of another operation effect.

This makes it possible to change the effect mode of another operation effect according to the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine L5, when the operation mode determination means determines that the operation timing determination means has operated the operation means within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started. The gaming machine L6, which increases the number of other operation effects.

According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5. That is, when it is determined by the operation timing determination means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started, the number of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means. Will be increased.

As a result, it is possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means early. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the operation means eagerly, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the effect execution means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and after the operation timing determination means starts the operation effective period of the one operation effect. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated over a predetermined period of time, the first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation timing determination means enables the operation of the first operation effect. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the period has started, it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect has started. A gaming machine L7, characterized in that it performs the same number of operation effects as the case.

The gaming machine L7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5 or L6. That is, in the case where it is determined that the other operation effects have been executed a plurality of times by the effect execution means, and the operation timing determination means has operated the operation means for more than a predetermined period from the start of the operation valid period of one operation effect. In addition, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect executing means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of the first operation effect is started, within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started. The same number of operation effects as the case where it is determined that the operation means is operated are executed.

As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation effect, one operation can be performed by operating the operation means within a predetermined period during the first operation effect executed next. It is possible to execute the same number of operation effects as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period in the effect. Therefore, an opportunity to increase the number of operation effects can be provided to a player who does not notice that the operation effects have been executed or who cannot watch the operation effects and operate the operation means early. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the effect execution means provides a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of the one operation effect. A gaming machine L8 characterized by being executed.

The gaming machine L8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect executing means executes the normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set.

As a result, the player who does not operate the operation means during the valid operation period, that is, the player who does not like the operation effect, repeatedly executes the operation effect, which reduces the player's willingness to play the game. There is an effect that can suppress.

The gaming machine L9 in any one of the gaming machines L4 to L8, wherein the more the number of the operation effects executed by the effect executing means, the easier the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L4 to L8, the more the number of operation effects executed by the effect executing means, the more easily the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and thus the player is motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating means can be operated and the player's motivation for playing can be prevented from being lowered.

<Characteristic M group> (Change the mode of slot effect based on the remaining period of the operation valid period)
Operation means operable by a player, operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which an operation on the operation means is effectively discriminated, and performance executing means for executing an effect in which the operation effective period is set. In the gaming machine having a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executing means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A dynamic display effect is displayed in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed from the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information by displaying and by operating the operating means when the operation valid period is set. And dynamically changing the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period to a variable dynamic display mode when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period. A gaming machine M1 characterized by the following.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which an operating means operable by a player is provided and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operating means (for example, JP 2012-2012A). No. 223651).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the effective period, and the game is monotonous. Then, there was a problem that the game gets tired of playing at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation unit operable by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation effective period setting unit, and the production in which the operation effective period is set is executed. Is performed by the means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the performance executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation valid period is set, the plurality of identifications dynamically displayed by operating the operation means. When the dynamic display effect of stopping the predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect becomes the predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is changed. It is displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed can be changed depending on the remaining period of the operation valid period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. Becomes Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the gaming machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and the remaining operation valid period in the dynamic display effect. Remaining period determining means for determining a period, and when the remaining period determining means determines the predetermined remaining period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M2 characterized by having a dynamic display mode changing means for performing.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, the performance executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display performance is determined by the remaining period determining means. It When the remaining period determination means determines that the predetermined remaining period is reached, at least part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches the predetermined remaining period, and it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode includes the plurality of The gaming machine M3, wherein the specific identification information among the identification information is in a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to the gaming machine M3, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the specific identification of the plurality of identification information is performed as the variable dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode makes it easier to identify the information than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information in which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is performed becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than the other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It is possible to raise it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine M3, the effect execution means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect execution means executes during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed when a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of dynamic display effects that meet a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the dynamic of the 1 above. A game machine M4, which is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the display effect.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, by the effect execution means, the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means when the combination of #1 and #2 satisfies the predetermined condition. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable display satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the one dynamic display effect.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in one dynamic display effect. It Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to operate the operation means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is executed, and the remaining period determination means, A gaming machine M5, which determines whether or not the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of operation valid periods.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effect is produced. That is, the operation effective period setting means sets the operation effective period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed. Then, the remaining period determination means determines the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of operation valid periods.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, array information storage means for storing array information in which the plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array, and the array information stored in the array information storage means are used. A start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is configured by the operation valid period setting means. A first start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display unit and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display unit within the operation valid period that is set. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that and can be set.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effect is achieved. That is, array information in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined array is stored by the array information storage means, and the start position of the dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means is the start position setting means. Set by. Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information. A first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display device and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display device within the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means. Is set by the start position setting means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display unit and the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is difficult to be displayed using the same array information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the display data for executing the dynamic display.

The gaming machine M7 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, wherein the effect executing means has a dynamic display speed changing means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6, the speed of dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed changing means, so that the number of times the predetermined identification information is displayed within the operation valid period. Can be varied. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

<Characteristic N group> (Determine the next button effect based on the content of the button operation)
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and An operation effect executing unit capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on the result of the judgment by the judging unit, and a judgment result judged by the judging unit during the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect executing unit. And a case where the operation effect execution means executes the second operation effect mode within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed. A gaming machine N1 comprising: an execution control unit that switches the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and executes the operation operation mode, based on a determination result by the determination unit.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, an operation of actually pressing the operation button and an operation of automatically performing a repeated hit operation by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period There is one having (for example, JP-A-2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect that requires operating the operation button multiple times (for example, continuous hit effect), the operation button is actually pressed multiple times or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. Although it was possible to enjoy the operation effect by automatically performing the continuous hit operation, when the operation effect is continuously executed multiple times, during the operation effect that is executed first, There is a case where the executed operation on the frame button is executed in an operation effect executed later, and there is a problem that the effect effect of the operation effect executed later is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, as an operation effect of operating the operation button, the above-mentioned operation effect (continuous hit effect) or the operation effect of operating the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, timing push effect) is given to the player. There are some which are provided with an operation effect of making different operations. In this case, when the timing push effect is executed after the continuous hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. However, there is a problem that the operation button is operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing push effect, and the effect of the timing push effect is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, since the effect is generally executed based on the changing period of the special symbol, in order to execute a plurality of operation effects within the limited period of the changing period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it cannot be solved by a simple method of lengthening the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and is determined by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the operation effect executing means executes a predetermined operation effect mode. The determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit during the period in which the operation production execution unit is executing the operation production mode. When the second operation production mode is executed by the operation production execution unit within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation production mode is executed, the execution control unit displays the determination result by the determination unit. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to the specific operation effect mode and executed.

As a result, when the second operation effect mode is executed within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, It is possible to switch the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and execute the operation based on the content of the operation performed on the operation means by the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine N1, the determination unit determines that the determination result determined by the determination unit is at least the first determination result and the first determination result is different during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. When the determination unit determines that the first determination result is the second determination result, the execution control unit determines that the first determination result is the specific operation effect mode. A gaming machine N2, which executes a corresponding operation effect mode.

The gaming machine N2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit to be the first determination result and the second determination result different from the first determination result during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. .. When the determination means determines that the result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes the operation effect mode based on the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode.

Thereby, as the second operation effect mode, it is possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined in the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation effect mode is continuously executed, the effect effect does not deteriorate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of effect by continuing the operation effect mode.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times, and the execution control means sets the specific operation effect mode to the above. A game machine N3, characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2. That is, the determination unit determines that the operation of the operation unit has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control unit switches the operation operation mode to the operation operation mode in which the operation unit is operated multiple times as the specific operation effect mode. Be done.

Thereby, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. ..

In the gaming machine N3, an operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated and a number of times measured by the operation number measuring means are determined while the first operation effect mode is being executed. A number of times determination means, and the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number of times determination means. A gaming machine N4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the number-of-operations measuring means, and the number of times measured by the number-of-operations measuring means is determined by the number-of-times determining means during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. .. Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and the third determination result different from the first determination result.

This makes it possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines the first determination result when the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is determined to be greater than a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is more than the predetermined number of times, the determining means determines the first determination result. Thereby, when the operation means is operated more than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue the state in which he/she is actively operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines the third determination result when the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is less than a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determining means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determining means determines the third determination result. As a result, when the operating means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from running.

In the gaming machine N2, the determining means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operating means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means controls the specific operation effect mode. As a game machine N7, the operation mode is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated continuously.

According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period as the first determination result. Then, the execution control means switches the specific operation effect mode to the operation effect mode for continuously operating the operation means.

As a result, when the player continuously operates the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated is executed as the second operation effect mode. .. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. ..

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has an informing means for informing that the specific operation effect mode is executed, and the informing means executes the second operation effect mode. A gaming machine N8, which notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the time.

The gaming machine N8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode will be executed by the execution control means by the time the second operation effect mode is executed. As a result, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, it becomes possible for the player to execute the game without confusion. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In the gaming machine N8, the determination means is for performing the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification means is for performing the determination after the determination by the determination means is executed. A gaming machine N9 for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed until the operation effect mode 1 is finished.

The gaming machine N9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination of the determination means is performed, and the specific operation effect mode is changed from the execution of the determination to the end of the first operation effect mode. The notification is notified by the notification means.

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably notify that the specific operation effect mode is executed before the second operation effect mode is started.

In the gaming machine N8 or N9, a mode display unit for displaying the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution unit, and an operation content display unit for displaying the operation content of the operation unit corresponding to the operation effect mode, A gaming machine N10, characterized in that the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

According to the gaming machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content display means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode.

As a result, since the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, it becomes possible for the player to execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation effect execution means is capable of executing a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine N11, the operation effect execution means executes the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to execute an effect in which the operation means can be operated in a short period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine N11 has an effect result display means for displaying an effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect executing means, and the effect result display means has the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. A gaming machine N12, which displays the effect result based on the operation effect mode of No.

According to the gaming machine N12, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N11. That is, the effect result display means displays the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated with each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group> (changing the interval of automatic continuous hits)
Operation means operable by the player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal When the determination result by the determination means satisfies the first condition, the first determination means sets a first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the signal determination in a state in which the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect every first period, and the first effect mode And a period variable setting means for variably setting an execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period, based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. And a gaming machine P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, there is one in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2014-180364). Publication).

In such a conventional game machine, in an effect that requires operating the operation button a plurality of times (for example, continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect (for example, the timing push effect), the automatic continuous hit operation is executed, so that the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect are impaired, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, the signal output means outputs a signal based on the operation means operable by the player being operated, and the output signal is determined by the signal determination means. When the determination result by the signal determining means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means sets the first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the signal determining unit satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing unit executes the specific effect every first period. Further, when the first effect mode is being executed, the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit by the period variable setting unit is the first period based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Are variably set in different second periods.

This makes it possible to change the interval of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, various effects using the operation means can be executed while the specific effect execution means is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine P1, a discriminating means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result. A gaming machine P2, which has a predetermined variable condition based on a result of the determination made by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the result of the determination is the predetermined determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Then, the predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the determination result of the determination unit based on the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage by paying attention to a specific effect executed based on the operation of the player.

The gaming machine P1 or P2 has a notifying means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means, the gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notification means informs that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means, so that the player operates the operating means to make the second operation. When the conditions are satisfied, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period in the specific effect is changed.

In the gaming machine P3, the informing means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means. It will be possible to guide you. Therefore, even if the execution period in the specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for effectively discriminating the operation of the operating means, and a remaining period for discriminating the remaining period of the valid period set by the valid period setting means. The signal determining means determines that the second condition is met when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determining period, and the remaining period is When the remaining time period is determined to be a predetermined time period by the determination means, it has a determination period variable means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period. A gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effective period for effectively discriminating the operation of the operating means is set by the effective period setting means, and the remaining period of the effective period is discriminated by the remaining period discriminating means. When the operation means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period, The discriminating period changing means changes the first discriminating period to a second discriminating period shorter than the first discriminating period.

Accordingly, when the remaining period of the effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined is the predetermined period, it is possible to easily execute the specific effect that is changed in the second period, which is amusement of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period, the gaming machine P6.

According to the gaming machine P6, the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period as the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the remaining effective period is short, the specification is changed to the second period. The effect can be executed, and the effect can be enhanced until the end of the effective period.

<Characteristic Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
Operating means operable by a player, determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated, and effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means. An informing means for informing a player of an operation informing mode for operating the operating means, and an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect based on the operation of the operating means being discriminated by the discriminating means, When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the valid period is specified over the first valid period and the second valid period. And a notification control unit that notifies the operation notification mode of the notification unit by the notification unit.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines can execute a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, JP-A-2014-180364).

Since a plurality of operation effects are executed in such a conventional game machine, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to operate the operation button and increase the motivation of the game, but the operation operations are frequently set. If this happens, the player will frequently repeat the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, an effective period during which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and within the effective period, the effect based on the operation of the operation button is executed, and even if it is not the effective period, that is, the ineffective period. For example, because the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button multiple times, some of the multiple operations will be operations in the invalid period. However, there is a problem in that the performance is not executed even though the operation button is operated, and the motivation for playing the game is reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, and the determination means determines the operation of the operation means effectively. Is set by the means, and the notification means notifies the operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means being judged by the judging means.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting unit under a predetermined condition, the notification control unit spans the first valid period and the second valid period. In this way, the notification means is caused to notify the specific operation notification mode.

Accordingly, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a specific operation informing mode is informed across the first effective period and the second effective period. It is possible to notify that the effective period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the operation means between the first effective period and the second effective period. Therefore, by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In addition, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period in this case, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such conditions, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in game motivation.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a method of determining an actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. A method of determining that the combination is set may be used.

Further, as an operation effect in the gaming machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the gaming machine, a driving mode of a driving object provided in the gaming machine, or an output from an audio output device provided in the gaming machine. It is possible to use a voice mode or a light mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game machine. In this way, it is sufficient that the player who operates the operating means can recognize the effect executed based on the determination of the operation on the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in the gaming machine Q1 may be any one that can be operated by the player, for example, a button device that can be pressed by the player, or a reaction when a contact or proximity of the player is detected. A sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, a lever device that the player can operate in the front, rear, left, and right directions can be considered.

A game machine Q2, comprising: a game mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode on the basis of the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means, so the first effective period It is possible to set a specific operation notification mode to be notified over the second effective period based on the operation effect executed during the first effective period or the second effective period.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be easily informed of the specific operation informing mode informed over the first effective period and the second effective period.

In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means provides the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the extension effect mode based on the above is set, it is possible to make the first effective period appear to continue until the second effective period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a second pre-production mode based on the second operation effect that is executed when the second effective period is set. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means performs the second operation executed when the second effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the pre-production mode based on the production is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second effective period is continuously set with the first effective period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to further suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period. A gaming machine Q5 having a pseudo effect executing means for executing.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effect is produced. That is, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing unit is pseudo-executed by the pseudo effect executing unit.

As a result, since the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, the player can be made to appear as if the first effective period and the second effective period are continuously set, and the operation button is pressed. There is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in game motivation due to frequent repetition of an act of operating and an act of not operating.

In addition, as the pseudo operation effect in the gaming machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. As a result, in the period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the invalid period is actually set, the operating means is operated for the player who continuously operates the operating means. This makes it possible to make the user think that the presentation mode is variable, and has the effect of increasing the motivation for the game.

Furthermore, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q3, it becomes possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first effective period is extended, and it is possible for the player to perform the operation operation. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a more understandable presentation.

Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is executed such that the operation effect executed in the second effective period is continuously executed in the first effective period. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more easily understandable effect.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means sets the specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination means that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first valid period. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by being notified by the notifying means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination unit that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first valid period.

Thereby, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, a specific operation notification is given. The mode is not notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player who does not like the operation effect from being informed of a specific operation notification mode unnecessarily, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the problem described above, that is, Since the problem itself of decreasing the willingness to play due to the frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it does not occur, the player's willingness to play the game does not increase even if the specific operation notification mode is not notified. It does not decrease. On the contrary, it is possible to reduce the processing for informing the specific operation informing mode and to provide the player with the effect executed in the normal state.

As the predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it may be set that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game motivation of the player who is eagerly operating the operation means from decreasing. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first effective period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is within a predetermined remaining period (for example, remaining 5 seconds or less). A state in which a certain remaining period (for example, remaining 10 seconds or less) is discriminated by the means, which is set as an operation condition, and means for discriminating the period until the second effective period is started is provided. It may be set that the operation means is operated as the operation condition. Even in the case of such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation due to frequent repetition of an act of operating the operating means and an act of not operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine Q6, the determining means has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and the operation number measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first valid period. The gaming machine Q7, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied when the gaming condition is met.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times the operating device is operated is measured by the operation number measuring device included in the determining device. Then, the operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

As a result, the specific operation notification mode is notified when a predetermined number of operations are performed during the first valid period. Therefore, for example, when the operation effect of repeatedly hitting the operation means is executed during the first effective period, the player who is eagerly operating the operation means is informed of the specific operation notification mode. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who is eagerly operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, and thus suppressing the player's willingness to play. There is an effect that can be done.

Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q5, by causing the player to execute a pseudo operation effect by executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is frequently changed as the operation effect that is pseudo executed. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness. Further, it is preferable that the pseudo effect execution means can execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is changed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation number measurement means. ..

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first effective period. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the second valid period is set until the first valid period ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect produced by the player understanding the operation effect that will be executed later.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, if the valid period setting means sets at least the first valid period and the second valid period under the predetermined condition, the first valid period A gaming machine Q9, comprising: valid period changing means for changing the valid period so that the second valid period continues.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are produced. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the valid period is set to be continuous with the first valid period and the second valid period. The effective period is changed by the changing means.

Accordingly, when a plurality of valid periods are set, the plurality of valid periods can be set as continuous valid periods. That is, it is possible to eliminate the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation due to the fact that the effect is not changed despite the operation of the operation means. There is an effect that can be done.

Here, to make the effective period in the gaming machine Q9 continuous means that a period during which the effect is not changed is set between the first effective period and the second effective period, even though the player operates the operation means. The valid period may be changed so that the first valid period and the second valid period are actually connected, or the first valid period and the second valid period may be changed. In between, a period shorter than the period necessary for determining that the operating means has been operated may be available.

In the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets a period between the first valid period and the second valid period to the valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets the valid period between the first valid period and the second valid period. Accordingly, a plurality of valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so that there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the valid period changing means delays the start of the first valid period, and the gaming machine Q11.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first valid period is delayed by the valid period changing means. As a result, the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, so that there is no need to set a new valid period, and the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means is for accelerating the start of the second valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means accelerates the start of the second valid period. As a result, the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, so that there is no need to set a new valid period, and the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has an effective period display means for displaying the operation informing mode on the display means, and the effective period is changed by the effective period changing means. A gaming machine Q13 having a valid period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period displaying means.

According to the gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effect is produced. That is, the effective period display means displays the operation notification mode on the display means, and the effective period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the effective period changing means changing the effective period.

As a result, the fact that the valid period has been changed by the valid period changing means can be displayed to the player, and thus an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine Q13, the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the lapse of the first valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the effective period display changing means based on the lapse of the first effective period. As a result, the player grasps the content of the operation effect (the operation effect for which the second effective period is set) executed later in the state where the first effective period has not elapsed, and the effect is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege granting a benefit to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means, and period effect executing means for executing a period effect of a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the period effect executing means performs a compound effect in which a plurality of the effective period is set. A gaming machine Q15, wherein the notification control means allows the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine Q15, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14. That is, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting device when the result of the determination performed by the determining device based on the satisfaction of the determination condition is the specific determination result. Then, based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, the composite effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as the period effect of the predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a composite effect based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege granting a benefit to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means and period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining means, and the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. In the case where the first effective period set in the first period effect and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later are set under predetermined conditions. A game machine Q16, which causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

According to the gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting device when the result of the determination performed by the determining device based on the satisfaction of the determination condition is the specific determination result. Further, the period effect executing unit executes the period effect for the predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determining unit. Then, of the continuous period effects, the first effective period set in the first period effect executed first and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later. When and are set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

Thereby, even when the first effective period and the second effective period are set over a plurality of period effects, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game willingness.

In the gaming machine Q16, a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and an advance determination means for determining the determination information stored in the determination condition storage means in advance. The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on a determination result of the advance determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

According to the gaming machine Q17, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q16. That is, a plurality of pieces of discrimination information based on the satisfaction of the discrimination conditions are stored in the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of stored pieces of discrimination information are judged by the pre-judgment means. Then, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit for the second period effect.

As a result, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set over the first period effect and the second period effect, the preliminary determination corresponding to the second period effect executed later. A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, Any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2014-180364).
However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement in interest has been demanded.
The technical idea is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to the technical idea 1 is provided with an operating means operable by a player, a determining means for determining that the operating means is operated, and an operation of the operating means by the determining means. The effective period setting means for setting an effective period for which the operation is effectively discriminated, an informing means for informing a player of an operation informing mode for operating the operating means, and an operation of the operating means is discriminated by the discriminating means. When the operation effect executing means for executing operation effect based on the fact and the effective period setting means set at least the first effective period and the second effective period under predetermined conditions, And a notification control unit configured to notify the specific operation notification mode by the notification unit over the one effective period and the second effective period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. I have.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the notification mode setting means is executed when the first valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode. The extension effect mode based on the first operation effect is set.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the notification mode setting means is executed when the second valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode. This is for setting a pre-production mode based on the second operation production that is performed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, It has a pseudo effect executing means for executing the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means in a pseudo manner.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the validating period is valid in which the determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated, and the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means. The informing means informs the operation informing mode set by the period setting means and causing the player to operate the operating means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means being judged by the judging means. Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting unit under a predetermined condition, the notification control unit spans the first valid period and the second valid period. In this way, the notification means is caused to notify the specific operation notification mode.
As a result, it is possible to notify that a plurality of effective periods are continuous, and there is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect obtained by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. That is, the notification mode setting means sets a specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the player of a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first effective period and the second effective period in an easy-to-understand manner.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect obtained by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. That is, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set.
Thereby, there is an effect that the first effective period can be made to appear to continue until the second effective period is started.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3. That is, the notification mode setting means sets the pre-production mode based on the second operation effect executed when the second effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode.
As a result, there is an effect that the second effective period can be made to appear as if it is continuously set with the first effective period.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4. That is, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is pseudo executed by the pseudo effect executing means.
As a result, since the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, it is possible for the player to appear as if the first effective period and the second effective period are continuously set, and the player's willingness to play is increased. There is an effect that the decrease can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 the operating means 113 the speech lamp controller (Operation demonstration execution hand stage)

Claims (5)

An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated,
An effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effectively judged by the judging means;
An informing means for informing a player of an operation informing mode for operating the operating means,
An operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect based on the operation of the operation means being determined by the determining means;
When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the valid period is specified over the first valid period and the second valid period. And a notification control unit that notifies the operation notification mode by the notification unit. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a notification mode setting unit that sets the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution unit. The notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set. The gaming machine according to claim 2, which is characterized in that. The notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a pre-production mode based on a second operation effect that is executed when the second effective period is set. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that. In the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, it has a pseudo effect execution unit that pseudo-executes the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution unit. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that there is.

Images